The registrant is submitting this draft Registration Statement confidentially as an “emerging growth company”

pursuant to Section 6(e) of the Securities Act of 1933.

As submitted confidentially to the Securities and Exchange Commission on August 14, 2018

 

Registration No. 333-          

 

 

UNITED STATES

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

Washington, D.C. 20549

 

Form S-1

REGISTRATION STATEMENT

Under

The Securities Act of 1933

 

Greenlane Holdings, Inc.

(Exact name of Registrant as specified in its charter)

 

Delaware   5099   83-0806637
(State or other jurisdiction of   (Primary Standard Industrial   (IRS Employer
incorporation or organization)   Classification Code Number)   Identification No.)

 

6501 Park of Commerce Blvd., Suite 200

Boca Raton, FL 33487

(Address, including zip code, and telephone number, including area code, of Registrant’s principal executive offices)

 

Aaron LoCascio

Chief Executive Officer

6501 Park of Commerce Blvd., Suite 200
Boca Raton, FL 33487

(877) 292-7660

(Name, address, including zip code, and telephone number, including area code, of agent for service)

 

Please send copies of all communications to:

 

Eric M. Hellige, Esq.

Jeffrey C. Johnson, Esq.

Pryor Cashman LLP

7 Times Square

New York, New York 10036

(212) 421-4100

 

Larry W. Nishnick, Esq.

Patrick J. O’Malley, Esq. 

DLA Piper LLP (US)

4365 Executive Drive, Suite 1100

San Diego, California

(858) 677-1400

 

Approximate date of commencement of proposed sale to the public:

As soon as practicable after the effective date of this Registration Statement.

 

If any of the securities being registered on this Form are to be offered on a delayed or continuous basis pursuant to Rule 415 under the Securities Act, check the following box: ☐

 

If this Form is filed to register additional securities for an offering pursuant to Rule 462(b) under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering. ☐

 

If this Form is a post-effective amendment filed pursuant to Rule 462(c) under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering. ☐

 

If this Form is a post-effective amendment filed pursuant to Rule 462(d) under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering. ☐

 

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, a non-accelerated filer, a smaller reporting company or an emerging growth company. See the definitions of “large accelerated filer”, “accelerated filer” and “smaller reporting company” in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act.

 

Large accelerated filer ☐ Accelerated filer  ☐
Non-accelerated filer ☐  (Do not check if a smaller reporting company) Smaller reporting company ☒
  Emerging growth company   ☒

 

If an emerging growth company, indicate by check mark if the registrant has elected not to use the extended transition period for complying with any new or revised financial accounting standards provided pursuant to Section 7(a)(2)(B) of the Securities Act. ☒

  

 

 

 

CALCULATION OF REGISTRATION FEE

 

 

Title of Each Class of Securities to be Registered

  Proposed Maximum
Aggregate Offering
Price(1)(2)
  

 

Amount of Registration Fee

 
Class A Common Stock, $0.01 par value per share  $         $         
Underwriters’ Warrants to Purchase Class A Common Stock(3)          
Class A Common Stock Underlying Underwriters’ Warrants, $0.01 par value per share(4)          

 

 

(1)Estimated solely for the purpose of computing the amount of the registration fee pursuant to Rule 457(o) under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended (the “Securities Act”).

 

(2)Includes additional shares that the underwriters have the option to purchase to cover over-allotments, if any.

 

(3)In accordance with Rule 457(g) under the Securities Act, because the shares of the registrant’s Class A common stock underlying the Underwriters’ Warrants are registered hereby, no separate registration fee is required with respect to the warrants registered hereby.

 

(4)Estimated solely for the purpose of calculating the registration fee pursuant to Rule 457(g) under the Securities Act. We have agreed to issue to the underwriters warrants to purchase up to 3% of the number of shares of our Class A common stock to be issued and sold in this offering (including shares issuable upon exercise of the over-allotment option described herein).

 

The Registrant hereby amends this Registration Statement on such date or dates as may be necessary to delay its effective date until the Registrant shall file a further amendment which specifically states that this Registration Statement shall thereafter become effective in accordance with Section 8(a) of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, or until the Registration Statement shall become effective on such date as the Commission acting pursuant to said Section 8(a) may determine.

  

 

 

 

 

 

EXPLANATORY NOTE

 

This registration statement contains two forms of prospectus: one to be used in connection with the offering of the securities described herein in the United States, which we refer to as the “U.S. Prospectus,” and one to be used in connection with the offering of such securities in Canada, which we refer to as the “Canadian Prospectus.” The U.S. Prospectus and the Canadian Prospectus are identical except for the cover page, the table of contents and the back page, and except that the Canadian Prospectus includes pages C-1 through C-26, a “Certificate of the Company,” a “Certificate of the Selling Stockholders,” a “Certificate of the Promoters” and a “Certificate of the Canadian Underwriters.” The form of the U.S. Prospectus is included herein and is followed by the alternate and additional pages to be used in the Canadian Prospectus.

  

 

 

 

The information in this preliminary prospectus is not complete and may be changed. Neither we nor the selling stockholders may sell these securities until the registration statement filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission is effective. This preliminary prospectus is not an offer to sell these securities and it is not soliciting an offer to buy these securities in any jurisdiction where the offer or sale is not permitted.

 

PRELIMINARY PROSPECTUS SUBJECT TO COMPLETION, DATED , 2018

  

Shares

 

 

Greenlane Holdings, Inc.

Class A Common Stock

$       per share

  

 

 

This is the initial public offering of our Class A common stock. We are selling           shares of our Class A common stock, and the selling stockholders named in this prospectus are selling           shares of our Class A common stock. We currently expect the initial public offering price to be between $           and $           per share of our Class A common stock. The initial public offering price of the shares concurrently being offered in Canada by the Canadian underwriters will be the approximate equivalent in Canadian dollars. We will not receive any proceeds from the sale of shares by the selling stockholders.

 

Prior to this offering, there has been no public market for our Class A common stock. We have applied to list our Class A common stock on the Canadian Securities Exchange under the symbol “GNLN.”

 

Following this offering, we will have three classes of authorized common stock. Each share of our Class A common stock, our Class B common stock and our Class C common stock will have one vote per share. Aaron LoCascio, our Chief Executive Officer, and Adam Schoenfeld, our President and Chief Strategy Officer, and an affiliated entity of Messrs. LoCascio and Schoenfeld, will beneficially own all of our issued and outstanding Class C common stock after this offering and will hold in the aggregate approximately           % of the combined voting power of our outstanding capital stock after this offering. As a result, Messrs. LoCascio and Schoenfeld will be able to control any action requiring the general approval of our stockholders, including the election of our board of directors, the adoption of amendments to our certificate of incorporation and bylaws and the approval of any merger or sale of substantially all of our assets.

 

We are an “emerging growth company” as that term is used in the Jumpstart our Business Startups Act of 2012, and as such, have elected to comply with certain reduced public company reporting requirements for this prospectus and future filings. See “Prospectus Summary—JOBS Act” and “Risk Factors—Risks Related to this Offering and Ownership of Our Class A Common Stock.”

 

Investing in our Class A common stock involves risks. See “Risk Factors” beginning on page 20.

  

   Per Share   Total 
Initial Public Offering Price  $               $                    
Underwriting Discounts and Commissions  $   $ 
Proceeds to Us (before expenses)  $   $ 
Proceeds to the Selling Stockholders  $   $ 

 

The selling stockholders have granted the underwriters an option to purchase up to            additional shares of our Class A common stock within 30 days of the closing date of this offering to cover any over-allotments, if any, and for market stabilization purposes.

 

Neither the Securities and Exchange Commission nor any state securities commission has approved or disapproved of these securities or determined if this prospectus is truthful or complete. Any representation to the contrary is a criminal offense.

 

The underwriters expect to deliver the shares to purchasers on or about            , 2018 through the book-entry facilities of The Depository Trust Company.

 

 

 

Canaccord Genuity

 

 

 

Prospectus dated                         , 2018

 

 

 

 

We are responsible for the information contained in this prospectus and in any free-writing prospectus we have authorized. Neither we, the selling stockholders nor the underwriters have authorized anyone to provide you with different information, and neither we, the selling stockholders nor the underwriters take responsibility for any other information others may give you. Neither we, the selling stockholders nor the underwriters are making an offer to sell these securities in any jurisdiction where the offer or sale is not permitted. The information contained in this prospectus is accurate only as of the date on the front of this prospectus, regardless of the time of delivery of this prospectus or any sale of shares of our Class A common stock. You should not assume that the information contained in this prospectus is accurate as of any date other than its date.

 

 

 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

    Page
Prospectus Summary   1
Risk Factors   20
Cautionary Note Regarding Forward-Looking Statements   54
Industry and Market Data   55
The Transactions   56
Use of Proceeds   60
Dividend Policy   62
Capitalization   63
Dilution   65
Selected Historical Consolidated Financial and Other Data   67
Unaudited Pro Forma Consolidated Financial Information   68
Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations   78
Business   96
Management   115
Executive Compensation   121
Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions   131
Principal and Selling Stockholders   138
Description of Capital Stock   139
Shares Eligible for Future Sale   145
Material U.S. Federal Income Tax Considerations to Non-U.S. Holders   146
Underwriting   149
Notice to Investors Regarding U.S. GAAP   153
Legal Matters   153
Experts   153
Where You Can Find More Information   153
Index to Consolidated Financial Statements   F-1

  

i

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

TRADEMARKS

 

This prospectus contains references to our trademarks and service marks, including without limitation, Greenlane®, Higher Standards®, VapeWorld®, Aerospaced® and Groove®. Solely for convenience, trademarks and trade names referred to in this prospectus may appear without the ® or TM symbols, but such references are not intended to indicate, in any way, that we will not assert, to the fullest extent under applicable law, our rights or the rights of the applicable licensor to these trademarks and trade names. In addition, this prospectus contains trade names, trademarks and service marks of other companies that we do not own. We do not intend our use or display of other companies’ trade names, trademarks or service marks to imply a relationship with, or endorsement or sponsorship of us by, these other companies.

 

GLOSSARY

 

Set forth below is a glossary of industry and other terms used in this prospectus:

 

“we,” “us,” “our,” the “Company,” “Greenlane” and similar references refer: (i) following the completion of the Transactions (as defined below), including this offering, to Greenlane Holdings, Inc., and, unless otherwise stated, all of its subsidiaries, including Greenlane Holdings, LLC, and, unless otherwise stated, all of its subsidiaries, and (ii) prior to the completion of the Transactions, including this offering, to Greenlane Holdings, LLC and, unless otherwise stated, all of its subsidiaries.

 

“Members” refer to the Founder Members and Non-Founder Members, as described below.

 

“Founder Members” refer to Aaron LoCascio, our Chief Executive Officer, Adam Schoenfeld, our President and Chief Strategy Officer, and Jacoby & Co. Inc., an affiliated entity of Messrs. LoCascio and Schoenfeld, each of which will continue to own Common Units (as defined below) after the Transactions and who may, following the completion of this offering, exchange their Common Units for shares of our Class A common stock as described in “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—The Transactions—Greenlane Operating Agreement.” As the context requires in this prospectus, “Founder Members” also refers to the respective successors, assigns and transferees of such Founder Members permitted under the Greenlane Operating Agreement and our amended and restated certificate of incorporation.

 

“Non-Founder Members” refer to those direct and certain indirect owners of interests in Greenlane Holdings, LLC prior to the Transactions, other than the Founder Members, but including the holders of interests that are subject to vesting, each of which will continue to own Common Units after the Transactions and who may, subject to contractual stipulations following the completion of this offering, exchange their Common Units for shares of our Class A common stock as described in “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—The Transactions—Greenlane Operating Agreement.” The Non-Founder Members will include (i) our named executive officers, other than the Founder Members, and (ii) each of our stockholders identified in the table under the caption “Principal and Selling Stockholders” as beneficially owning shares of our Class B common stock. As the context requires in this prospectus, “Non-Founder Members” also refers to the respective successors, assigns and transferees of such Non-Founder Members permitted under the Greenlane Operating Agreement and our amended and restated certificate of incorporation.

 

“Common Units” refer to the single class of issued common membership interests of Greenlane Holdings, LLC.

 

“Greenlane Operating Agreement” refers to Greenlane Holdings, LLC’s third amended and restated operating agreement, which will become effective on or immediately prior to the completion of this offering.

 

“Transactions” refer, unless otherwise stated or the context otherwise requires, to this offering and the other organizational transactions described under the caption “The Transactions.”

  

ii

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

BASIS OF PRESENTATION

 

Organizational Structure

 

In connection with the completion of this offering, we will effect certain organizational transactions, which we refer to collectively as the “Transactions.” See “The Transactions” for a description of the Transactions and a diagram depicting our organizational structure after giving effect to the Transactions, including this offering.

   

Prior to the completion of this offering and the Transactions, Greenlane Holdings, LLC was owned entirely by the Members and operated its business through itself and various wholly-owned subsidiaries. Greenlane Holdings, Inc. was incorporated as a Delaware corporation on May 2, 2018 to serve as the issuer of the Class A common stock offered in this offering.

 

Following the Transactions, we will be a holding company and the sole manager of Greenlane Holdings, LLC, and upon completion of this offering and the application of proceeds therefrom, our principal asset will be Common Units. For financial reporting purposes, Greenlane Holdings, LLC is the predecessor of our company. We will be the financial reporting entity following this offering. Accordingly, this prospectus contains the following historical financial statements:

  

Greenlane Holdings, LLC. As we will have no other interest in any operations other than those of Greenlane Holdings, LLC and its subsidiaries, the historical consolidated financial information included in this prospectus is that of Greenlane Holdings, LLC and its subsidiaries.

 

Better Life Holdings, LLC. We acquired all of the outstanding securities of Better Life Holdings, LLC a leading west coast distributor of like products, on February 20, 2018 and have included the historical financial information of Better Life Holdings, LLC.

 

The unaudited pro forma financial information of our company presented in this prospectus has been derived by the application of pro forma adjustments to the historical consolidated financial statements of Greenlane Holdings, LLC and its subsidiaries included elsewhere in this prospectus. These pro forma adjustments give effect to (i) the organizational transactions described under “The Transactions,” (ii) this offering and the use of proceeds from this offering and (iii) the acquisition by Greenlane Holdings, LLC of Better Life Holdings, LLC on February 20, 2018 as if such acquisition occurred on January 1, 2017. See “Unaudited Pro Forma Consolidated Financial Information” for a complete description of the adjustments and assumptions underlying the pro forma financial information included in this prospectus.

  

iii

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

PROSPECTUS SUMMARY

 

This summary highlights selected information that is presented in greater detail elsewhere in this prospectus. This summary does not contain all of the information you should consider before deciding to invest in our Class A common stock. You should read this entire prospectus carefully, including “Risk Factors” and “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and our historical and pro forma consolidated financial statements and the related notes included elsewhere in this prospectus, before making an investment decision.

 

Our Company

 

Overview

 

We are the largest distributor of premium vaporization products and consumption accessories in the United States and have a growing presence in Canada. Our customers include over 5,700 independent smoke shops and regional retail chain stores, which collectively operate through an estimated 8,000 retail locations, and hundreds of licensed cannabis cultivators, processors and dispensaries. We also own and operate two of the leading North American direct-to-consumer e-commerce websites in the vaporization products and consumption accessories industry, VaporNation.com and VapeWorld.com, which offer convenient, flexible shopping solutions directly to consumers. Through our expansive North American distribution network and e-commerce presence, we offer a comprehensive selection of more than 4,000 stock keeping units (“SKUs”), including premium vaporizers and parts, cleaning products, grinders and storage containers, pipes, rolling papers and customized lines of premium specialty packaging. We have cultivated a reputation for carrying the highest-quality products from large established manufacturers that offer leading brands, such as the Volcano vaporizers by Storz & Bickel, PAX 3 vaporizers by PAX Labs and JUUL vaporizers by JUUL Labs, as well as promising start-up manufacturers that offer innovative, up-and-coming products, to which we extend the ability to grow and scale quickly. We also provide value-added sales services to complement our product offerings and help our customers operate and grow their businesses. Recently, we have set out to develop a world class portfolio of our own proprietary brands which, over time, will deliver higher margin and create long-term value. We believe our market leadership, distribution network, broad product selection and extensive technical expertise provide us with significant competitive advantages and create a compelling value proposition for both our customers and our suppliers. 

 

Our Customers. We market and sell our products in both the business to business (“B2B”) and business to consumer (“B2C”) sectors of the marketplace. We believe our B2B customers choose us for a number of reasons, including the breadth and availability of the products we offer, our extensive expertise, the quality of our customer service, the convenience of our distribution centers and the consistency of our timely delivery. Our ability to provide a “one-stop shop” experience allows us to be the preferred vendor to many of these customers by streamlining their supply chain. In addition, we believe that our customers find great value in the advice and recommendations provided by our knowledgeable sales and service associates, which further increases demand for our products.

 

We have a diverse base of more than 5,700 B2B customers, and our top ten customers accounted for 10.9% and 12.9% of our net sales in the year ended December 31, 2017 and the three-month period ended March 31, 2018, respectively, with no single customer accounting for more than 2.0% and 3.5% of our net sales in the year ended December 31, 2017 and the three-month period ended March 31, 2018, respectively. While we distribute our products to a growing number of large national and regional retailers in Canada, our typical B2B customer is an independent retailer operating in a single market. Our customer service teams interact regularly with our B2B customers as most of them have frequent restocking needs. We believe our high-touch customer service model strengthens relationships, builds loyalty and drives repeat business. In addition, we believe our premium product lines, broad product portfolio and strategically-located distribution centers position us well to meet our customers’ needs and ensure timely delivery of products.

 

We also have a large base of B2C customers who we reach via our VaporNation.com and VapeWorld.com websites. While these customers are predominantly in North America, we also ship to Europe, Australia and other select regions. Our websites are among the most trafficked within our segment according to Alexa Traffic Rankings, and as of March 31, 2018, we ranked first in over 15 Google key search terms and in the top five in over 150 Google key search terms. These websites currently attract over 360,000 unique monthly visitors and generate approximately 6,000 monthly transactions. We shipped more than 180,000 parcels to our B2C customers during the year ended December 31, 2017 and more than 57,000 parcels during the three-month period ended March 31, 2018. In addition to our e-commerce platform, in 2018 we opened our first retail location in the high-traffic shopping center, Chelsea Market, in New York City under our proprietary Higher Standards brand.

 

In the first quarter of 2018, our B2B revenues represented approximately 82.1% of our net sales, our B2C revenues represented approximately 10.9% of our net sales, and the balance of our net sales was comprised of revenues derived from drop-shipping on behalf of other website operators and providing other services.

 

Our Suppliers. Our strong supplier relationships allow us to distribute a broad selection of in-demand premium products at attractive prices. We are the exclusive or lead distributor for many of our suppliers due to our scale, nationwide footprint, leading market positions, knowledgeable professionals, high service levels and strong customer relationships. We believe many of our suppliers choose us because of our track record for successfully growing and launching brands in our trade channels. We offer suppliers feedback and support through all stages of the product sale cycle, including customer service and warranty support. We are often the largest or most visible exhibitor at industry trade shows where we work closely with our premium suppliers in presenting, demonstrating and exposing their products. We believe these value-added services foster an ongoing and lasting relationship with our suppliers, and they serve as a key element of our business strategy.

 

1

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

We source our products from more than 125 suppliers, including leading vaporizer equipment manufacturers, a wide range of smaller companies that are applying breakthrough innovations for up-and-coming products, and a variety of suppliers that specialize in low or no-technology industry-staple products, such as rolling papers, cleaning supplies and child-resistant packaging. We have exclusive or lead distribution relationships with some of our largest suppliers, including North America channel exclusivity for Pax Lab’s Pax 2 and 3 products, U.S. exclusivity for the full line of Storz & Bickel products (Volcano, Plenty, Mighty and Crafty), worldwide exclusivity for all Grenco Science products, and other geographic exclusivity with Da Vinci, Pollen Gear, Banana Bros, Eyce and others. We are also one of the largest distributors of products made by JUUL Labs. We believe our exclusive and lead distribution relationships are a principal competitive advantage. Additionally, we develop and sell innovative products under our proprietary brands, such as Higher Standards. Our portfolio of highly-regarded brands helps us to attract and retain our B2B and B2C customers, which allows us to generate incremental sales opportunities.

 

Our Distribution Facilities. In 2017, we shipped more than 225,000 parcels comprising more than 2.0 million product units. To facilitate these volumes and in anticipation of future growth, we have established a network of five strategically-located distribution centers that provide full coverage of the United States and Canada and ensure timely and cost-effective transportation and delivery of our products. We estimate that, as of March 31, 2018, 90% of our North American customers could be reached within two days via FedEx Ground or similar ground delivery services. Due to our mature and continuously-evolving operational efficiencies, we provide our customers with accurate transaction fulfillment, logistics and customer support services. We expect to open an additional distribution facility in British Columbia, Canada, in the third quarter of 2018.

 

Our Growth. In February 2018, we completed the acquisition of Better Life Holdings, LLC, a leading west coast distributor of like products that does business under the trade name VaporNation, to expand and grow our business and market leadership. We intend to pursue additional acquisitions to complement our organic growth and to achieve our strategic objectives. Since July 1, 2016, we have grown our employee count from 89 employees to 220 employees as of June 1, 2018, of which 75 were focused on sales. Our organic and acquisition-driven growth strategies have led to significant increases in consolidated net sales, gross profit and EBITDA.  For the three-month period ended March 31, 2018, which included the results of Better Life Holdings, LLC only for the period commencing on February 20, 2018 we generated consolidated net sales of $43.3 million, gross profit of $9.1 million and EBITDA of $2.7 million, compared to net sales of $19.2 million, gross profit of $4.4 million and EBITDA of $0.8 million for the three-month period ended March 31, 2017. For the year ended December 31, 2017, without any pro forma adjustment for our acquisition of Better Life Holdings, LLC, we generated consolidated net sales of $88.3 million, gross profit of $20.6 million and EBITDA of $3.5 million, compared to consolidated net sales of $66.7 million, gross profit of $15.0 million and EBITDA of $1.0 million for the year ended December 31, 2016. See “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations—Non-GAAP Financial Measure-EBITDA” for a reconciliation of our EBITDA to net income.

 

Investment Highlights

 

Leading Distributor of Premium Vaporization Products and Consumption Accessories in North America

 

We are the largest distributor of premium vaporization products and consumption accessories in the United States and have a growing presence in Canada. We have exclusive rights from a number of suppliers to distribute premium brands and products. As of March 31, 2018, we carried more than 4,000 SKUs that were sourced from more than 125 suppliers. For the year ended December 31, 2017 and the three-month period ended March 31, 2018, we had consolidated net sales of $88.3 million and $43.3 million, respectively, and we believe we are positioned to grow substantially as the cannabis regulatory landscape evolves. 

 

Strong and Loyal Customer Base with Robust Sales Infrastructure to Support Scale

 

Our B2B customers include over 5,700 independent smoke shops and regional retail chain stores, which collectively operate through an estimated 8,000 retail locations, and hundreds of licensed cannabis producers, processors and dispensaries. We intend to further expand into new or recently-entered trade channels, including mass retail and big box. We believe our highly-specialized sales force and robust infrastructure are well-positioned to support this growth. We invest in our talent by providing every sales representative with an extensive and ongoing education, including programs that provide comprehensive product knowledge, as well as the tools needed to have a unique understanding of our customers’ personalities and decision-making processes.

 

A Significant E-Commerce Retailer Positioned to Become a Global Leader in Direct-to-Consumer

 

We own and operate two of the leading North American direct-to-consumer e-commerce websites in our industry, VaporNation.com and VapeWorld.com. Our e-commerce properties increase our reach on a global scale and provide better gross profit margins than our B2B operations. With a database consisting of more than 260,000 B2C customers, we are able to continually expand our audience and business. In addition to our own fulfillment, we also exclusively fulfill web orders for many of the top industry suppliers, as well as for other leading e-commerce websites. We are developing a unique e-commerce platform, Vapor.com, that should further increase our leadership position in the direct-to-consumer channel.

 

Strategically-Located Distribution Footprint  

 

We have established our distribution network across the U.S. and Canada, including five distribution centers that allow us to deliver to approximately 90% of our customers within two days via FedEx Ground or similar ground delivery services. In the 12 months ended March 31, 2018, our expansive distribution network allowed us to ship over 257,000 parcels comprising over 4.1 million product units. Our infrastructure is built to support our company as it grows and scales. We believe our distribution network would be difficult and expensive for new entrants in our industry to replicate. 

 

2

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Demonstrated Strong Financial Performance and Future Growth Prospects

 

We have operated profitably since our inception in 2005. We believe our products are best-in-class and our “white glove” customer service, complemented by our prudent financial management, have driven strong growth and financial performance. We emphasize and incentivize profitability at the transaction level and foster relationships with customers to drive repeat purchasing. We have achieved revenue growth of 32.3% for the year ended December 31, 2017 (“fiscal 2017”) compared to the prior year period.

 

  Total revenue increased from $66.7 million in the year ended December 31, 2016 (“fiscal 2016”) to $88.3 million in fiscal 2017, representing an annual growth rate of 32.3%, or to $104.6 million in fiscal 2017 on a pro forma basis giving effect to our acquisition of Better Life Holdings, LLC in February 2018, representing a growth rate of 56.8%.

 

  Total revenue increased from $19.2 million in the quarter ended March 31, 2017 (“Q1 2017”) to $43.3 million in the quarter ended March 31, 2018 (“Q1 2018”), representing an increase of 125.5%.

 

  Net income was $87,000 for fiscal 2016 and $2.3 million for fiscal 2017.

 

  EBITDA increased from $1.0 million in the year ended December 31, 2016 to $3.5 million for fiscal 2017, representing an annual growth rate of 250.0%.

  

We believe our results of operations for Q1 2018 are a first look at our future growth prospects as we continue to rapidly scale and execute on new growth opportunities. We experienced revenue growth of 125.5% for Q1 2018 compared to Q1 2017.

 

Passionate and Committed Executive Team with Proven Track Record of Delivering Strong Results

 

Our executive team has over 225 years of cumulative experience across various industries, including distribution, marketing, sales, financial services, public accounting, logistics, information technology, and luxury retail. Through steady brand discipline and strategic business planning, our executive team has transformed a small, single-product distributor into a leading multi-product, omni-channel distributor with a diverse and strategic portfolio mix of premium brands and products. Our executive team’s passion and dedication to our company permeates across our employees and organizational culture, which fosters innovation, teamwork, passion for our products and personalized customer service.

 

Our Business Relating to the Cannabis Industry

 

While we do not cultivate, distribute or dispense cannabis or any cannabis derivatives, several of the products we distribute may be used for the consumption of cannabis, cannabis derivatives and nicotine using items such as vaporizers, pipes and rolling papers.

 

We believe the global cannabis industry is experiencing a transformation from a state of prohibition toward a state of legalization. We expect the number of states, countries and other jurisdictions implementing legalization legislation to continue to increase, which will create numerous and sizable opportunities for market participants, including us. Further, we believe that the trend of users seeking to consume nicotine will continue to evolve from traditional cigarettes to e-cigarettes, vaporizers and heat-not-burn platforms a trend which we are well-positioned to capitalize on.

Global Landscape

 

A June 2018 report of Arcview Market Research, a leading market research firm in the cannabis industry, projects that spending in the global legal cannabis market will be approximately $12.9 billion in 2018, of which the United States, Canada and rest of the world are projected to comprise $11 billion, $1.3 billion and $0.6 billion, respectively, and projects that by 2022 spending in the global legal cannabis market will reach $32.0 billion, of which the United States, Canada and rest of the world comprises $23.4 billion, $5.5 billion and $3.1 billion, respectively.

 

Wells Fargo Securities, LLC believes the global e-cigarette and vapor market will generate $5.5 billion of revenue in 2018, of which vaporizers, tanks and mods are projected to comprise $3.5 billion.

 

Our experience and awareness of the markets in which we operate lead us to believe that demand for the types of products we distribute will grow in tandem with the industry.

The North American Cannabis Landscape

 

United States and Territories. Thirty-one states, the District of Columbia, Puerto Rico, and Guam have legalized medical cannabis in some form, although not all of those jurisdictions have fully implemented their legalization programs. Nine of these states and the District of Columbia have legalized cannabis for non-medical adult use. Fifteen additional states have legalized high-cannabidiol (CBD), low tetrahydrocannabinol (THC) oils for a limited class of patients. Only four states continue to prohibit cannabis entirely. Notwithstanding the continued trend toward further state legalization, cannabis continues to be categorized as a Schedule I controlled substance under the Federal Controlled Substances Act (the “CSA”) and, accordingly, the cultivation, processing, distribution, sale and possession of cannabis violate federal law in the United States as discussed further in “Risk Factors—Our business depends partly on continued purchases by businesses and individuals selling or using cannabis pursuant to state laws in the United States or Canadian and provincial laws.”

 

3

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

We believe support for cannabis legalization in the United States is gaining momentum. According to a 2017 poll by Gallup, public support for the legalization of cannabis in the United States has increased from approximately 16% in 1974 to approximately 64% in 2017.

 

 

 

The U.S. cannabis industry has experienced significant growth over the past 12 months fueled in part by increasing consumer acceptance and the legalization of medical and recreational cannabis across the United States. A May 2018 research report of Cowen and Company, a diversified financial services firm, estimated the United States to have 34 million adult cannabis users and projects that this number will grow to approximately 43 million in 2022 and 58 million by 2030. However, many of these consumers do not reside in states where recreational or medical cannabis is legal under applicable state law. With increasing adult usage and further states expecting to legalize recreational cannabis use, some business participants in sectors such as wine, beer, spirits and tobacco have publicly expressed their views on the threats to their businesses from the growth of the cannabis industry.

 

 

 

4

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

The following map illustrates states that have fully legalized cannabis (for medical and recreational purposes); have partially legalized cannabis (for medical purposes only); and have not legalized cannabis for medical or recreational purposes are outlined below (as of August 1, 2018).

 

 

Canada. Legal access to dried cannabis for medical purposes was first allowed in Canada in 1999. The Access to Cannabis for Medical Purposes Regulations currently govern the production, sale and distribution of cannabis products in Canada. Health Canada recently reported that over 235,000 patients had registered for medical cannabis prescription by September 30, 2017.

 

On April 13, 2017, the Government of Canada introduced legislation to legalize and regulate access to cannabis (“Bill C -45”). The Cannabis Act (Canada) (the “Cannabis Act”) created a strict legal framework for controlling the production, distribution, sale and possession of cannabis in Canada. On June 21, 2018, the Government of Canada announced that Bill C-45, an Act respecting cannabis and to amend the Controlled Drugs and Substances Act, the Criminal Code and other Acts, received Royal Assent and Prime Minister Trudeau announced that marijuana would be legal and available to the consuming public by October 2018.

 

In a 2018 publication by Deloitte, a leading professional services and consulting firm, the projected size of the Canadian adult-use market in 2019 ranged from C$1.8 billion to C$4.3 billion and in a 2018 research report, CIBC World Markets indicated that it expects the sector to grow to C$6.5 billion by 2020.

The outlook for the North American cannabis industry is largely positive. The industry is expected to continue benefiting from increasingly-favorable attitudes toward both medical cannabis and recreational cannabis with expected significant consumer spending increases.

 

The International Cannabis Landscape

 

Europe. Europe’s population is more than twice the size of the U.S. and Canadian markets combined, suggesting the potential of a very significant market. Prohibition Partners, a London-based strategic consultancy firm, estimated in 2018 that approximately 12% of the continent’s adult population were “irregular” or “intensive” users of cannabis and a fully-regulated cannabis market would be worth more than $70 billion annually, with medical usage comprising $46 billion.

Currently, only Germany, Italy, Austria, Czech Republic, Finland, Portugal, Poland and Spain allow cannabis use for medicinal purposes, although it has been widely reported that other countries are considering following suit.

 

5

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

The progress of some key international markets is outlined below.

 

Germany. In January 2017, the German parliament legalized cannabis for medical consumption. In Germany, the cost of dried cannabis and cannabis extracts will be covered by health insurance for patients who have no other treatment options. Germany has created a “Cannabis Agency” to regulate the formation of a domestic cultivation and production of the medical cannabis supply chain. According to Rheinische Post, in the first 10 months of Germany’s medical cannabis reform, over 13,000 applications for medical cannabis have been received by the largest three public health insurance companies in Germany.

 

United Kingdom. The U.K is a global leader in legal cannabis production according to the International Narcotics Control Board and the country has also positioned itself as being in the forefront of medical cannabis research and development. The U.K has launched a review into the status of cannabis, which is currently classified as a Class B drug, the second most harmful category of narcotics.

 

Australia. In February 2016, Australia legalized medical cannabis at the federal level to allow for the manufacturing of medicinal cannabis products in Australia. In October 2016, the Australian regulatory authority released a detailed application process to license domestic cultivators and producers of medical cannabis. In the interim, until local licenses have been awarded and have reached production capacity, Australia is allowing medical cannabis to be imported from locally-authorized producers. In January 2018, the Australian government announced that it will now permit the export of medicinal cannabis products to provide increasing opportunities for domestic producers.

 

Israel. In February 2017, legislation was passed allowing Israeli cannabis companies to export cannabis internationally. According to the country’s health minister, as of December 2017, there are 383 farmers that had applied for growing licenses in Israel, and 250 nurseries, 95 pharmacies and 60 processing facilities had applied for cannabis distribution and/or processing licenses. According to the European Journal of Internal Medicine, as of March 2018, there was estimated to be 32,000 registered users of medical cannabis in Israel. Recreational cannabis use is currently illegal in Israel, but it is expected to be decriminalized by late 2018.

 

Uruguay. In December 2013, Uruguay became the first country to legalize cannabis for both medicinal and recreational purposes. According to a news report published by The Independent, as of December 2017, there were over 16,000 government - registered cannabis users, a three-fold increase from approximately 5,000 users in July 2017.

 

Product Information

 

Consumers of cannabis, herbs, flavored compounds and nicotine are likely going to require the types of products we distribute, including vaporizers, pipes, rolling papers and packaging. We believe we distribute the “picks & shovels” for these rapidly-growing industries.

 

Inhalation Delivery Methods. There are two prevalent types of inhalation methods for cannabis and nicotine—combustion and vaporization. Recent advances in vaporization technology offer users a cleaner alternative to combustion with fewer health concerns.

 

Vaporizers are personal devices that heat materials to temperatures below the point of combustion, extracting the flavors, aromas and effects of dry herbs and concentrates in the form of vapor. Measured by revenue, vaporizers are our largest product category. In 2017, the vaporizers and components category, which is comprised of desktops, portables and pens, generated 79.9% of our net sales.

 

The Science and Popularity of Vaporization

 

Vaporizers have elements that are designed to quickly heat combustible material, which generates a vapor that is immediately inhaled through the mouthpiece on the device itself, or a hose, pipe or an inflatable bag. Vaporizers can heat a variety of dry materials, viscous liquids and waxes and provides a convenient way for users to consume the active ingredients. Common ingredients used in vaporizers include cannabis, nicotine extracts, tobacco, herbs and propylene glycol and glycerin blends.

 

6

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Vaporizers have become a popular way to consume cannabis, flavored compounds and nicotine. According to the Cowen Vaping Survey conducted in April 2016, cannabis users comprised 20% of the vaporizer market. Heating rather than burning cannabis affords the consumer more control over the substances being consumed as vaporizers produce no smoke, are more discreet and emit less odor compared to combustible methods of consumption. As a result, vaporizers are expected to gain significantly more market share.

 

Currently, vaporization technology is utilized for the following substances:

 

 

 

Vaporization Technology. Cannabis consumers have a wide array of vaporization devices at their disposal, which can be broadly categorized into two primary segments—desktop and portable vaporizers. Our vaporizer offering spans over 250 distinct products across 56 brands.

 

Desktop Vaporizers. Vaporizers were first developed as desktop models that were powered through traditional electric power sources. Desktop vaporizers are capable of heating the material to a more precise temperature choice determined by the consumer or as advised by a health practitioner. Some models dispense the vapor through a pipe or wand, and others into an inflatable bag in order to allow users to more accurately monitor their consumption.

 

Portable Vaporizers. With the development of lithium batteries, vaporizers have now become portable. Technological advances are resulting in lighter, sleeker and more visually-appealing units that are capable of quickly heating the material to the user’s desired temperature setting. The temperature setting can be fixed by the manufacturer or set manually by the consumer or via a Bluetooth connection to the consumer’s smartphone. Portable vaporizers, of which pens are a sub-set, are differentiated by many features, including output, battery life, recharge time, material, capacity and design.

 

Other Methods of Consumption. In addition to vaporizers, consumers have a wide array of methods of consumption at their disposal, including, among others, hand pipes, water pipes, rolling papers, and oral and topical delivery methods.

 

Hand and Water Pipes. We offer a diverse portfolio of approximately 114 products and seven brands, including our own proprietary Higher Standards brand. Many display iconic, licensed logos and artwork as pipes have grown into an artistic expression and are available in countless creative forms and functionality.

 

Hand pipes are small, portable and simple to use and function by trapping the smoke produced from burning materials, which is then inhaled by the user. Water pipes include large table-top models and bubblers and are more complex because they incorporate the cooling effects of water to the burning materials, before inhalation.

 

Rolling Papers. Rolling papers are a traditional consumption method used to smoke dried plant material in a “roll-your-own application”. Our rolling papers category is comprised of approximately 50 products across six brands.

 

Edibles, Tinctures, Ingestible Oils and Topicals are additional methods of consumption.

 

7

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Our Competitive Strengths

 

We attribute our success to the following competitive strengths.

 

Clear Market Leader in an Attractive Industry. We are the largest North American distributor of premium vaporization products and consumption accessories.

 

Market Knowledge and Understanding. Because of our experience and our extensive and long-term industry relationships, we believe we have a deep understanding of customer needs and desires in both our B2B and B2C channels. This allows us to influence customer demand and to insert ourselves in the pipeline between product manufacturers, suppliers, advertisers and the marketplace.

 

Broadest Product Offering. We believe we offer the industry’s most comprehensive portfolio of vaporization products and consumption accessories with over 4,000 SKUs from more than 125 suppliers. This broad product offering creates a “one-stop” shop for our customers and positively distinguishes us from our competitors. In addition, we have carefully cultivated a portfolio of well-known brands and premium products, and have helped many of the brands we distribute to become established names in the industry.

 

Entrepreneurial Culture. We believe our entrepreneurial, results-driven culture fosters highly-dedicated employees who provide our customers with superior service that differentiates us from our competition. We invest in our talent by providing every sales representative with an extensive and ongoing education, and have successfully developed programs that provide comprehensive product knowledge, as well as the tools needed to have a unique understanding of our customers’ personalities and decision-making processes.

 

Unwavering Focus on Relationships and Superior Service. We aim to be the premier partner of choice for our customers, suppliers and employees.

 

  Customers. We believe we offer superior services and solutions due to our comprehensive product offering, proprietary industry data and analytics, product expertise and the quality of our service. We deliver products to our customers in a precise, safe and timely manner with complementary support from our dedicated sales and service teams.

 

  Suppliers. Our industry knowledge, market reach and resources allow us to establish trusted professional relationships with many of our product suppliers. We offer them a variety of value-added services, such as marketing support, supply chain management, customer feedback, market data and customer service to support the sale of their products.

 

  Employees. We provide our employees with an entrepreneurial culture, a safe work environment, financial incentives and career development opportunities.

 

Experienced and Proven Management Team Driving Organic and Acquisition Growth. We believe our management team is among the most experienced in the industry. Our senior management team brings experience in accounting, mergers and acquisitions, financial services, consumer packaged goods, retail operations, third-party logistics, information technology, product development and specialty retail, and an understanding of the cultural nuances of the sectors that we serve.

 

8

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

  

Our Strategies

 

We intend to leverage our competitive strengths to increase shareholder value through the following core strategies:

  

Build Upon Strong Customer and Supplier Relationships to Expand Organically. Our North American footprint and broad supplier relationships, combined with our regular interaction with our large and diverse customer base, provides us key insights and positions us to be a critical link in the supply chain for premium vaporization products and consumption accessories. Our suppliers benefit from access to more than 5,700 B2B customers and more than 260,000 B2C customers as we are a single point of contact for improved production, planning and efficiency. Our customers, in turn, benefit from our market leadership, talented sales associates, broad product offering and high inventory availability, timely delivery and complementary value-added services. We believe our strong customer and supplier relationships will enable us to expand and broaden our market share in the premium vaporization products and consumption accessories marketplace.

 

Expand Our Operations Internationally. We currently focus our marketing and sales efforts on the United States and Canada, the two largest and most developed markets for our products. While we currently support and ship products to customers in Europe, Australia, and parts of South America on a limited basis, we are aware of the growth opportunities in these markets. As we continue to expand our marketing, supplier relationships, sales bandwidth and expertise, we anticipate capturing market share in those regions by opening our own distribution centers, acquiring existing international distributors and partnering with local operators.

 

Expand our E-Commerce Reach and Capabilities. We own and operate two of the leading direct-to-consumer e-commerce websites in our industry, VaporNation.com and VapeWorld.com. These sites are the most trafficked within our segment according to Alexa Traffic Rankings, a leading data analytics firm, and as of March 31, 2018, we ranked first in over 15 Google key search terms and over 150 in the top five key search term positions. We intend to continue to optimize our e-commerce platforms to improve conversion rates, increase average order values, and grow our margins.

  

Pursue Value-Enhancing Strategic Acquisitions. Through our recently-completed acquisition of Better Life Holdings, LLC, we have added new markets within the United States, new product lines, talented employees and operational best practices. We intend to continue pursuing strategic acquisitions to grow our market share and enhance leadership positions by taking advantage of our scale, operational experience and acquisition know-how to pursue and integrate attractive targets. We believe we have significant opportunities to add product categories through our knowledge of our industry and possible acquisition targets.

 

Enhance Our Operating Margins. We expect to enhance our operating margins as our business expands through a combination of additional product purchasing discounts, reduced inbound and outbound shipping and handling rates, reduced transaction processing fees, increased operating efficiencies and realizing the benefits of leveraging our existing assets and distribution facilities. Additionally, we expect that our operating margins will increase as our product mix continues to evolve to include a greater portion of our proprietary branded products. We are committed to supporting our proprietary brands, such as Higher Standards, which offer better price points and significantly higher gross margins than supplier-branded products.

 

Developing A World-Class Portfolio of Proprietary Brands. We intend to develop a portfolio of our own proprietary brands, which over time should improve our blended margins and create long-term value. Our brand development will be based upon our proprietary industry intelligence that allows us to identify market opportunities for new brands and products. We plan to leverage our distribution infrastructure and customer relationships to penetrate the market quickly with our proprietary brands and to gain placement in thousands of stores. In addition, we plan to sell such products directly to consumers via the brand websites and our e-commerce properties. Our existing proprietary brands include our Higher Standards and Aerospaced brands. We have short term plans to introduce a brand in partnership with the estate of the iconic artist Keith Haring and a rolling paper brand with one of the most influential celebrities in the industry today. In addition, we are absorbing the Marley Natural accessory line as a house brand. In creating our proprietary brands, we intend to stay mindful of our key supplier relationships and to identify opportunities within our product portfolio and in the market where we can introduce compelling products that do not directly compete with the products of our core suppliers. We believe that, over time, our proprietary brands will have a significant positive impact on our results of operations.

 

Execute on Identified Operational Initiatives. We continue to evaluate operational initiatives to improve our profitability, enhance our supply chain efficiency, strengthen our pricing and category management capabilities, streamline and refine our marketing process and invest in more sophisticated information technology systems and data analytics. In addition, we continue to further automate our distribution facilities and improve our logistical capabilities. We believe we will continue to benefit from these and other operational improvements.

 

Be the Employer of Choice. We believe our employees are the key drivers of our success, and we aim to recruit, train, promote and retain the most talented and success-driven personnel in the industry. Our size and scale enable us to offer structured training and career path opportunities for our employees, while in our sales and marketing teams, we have built a vibrant and entrepreneurial culture that rewards performance. We are committed to being the employer of choice in our industry.

 

9

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

  

Reorganization Transactions

 

Prior to the completion of this offering and the Transactions described below, Greenlane Holdings, LLC was owned entirely by the Members and operated its business through itself and various wholly-owned subsidiaries. Greenlane Holdings, Inc. was incorporated as a Delaware corporation on May 2, 2018, to serve as the issuer of the Class A common stock offered in this offering.

 

In connection with the completion of this offering, we will consummate the following organizational transactions:

  

  we will amend and restate Greenlane Holdings, LLC’s existing operating agreement effective as of the completion of this offering to, among other things, convert the Members’ existing interests in Greenlane Holdings, LLC into Common Units and appoint Greenlane Holdings, Inc. as the sole manager of Greenlane Holdings, LLC;

 

we will amend and restate our certificate of incorporation to, among other things, provide for Class A common stock, Class B common stock and Class C common stock;

 

we will issue shares of Class B common stock to the Non-Founder Members on a one-to-one basis with the number of Common Units they own, for nominal consideration, and shares of Class C common stock to the Founder Members on a three-to-one basis with the number of Common Units they own, for nominal consideration;

 

we will issue         shares of our Class A common stock, or         shares if the underwriters exercise in full their option to purchase additional shares of Class A common stock, assuming an initial public offering price at the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page, to the Members upon exchange of an equal number of Common Units, which shares will be sold by the Members as selling stockholders in this offering;

 

we will issue         shares of our Class A common stock to the purchasers in this offering, assuming an initial public offering price at the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page, and will use all of the net proceeds received by us from such issuance to acquire Common Units from Greenlane Holdings, LLC at a purchase price per Common Unit equal to the initial public offering price per share of Class A common stock, less underwriting discounts and commissions, which Common Units, when added to the Common Units we receive from the selling stockholders, will collectively represent         % of Greenlane Holdings, LLC’s outstanding Common Units following this offering, or approximately         % if the underwriters exercise in full their option to purchase additional shares of Class A common stock from the selling stockholders;

 

Greenlane Holdings, LLC intends to use the proceeds from the sale of Common Units to Greenlane Holdings, Inc. as described in “Use of Proceeds,” including to pay the expenses of this offering and for acquisitions of complementary businesses, acquisitions of proprietary brands, dispensary service infrastructure and licenses, capital expenditures for operations and warehouses and other facilities, inventory investment, and working capital and general corporate purposes;

  

the Members will continue to own their Common Units not exchanged for the shares of Series A common stock to be sold by them in this offering and will have no economic interests in Greenlane Holdings, Inc. despite their ownership of Class B common stock and Class C common stock, where “economic interests” means the right to receive any distributions or dividends, whether cash or stock, nor any proceeds upon dissolution, winding up or liquidation; and

 

Greenlane Holdings, Inc. will enter into (i) a Tax Receivable Agreement with Greenlane Holdings, LLC and the Members and (ii) a Registration Rights Agreement with the Members who, assuming that all of the Common Units of such Members are redeemed or exchanged for newly issued shares of Class A common stock on a one-to-one basis, will own         shares of Greenlane Holdings, Inc.’s Class A common stock, assuming an initial public offering price at the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page, representing approximately         % of the combined voting power of all of Greenlane Holdings, Inc.’s common stock, or approximately         % if the underwriters exercise in full their option to purchase additional shares of Class A common stock. Although the actual timing and amount of any payments that we make to the Members under the Tax Receivable Agreement will vary, we expect those payments will be significant.

  

Following this offering, Common Units will be redeemable subject to contractual restrictions at the election of such Members for newly-issued shares of Class A common stock on a one-to-one basis (and their shares of Class B common stock or Class C common stock, as the case may be, will be cancelled on a one-to-one basis in the case of Class B common stock or three-to-one basis in the case of Class C common stock upon any such issuance). We will have the option to instead make a cash payment equal to a volume weighted average market price of one share of Class A common stock for each Common Unit redeemed (subject to customary adjustments, including for stock splits, stock dividends and reclassifications) in accordance with the terms of the Greenlane Operating Agreement. Our decision to make a cash payment upon a Member’s election will be made by our independent directors (within the meaning of applicable securities laws) who are disinterested.

  

10

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Our corporate structure following this offering, as described above, is commonly referred to as an “Up-C” structure, which is often used by partnerships and limited liability companies when they undertake an initial public offering of their business. The Up-C structure will allow the Members to continue to realize tax benefits associated with owning interests in an entity that is treated as a partnership, or “pass-through” entity, for income tax purposes following this offering. One of these benefits is that future taxable income of Greenlane Holdings, LLC that is allocated to the Members will be taxed on a flow-through basis and therefore will not be subject to corporate taxes at the entity level. Additionally, because the Members may redeem their Common Units for shares of our Class A common stock or, at our option, for cash, the Up-C structure also provides the Members with potential liquidity that holders of non-publicly-traded limited liability companies are not typically afforded. See “The Transactions” and “Description of Capital Stock.”

  

Greenlane Holdings, Inc. will receive the same benefits as the Members on account of our ownership of Common Units in an entity treated as a partnership, or “pass-through” entity, for income tax purposes. As we redeem additional Common Units from the Members under the mechanism described above, we will obtain a step-up in tax basis in our share of Greenlane Holdings, LLC’s assets. This step-up in tax basis will provide us with certain tax benefits, such as future depreciation and amortization deductions that can reduce the taxable income allocable to us. We expect to enter into the Tax Receivable Agreement with Greenlane Holdings, LLC and each of the Members that will provide for the payment by us to the Members of 85% of the amount of tax benefits, if any, that we actually realize (or in some cases are deemed to realize) as a result of (i) increases in tax basis resulting from the redemption of Common Units and (ii) certain other tax benefits attributable to payments made under the Tax Receivable Agreement.

 

We refer to the foregoing distribution and organizational transactions collectively as the Transactions. For more information regarding our structure after the completion of the Transactions, including this offering, see “The Transactions.”

  

Immediately following this offering, we will be a holding company and our principal asset will be the Common Units we purchase from Greenlane Holdings, LLC. As the sole manager of Greenlane Holdings, LLC, we will operate and control all of the business and affairs of Greenlane Holdings, LLC and, through Greenlane Holdings, LLC and its subsidiaries, conduct our business. Although we will have a minority economic interest in Greenlane Holdings, LLC, we will have the sole voting interest in, and control the management of, Greenlane Holdings, LLC, and will have the obligation to absorb losses of, and receive benefits from, Greenlane Holdings, LLC that could be significant. As a result, we have determined that, after the Transactions, Greenlane Holdings, LLC will be a variable interest entity, or VIE, and that we will be the primary beneficiary of Greenlane Holdings, LLC. Accordingly, pursuant to the VIE accounting model, we will consolidate Greenlane Holdings, LLC in our consolidated financial statements and will report a non-controlling interest related to the Common Units held by the Members on our consolidated financial statements.

 

See “Description of Capital Stock” for more information about our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and the terms of the Class A common stock, Class B common stock and Class C common stock. See “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions” for more information about:

 

the Greenlane Operating Agreement, including the terms of the Common Units and the redemption right of the Members;

 

the Tax Receivable Agreement; and

 

the Registration Rights Agreement.

  

11

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

The following diagram shows our organizational structure after giving effect to the Transactions, including this offering, assuming an initial public offering price at the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page and no exercise by the underwriters of their option to purchase additional shares of Class A common stock:

  

 

  

JOBS Act

  

We are an “emerging growth company,” as defined in the Jumpstart Our Business Startups Act of 2012. We will remain an emerging growth company until the earlier to occur of (1) the last day of the fiscal year (a) following the fifth anniversary of the completion of this offering, (b) in which we have total annual gross revenue of at least $1.0 billion or (c) in which we become a large accelerated filer, which means that we have been public for at least 12 months, have filed at least one annual report and the market value of our Class A common stock that is held by non-affiliates exceeds $700 million as of the last day of our then most recently completed second fiscal quarter and (2) the date on which we have issued more than $1.0 billion in non-convertible debt during the prior three-year period. We refer to the Jumpstart Our Business Startups Act of 2012 as the “JOBS Act,” and references to “emerging growth company” have the meaning given to such term in the JOBS Act.

  

12

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

An emerging growth company may take advantage of specified exemptions from various requirements that are otherwise generally applicable to public companies in the United States. These provisions include:

 

an exemption to include in an initial public offering registration statement less than five years of selected financial data; and

  

an exemption from the auditor attestation requirement in the assessment of the emerging growth company’s internal control over financial reporting.

 

We have availed ourselves in this prospectus of the reduced reporting requirements described above with respect to selected financial data. As a result, the information that we are providing to you may be less comprehensive than what you might receive from other public companies.

 

In addition, the JOBS Act provides that an emerging growth company may delay adopting new or revised accounting standards until such time as those standards apply to private companies. We have elected not to use the extended transition period for complying with any new or revised financial accounting standards provided pursuant to Section 7(a)(2)(B) of the Securities Act. Therefore, we will be subject to the same new or revised accounting standards as other public companies that are not emerging growth companies.

 

Corporate Information

 

We were incorporated as a Delaware corporation on May 2, 2018 for the purpose of issuing the Class A common stock in this offering and acquiring Common Units in Greenlane Holdings, LLC, our principal operating subsidiary, which was organized as Delaware limited liability company on September 1, 2015. Our principal executive offices are located at 6501 Park of Commerce Boulevard, Suite 200, Boca Raton, FL 33487, and our telephone number is (877) 292-7660. Our corporate website is www.gnln.com. Information contained on our website is not incorporated by reference into this prospectus, and such information should not be considered to be part of this prospectus.

  

13

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

The Offering

 

Issuer in this offering   Greenlane Holdings, Inc.
     
Class A common stock offered by us             shares
     
Class A common stock offered by the selling  stockholders             shares
     
Underwriters’ option to purchase additional shares of Class A common stock   The selling stockholders have granted the underwriters the right to purchase up to           additional shares of Class A common stock within 30 days of the closing date of this offering.  See “Underwriting.”
     
Class A common stock to be outstanding immediately after this offering             shares, representing          % of the voting interest and 100% of the economic interest in us, or            shares, representing        % voting interest and 100% of the economic interest in us if the underwriters exercise in full their option to purchase additional shares of Class A common stock.
     
Class B common stock to be outstanding immediately after this offering            shares, representing          % of the voting interest and no economic interest in us, or           shares, representing          % voting interest and no economic interest if the underwriters exercise in full their option to purchase additional shares of Class A common stock.
     
Class C common stock to be outstanding immediately after this offering              shares, representing          % of the voting interest and no economic interest in us, representing           % voting interest and no economic interest if the underwriters exercise in full their option to purchase additional shares of Class A common stock.
     
Common Units of Greenlane Holdings, LLC to be held by us immediately after this offering             Common Units, representing a          % economic interest in the business of Greenlane Holdings, LLC, or           Common Units, representing a          % economic interest in the business of Greenlane Holdings, LLC, if the underwriters exercise in full their option to purchase additional shares of Class A common stock.
     
Common Units of Greenlane Holdings, LLC to be held by the Members after this offering             Common Units, representing an          % economic interest in the business of Greenlane Holdings, LLC, or           Common Units, representing an          % economic interest in the business of Greenlane Holdings, LLC, if the underwriters exercise in full their option to purchase additional shares of Class A common stock.
     
Ratio of shares of Class A common stock to Common Units   Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and the Greenlane Operating Agreement will require that we and Greenlane Holdings, LLC at all times maintain a one-to-one ratio between the number of shares of Class A common stock issued by us and the number of Common Units owned by us.

 

14

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Ratio of shares of Class B common stock to Common Units   Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and the Greenlane Operating Agreement will require that we and Greenlane Holdings, LLC at all times maintain a one-to-one ratio between the number of shares of Class B common stock owned by the Non-Founder Members and the number of  Common Units owned by the Non-Founder Members.
     
Ratio of shares of Class C common stock to Common Units   Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and the Greenlane Operating Agreement will require that we and Greenlane Holdings, LLC at all times maintain a three-to-one ratio between the number of shares of Class C common stock owned by the Founder Members and the number of Common Units owned by the Founder Members.
     
Permitted holders of shares of Class B common stock   Only the Non-Founder Members and their permitted transferees of Common Units as described herein will be permitted to hold shares of our Class B common stock. Shares of Class B common stock are transferable only together with an equal number of Common Units. See “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—The Transactions—Greenlane Operating Agreement.”
     
Permitted holders of shares of Class C common stock   Only the Founder Members, an entity controlled by the Founder Members and their permitted transferees of Common Units as described herein will be permitted to hold shares of our Class C common stock. Shares of Class C common stock are transferable only together with an equal number of Common Units. See “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—The Transactions—Greenlane Operating Agreement” and “Description of Capital Stock—Class C Common Stock—Conversion.”
     
Voting rights   Each share of our Class A common stock entitles its holder to one vote per share, representing an aggregate of          % of the combined voting power of our issued and outstanding common stock upon the completion of this offering, or             % if the underwriters exercise in full their option to purchase additional shares of Class A common stock.
     
    Each share of our Class B common stock entitles its holder to one vote per share, representing an aggregate of          % of the combined voting power of our issued and outstanding common stock upon the completion of this offering, or            % if the underwriters exercise in full their option to purchase additional shares of Class A common stock.
     
    Each share of our Class C common stock entitles its holder to one vote per share, representing an aggregate of          % of the combined voting power of our issued and outstanding common stock upon the completion of this offering, or          % if the underwriters exercise in full their option to purchase additional shares of Class A common stock.
     
    All classes of our common stock generally vote together as a single class on all matters submitted to a vote of our stockholders, except as otherwise required by law or our amended and restated certificate of incorporation. Upon the completion of this offering, our Class B common stock will be held exclusively by the Non-Founder Members and following the Class C Share Conversion, the Founder Members and our Class C common stock will be held exclusively by the Founder Members and an entity beneficially owned by the Founder Members. See “Description of Capital Stock.”

 

15

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Voting power of the Members after this offering              %, or           % if the underwriters exercise in full their option to purchase additional shares of Class A common stock.
     
Voting power of our executive officers, directors and persons holding more than 5% of our Class  A, Class B or Class C common stock (other than any purchasers in this offering) after this  offering            %, or          % if the underwriters exercise in full their option to purchase additional shares of Class A common stock.
     
Redemption rights of holders of Common Units   The Members, from time to time following the completion of this offering, may require Greenlane Holdings, LLC to redeem all or a portion of their Common Units for newly-issued shares of Class A common stock on a one-to-one basis or, at our option, a cash payment equal to a volume weighted average market price of one share of our Class A common stock for each Common Unit redeemed (subject to customary adjustments, including for stock splits, stock dividends and reclassifications) in accordance with the terms of the Greenlane Operating Agreement. Our decision to make a cash payment upon a Member’s redemption election will be made by our independent directors (within the meaning of the applicable securities laws) who are disinterested. See “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—The Transactions—Greenlane Operating Agreement.” Shares of our Class B common stock and Class C common stock, as the case may be, will be cancelled, without consideration, on a one-to-one basis in the case of our Class B common stock or a three-to-one basis in the case of our Class C common stock if we, at the election of a Member, redeem or exchange Common Units of such Member pursuant to the terms of the Greenlane Operating Agreement.
     
Use of proceeds   We intend to use the net proceeds received by us from this offering to purchase           Common Units (assuming an initial offering price per share of Class A common stock in this offering of $        per share, the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus) directly from Greenlane Holdings, LLC at a price per Common Unit equal to the initial public offering price per share of Class A common stock in this offering, less underwriting discounts and commissions. We will not receive any proceeds from the sale of Class A common stock by the selling stockholders, including any shares sold to the underwriters upon exercise of their right to purchase additional shares of Class A common stock.  We will receive Common Units from the selling stockholders in exchange for the shares of Class A common stock to be sold by the selling stockholders in this offering.
     
    We intend to cause Greenlane Holdings, LLC to use the proceeds from the sale of Common Units to us to pay the expenses of this offering and for acquisitions of complementary businesses, acquisitions of proprietary brands, dispensary service infrastructure and licenses, capital expenditures for operations and warehouses and other facilities, inventory investment, and working capital and general corporate purposes.  See “Use of Proceeds.”

 

16

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Tax Receivable Agreement   We will enter into the Tax Receivable Agreement with Greenlane Holdings, LLC and each of the Members that will provide for the payment by us to the Members of 85% of the amount of tax benefits, if any, that we actually realize (or in some circumstances are deemed to realize) as a result of (i) increases in tax basis resulting from any future redemptions that are funded by us or exchanges of Common Units described above under “—Redemption rights of holders of Common Units” and (ii) certain other tax benefits attributable to payments made under the Tax Receivable Agreement. See “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—The Transactions—Tax Receivable Agreement” for a discussion of the Tax Receivable Agreement.
     
Registration Rights Agreement   Pursuant to the Registration Rights Agreement, we will, subject to the terms and conditions thereof, agree to register the resale of the shares of our Class A common stock that are issuable to the Members upon redemption or exchange of their Common Units. See “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—The Transactions—Registration Rights Agreement.”
     
Proposed Symbol   We have applied to list our Class A common stock on the Canadian Securities Exchange under the symbol “GNLN.”
     
Risk Factors   You should read the “Risk Factors” section of this prospectus for a discussion of facts to consider carefully before deciding to invest in shares of our Class A common stock.

 

The shares of Class A common stock to be outstanding following this offering excludes:

 

           shares of Class A common stock that may be issuable upon exercise of the Members’ rights to redeem their Common Units, assuming an offering price of $        , the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus;

 

           shares of Class A common stock reserved for future issuance under our 2018 Equity Incentive Plan, including            shares of Class A common stock (based on an assumed initial public offering price in this offering of $            per share, the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus) issuable upon the exercise of stock options our board of directors has approved in connection with this offering; and

 

           shares of Class A common stock issuable upon the exercise of the warrants to be issued to the underwriters as compensation in this offering, assuming an offering price per share of $            , the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus.

 

The shares of Class B common stock and Class C common stock to be outstanding following this offering is based on            Common Units held by the Members as of March 31, 2018 after taking into account the assumptions set forth below, of which           Common Units will be subject to certain vesting conditions. The shares of Class C common stock to be outstanding following this offering is based on            Common Units held by the Founder Members as of March 31, 2018 after taking into account the assumptions set forth below.

 

Unless we indicate otherwise or the context otherwise requires, all information in this prospectus:

 

gives effect to the Greenlane Operating Agreement, as well as the filing of our amended and restated certificate of incorporation;

 

gives effect to the Transactions;

 

assumes no exercise by the underwriters of their option to purchase            additional shares of Class A common stock from the selling stockholders, assuming an offering price per share of the Class A common stock of $            , the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page; and

 

includes an aggregate of            Common Units and            shares of Class B common stock, assuming an offering price per share of the Class A common stock of $            , the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page to be issued upon consummation of the Transactions to certain of our executive officers that are subject to certain vesting conditions and may not be redeemed for shares of Class A common stock until such vesting conditions are satisfied. See “Executive Compensation.”

  

17

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

SUMMARY CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL DATA

 

The following tables present the summary historical consolidated financial and other data for Greenlane Holdings, LLC and its subsidiaries.  Greenlane Holdings, LLC is our predecessor for financial reporting purposes. The summary consolidated statement of operations data for the years ended December 31, 2017 and 2016 and the summary balance sheet data at December 31, 2017 and 2016 were derived from the audited consolidated financial statements of Greenlane Holdings, LLC included elsewhere in this prospectus. The summary consolidated statement of operations data for the three months ended March 31, 2018 and 2017 and the summary balance sheet data at March 31, 2018 were derived from the unaudited consolidated interim financial statements of Greenlane Holdings, LLC included elsewhere in this prospectus. The unaudited consolidated interim financial statements have been prepared on the same basis as the audited consolidated financial statements and, in the opinion of management, reflect all adjustments, consisting only of normal recurring adjustments, that we consider necessary for a fair statement of the financial information set forth in those statements. The results of operations for the periods presented below are not necessarily indicative of the results to be expected for any future period and the results for any interim period are not necessarily indicative of the results that may be expected for a full year. The following summary consolidated financial and other data should be read in conjunction with the section titled “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and the consolidated financial statements and related notes of Greenlane Holdings, LLC included elsewhere in this prospectus.

 

The summary historical consolidated financial and other data of our company, Greenlane Holdings, Inc., has not been presented, as we are a newly-incorporated entity, have had no business transactions or activities to date and had no assets or liabilities during the periods presented in this section.

  

  

Three Months Ended

March 31,

  

Year Ended

December 31,

 
   2018   2017   2017   2016 
   (unaudited)         
Statement of Operations Data:                
Net sales  $43,257,643   $19,178,993   $88,259,975   $66,689,944 
Gross profit   9,053,094    4,357,677    20,570,397    14,954,003 
Operating expenses   6,727,112    3,710,264    17,854,624    14,839,513 
Income from operations   2,325,982    647,413    2,715,773    114,490 
Other income (expense)   54,564    (46,276)   (241,683)   81,422
Income before income taxes   2,380,546    601,137    2,474,090    195,912 
Net income   2,298,729    563,755    2,291,557    86,985 
                     
Other Data:                    
EBITDA(1)  $2,665,214   $806,374   $3,535,009   $951,945 

  

(1)EBITDA is a Non-GAAP financial measure and generally differs from income from operations, the most directly comparable GAAP financial measure. See “Management’s Discussion and Analyis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations—Non-GAAP Financial Measure-EBITDA” for more information.

 

   March 31,    As of December 31, 
   2018   2017   2016 
   (unaudited)         
Balance Sheet Data:            
               
Cash  $3,099,076   $2,080,397   $1,691,196 
Accounts receivable, net   5,713,790    3,759,551    1,336,982 
Inventories   28,442,048    14,159,693    5,618,328 
Total current assets   44,327,595    23,288,456    10,003,631 
Goodwill and intangible assets, net   10,069,022    4,769,957    4,748,092 
Total assets   56,351,978    29,571,827    15,999,866 
                
Total current liabilities   36,048,668    19,519,682    6,439,943 
Total liabilities   36,794,516    20,175,994    8,551,227 
Total members’ equity   10,667,462    9,395,833    7,448,639 
Total liabilities and members’ equity   56,351,978    29,571,827    15,999,866 

  

18

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

SUMMARY PRO FORMA COMBINED CONDENSED FINANCIAL DATA

 

The following summary unaudited pro forma consolidated statement of operations data for the year ended December 31, 2017 and the three months ended March 31, 2018 presents our consolidated results of operations after giving effect to (i) the organizational transactions described under “The Transactions,” (ii) this offering and the use of proceeds from this offering, and (iii) the acquisition by Greenlane Holdings, LLC of Better Life Holdings, LLC, as if each had been completed as of January 1, 2017. The following pro forma consolidated balance sheet data presents our consolidated financial position as of March 31, 2018 after giving effect to (i) the organizational transactions described under “The Transactions,” and (ii) this offering and the use of proceeds from this offering, as if each had been completed as of March 31, 2018. The summary unaudited pro forma combined condensed financial data has been prepared from, and should be read in conjunction with, the unaudited pro forma combined condensed financial information  set forth under the caption “Unaudited Pro Forma Consolidated Financial Information” and the historical consolidated financial statements and notes thereto of Greenlane Holdings, LLC and the historical consolidated financial statements of Better Life Holdings, LLC, each included elsewhere in this prospectus.

  

The summary historical profit and loss accounts of each of these entities have been prepared in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles in the United States, or U.S. GAAP. The pro forma acquisition adjustments described in the summary unaudited pro forma combined condensed financial information are based on available information and certain assumptions made by us and may be revised as additional information becomes available as the purchase accounting for the acquisition is finalized. The pro forma adjustments are based on preliminary estimates of the fair values of assets acquired and information available as of the date of this prospectus. Certain valuations are currently in process. Actual results may differ from the amounts reflected in the unaudited pro forma combined condensed financial statements, and the differences may be material.

 

The unaudited pro forma combined condensed financial information included in this prospectus is not intended to represent what our results of operations would have been if the acquisition of Better Life Holdings, LLC, and the Transactions and this offering had occurred on January 1, 2017 or to project our results of operations for any future period. The acquisition of Better Life Holdings, LLC was completed on February 20, 2018. We and Better Life Holdings, LLC were not under common control or management for any period presented prior to the acquisition date. Therefore, the unaudited pro forma combined condensed financial results may not be comparable to, or indicative of, future performance.

 

   As of March 31, 2018 
   (unaudited) 
       Including the 
   Including the   Transactions and 
   Transactions   this Offering 
Balance Sheet Data:        
Cash  $3,099,076    
Accounts receivable, net   5,713,790     
Inventories, net   28,442,048     
Total current assets   44,327,595     
Intangible assets, net   4,623,331     
Goodwill   5,445,691     
Total assets   56,351,978     
           
Total current liabilities   36,048,668     
Total liabilities   36,794,516     
           
Total members' / stockholders' equity   19,557,462     
Total liabilities and members' / stockholders' equity   56,351,978     

 

           Including Acquisition of  

Including Acquisition of

Better Life Holdings,

 
   Including Acquisition of   Better Life Holdings, LLC,    LLC, and the Transactions  
   Better Life Holdings, LLC   and the Transactions   and this Offering 
   For the three months ended
March 31, 2018
   For the year ended December 31, 2017   For the three months ended
March 31, 2018
   For the year ended December 31, 2017   For the three months ended
March 31, 2018
   For the year ended December 31, 2017 
   (unaudited)   (unaudited)   (unaudited)   (unaudited)   (unaudited)   (unaudited) 
Statement of Operations Data:                        
Net sales  $45,325,827   $104,588,530   $45,325,827   $104,588,530      
Gross profit   9,703,984    24,752,009    9,703,984    24,752,009         
Operating expenses   7,450,218    23,047,869    7,450,218    23,047,869           
Income from operations   2,253,766    1,704,140    2,253,766    1,704,140           
Other income (expense)   56,648    (234,395)   56,648    (234,395)        
Income before taxes   2,310,414    1,469,745    2,310,414    1,469,745           
Net income   2,228,597    1,287,212    2,228,597    1,287,212           
Net income attributable to non-controlling interests   -    -                     
Net income attributable to Greenlane Holdings, Inc.   -    -                     

 

19

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

RISK FACTORS

 

An investment in our Class A common stock involves a high degree of risk and many uncertainties. You should carefully consider the specific factors listed below together with the other information included in this prospectus before purchasing our Class A common stock in this offering. If any of the possibilities described as risks below actually occurs, our operating results and financial condition would likely suffer and the trading price of our Class A common stock could fall, causing you to lose some or all of your investment. The following is a description of what we consider the key challenges and material risks to our business and an investment in our Class A common stock.

 

Risks Related to Our Business and Industry

 

We have experienced rapid growth, both domestically and internationally, and expect continued future growth, including growth from additional acquisitions. If we fail to manage our growth effectively, we may be unable to execute our business plan, maintain high levels of service or address competitive challenges adequately. Furthermore, our corporate culture has contributed to our success, and if we cannot maintain this culture as we grow, we could lose the innovation, creativity, and teamwork fostered by our culture, and our business may be harmed.

 

We have recently experienced a period of rapid growth in our business, operations, and employee headcount. Our net sales increased to $88.3 million in the year ended December 31, 2017 from $66.7 million in the year ended December 31, 2016, representing a 32.3% increase. We shipped over 1,200,000 product units to our B2B customers in fiscal year 2017 compared to over 780,000 product units in fiscal year 2016, representing a growth rate of approximately 53.8%. We grew our employee head count from 89 employees as of January 1, 2016 to 220 employees as of June 1, 2018.

 

We intend to continue to grow our business through the expansion of our product offerings, product shipments, our commercial, administrative and marketing operations and overall employee headcount. Our success will depend, in part, on our ability to manage this growth, both domestically and internationally. Any growth in, or expansion of, our business is likely to continue to place a strain on our management and administrative resources, infrastructure and systems. As with other growing businesses, we expect that we will need to further refine and expand our business development capabilities, our systems and processes and our access to financing sources. We will also need to hire, train, supervise, and manage new employees. These processes are time consuming and expensive and will increase management responsibilities and divert management attention. We cannot assure that we will be able to:

 

expand our product offerings effectively or efficiently or in a timely manner, if at all;

 

allocate our human resources optimally;

 

meet our capital needs;

 

identify and hire qualified employees or retain valued employees;

 

effectively incorporate the components of any business or product line that we may acquire in our effort to achieve growth; or

 

continue to grow our business rapidly.

 

Our inability or failure to manage our growth and expansion effectively could harm our business and materially adversely affect our operating results and financial condition.  In addition, we believe that an important contributor to our success has been and will continue to be our corporate culture, which we believe fosters innovation, teamwork and a passion for our products and customers. As a result of our rapid growth, we may find it difficult to build and maintain our strong corporate culture, which could limit our ability to innovate and operate effectively. Any failure to preserve our culture could also negatively affect our ability to retain current and recruit new personnel, continue to perform at current levels or execute on our business strategy.

  

20

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

The market for vaporizer products and related items is a niche market, subject to a great deal of uncertainty and is still evolving.

 

Vaporizer products comprise a significant portion of our product portfolio. Many of these products have only recently been introduced to the market and are at an early stage of development. These products represent core components of a niche market that is evolving rapidly, is characterized by a number of market participants and is subject to regulatory oversight and a potentially fluctuating regulatory framework. Rapid growth in the use of, and interest in, vaporizer products are recent, and may not continue on a lasting basis. The demand and market acceptance for these products is subject to a high level of uncertainty, including, but not limited to, changes in governmental regulation, developments in product technology, perceived safety and efficacy of our products, perceived advantages of competing products and sale and use of materials that can be vaporized, including in the expanding legal national and state cannabis markets. Therefore, we are subject to many of the business risks associated with a new enterprise in a niche market. Continued technical evolution, market uncertainty, evolving regulation and the resulting risk of failure of our new and existing product offerings in this market could have a material adverse effect on our ability to build and maintain market share and on our business, results of operations and financial condition. Further, there can be no assurance that we will be able to continue to effectively compete in this marketplace.

 

We depend on third-party suppliers for our products and may experience unexpected supply shortages.

 

We depend on third-party suppliers for our vaporization products and consumption accessories product offerings. Our customers associate certain characteristics of our products, including the weight, feel, draw, flavor, packaging and other unique attributes, to the brands we market, distribute and sell. In the future, we may have difficulty obtaining the products we need from our suppliers as a result of unexpected demand or production difficulties that might extend lead times. Also, products may not be available to us in quantities sufficient to meet our customer demand. Any interruption in supply and/or consistency of these products may adversely impact our ability to deliver products to our customers, may harm our relationships and reputation with our customers, and may have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.

 

A significant percentage of our revenue is dependent on sales of products from a relatively small number of key suppliers, and a decline in sales of products from these suppliers could materially harm our business.

 

A significant percentage of our revenue is dependent on sales of products from a small number of key suppliers, including PAX Labs and JUUL Labs. For example, products manufactured by PAX Labs represented approximately 17.0% and 34.9% of our net sales in the three-month periods ended March 31, 2018 and 2017, respectively, and 29.4% and 29.0% for the years ended December 31, 2017 and 2016, respectively, and products manufactured by JUUL Labs represented approximately 42.2% and 1.0% of our net sales in the three-month periods ended March 31, 2018 and 2017, respectively, and 11.4% and 4.5% for the years ended December 31, 2017 and 2016, respectively. A decline in sales of any of our key suppliers’ products, whether due to decreases in supply of, or demand for their products, termination of our agreements with them, or otherwise, could have a material adverse impact on our sales and earnings and adversely affect our business.

 

We may be unable to identify or contract with new suppliers in the event of a disruption to our supply.

 

In the event of a disruption to our supply of products, we would have to identify new suppliers that can meet our needs. Only a limited number of suppliers may have the ability to produce certain products we sell at the volumes we need, and it could be costly or time-consuming to locate and approve such alternative sources. Moreover, it may be difficult or costly to find suppliers to produce small volumes of products in the event we are looking only to supplement our current supply as suppliers may impose minimum order requirements. In addition, we may be unable to negotiate pricing or other terms with our existing or new suppliers as favorable as those we currently enjoy. We cannot guarantee that a failure to adequately replace or supplement our existing suppliers would not have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.

 

Demand for the products we distribute could decrease if the suppliers of these products were to sell a substantial amount of goods directly to consumers in the sectors we serve.

 

Retailers and consumers of vaporization products and consumption accessories have historically purchased certain amounts of these products directly from suppliers. If our customers were to increase their purchases of products directly from suppliers, or if suppliers seek to increase their efforts to sell such products directly to consumers, we could experience a significant decrease in our business, results of operations and financial condition. These, or other developments that remove us from, or limit our role in, the distribution chain, may harm our competitive position in the marketplace and reduce our sales and earnings and adversely affect our business.

 

We are vulnerable to third party transportation risks.

 

We depend on fast and efficient shipping services to distribute our products. Any prolonged disruption of these services may have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations. Rising costs associated with transportation services used by us to receive or deliver our products, including tariffs, may also have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

  

21

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

We do not have long-term agreements or guaranteed price or delivery arrangements with most of our suppliers. The loss of a significant supplier would require us to rely more heavily on our other existing suppliers or to develop relationships with new suppliers. Such a loss may have an adverse effect on our product offerings and our business.

 

While we have exclusive long-term distribution agreements with certain of our suppliers, consistent with industry practice, we do not have guaranteed price or delivery arrangements with most of our suppliers. We generally make our purchases through purchase orders. As a result, we have experienced and may in the future experience inventory shortages or price increases on certain products. Furthermore, our industry occasionally experiences significant product supply shortages, and we sometimes experience customer order backlogs due to the inability of certain suppliers to make available to us certain products as needed. We cannot assure you that suppliers will maintain an adequate inventory of products to fulfill our orders on a timely basis, or at all, or that we will be able to obtain particular products on favorable terms, or at all. Additionally, we cannot assure you that product lines currently offered by suppliers will continue to be available to us. A decline in the supply or continued availability of the products of our suppliers, or a significant increase in the price of those products, could reduce our sales and negatively affect our operating results.

 

In addition, some of our suppliers have the ability to terminate their relationships with us at any time, or to decide to sell, or increase their sales of, their products through other resellers or channels. Although we believe there are numerous suppliers with the capacity to supply the products we distribute, the loss of one or more of our major suppliers could have an adverse effect on our product offerings and our business. Such a loss would require us to rely more heavily on our other existing suppliers, develop relationships with new suppliers or undertake our own manufacturing, which may cause us to pay higher prices for products due to, among other things, a loss of volume discount benefits currently obtained from our major suppliers. Any termination, interruption or adverse modification of our relationship with a key supplier or a significant number of other suppliers would likely adversely affect our operating income, cash flow and future prospects.

 

Our payments system and the payment systems of our customers depend on third-party providers and are subject to evolving laws and regulations.

 

We and our retail customers have engaged third-party service providers to perform underlying credit and debit card processing, currency exchange, identity verification and fraud analysis services. If these service providers do not perform adequately or if our relationships, or the relationships of our retail customers with these service providers were to terminate, our ability or the ability of such retail customers to process payments could be adversely affected and our business would be harmed.

 

The laws and regulations related to payments are complex and are potentially impacted by tensions between federal and state treatment of the vaporization, tobacco, nicotine and cannabis industries. These laws and regulations also vary across different jurisdictions in the United States, Canada and globally. As a result, we are required to spend significant time and effort to comply with those laws and regulations. Any failure or claim of our failure to comply, or any failure by our third-party service providers to comply, could cost us substantial resources, could result in liabilities, or could force us to stop offering our customers the ability to pay with credit cards, debit cards and bank transfers. As we expand the availability of these payment methods or offer new payment methods to our customers in the future, we may become subject to additional regulations and compliance requirements.

 

Further, through our agreement with our third-party credit card processors, we are indirectly subject to payment card association operating rules and certification requirements, including restrictions on product mix and the Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard, 02 PCIDSS. We also are subject to rules governing electronic funds transfers. Any change in these rules and requirements could make it difficult or impossible for us to comply.

 

Due to our acceptance of credit cards in our e-commerce business, we are subject to the Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard, designed to protect the information of credit card users. We have had a security incident in the past which we do not believe reached the level of a breach which would be reportable under state laws or our other obligations, however there can be no assurance that our determination was correct. In the event our determination is challenged and found to have been incorrect, we may be subject to claims by one or more state attorneys general, federal regulators, or private plaintiffs and we may additional be subject to claims or fines from credit associations.

 

We are subject to certain U.S. federal regulations relating to cash reporting.

 

The U.S. Bank Secrecy Act, enforced by the Financial Crimes Enforcement Network (“FinCEN”), a division of the U.S. Department of the Treasury, requires a party in trade or business to file with the U.S. Internal Revenue Service (the “IRS”) a Form 8300 report within 15 days of receiving a cash payment of over $10,000. While we receive very few cash payments for the products we sell, if we fail to comply with these laws and regulations, the imposition of a substantial penalty could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.

  

22

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

If we fail to maintain proper inventory levels, our business could be harmed.

 

We purchase key products from suppliers prior to the time we receive purchase orders from customers. We do this to minimize purchasing costs, the time necessary to fill customer orders, and the risk of non-delivery. However, we may be unable to sell the products we have purchased in advance. Inventory levels in excess of customer demand may result in inventory write-downs, and the sale of excess inventory at discounted prices could significantly impair our brand image and have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition. Conversely, if we underestimate demand for our products or if we fail to acquire the products that we require at the time we need them, we may experience inventory shortages. Inventory shortages might delay shipments to customers, reduce revenue, negatively impact customer relationships and diminish brand loyalty, which in turn could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.

 

Certain of our suppliers provide us with incentives and other assistance that reduce our operating costs, and any decline in these incentives and other assistance could materially harm our operating results.

 

Certain of our suppliers, including PAX Labs, provide us with trade credit or substantial incentives in the form of discounts, credits and cooperative advertising, among other benefits. We have agreements with many of our suppliers under which they provide us, or they have otherwise consistently provided us, with market price discounts to subsidize portions of our advertising, marketing and distribution costs based upon the amount of coverage we give to their respective products in our catalogs or other advertising and marketing mediums. Any termination or interruption of our relationships with one or more of these suppliers, or modification of the terms or discontinuance of our agreements or arrangements with these suppliers, could adversely affect our operating income and cash flow. For example, the incentives we receive from a particular supplier may be impacted by a number of events outside of our control, including acquisitions, divestitures, management changes or economic pressures affecting such supplier, any of which could materially affect or eliminate the incentives we receive from such supplier.

 

Our success is dependent in part upon our ability to distribute popular products from new suppliers, as well as the ability of our existing suppliers to develop and market products that meet changes in market demand or regulatory requirements.

 

Many of the products we sell are generally subject to rapid changes in marketplace demand or regulatory requirements. Our success is dependent, in part, upon the ability of our suppliers to develop and market products that meet these changes. Our success is also dependent on our ability to develop relationships with and sell products from new suppliers that address these changes in market demand or regulatory requirements. To the extent products that address recent changes are not available to us, or are not available to us in sufficient quantities or on acceptable terms, we could encounter increased competition, which would likely adversely affect our business, results of operations and financial condition.

 

We may not be able to maintain existing supplier relationships or exclusive distributor status with our suppliers, which may affect our ability to offer a broad selection of products at competitive prices and negatively impact our results of operations.

 

We purchase products for resale both directly from manufacturers and, on occasion, from other sources, all of whom we consider our suppliers. We also maintain certain exclusive relationships with several of our suppliers, which provide us with exclusive rights to distribute their products in certain geographic areas or sales channels, preferred pricing, training, support, preferred access and other significant benefits. In some cases, suppliers require us to meet certain minimum standards in order to retain these qualifications and our exclusive distributor status. If we do not maintain our existing relationships or exclusive distributor status, or if we fail to build new relationships with suppliers on acceptable terms, including our exclusive distribution rights, favorable pricing, manufacturer incentives or reseller qualifications, we may not be able to offer a broad selection of products or continue to offer products from these suppliers at competitive prices, or at all. From time to time, suppliers may be acquired by other companies, terminate our right to sell some or all of their products, modify or terminate our exclusive distributor or qualification status, change the applicable terms and conditions of sale or reduce or discontinue the incentives or supplier consideration that they offer us. Any termination or reduction of our exclusive distributor status with any of our major suppliers, or our failure to build new exclusive supplier relationships, could have a negative impact on our operating results. Further, some products may be subject to allocation by the supplier, which could limit the number of units of those products that are available to us and may adversely affect our operating results.

 

23

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

We do not have long-term contracts with most of our customers. The agreements that we do have generally do not commit our customers to any minimum purchase volume. The loss of a significant customer may have a material adverse effect on us.

 

Our customers generally place orders on an as-needed basis. Consistent with industry practice, we do not have long-term contracts with most of our customers, other than certain retail chains in Canada. In addition, our agreements generally do not commit our customers to any minimum purchase volume. Accordingly, we are exposed to risks from potential adverse financial conditions in the vaporization products and consumption accessories industry, a potentially shifting legal landscape, the general economy, a competitive landscape, a changing technological landscape or changing customer needs or any other change that may affect the demand for our products. We cannot assure you that our customers will continue to place orders with us in similar volumes, on the same terms, or at all. Our customers may terminate their relationships with us or reduce their purchasing volume at any time. Our ten largest customers, in the aggregate, represented approximately 12.9% and 11.5% of our net sales for the three-month periods ended March 31, 2018 and 2017, respectively, and 10.9% and 11.4% for the years ended December 31, 2017 and 2016, respectively. The loss of a significant number of customers, or a substantial decrease in a significant customer’s orders, may have an adverse effect on our revenue.

 

Changes in our customer, product or competition mix could cause our product margin to fluctuate.

 

From time to time, we may experience changes in our customer mix, our product mix or our competition mix. Changes in our customer mix may result from geographic expansion or contractions, legislative or enforcement priority changes affecting the products we distribute, selling activities within current geographic markets and targeted selling activities to new customer sectors. Changes in our product mix may result from marketing activities to existing customers, the needs communicated to us from existing and prospective customers and from legislative changes. Changes in our competition mix may result from well-financed competitors entering into our business segment. If customer demand for lower-margin products increases and demand for higher-margin products decreases, our business, results of operations and financial condition may suffer.

 

Because a majority of our revenues are derived from sales to consumers indirectly through third-party retailers who operate traditional brick-and-mortar locations, the shift of sales to more online retail business could harm our market share and our revenues in certain sectors.

 

Our current B2B model includes selling our products through third-party retailers. These third-party retailers operate physical brick-and-mortar locations to sell our product to consumers. The current shift in purchasing demographics due to the changing preferences of consumers who are moving from in-store purchases of goods to online purchases creates the additional risks of our current revenue streams being impacted negatively and an overall decrease of market share.

 

Further, laws in some jurisdictions in which we operate could make collection of receivables difficult, time consuming or expensive. We generally do not require collateral in support of our trade receivables. While we maintain reserves for expected credit losses, we cannot assure these reserves will be sufficient to meet write-offs of uncollectible receivables or that our losses from such receivables will be consistent with our historical performance. Significant write-offs may affect our business, results of operations and financial condition. As we begin selling our products indirectly through large retailers, customer credit risks will expand.

 

Our ability to distribute certain licensed brands and to use or license certain trademarks may be terminated or not renewed.

 

We are reliant upon brand recognition in the markets in which we compete, as the industry is characterized by a high degree of brand loyalty and a reluctance of consumers to switch to substitute or unrecognizable brands. Some of the brands we distribute and the trademarks under which products are sold are licensed for a fixed period of time with regard to specified markets.

 

In the event that the licenses to use the brand names and trademarks for the products we distribute are terminated or are not renewed after the end of the term, there is no guarantee we or our suppliers will be able to find suitable replacement brands or trademarks, or that if a replacement is found, that it will be on favorable terms. Any loss in brand-name appeal to our existing customers as a result of the lapse or termination of our licenses or the licenses of our suppliers could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.

 

24

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

We may not be successful in maintaining the consumer brand recognition and loyalty of our products.

 

We compete in a market that relies on innovation and the ability to react to evolving consumer preferences. The vaporization products and consumption accessories industry, as well as the nicotine industries, are subject to changing consumer trends, demands and preferences. Therefore, products once favored may, over time, become disfavored by consumers or no longer perceived as the best option. Consumers in the vaporizer market have demonstrated a degree of brand loyalty, but suppliers must continue to adapt their products in order to maintain their status among customers as the market evolves. Our continued success depends in part on our ability and our supplier’s ability to continue to differentiate the brand names we represent, own or license and maintain similarly high levels of recognition with target consumers. Trends within the vaporization products and consumption accessories industry change often and our failure to anticipate, identify or react to changes in these trends could, among other things, lead to reduced demand for our products. Factors that may affect consumer perception of our products include health trends and attention to health concerns associated with tobacco, nicotine, herbs, cannabis or other materials used with vaporizers, price-sensitivity in the presence of competitors’ products or substitute products and trends in favor of new vaporization products or technology consumption accessories products that are currently being researched and produced by participants in our industry. For example, in recent years, we have witnessed a shift in consumer purchases from vaporizers designed for dry herbs to those utilizing cartridges containing liquids or wax type concentrates. A failure to react to similar trends in the future could enable our competitors to grow or establish their brands’ market share in these categories before we have a chance to respond.

 

Regulations may be amended or enacted in the future that would make it more difficult to appeal to consumers or to leverage the brands that we distribute, own or license. Furthermore, even if we are able to continue to distinguish our products, there can be no assurance that the sales, marketing and distribution efforts of our competitors will not be successful in persuading consumers of our products to switch to their products. Some of our competitors have greater access to resources than we do, which better positions them to conduct market research in relation to branding strategies or costly marketing campaigns. Any loss of consumer brand loyalty to our products or in our ability to effectively brand our products in a recognizable way will have a material effect on our ability to continue to sell our products and maintain our market share, which could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.

 

We may not be able to establish sustainable relationships with large retailers or national chains.

 

We expect to increase sales volume by establishing relationships with large retailers and national chains, particularly in Canada. In connection therewith, we may have to pay slotting fees based on the number of stores in which our products will be carried. We may not be able to develop these relationships or continue to maintain relationships with large retailers or national chains. Our inability to develop and sustain relationships with large retailers and national chains may impede our ability to develop brand and product recognition and increase sales volume and, ultimately, require us to continue to rely on local and more fragmented sales channels, which may have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition. In addition, if we are unable to develop or maintain relationships with large retailers and national chains and such large retailers or national chains take market share from the smaller local and more fragmented sales channels, our business, results of operations and financial condition will be adversely impacted.

 

New products face intense media attention and public pressure.

 

Many of our vaporizers and other products are new to the marketplace. Since their introduction, certain members of the media, politicians, government regulators and advocacy groups, including independent doctors, have called for an outright ban of all electronic cigarettes pending regulatory review and a further demonstration of safety. A ban of this type would likely have the effect of terminating our sales and marketing efforts of certain products in jurisdictions in which we may currently market or have plans to market such products. Such a ban would also likely cause public confusion as to which vaporizer products are the subject of bans, which confusion could also have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.

 

Our success depends, in part, on the quality and safety of our products, as well as the perception of quality and safety in the vaporization products and consumption accessories industry generally.

 

Our success depends, in part, on the quality and safety of the products we sell, including manufacturing issues and unforeseen product misuse. Even a single incident of product defect or misuse, whether relating to products sold by us or just to our industry generally, could result in significant harm to our reputation. If any of our products are found to be, or are perceived to be, defective or unsafe, or if they otherwise fail to meet our customers’ standards, our relationship with our customers could suffer, our reputation or the appeal of our brands could be diminished, and we could lose market share and or become subject to liability claims, any of which could result in a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.

 

25

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Damage to our reputation, or that of any of our key suppliers or their brands, could affect our business performance.

 

The success of our business depends in part upon the positive image that consumers have of the third-party brands we distribute. Incidents, publicity or events arising accidentally or through deliberate third-party action that harm the integrity or consumer support of our products could affect the demand for our products. Unfavorable media, whether accurate or not, related to our industry, to us, to our customers, or to the products we sell could negatively affect our corporate reputation, stock price, ability to attract high-quality talent, or the performance of our business. Negative publicity or commentary on social media outlets also could cause consumers to react rapidly by avoiding our products and brands or by choosing brands offered by our competitors, which could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.

 

We are subject to substantial and increasing regulation regarding the tobacco industry.

 

The tobacco industry, of which some of our vaporizer products are deemed to be a part, has been under public scrutiny for many years. Industry critics include special interest groups, the U.S. Surgeon General and many legislators and regulators at the state, federal and provincial levels. A wide variety of federal, state or provincial and local laws limit the advertising, sale and use of tobacco and these laws have proliferated in recent years. Together with changing public attitudes towards tobacco and nicotine consumption, the constant expansion of regulations has been a major cause of the overall decline in the consumption of tobacco products since the early 1970s. These regulations relate to, among other things, the importation of tobacco products and shipping throughout the North American market, increases in the minimum age to purchase tobacco products, imposition of taxes, sampling and advertising bans or restrictions, flavor bans or restrictions, ingredient and constituent disclosure requirements and media campaigns and restrictions on where tobacco can be consumed. Additional restrictions may be legislatively imposed or agreed to in the future. These limitations may make it difficult for us to maintain the sales levels of our regulated vaporizer products.

 

Moreover, the current trend is toward increasing regulation of the tobacco industry, which is likely to differ between the various U.S. states and Canadian provinces in which we currently conduct business. Extensive and inconsistent regulation by multiple states or provinces and at different governmental levels could prove to be particularly disruptive to our business as well, as we may be unable to accommodate such regulations in a cost-effective manner that will allow us to continue to compete in an economically-viable way. Tobacco regulations are often introduced without the tobacco industry’s input and have been a significant reason behind reduced sales volumes and increased illicit trade in the tobacco industry. Such regulations also may impact our sales volumes to the extent they apply to the vaporizer products we sell.

 

On June 22, 2009, the Family Smoking Prevention and Tobacco Control Act (the “Tobacco Control Act”) authorized the United States Food and Drug Administration (the “FDA”) to regulate the tobacco industry and amended the Federal Cigarette Labeling and Advertising Act, which governs how cigarettes can be advertised and marketed. In addition to the FDA, we are subject to regulation by numerous other federal agencies, including the Federal Trade Commission, the Alcohol and Tobacco Tax and Trade Bureau, the Federal Communications Commission, the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, the U.S. Department of Agriculture, U.S. Customs and Border Protection and the U.S. Center for Disease Control and Prevention’s Office on Smoking and Health. There have also been adverse legislative and political decisions and other unfavorable developments concerning cigarette smoking and the tobacco industry, which have received widespread public attention. There can be no assurance as to the ultimate content, timing or effect of any regulation of tobacco or nicotine products by governmental bodies, nor can there be any assurance that potential corresponding declines in demand resulting from negative media attention would not have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.

 

26

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

There is uncertainty related to the regulation of vaporization products and certain other consumption accessories. Increased regulatory compliance burdens could have a material adverse impact on our business development efforts and our operations.

 

United States

 

There is uncertainty regarding whether, in what circumstances, how and when the FDA will seek to enforce regulations under the Tobacco Control Act relative to vaporizer hardware and accessories that can be used to vaporize cannabis and other material, including electronic cigarettes, rolling papers and glassware, in light of the potential for dual use with tobacco.

 

The Tobacco Control Act, enacted in 2009, established, by statute, that the FDA has oversight over specific types of tobacco products (cigarettes, cigarette tobacco, roll-your-own (“RYO”) tobacco, and smokeless tobacco) and granted the FDA the authority to “deem” other types of tobacco products as subject to the statutory requirements. In addition to establishing authority, defining key terminology, and setting adulteration and misbranding standards, the Tobacco Control Act established authority over tobacco products in a number of areas such as: submission of health information to the FDA; registration with the FDA; requirements prior to marketing products; good manufacturing practice requirements; tobacco product standards; notification, recall, corrections, and removals; records and reports; marketing considerations and restrictions; post-market surveillance and studies; labeling and warnings; and recordkeeping and tracking.

 

In December 2010, the U.S. Court of Appeals for the D.C. Circuit held that the FDA is permitted to regulate vaporizer devices containing tobacco-derived nicotine as “tobacco products” under the Tobacco Control Act.

 

In a final rule effective August 8, 2016, the FDA “deemed” all products that meet the Tobacco Control Act’s definition of “tobacco product,” including components and parts but excluding accessories of the newly deemed products, to be subjected to the tobacco control requirements of the Food, Drug, and Cosmetic Act and the FDA’s implementing regulations. This includes among other things: products such as electronic cigarettes, electronic cigars, electronic hookahs, vape pens, vaporizers and e-liquids and their components or parts (such as tanks, coils and batteries) (Electronic Nicotine Delivery Systems or “ENDS”).

 

The FDA’s interpretation of components and parts of a tobacco product includes any assembly of materials intended or reasonably expected to be used with or for the human consumption of a tobacco product.

 

In a 2017 decision of the D.C. Circuit, the court upheld the FDA’s authority to regulate ENDS even though they do not actually contain tobacco, and even if the products could be used with nicotine-free e-liquids.

 

The Tobacco Control Act and implementing regulations restrict the way tobacco product manufacturers, retailers, and distributors can advertise and promote tobacco products, including a prohibition against free samples or the use of vending machines, requirements for presentation of warning information, and age verification of purchasers.

 

Newly-deemed tobacco products are also subject to the other requirements of the Tobacco Control Act, such as that they not be adulterated or misbranded. The FDA has been directed under the Tobacco Control Act to establish specific good manufacturing practice (“GMP”) regulations for tobacco products, and could do so in the future, which could have a material adverse impact on the ability of some of our suppliers to manufacture, and the cost to manufacture, certain of our products. Even in the absence of specific GMP regulations, a facility’s failure to maintain sanitary conditions or to prevent contamination of products could result in the FDA deeming the products produced there adulterated.

 

In light of the laws noted above, we anticipate that authorizations will be necessary in order for us to continue our distribution of certain vaporizer hardware and accessories that can be used to vaporize cannabis and other material. Tobacco Control Act compliance dates vary depending upon type of application submitted, but all newly-deemed products that were marketed before August 8, 2016 will require an application no later than August 8, 2021, for “combustible” products (e.g. cigar and pipe) and August 8, 2022, for “non-combustible” products (e.g. vapor products) with the exception of “grandfathered” products (products in commerce as of February 15, 2007) that are already authorized, unless the FDA grants extensions to these compliance periods. Since there were virtually no e-liquid, e-cigarettes or other vaping products on the market as of February 15, 2007, there is no way to utilize the less onerous substantial equivalence or substantial equivalence exemption pathways that traditional tobacco corporations can utilize. Products entering the market after August 8, 2016 are not covered by the FDA compliance policy described above, and will be subject to enforcement if marketed without authorization.

 

We expect our suppliers to timely file for the appropriate authorizations to allow us to sell their products in the U.S. We have no assurances that the outcome of such processes will result in these products receiving marketing authorizations from the FDA. If the FDA establishes regulatory processes that our suppliers are unable or unwilling to comply with, our business, results of operations, financial condition and prospects could be adversely affected.

 

27

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

The anticipated costs to our suppliers of complying with future FDA regulations will be dependent on the rules issued by the FDA, the timing and clarity of any new rules or guidance documents accompanying these rules, the reliability and simplicity (or complexity) of the electronic systems utilized by the FDA for information and reports to be submitted, and the details required by the FDA for such information and reports with respect to each regulated product (which have yet to be issued by the FDA). Any failure to comply with existing or new FDA regulatory requirements could result in significant financial penalties to us or our suppliers, which could ultimately have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations, financial condition and ability to market and sell our products. Compliance and related costs could be substantial and could significantly increase the costs of operating in the vaporization products and certain other consumption accessories markets.

 

In addition, failure to comply with the Tobacco Control Act and with FDA regulatory requirements could result in litigation, criminal convictions or significant financial penalties and could impair our ability to market and sell some of our vaporizer products. At present, we are not able to predict whether the Tobacco Control Act will impact our business to a greater degree than competitors in the industry, thus affecting our competitive position.

 

It has not been conclusively determined whether the Prevent All Cigarette Trafficking Act or the Federal Cigarette Labeling and Advertising Act currently apply to vaporization products and certain other consumption accessories. At the state level, over 25 states have implemented statewide regulations that prohibit vaping in public places. Some cities have also implemented more restrictive measures than their state counterparts, such as San Francisco, which in June 2018, approved a new ban on the sale of flavored tobacco products, including vaping liquids and menthol cigarettes. There may, in the future, also be increased regulation of additives in smokeless products and internet sales of vaporization products and certain other consumption accessories. The application of either or both of these federal laws, and of any new laws or regulations which may be adopted in the future at a state, provincial or local level, to vaporization products, consumption accessories or such additives could result in additional expenses and require us to change our advertising and labeling, and methods of marketing and distribution of our products, any of which could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.

 

Canada

 

On May 23, 2018, the Tobacco and Vaping Products Act (“TVPA”) became effective, and now governs the manufacture, sale, labeling and promotion of vaping products sold in Canada. The TVPA replaced the former Tobacco Act (Canada) and establishes a legislative framework that applies to vaping products, whether or not they contain nicotine. While the TVPA prescribes high-level requirements in relation to vaping products, the Government of Canada has yet to implement regulations that will ultimately address the standards, testing methods, reporting requirements, packaging and labeling requirements, and other obligations with which vaping products will be required to comply. Accordingly, absent any such regulations, there is a lack of visibility as to the specific compliance regime that will apply to vaping products in the future. As such, there can be no assurance that we will initially be in total compliance, remain competitive, or financially able to meet future requirements administered pursuant to the TVPA.

 

Prior to the TVPA becoming effective, Health Canada had taken the position that electronic smoking products (i.e., electronic products for the vaporization and administration of inhaled doses of nicotine, including electronic cigarettes, cigars, cigarillos and pipes, as well as cartridges of nicotine solutions and related products) fell within the scope of the Food and Drugs Act (Canada) (“Food and Drugs Act”). On this basis, Health Canada has advised that all of these products require market authorization prior to being imported, advertised or sold in Canada. Market authorization is generally granted by Health Canada following successful review of scientific evidence demonstrating safety, quality and efficacy with respect to the intended purpose of the health product. To date, no electronic smoking product with nicotine has been authorized for sale by Health Canada. According to Health Canada regulations, it is not permissible to import, advertise or sell electronic smoking products without the appropriate authorizations, and persons who violate these regulations are subject to enforcement repercussions, including but not limited to seizure of the products.

 

It is not presently clear what implications the enactment of the TVPA will have for Health Canada’s role in authorizing vaping products, or on the degree to which it will remain subject to the provisions of Food and Drugs Act. Currently, vaping products with therapeutic or health-related claims are subject to the Food and Drugs Act and related regulations. Until regulations are published and enacted pursuant to the TVPA, a significant degree of uncertainty will remain with respect to compliance landscape for vaping products.

 

28

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Some of the products we sell contain nicotine, which is considered to be a highly-addictive substance, or other chemicals that some jurisdictions have determined to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

 

Some of our products, like the JUUL nicotine vaporizers, contain nicotine, a chemical that is considered to be highly addictive. The Tobacco Control Act empowers the FDA to regulate the amount of nicotine found in tobacco products, but not to require the reduction of nicotine yields of a tobacco product to zero. In addition, the State of California has determined that some chemicals found in certain vaporizers cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Federal, state or provincial regulations, whether of nicotine levels or other product attributes, may require us to reformulate, recall and/or discontinue certain of the products we may sell from time to time, which may have a material adverse effect on our ability to market our products and have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.

 

The FDA has recently expressed growing concern about the popularity of JUUL products among youth, and regulatory actions may impact our ability to sell these products in the U.S.

 

On April 24, 2018, the FDA issued a letter to JUUL Labs requesting documents relating to marketing practices and research on marketing, effects of product design, public health impact, and adverse experiences and complaints related to JUUL products. All information for this request was to be received by the FDA no later than June 19, 2018. FDA Commissioner Scott Gottlieb, M.D. issued an FDA statement on April 24, 2018 announcing that the FDA has been conducting a large-scale, undercover nationwide action to crack down on the sale of e-cigarettes, specifically JUUL products, to minors at both brick-and-mortar and online retailers. The FDA indicated that this action had already revealed numerous violations of the law, and that as a result of these and other identified instances of the sale of JUUL products to minors, the FDA was issuing 40 Warning Letters. The FDA also advised that it had contacted eBay regarding concerns over listings of JUUL products on its website. As JUUL Labs is one of our key suppliers, any regulatory action by the FDA that affects the sale or distribution of such products may have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.

 

Significant increases in state and local regulation of our vaporizer products have been proposed or enacted and are likely to continue to be proposed or enacted in numerous jurisdictions.

 

There has been increasing activity on the state, provincial and local levels with respect to scrutiny of vaporizer products. State and local governmental bodies across the U.S. have indicated that vaporization products and certain other consumption accessories may become subject to new laws and regulations at the state and local levels. For example, in January 2015, the California Department of Health declared electronic cigarettes and certain other vaporizer products a health threat that should be strictly regulated like tobacco products. Further, some states and cities, including the State of Iowa, have enacted regulations that require retailers to obtain a tobacco retail license in order to sell electronic cigarettes and vaporizer products. Many states, provinces and some cities have passed laws restricting the sale of electronic cigarettes and certain other vaporizer products. If one or more states or provinces from which we generate or anticipate generating significant sales of vaporizer products bring actions to prevent us from selling our vaporizer products unless we obtain certain licenses, approvals or permits, and if we are not able to obtain the necessary licenses, approvals or permits for financial reasons or otherwise and/or any such license, approval or permit is determined to be overly burdensome to us, then we may be required to cease sales and distribution of our products to those states, which could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.

 

Certain states, provinces and cities have already restricted the use of electronic cigarettes and vaporizer products in smoke-free venues. Additional city, state, provincial or federal regulators, municipalities, local governments and private industry may enact rules and regulations restricting the use of electronic cigarettes and vaporizer products in those same places where cigarettes cannot be smoked. Because of these restrictions, our customers may reduce or otherwise cease using our vaporization products or certain other consumption accessories, which could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.

 

Certain provinces of Canada have passed or propose to pass legislation which will restrict the extent to which e-cigarettes, e-liquid and other vaping products may be displayed or sold. The Electronic Cigarettes Act (Ontario), for example, restricts the sale of e-cigarettes, e-liquid and other vaping products in stores that sell tobacco products. Additionally, the Electronic Cigarettes Act (Ontario) restricts the display of e-cigarettes, e-liquid and other vaping products from outside a place in which such products are sold. These regulations and future regulations could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.

 

29

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Our business depends partly on continued purchases by businesses and individuals selling or using cannabis pursuant to state laws in the United States or Canadian and provincial laws.

 

Because some of our B2C customers use some of the items that we sell to consume cannabis and some of our B2B customers operate in the legal national and state cannabis industry, our business depends partly on federal, state, provincial and local laws, regulations, guidelines and enforcement pertaining to cannabis. In both the United States and Canada, those factors are in flux.

 

United States

 

Currently, in the United States, 31 states and the District of Columbia permit some form of whole-plant cannabis cultivation, sales, and use for certain medical purposes (“medical states”). Nine of those states and the District of Columbia have also legalized cannabis for adults for non-medical purposes (sometime referred to as recreational use). Fifteen additional states have legalized low-tetrahydrocannabinol (“THC”) / high-cannabidiol (“CBD”) extracts for select medical conditions (“CBD states”). Several CBD states are considering legalizing medical cannabis, and several medical states may extend legalization to adult use.

 

The states’ cannabis programs have proliferated and grown even though the cultivation, sale, and use of cannabis is considered illegal under U.S. federal law. Under the CSA, cannabis is a Schedule I drug, meaning that the Drug Enforcement Administration recognizes no accepted medical use for cannabis, and the substance is considered illegal under federal law.

 

In an effort to provide guidance to U.S. Attorneys’ offices regarding the enforcement priorities associated with cannabis in the U.S., the U.S. Department of Justice (the “DOJ”) has issued a series of memoranda detailing its suggested enforcement approach. During the administration of former President Obama, each memorandum acknowledged the DOJ’s authority to enforce the CSA in the face of state laws, but noted that the DOJ was more committed to using its limited investigative and prosecutorial resources to address the most significant threats associated with cannabis in the most effective, consistent, and rational way.

 

On August 29, 2013, the DOJ issued what came to be called the “Cole Memorandum,” which gave U.S. Attorneys the discretion not to prosecute federal cannabis cases that were otherwise compliant with applicable state law that had legalized medical or adult-use cannabis and that have implemented strong regulatory systems to control the cultivation, production, and distribution of cannabis. The eight federal priorities were preventing:

 

  The distribution of cannabis to minors;

 

  Revenue from the sale of cannabis from going to criminal enterprises, gangs, and cartels;

 

  The diversion of cannabis from states where it is legal under state law in some form to other states;

 

  State-authorized cannabis activities from being used as a cover or pretext for the trafficking of other illegal drugs or other illegal activity;

 

  Violence and the use of firearms in the cultivation and distribution of cannabis;

 

  Drugged driving and exacerbation of other adverse public health consequences associated with cannabis use;

 

  Growing cannabis on public lands and the attendant public safety and environmental dangers posed by cannabis production on public lands; and

 

  Cannabis possession or use on federal property.

 

Accordingly, the Cole Memorandum provided lawful cannabis-related enterprises a tacit federal go-ahead in states with legal cannabis programs, provided that the state had adopted and was enforcing strict regulations and oversight of the medical or adult-use cannabis program in.

 

30

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

In March 2017, the newly-appointed Attorney General Jeff Sessions, while acknowledging limited federal resources and that much of the Cole Memorandum had merit, asserted that the previous administration had not implemented enforcement of the Cole Memorandum effectively. On January 4, 2018, however, Attorney General Jeff Sessions issued a memorandum (the “Sessions Memorandum”) that rescinded previous DOJ guidance on the state-legal cannabis industry, including the Cole Memorandum. Attorney General Sessions wrote that the previous guidance on cannabis law enforcement was unnecessary and that U.S. federal prosecutors should adhere to traditional principles of federal prosecution in determining whether to pursue or decline to pursue the cannabis-related industry. In particular, he referred to the U.S. Attorneys’ Manual, section 9-27.230, “Initiating and Declining Charges,” which directs each individual U.S. Attorney to focus on factors such as (1) the nature and seriousness of the offense, (2) the deterrent effect of prosecution, and (3) the personal culpability and history of the target. Similar to the principles outlined in the Cole Memorandum, in recognition of the limited resources of the U.S. federal government, current guidance directs federal prosecutors to focus on those enforcement efforts that are both most deserving of federal attention and are most likely to be handled most effectively at the federal, as opposed to the state level. As a result of the Sessions Memorandum, federal prosecutors may now be free to utilize their prosecutorial discretion to decide whether to prosecute even state-legal adult-use cannabis activities. Most U.S. Attorneys issued no response to the change in guidance. A few U.S. Attorneys have stated that the change will not lead them to prosecute persons or entities acting in compliance with state cannabis laws, while a few have refused to assure states that they will not pursue such prosecutions.

 

Most recently, President Trump promised to support federal legislation that would defer to states that have legalized cannabis (in other words, if a state legalized cannabis, cannabis in that state would not be federally illegal). Although bills that would accomplish that are pending, there is no way to determine if they would pass in Congress or ultimately receive the President’s support.

 

Companies strictly complying with state medical cannabis law are more formally protected against federal enforcement against those activities. Specifically, the Rohrabacher-Blumenauer Amendment to the Omnibus Spending Bill prevents federal prosecutors from using federal funds to impede the implementation of medical cannabis laws enacted at the state level. Courts have interpreted the provision to mean that federal prosecutors may not prosecute entities or individuals strictly complying with state medical cannabis laws. Without further legislative activity, that protection expires on September 23, 2018, although industry observers expect Congress to extend the provision beyond that date. If the protection expired, prosecutors could prosecute illegal activity that occurred during the statute of limitations, even if the protection was pending at the time of the activity. Over the last several years, including during the administration of President Trump, federal prosecutors have not brought cases against entities or persons complying with state medical or adult use laws.

 

Until Congress amends the CSA or the executive branch de-schedules or reschedules cannabis under it, or Congress otherwise enacts laws or regulations that legalize or decriminalize cannabis or at least conduct that is legal under state laws, there is a risk that U.S. federal authorities may enforce current U.S. federal law even in the face of otherwise compliant businesses at the state level. Enforcement of the CSA by U.S. federal authorities could have a direct and adverse impact on our revenue and earnings, and could adversely affect our business, financial condition and results of operations. The risk of strict U.S. federal enforcement of the CSA in light of congressional activity, judicial holdings and stated U.S. federal policy, including enforcement priorities, remains uncertain.

 

Canada

 

On December 13, 2016, the Task Force on Cannabis Legalization and Regulation (the “Task Force”), which was established by the Canadian Federal Government to seek input on the design of a new system to legalize, strictly regulate and restrict access to cannabis, published its report outlining its recommendations. On April 13, 2017, the Government of Canada released Bill C-45, An Act Respecting Cannabis and to Amend the Controlled Drugs and Substances Act, the Criminal Code and other Acts, which proposed the enactment of the Cannabis Act to regulate the production, distribution and sale of cannabis for medical and unqualified adult use.

 

On November 27, 2017, the House of Commons passed Bill C-45 and on June 19, 2018, the Senate passed Bill C-45. On June 20, 2018, Prime Minister Trudeau announced that cannabis for unqualified adult use would be legal by October 17, 2018 but did not disclose the expected date on which the bill would receive royal assent. On June 21, 2018, the Government of Canada announced that Bill C-45 received royal assent.

 

The Cannabis Act is a new regime that has no close precedent in Canadian law. The effect of relevant governmental authorities’ administration, application and enforcement of their respective regulatory regimes and delays in obtaining, or failure to obtain, applicable regulatory approvals which may be required may significantly delay or impact the development of markets, products and sales initiatives and could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

 

31

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Business impact of legal uncertainty

 

Continued development of the cannabis industry is dependent upon continued legislative authorization of cannabis at the state level, as well as the U.S. government’s continued non-enforcement of federal cannabis laws against state law compliant cannabis businesses. Any number of factors could slow or halt progress in this area. Further, progress, while generally expected, is not assured. Some industry observers believe that well-funded interests, including businesses in the alcohol beverage and the pharmaceutical industries, may have a strong economic opposition to the continued legalization of cannabis. The pharmaceutical industry, for example, is well funded with a strong and experienced lobby that eclipses the funding of the medical cannabis movement. Any inroads legalization opponents could make in halting the impending cannabis industry could have a detrimental impact on our business. While there may be ample public support for legislative action, numerous factors impact the legislative process. Any one of those factors could slow or halt the continued legalization and use of cannabis, which would negatively impact our business.

 

As we do business with consumers and businesses involved in the cannabis industry, we cannot guarantee that we will not face any legal enforcement even though we have faced none yet.

 

Our sales into the cannabis industry could in the future trigger legal enforcement if the laws or the federal and state enforcement priorities or choices change. Although the U.S. government has not recently prosecuted any entity or person for sales into the cannabis industry or for selling cannabis paraphernalia, and while we have been involved in our business for several years without facing any actual or threatened legal action under the CSA, we can make no promises about the future.

 

Under U.S. Code Title 21 Section 863, the term “drug paraphernalia” means “any equipment, product or material of any kind which is primarily intended or designed for use in manufacturing, compounding, converting, concealing, producing, processing, preparing, injecting, ingesting, inhaling, or otherwise introducing into the human body a controlled substance.” Any drug paraphernalia involved in any violation of Section 863 can be subject to seizure and forfeiture upon the conviction of a person for such violation. While Section 863(f) contains an exemption for any person authorized by local, state or federal law to manufacture, possess, or distribute such items, and various state cannabis legalization laws expressly or implicitly authorize cannabis paraphernalia, any legal action could force us to cease operations and our investors could lose their entire investment. We believe, however, that such risks are relatively low. We are unaware of such a broad application of the CSA by U.S. federal authorities recently, and we believe that such an attempted application would be uncustomary.

 

If the U.S. federal government were to change its practices, or were to expend its resources investigating and prosecuting providers of equipment that is used by participants in the medical or adult-use cannabis industry, such action could have a materially adverse effect on our operations, our customers, or the sales of our products.

 

In addition, laws and regulations, applied generally, grant government agencies and self-regulatory bodies broad administrative discretion over our activities, including the power to limit or restrict business activities as well as impose additional disclosure requirements on our products and services.

 

While we endeavor to comply with all relevant laws, regulations and guidelines and, to our knowledge, we are in compliance and continue to monitor and assess compliance with all such laws, regulations and guidelines, any failure to comply with the regulatory requirements applicable to our operations may lead to possible sanctions including: the suspension or expulsion from a particular market or jurisdiction or of our key personnel; the imposition of additional or more stringent inspection, testing and reporting requirements; and the imposition of fines and censures. In addition, changes in regulations, more vigorous enforcement thereof or other unanticipated events could require extensive changes to our operations, increase compliance costs or give rise to material liabilities or a revocation of our licenses and other permits, which could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition. Furthermore, governmental authorities may change their administration, application or enforcement procedures at any time, which may adversely impact our ongoing costs relating to regulatory compliance.

 

32

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Because our business is dependent, in part, upon continued market acceptance of cannabis by consumers, any negative trends will adversely affect our business operations.

 

We are dependent on public support, continued market acceptance and the proliferation of consumers in the legal cannabis markets. While we believe that the market and opportunity in the space continue to grow, we cannot predict the future growth rate or size of the market. Any downturns in, or negative outlooks on, the cannabis industry may adversely affect our business and financial condition.

 

We may become involved in regulatory or agency proceedings, investigations and audits.

 

Our business, and the business of the suppliers from which we acquire the products we sell, requires compliance with many laws and regulations. Failure to comply with these laws and regulations could subject us or such suppliers to regulatory or agency proceedings or investigations and could also lead to damage awards, fines and penalties. We or such suppliers may become involved in a number of government or agency proceedings, investigations and audits. The outcome of any regulatory or agency proceedings, investigations, audits, and other contingencies could harm our reputation or the reputations of the brands that we sell, require us to take, or refrain from taking, actions that could harm our operations or require us to pay substantial amounts of money, harming our financial condition. There can be no assurance that any pending or future regulatory or agency proceedings, investigations and audits will not result in substantial costs or a diversion of management’s attention and resources or have a material adverse impact on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

 

There can be no assurance that the legalization of recreational cannabis by the Government of Canada will occur and the legislative framework pertaining to the Canadian adult-use cannabis market is uncertain.

 

On June 30, 2016, the Government of Canada established the Task Force to seek input on the design of a new system to legalize, strictly regulate and restrict access to cannabis. On December 13, 2016, the Task Force, which was established by the Government of Canada to seek input on the design of a new system to legalize, strictly regulate and restrict access to cannabis, published its report outlining its recommendations. On April 13, 2017, the Government of Canada released Bill C-45, which proposes the enactment of the Cannabis Act to regulate the production, distribution and sale of cannabis for medical and unqualified adult use. On November 27, 2017, the House of Commons passed Bill C-45, and on December 20, 2017, the Prime Minister communicated that the Government of Canada intends to legalize cannabis in the summer of 2018, despite previous reports of a July 1, 2018 deadline. On June 7, 2018, Bill C-45 passed the third reading in the Senate with a number of amendments to the language of the Cannabis Act.

 

In total, forty six (46) amendments were proposed by the Senate submitted to the House of Commons on June 13, 2018. The House of Commons rejected 13 amendments proposed by the Senate, including: (i) an amendment which proposed allowing provinces to prohibit home cultivation of marijuana plants; (ii) the prohibition of any marijuana branded promotional materials; (iii) setting limits on the quantities of THC permissible in products; and (iv) the provision of expanded power to require security clearances. The House of Commons effectively accepted the remaining 33 technical amendments made by the Senate and returned the bill to the Senate for a vote. On June 19, 2018, the Senate passed Bill C-45. On June 20, 2018, Prime Minister Trudeau announced that marijuana would be legal by October 17, 2018 but did not disclose the expected date on which the bill would receive royal assent. On June 21, 2018, the Government of Canada announced that Bill C-45 received royal assent. On June 21, 2018, the Government of Canada announced that Bill C-45 received royal assent. Although Bill C-45 has received royal assent, the Cannabis Act is not yet effective, and there can be no assurance that it will come into effect on October 17, 2018 as currently anticipated.

 

The governments of every Canadian province have, to varying degrees, announced proposed regulatory regimes for the distribution and sale of cannabis for recreational purposes within those jurisdictions. There is no guarantee that provincial legislation regulating the distribution and sale of cannabis for recreational purposes will be enacted according to all the terms announced by such provinces, or at all, or that any such legislation, if enacted, will create the growth opportunities that we currently anticipate. While the impact of any new legislative framework for the regulation of the Canadian recreational cannabis market is uncertain, any of the foregoing could result in a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operation.

 

33

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

On March 27, 2018, the Government of Canada introduced the Budget Implementation Bill, 2018, No. 1, (amendments to the Excise Act, 2001 cannabis taxation), which proposed to implement a new framework for taxation of cannabis, the majority of which had been previously published for consultation on November 10, 2017, with some modifications. The proposed rules would effectively place cannabis producers within the existing rules that currently apply excise duties on tobacco, wine and spirits producers under the Excise Act, 2001 (Canada), with modifications as applicable. These rules include a new tax licensing regime for cannabis producers, stamping and marking rules, ongoing reporting requirements, and applicable excise duties payable by licensed cannabis producers on both recreational cannabis products, in addition to goods and services tax/harmonized sales tax. The cannabis excise duty framework is proposed to generally come into force on the date that legal cannabis for non-medical purposes becomes accessible for retail sale under the Cannabis Act, which in intended to be October 17, 2018. The rates of the excise duty for cannabis products delivered in each province and territory and relevant exemptions from the excise tax are still subject to some uncertainty, and will only become known with precision when the law and regulations come into effect.

 

Laws and regulations affecting the cannabis industry are constantly changing.

 

The constant evolution of laws and regulations affecting the cannabis industry could detrimentally affect our operations. As a newer industry, local, state, provincial and federal laws regarding medical and non-medical cannabis are frequently changing to adapt to and address issues as they arise in the industry. Local, state, provincial and federal medical cannabis laws and regulations are broad in scope and subject to substantive change as well as changing interpretations. These changes may require us to incur substantial costs associated with legal and compliance fees and ultimately require us to alter our business plan. Furthermore, violations of these laws, or alleged violations, could disrupt our business and result in a material adverse effect on our operations. In addition, we cannot predict the nature of any future laws, regulations, interpretations or applications, and it is possible that regulations may be enacted in the future that will be directly applicable to our business.

 

We and our customers may have difficulty accessing the service of banks, which may make it difficult for us and for them to sell our products.

 

Financial transactions involving proceeds generated by cannabis-related activities can form the basis for prosecution under the U.S. federal money laundering statutes, unlicensed money transmitter statutes and the U.S. Bank Secrecy Act. Guidance issued by FinCEN clarifies how financial institutions can provide services to cannabis-related businesses consistent with their obligations under the Bank Secrecy Act. Furthermore, since the rescission by U.S. Attorney General Jeff Sessions on January 4, 2018 of the Cole Memorandum, U.S. federal prosecutors have had greater discretion when determining whether to charge institutions or individuals with any of the financial crimes described above based upon cannabis-related activity. As a result, given these risks and their own related disclosure requirements, some banks remain hesitant to offer banking services to cannabis-related businesses. Consequently, those businesses involved in the cannabis industry continue to encounter difficulty establishing banking relationships. While we do not presently have challenges with our banking relationships, should we have an inability to maintain our current bank accounts, or the inability of our more significant customers to maintain their current banking relationships, it would be difficult for us to operate our business, may increase our operating costs, could pose additional operational, logistical and security challenges and could result in our inability to implement our business plan.

 

Increases in tobacco-related taxes have been proposed or enacted and are likely to continue to be proposed or enacted in numerous jurisdictions.

 

Tobacco products, premium cigarette papers and tubes have long been subject to substantial federal, state, provincial and local excise taxes. Such taxes have frequently been increased or proposed to be increased, in some cases significantly, to fund various legislative initiatives or further disincentivize smoking. Since 1986, smokeless products have been subject to federal excise tax. Smokeless products are taxed by weight (in pounds or fractional parts thereof) manufactured or imported.

 

Since the State Children’s Health Insurance Program (“S-CHIP”) reauthorization in early 2009, which utilizes, among other things, taxes on tobacco products to fund health insurance coverage for children, the federal excise tax increases adopted have been substantial and have materially reduced sales in the RYO/make your own (“MYO”) cigarette smoking products market, and also caused volume declines in other markets. Although the RYO/MYO cigarette smoking tobacco and related products market had been one of the fastest growing markets in the tobacco industry in the five years prior to 2009, the reauthorization of S-CHIP increased the federal excise tax on RYO tobacco from $1.10 to $24.78 per pound, and materially reduced the MYO cigarette smoking tobacco market in the U.S. There have not been any increases announced since 2009, but we cannot guarantee that we will not be subject to further increases, nor whether any such increases will affect prices in a way that further deters consumers from purchasing certain of our products and/or affects our net revenues in a way that renders us unable to compete effectively.

 

34

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

In addition to federal excise taxes, every state and certain city and county governments have imposed substantial excise taxes on sales of tobacco products, and many have raised or proposed to raise excise taxes in recent years, including Arkansas, Kansas, Louisiana, Minnesota, Nevada, Ohio, Vermont, Oregon, Indiana, Kentucky and Rhode Island. Tax increases, depending on their parameters, may result in consumers switching between tobacco products or depress overall tobacco consumption, which is likely to result in declines in overall sales volumes in certain of our products.

 

Any future enactment of increases in federal, provincial or state excise taxes on our tobacco products or rulings that certain of our products should be categorized differently for excise tax purposes could adversely affect demand for our products and may result in consumers switching between tobacco products or a depression in overall tobacco consumption, which would have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.

 

If our vaporizer products become subject to increased taxes it could adversely affect our business.

 

Supply to our customers is sensitive to increased sales taxes and economic conditions affecting their disposable income. Discretionary consumer purchases, such as of vaporization products and consumption accessories, may decline during recessionary periods or at other times when disposable income is lower and taxes may be higher.

 

Presently, the sale of vaporization products and certain other consumption accessories is, in certain jurisdictions, subject to federal, state, provincial and local excise taxes like the sale of conventional cigarettes or other tobacco products, all of which generally have high tax rates and have faced significant increases in the amount of taxes collected on their sales. Other jurisdictions are contemplating similar legislation and other restrictions on electronic cigarettes and certain other vaporizer products. Should federal, state, provincial and local governments and/or other taxing authorities begin or continue to impose excise taxes similar to those levied against conventional cigarettes and tobacco products on vaporization products or consumption accessories, it may have a material adverse effect on the demand for those products, as consumers may be unwilling to pay the increased costs, which in turn could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.

 

We may be subject to increasing international control and regulation.

 

The World Health Organization’s Framework Convention on Tobacco Control (“FCTC”) is the first international public health treaty that establishes a global agenda to reduce initiation of tobacco use and regulate tobacco in an effort to encourage tobacco cessation. Over 170 governments worldwide have ratified the FCTC, including Canada. The FCTC has led to increased efforts to reduce the supply of and demand for tobacco products and to encourage governments to further regulate the tobacco industry. The tobacco industry and others expect significant regulatory developments to take place over the next few years, driven principally by the FCTC.

 

If the U.S. becomes a signatory to the FCTC and/or national laws are enacted in the U.S. that reflect the major elements of the FCTC, our business, results of operations and financial condition could be materially and adversely affected. In addition, if any of our vaporization products or consumption accessories become subject to one or more of the significant regulatory initiatives proposed under the FCTC or any other international treaty, our business, results of operations and financial condition may also be materially adversely affected.

 

We currently distribute in select international markets and as part of our strategy, we anticipate further international expansions. Future expansions may subject us to additional or increasing international regulation, either by that country’s legal requirements or through international regulatory regimes, such as the FCTC, to which those countries may be signatories.

 

Liquid vapor products containing nicotine have not been approved for sale in Canada. Some Canadian provinces have restricted sales and marketing of electronic cigarettes, and other provinces are in the process of passing similar legislation. Furthermore, some Canadian provinces have limited the use of vaporizer products and electronic cigarettes in public places. As a result, we are unable to market these products in the relevant parts of Canada. These measures, and any future measures taken to limit the marketing, sale and use of vaporization products or other consumption accessories may have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.

 

To the extent our existing or future products become subject to international regulatory regimes that we are unable to comply with or fail to comply with, they may have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.

 

35

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

We face intense competition and may fail to compete effectively.

 

The vaporization products and consumption accessories industry is characterized by brand recognition and loyalty, with product quality features, price, marketing and packaging constituting the primary methods of competition. Substantial marketing support, merchandising display, competitive pricing and other financial incentives generally are required to introduce a new brand or to improve or maintain a brand’s market position. Our principal competitors may be significantly larger than us and aggressively seek to limit the distribution or sale of our products.

 

Competition in the vaporization products and consumption accessories industry is particularly intense, and the market is highly fragmented. In addition, some competitors still have the ability to access sales channels through the mail, which is no longer available to us and may place us at a competitive disadvantage.

 

“Big tobacco” is continuing to establish its presence in the vaporization products and consumption accessories market. There can be no assurance that our products will be able to compete successfully against these companies or any of our other competitors, some of which have far greater resources, capital, experience, market penetration, sales and distribution channels than us. In addition, if large online retailers such as Amazon establish their presence in the vaporization products and consumption accessories market, our B2C internet business may be harmed. Competitors, including “big tobacco” and large online retailers, may also have more resources than us for advertising, which could have a material adverse effect on our ability to build and maintain market share, and thus have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.

 

Our narrow margins may magnify the impact of variations in operating costs and of adverse or unforeseen events on operating results.

 

We are subject to intense price competition. As a result, our gross and operating margins have historically been narrow, and we expect them to continue to be narrow. Narrow margins magnify the impact of variations in operating costs and of gross margin and of unforeseen adverse events on operating results. Future increases in costs, such as the cost of merchandise, wage levels, shipping rates, import duties and fuel costs, may negatively impact our margins and profitability. We are not always able to raise the sales price to offset cost increases or to effect increased operating efficiencies in response to increasing costs. If we are unable to maintain our margins in the future, it could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition. If we become subject to increased price competition in the future, we cannot assure you that we will not lose market share, that we will not be forced to reduce our prices and further reduce our margins, or that we will be able to compete effectively.

 

Additionally, promotional activities can significantly increase net sales in the periods in which it is initiated and net sales can be adversely impacted in the periods after a promotion. Accordingly, based upon the timing of our marketing and promotional initiatives, we have and may continue to experience significant variability in our month-to-month results, which could affect our ability to formulate strategies that allow us to maintain our market presence across volatile months. If our monthly sales fluctuations obscure our ability to track important trends in our key markets, it may have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.

 

We experience variability in our net sales and net income on a quarterly basis as a result of many factors.

 

We experience variability in our net sales and net income on a quarterly basis as a result of many factors. These factors include:

 

  the relative mix of vaporization products and consumption accessories sold during the period;
     
  the general economic environment and competitive conditions, such as pricing;
     
  the timing of procurement cycles by our customers;
     
  seasonality in customer spending and demand for products we provide;
     
  variability in supplier programs;
     

36

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

  the introduction of new and upgraded products;
     
  changes in prices from our suppliers;
     
  trade show attendance;
     
  promotions;
     
  the loss or consolidation of significant suppliers or customers;
     
  our ability to control costs;
     
  the timing of our capital expenditures;
     
  the condition of our industry in general;
     
  any inability on our part to obtain adequate quantities of products;
     
  delays in the release by suppliers of new products and inventory adjustments;
     
  delays in the release of imported products by customs authorities;
     
  our expenditures on new business ventures and acquisitions;
     
  performance of acquired businesses;
     
  adverse weather conditions that affect supply or customer response;
     
  distribution or shipping to our customers; and
     
  geopolitical events.

 

Our planned operating expenditures each quarter are based on sales forecasts for the quarter. If our sales do not meet expectations in any given quarter, our operating results for the quarter may be materially adversely affected. Our narrow margins may magnify the impact of these factors on our operating results. We believe that period-to-period comparisons of our operating results are not necessarily a good indication of our future performance. In addition, our results in any quarterly period are not necessarily indicative of results to be expected for a full fiscal year. In future quarters, our operating results may be below the expectations of public market analysts or investors and, as a result, the market price of our Class A common stock could be materially adversely affected.

 

Product defects could increase our expenses, damage our reputation or expose us to liability.

 

We may not be able to adequately address product defects. Product defects in vaporizers and other accessories may harm the health or safety of our end-consumers. In addition, remedial efforts could be particularly time-consuming and expensive if product defects are only found after we have sold the defective product in volume. Any actual or perceived defects in our products could result in unsold inventory, product recalls, repairs or replacements, damage to our reputation, increased customer service costs and other expenses, as well as divert management attention and expose us to liabilities. Furthermore, a product liability claim brought against us by our customers or end-consumers could be time-consuming and costly to defend and, if successful, could require us to make significant payments.

 

Contamination of, or damage to, our products could adversely impact sales volume, market share and profitability.

 

Our market position may be affected through the contamination of our products, as well as the material used during the manufacturing processes of the products we sell, or at different points in the entire supply chain. We keep significant amounts of inventory of our products in warehouses and it is possible that this inventory could become contaminated prior to arrival at our premises or during the storage period. If contamination of our inventory or packaged products occurs, whether as a result of a failure in quality control by us or by one of our suppliers, we may incur significant costs in replacing the inventory and recalling products. We may be unable to meet customer demand and may lose customers who purchase alternative brands or products. In addition, consumers may lose confidence in the affected product.

 

37

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Under the terms of our contracts, we generally impose requirements on our suppliers to maintain quality and comply with product specifications and requirements, and with all federal, state and local laws. Our suppliers, however, may not continue to produce products that are consistent with our standards or that are in compliance with applicable laws, and we cannot guarantee that we will be able to identify instances in which our suppliers fail to comply with our standards or applicable laws. A loss of sales volume from a contamination event may occur, and such a loss may affect our ability to supply our current customers and to recapture their business in the event they are forced to switch products or brands, even if on a temporary basis. We may also be subject to legal action as a result of a contamination, which could result in negative publicity and affect our sales. During this time, our competitors may benefit from an increased market share that could be difficult and costly to regain. Such a contamination event could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.

 

We may not have adequate insurance for potential liabilities, including liabilities arising from litigation.

 

In the ordinary course of business, we have and in the future may become the subject of various claims, lawsuits and administrative proceedings seeking damages or other remedies concerning our commercial operations, the products we distribute, our employees and other matters, including potential claims by individuals alleging exposure to hazardous materials as a result of the products we distribute. Some of these claims may relate to the activities of businesses that we have acquired, even though these activities may have occurred prior to our acquisition of the businesses. The products we distribute may contain lithium ion or similar type batteries that can explode or release hazardous substances. In addition, defects in the products we distribute could result in death, personal injury, property damage, pollution, release of hazardous substances or damage to equipment and facilities. Actual or claimed defects in the products we distribute may give rise to claims against us for losses and expose us to claims for damages.

 

We maintain insurance to cover certain of our potential losses, and we are subject to various self-retentions, deductibles and caps under our insurance. We face the following risks with respect to our insurance coverage:

 

  we may not be able to continue to obtain insurance on commercially reasonable terms;
     
  we may incur losses from interruption of our business that exceed our insurance coverage;
     
  we may be faced with types of liabilities that will not be covered by our insurance;
     
  our insurance carriers may not be able to meet their obligations under the policies; or
     
  the dollar amount of any liabilities may exceed our policy limits.

 

Even a partially uninsured claim, if successful and of significant size, could have a material adverse effect on us. Finally, even in cases where we maintain insurance coverage, our insurers may raise various objections and exceptions to coverage that could make uncertain the timing and amount of any possible insurance recovery.

 

Due to our position in the supply chain of vaporization products and consumption accessories, we are subject to personal injury, product liability and environmental claims involving allegedly defective products.

 

Our customers use certain products we distribute in potentially hazardous applications that can result in personal injury, product liability and environmental claims. A catastrophic occurrence at a location at which consumers use the products we distribute may result in our company being named as a defendant in lawsuits asserting potentially large claims, even though we did not manufacture such products or even if such products were not used in the manner recommended by the manufacturer. Applicable law may render us liable for damages without regard to negligence or fault. Certain of these risks are reduced by the fact that we are a distributor of products that third-party manufacturers produce, and, thus, in certain circumstances, we may have third-party warranty or other claims against the manufacturer of products alleged to have been defective. However, there is no assurance that these claims could fully protect us or that the manufacturer would be financially able to provide protection. There is no assurance that our insurance coverage will be adequate to cover the underlying claims. Our insurance does not provide coverage for all liabilities (including liability for certain events involving pollution or other environmental claims).

 

38

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

We may become subject to significant product liability litigation.

 

The tobacco industry has experienced and continues to experience significant product liability litigation. As a result of their relative novelty, electronic cigarette, vaporizer product and other consumption product manufacturers, suppliers, distributors and sellers have only recently become subject to litigation. While we have not been a party to any product liability litigation, several lawsuits have been brought against other manufacturers and sellers of smokeless products for injuries to health allegedly caused by use of smokeless products. We may be subject to similar claims in the future relating to our vaporizer products. We may also be named as a defendant in product liability litigation against one of our suppliers by association, including in class action lawsuits. In addition, we may see increasing litigation over our vaporizer products or the regulation of our products as the regulatory regimes surrounding these products develop. In February 2015, for example, the Center for Environmental Health, a public interest group in California, filed an action against vaporizer marketers alleging a violation of California’s Proposition 65 (“Prop 65”). Prop 65 requires the State of California to identify chemicals that could cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm, and businesses selling products in California are then required to warn consumers of any possible exposure to the chemicals on the list. The basis for the action brought by the Center for Environmental Health is the reproductive harm associated with nicotine. Although we are not aware of an instance in which we have sold nicotine-containing electronic cigarette products that did not carry the appropriate Prop 65 warning, the Center for Environmental Health has asserted in its complaint that even electronic cigarette products that do not contain nicotine, but could potentially be used with nicotine-containing products (such as open-system vaporizers or blank cartridges), should also carry a Prop 65 warning. As a result of other similar suits that may be filed in the future, we may face substantial costs due to increased product liability litigation relating to new regulations or other potential defects associated with our vaporizer and other consumption products, including litigation arising out of faulty devices or improper usage, which could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.

 

There can be no assurances that we will be able to obtain or maintain product liability insurance on acceptable terms or with adequate coverage against potential liabilities. Such insurance is expensive and may not be available in the future on acceptable terms, or at all. The inability to obtain sufficient insurance coverage on reasonable terms or to otherwise protect against potential product liability claims could prevent or inhibit the commercialization of products.

 

The scientific community has not yet extensively studied the long-term health effects of the use of vaporizers, electronic cigarettes or e-liquids products.

 

Vaporizers, electronic cigarettes and related products were recently developed and therefore the scientific community has not had a sufficient period of time to study the long-term health effects of their use. Currently, there is no way of knowing whether these products are safe for their intended use. If the scientific community were to determine conclusively that use of any or all of these products poses long-term health risks, market demand for these products and their use could materially decline. Such a determination could also lead to litigation and significant regulation. Loss of demand for our product, product liability claims and increased regulation stemming from unfavorable scientific studies on these products could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.

 

Reliance on information technology means a significant disruption could affect our communications and operations.

 

We increasingly rely on information technology systems for our internal communications, controls, reporting and relations with customers, vendors and suppliers, and information technology is becoming a significantly important tool for our sales staff. Our marketing and distribution strategy is dependent upon our ability to closely monitor consumer and market trends on a highly-specified level, for which we are reliant on our sophisticated data tracking systems, which are susceptible to disruption or failure. In addition, our reliance on information technology exposes us to cyber-security risks, which could have a material adverse effect on our ability to compete. Security and privacy breaches may expose us to liability and cause us to lose customers, or may disrupt our relationships and ongoing transactions with other entities with whom we contract throughout our supply chain. The failure of our information systems to function as intended, or the penetration by outside parties intent on disrupting business processes, could result in significant costs, loss of revenue, assets or personal or other sensitive data and reputational harm.

 

39

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Internet security poses a risk to our e-commerce sales.

 

At present we generate a portion of our sales through e-commerce sales on our own websites and fulfillment activities through third-party websites. We manage our websites and e-commerce platform internally and, as a result, any compromise of our security or misappropriation of proprietary information could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition. We rely on encryption and authentication technology licensed from third parties to provide the security and authentication necessary to effect secure Internet transmission of confidential information, such as credit and other proprietary information. Advances in computer capabilities, new discoveries in the field of cryptography or other events or developments may result in a compromise or breach of the technology used by us to protect client transaction data. Anyone who is able to circumvent our security measures could misappropriate proprietary information or cause material interruptions in our operations. We may be required to expend significant capital and other resources to protect against security breaches or to minimize problems caused by security breaches. To the extent that our activities or the activities of others involve the storage and transmission of proprietary information, security breaches could damage our reputation and expose us to a risk of loss and/or litigation. Our security measures may not prevent security breaches. Our failure to prevent these security breaches may result in consumer distrust and may adversely affect our business, results of operations and financial condition.

 

If the methodologies of Internet search engines are modified, traffic to our websites and corresponding consumer origination volumes could decline.

 

We depend in part on various Internet search engines, including Google®, Bing®, and Yahoo!®, to direct a significant amount of traffic to our websites. Our ability to maintain the number of visitors directed to our websites by search engines through which we distribute our content is not entirely within our control. Our competitors’ search engine optimization (“SEO”) efforts may result in their websites receiving a higher search result page ranking than ours, or Internet search engines could revise their methodologies, which could adversely affect the placement of our search result page ranking. If search engine companies modify their search algorithms in ways that are detrimental to our consumer growth or in ways that make it harder for our customers to access or use our websites, or if our competitors’ SEO efforts are more successful than ours, our consumer engagement and number of consumers could decline. Any reduction in the number of consumers directed to our websites could negatively affect our ability to earn revenue. If traffic on our websites declines, we may need to employ more costly resources to replace lost traffic, and such increased expense could adversely affect our business, results of operations and financial condition.

 

Security and privacy breaches may expose us to liability and cause us to lose customers.

 

Federal, provincial and state laws require us to safeguard our customers’ financial information, including credit information. Although we have established security procedures to protect against identity theft and the theft of financial information of our customers, distributors or consumers, our security and testing measures may not prevent security breaches and breaches of privacy may occur, which would harm our business. Typically, we rely on encryption and authentication technology licensed from third parties to enhance transmission security of confidential information in relation to financial and other sensitive information that we have on file. Advances in computer capabilities, new discoveries in the field of cryptography, inadequate facility security or other developments may result in a compromise or breach of the technology used by us to protect customer data. Any compromise of our security could harm our reputation or financial condition and therefore, our business. In addition, a party who is able to circumvent our security measures or exploit inadequacies in our security measures, could, among other effects, misappropriate proprietary information, cause interruptions in our operations or expose customers and other entities with which we interact to computer viruses or other disruptions. Actual or perceived vulnerabilities may lead to claims against us. To the extent the measures we have taken prove to be insufficient or inadequate, we may become subject to litigation or administrative sanctions, which could result in significant fines, penalties or damages and harm to our reputation.

 

40

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

We are a holding company and depend upon our subsidiaries for our cash flow.

 

We are a holding company. Our subsidiaries conduct all of our operations and own substantially all of our tangible assets. Consequently, our cash flow and our ability to meet our obligations or to make other distributions in the future will depend upon the cash flow of our subsidiaries and our subsidiaries’ payment of funds to us in the form of distributions, dividends, tax sharing payments or otherwise.

 

The ability of our subsidiaries to make any payments to us will depend on their earnings and cash flow, the terms of their current and future indebtedness, tax considerations and legal and contractual restrictions on their ability to make distributions.

 

Our subsidiaries are separate and distinct legal entities. Any right that we have to receive any assets of or distributions from any of our subsidiaries upon the bankruptcy, dissolution, liquidation or reorganization, or to realize proceeds from the sale of their assets, will be junior to the claims of that subsidiary’s creditors, including trade creditors and holders of debt that the subsidiary issued.

 

Changes in our credit profile may affect our relationship with our suppliers, which could have a material adverse effect on our liquidity.

 

Changes in our credit profile may affect the way our suppliers view our ability to make payments and may induce them to shorten the payment terms of their invoices. Given the large dollar amounts and volume of our purchases from suppliers, a change in payment terms may have a material adverse effect on our liquidity and our ability to make payments to our suppliers and, consequently, may have a material adverse effect on us.

 

Our intellectual property may be infringed.

 

We currently rely on trademark and other intellectual property rights to establish and protect the brand names and logos we own or license on the products we distribute. Third parties have in the past infringed, and may in the future infringe, on these trademarks and our other intellectual property rights. Our ability to maintain and further build brand recognition is dependent on the continued use of these trademarks, service marks and other proprietary intellectual property, including the names and logos we own or license. Despite our attempts to ensure these intellectual property rights are protected, third parties may take actions that could materially and adversely affect our rights or the value of this intellectual property. Any litigation concerning our intellectual property rights or the intellectual property rights of our suppliers, whether successful or unsuccessful, could result in substantial costs to us and diversions of our resources. Expenses related to protecting our intellectual property rights or the intellectual property rights of our suppliers, the loss or compromise of any of these rights or the loss of revenues as a result of infringement could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition, and may prevent the brands we own or license, or are owned or licensed by our suppliers, from growing or maintaining market share. There can be no assurance that any trademarks or common marks that we own or license, or are owned or licensed by our suppliers, will not be challenged in the future, invalidated or circumvented or that the rights granted thereunder or under licensing agreements will provide us or our suppliers competitive advantages. We are dependent on the validity, integrity and intellectual property of our suppliers and their efforts to appropriately register, maintain and enforce intellectual property in all jurisdictions in which their products are sold.

 

We devote significant resources to the registration and protection of our trademarks and to anti-counterfeiting efforts. Despite these efforts, we regularly discover products that infringe on our proprietary rights or that otherwise seek to mimic or leverage our intellectual property or the intellectual property of our suppliers. Counterfeiting and other infringing activities typically increase as brand recognition increases, especially in markets outside the United States and Canada. Counterfeiting and other infringement of our intellectual property could divert away sales, and association of our brands with inferior counterfeit reproductions or third party labels could adversely affect the integrity and reputation of our brands.

 

Although we currently hold a limited number of patents on our products, we generally rely on patents on the products of our suppliers as well as their efforts in successfully defending third-party challenges to such products. The ability of our suppliers, licensors, collaborators and manufacturers to maintain and enforce their patent rights against third-party challenges to their validity, scope or enforceability plays an important role in determining our future. There can be no assurances that we will ever successfully file or receive any patents in the future, and changes in either the patent laws or in interpretations of patent laws in the United States or other countries may diminish the value of the intellectual property rights of the products we distribute, license or own. Accordingly, we cannot predict with any certainty the range of claims that may be allowed or enforced concerning the products that we sell.

 

41

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

In addition, there can be no assurance that standard intellectual property confidentiality and assignment agreement with employees, consultants and other advisors will not be breached, that we will have adequate remedies for any breach, or that our trade secrets will not otherwise become known to or independently developed by competitors. Furthermore, there can be no assurance that our efforts to protect our intellectual property will prevent others from unlawfully using our trademarks, trade secrets, copyrights and other intellectual property. Our success depends in part, on our continued ability to maintain our intellectual property and those of our suppliers, and to protect our trade secrets. An inability to continue to preserve and protect our intellectual property would likely have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.

 

We are subject to the risks of exchange rate fluctuations.

 

Currency movements and suppliers’ price increases relating to currency exchange rates are significant factors affecting our cost of sales. Many of our products are purchased from suppliers located in foreign countries and we make payments for our products in numerous currencies. Thus, we bear certain foreign exchange rate risk for certain of our inventory purchases. In addition, we recently expanded into Canada, and as part of our strategy, we may undertake further international expansion. As a result, in the future, we may be more sensitive to the risks of exchange rate fluctuations, which may have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.

 

Adverse U.S., Canadian and global economic conditions could negatively impact our business, prospects, results of operations, financial condition or cash flows.

 

Our business and operations are sensitive to global economic conditions. These conditions include interest rates, energy costs, inflation, international trade relationships, recession, fluctuations in debt and equity capital markets and the general condition of the U.S., Canadian and world economy. A material decline in the economic conditions affecting consumers, which cause a reduction in disposable income for the average consumer, may change consumption patterns, and may result in a reduction in spending on vaporization products and consumption accessories or a switch to cheaper products or products obtained through illicit channels. Vaporizer, electronic cigarette and e-liquid products are relatively new to market and may be regarded by consumers as a novelty item and expendable. As such, demand for our vaporizer products may be particularly sensitive to economic conditions such as inflation, recession, high energy costs, unemployment, changes in interest rates and money supply, changes in the political environment and other factors beyond our control, any combination of which could result in a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.

 

We are required to comply with laws and regulations in other countries and are exposed to business risks associated with our international operations.

 

For the three-month periods ended March 31, 2018 and 2017 and the years ended December 31, 2017 and 2016, we derived 6.0%, 11.0%, 9.4% and 10.8%, respectively, of our net sales from outside the United States, primarily in Canada. We intend to increase our Canadian and other international sales, both as to the dollar amount and as a percentage of our net sales and operations in the future. As a result, we are subject to numerous evolving and complex laws and regulations which apply, among other things, to financial reporting standards, corporate governance, data privacy, tax, trade regulations, export controls, competitive practices, labor, health and safety laws, and regulations in each jurisdiction in which we operate. We are also required to obtain permits and other authorizations or licenses from governmental authorities for certain of our operations and we or our suppliers’ must protect our intellectual property worldwide. In the jurisdictions in which we operate, we need to comply with various standards and practices of different regulatory, tax, judicial and administrative bodies.

 

There are a number of risks associated with international business operations, including political instability (e.g., the threat of war, terrorist attacks or civil unrest), inconsistent regulations across jurisdictions, unanticipated changes in the regulatory environment, and import and export restrictions. Any of these events may affect our employees, reputation, business or financial results as well as our ability to meet our objectives, including the following international business risks:

 

  negative economic developments in economies around the world and the instability of governments, or the downgrades in the debt ratings of certain major economies;
     
  social and political instability;
     
  complex regulations governing certain of our products;

 

42

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

     
  potential terrorist attacks;
     
  adverse changes in governmental policies, especially those affecting trade, tariffs and investment;
     
  foreign currency exchange, particularly with respect to the Canadian Dollar, Euro, British Pound Sterling and Australian dollar; and
     
  threats that our operations or property could be subject to nationalization and expropriation.

 

We may not be in full compliance at all times with the laws and regulations to which we are subject. Likewise, we may not have obtained or may not be able to obtain the permits and other authorizations or licenses that we need. If we violate or fail to comply with laws, regulations, permits, labor, health and safety regulations or other authorizations or licenses, we could be fined or otherwise sanctioned by regulators. In such a case, or if any of these international business risks were to materialize, our business, results of operations and financial condition could be adversely affected.

 

New tariffs and the evolving trade policy dispute between the United States and China may adversely affect our business.

 

On August 14, 2017, President Trump instructed the U.S. Trade Representative (“USTR”) to determine under Section 301 of the U.S. Trade Act of 1974 (the “Trade Act”) whether to investigate China’s law, policies, practices or actions that may be unreasonable or discriminatory and that may be harming American intellectual property rights, innovation or technology development. On March 22, 2018, based upon the results of its investigation, the USTR published a report finding that the acts, policies and practices of the Chinese government are unreasonable or discriminatory and burden or restrict U.S. commerce.

 

On March 8, 2018, President Trump imposed significant tariffs on steel and aluminum imports from a number of countries, including China. Subsequently, the USTR announced an initial proposed list of 1,300 goods imported from China that could be subject to additional tariffs and initiated a dispute with the World Trade Organization against China for alleged unfair trade practices.

 

On June 15, 2018, the USTR announced a list of products subject to additional tariffs. The list focused on products from industrial sectors that contribute to or benefit from the “Made in China 2025” industrial policy. The list of products consists of two sets of tariff lines. The first set contains 818 tariff lines for which Customs and Border Protection began collecting the additional duties on July 6, 2018. This list includes some of the products we distribute. The second set contains 284 proposed tariff lines that remain subject to further review. On July 10, 2018, the USTR announced that, as a result of China’s retaliation and failure to change its practices, President Trump has ordered the USTR to begin the process of imposing tariffs of 10 percent on an additional $200 billion of Chinese imports.

 

These new tariffs and the evolving trade policy dispute between the United States and China may have a significant impact on the industries in which we participate. A “trade war” between the United States and China or other governmental action related to tariffs or international trade agreements or policies has the potential to adversely impact demand for our products, our costs, customers, suppliers and/or the United States economy or certain sectors thereof and, thus, to adversely impact our businesses and results of operations.

 

Our failure to comply with certain environmental, health and safety regulations could adversely affect our business.

 

The storage, distribution and transportation of some of the products that we sell are subject to a variety of federal, state, provincial and local environmental regulations. We are also subject to operational, health and safety laws and regulations. Our failure to comply with these laws and regulations could cause a disruption in our business, an inability to maintain our warehousing resources, additional and potentially significant remedial costs and damages, fines, sanctions or other legal consequences that could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition. In addition, changes in environmental, employee health and safety or other laws, more vigorous enforcement thereof or other unanticipated events could require extensive changes to our operations or give rise to material liabilities, which could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

 

Our business depends substantially on the continued efforts of our executive officers and key employees, and our business may be severely disrupted if we lose their services.

 

Our future success depends substantially on the continued efforts of our executive officers, especially our Chief Executive Officer, Aaron LoCascio, and our President and Chief Strategy Officer, Adam Schoenfeld, as well as our key employees. If one or more of our executive officers or key employees were unable or unwilling to continue in their present positions, we may not be able to replace them in a timely manner, or at all. Our business may be severely disrupted, our financial conditions and results of operations may be materially adversely affected and we may incur additional expenses to recruit, train and retain personnel. In addition, if any of our executive officers or key employees joins a competitor or forms a competing company, we may lose customers, suppliers, know-how, key professionals and staff members.

 

In the future, we may pursue selective acquisitions to complement our organic growth, which may not be successful and may divert financial and management resources.

 

If we identify appropriate opportunities, we may acquire or invest in technologies, businesses or assets that are strategically important to our business or form alliances with key participants in the vaporization products and consumption accessories industry to further expand our business. If we decide to pursue a strategy of selective acquisitions, we may not be successful in identifying suitable acquisition opportunities or completing such transactions. Our competitors may be more effective in executing and closing acquisitions in competitive auctions than us. Our ability to enter into and complete acquisitions may be restricted by, or subject to, various approvals under U.S., Canadian or other applicable law or may not otherwise be possible, may result in a possible dilutive issuance of our securities, or may require us to seek additional financing. We also may experience difficulties integrating acquired operations, technology, and personnel into our existing business and operations. Completed acquisitions may also expose us to potential risks, including risks associated with unforeseen or hidden liabilities, impact to our corporate culture, the diversion of resources from our existing business, and the potential loss of, or harm to, relationships with our suppliers, business relationships or employees as a result of our integration of new businesses. In addition, following completion of an acquisition, our management and resources may be diverted from their core business activities due to the integration process, which diversion may harm the effective management of our business. Furthermore, it may not be possible to achieve the expected synergies or the actual cost of delivering such benefits may exceed the anticipated cost. Any of these factors may have an adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.

 

43

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

 

Our operations are subject to natural disasters, adverse weather conditions, operating hazards, environmental incidents and labor disputes.

 

We may experience earthquakes, floods, typhoons, power outages, labor and trade disputes or similar events beyond our control that would affect our warehousing and distribution operations. The occurrences of such events could result in shutdowns or periods of reduced operations, which could significantly disrupt our business operations, cause us to incur additional costs and affect our ability to deliver our products to our customers as scheduled, which may adversely affect our business, results of operations and financial condition. Moreover, such events could result in severe damage to property, personal injuries, fatalities, regulatory enforcement proceedings or in us being named as a defendant in lawsuits asserting claims for large amounts of damages, which in turn could lead to significant liabilities.

 

Risks Related to Our Organizational Structure

 

Our principal asset after the completion of this offering will be our interest in Greenlane Holdings, LLC, and, accordingly, we will depend on distributions from Greenlane Holdings, LLC to pay our taxes and expenses, including payments under the Tax Receivable Agreement. Greenlane Holdings, LLC’s ability to make such distributions may be subject to various limitations and restrictions.

 

Upon the completion of this offering, we will be a holding company and will have no material assets other than our ownership of Common Units of Greenlane Holdings, LLC. As such, we will have no independent means of generating revenue or cash flow. We have determined that Greenlane Holdings, LLC will be a variable interest entity, or VIE, and that we will be the primary beneficiary of Greenlane Holdings, LLC. Accordingly, pursuant to the VIE accounting model, we will consolidate Greenlane Holdings, LLC in our consolidated financial statements. In the event of a change in accounting guidance or amendments to the Greenlane Operating Agreement resulting in us no longer having a controlling interest in Greenlane Holdings, LLC, we may not be able to consolidate its results of operations with our own, which would have a material adverse effect on our results of operations. Moreover, our ability to pay our taxes and operating expenses or declare and pay dividends in the future, if any, will be dependent upon the financial results and cash flows of Greenlane Holdings, LLC and its subsidiaries and distributions we receive from Greenlane Holdings, LLC. There can be no assurance that Greenlane Holdings, LLC and its subsidiaries will generate sufficient cash flow to distribute funds to us or that applicable state law and contractual restrictions, including negative covenants in our debt instruments, will permit such distributions.

 

Greenlane Holdings, LLC will continue to be treated as a partnership for U.S. federal income tax purposes and, as such, will not be subject to any entity-level U.S. federal income tax. Instead, taxable income will be allocated to holders of Common Units, including us. Accordingly, we will incur income taxes on our allocable share of any net taxable income of Greenlane Holdings, LLC. Under the terms of the Greenlane Operating Agreement, Greenlane Holdings, LLC will be obligated to make tax distributions to holders of Common Units, including us. In addition to tax expenses, we will also incur expenses related to our operations, including payments under the Tax Receivable Agreement, which we expect could be significant. See “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—The Transactions—Tax Receivable Agreement.” We intend, as its manager, to cause Greenlane Holdings, LLC to make cash distributions to the owners of Common Units in an amount sufficient to (i) fund their tax obligations in respect of taxable income allocated to them and (ii) cover our operating expenses, including payments under the Tax Receivable Agreement. However, Greenlane Holdings, LLC’s ability to make such distributions may be subject to various limitations and restrictions, such as restrictions on distributions that would either violate any contract or agreement to which Greenlane Holdings, LLC is then a party, including debt agreements, or any applicable law, or that would have the effect of rendering Greenlane Holdings, LLC insolvent. If we do not have sufficient funds to pay tax or other liabilities or to fund our operations, we may have to borrow funds, which could materially adversely affect our liquidity and financial condition and subject us to various restrictions imposed by any such lenders. To the extent that we are unable to make payments under the Tax Receivable Agreement for any reason, such payments generally will be deferred and will accrue interest until paid; provided, however, that nonpayment for a specified period may constitute a material breach of a material obligation under the Tax Receivable Agreement and therefore accelerate payments due under the Tax Receivable Agreement. See “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—The Transactions—Tax Receivable Agreement” and “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—The Transactions—Greenlane Operating Agreement—Distributions.” In addition, if Greenlane Holdings, LLC does not have sufficient funds to make distributions, our ability to declare and pay cash dividends will also be restricted or impaired. See “—Risks Related to This Offering and Ownership of Our Class A Common Stock” and “Dividend Policy.”

 

44

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

The Tax Receivable Agreement with the Members requires us to make cash payments to them in respect of certain tax benefits to which we may become entitled, and we expect that the payments we will be required to make will be substantial.

 

Upon the closing of this offering, we will be a party to the Tax Receivable Agreement with Greenlane Holdings, LLC and the Members. Under the Tax Receivable Agreement, we will be required to make cash payments to the Members equal to 85% of the tax benefits, if any, that we actually realize, or in certain circumstances are deemed to realize, as a result of (i) the increases in the tax basis of assets of Greenlane Holdings, LLC resulting from any redemptions or exchanges of Common Units from the Members as described under “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—The Transactions—Greenlane Operating Agreement—Common Unit Redemption Right” and (ii) certain other tax benefits related to our making payments under the Tax Receivable Agreement. Although the actual timing and amount of any payments that we make to the Members under the Tax Receivable Agreement will vary, we expect those payments will be significant. Any payments made by us to the Members under the Tax Receivable Agreement may generally reduce the amount of overall cash flow that might have otherwise been available to us. Furthermore, our future obligation to make payments under the Tax Receivable Agreement could make us a less attractive target for an acquisition, particularly in the case of an acquirer that cannot use some or all of the tax benefits that are the subject of the Tax Receivable Agreement. For more information, see “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—The Transactions—Tax Receivable Agreement.” Payments under the Tax Receivable Agreement are not conditioned on any Member’s continued ownership of Common Units or our Class A common stock after this offering.

 

The actual amount and timing of any payments under the Tax Receivable Agreement will vary depending upon a number of factors, including the timing of redemptions or exchanges by the holders of Common Units, the amount of gain recognized by such holders of Common Units, the amount and timing of the taxable income we generate in the future, and the federal tax rates then applicable.

 

Two of our senior executives, Aaron LoCascio and Adam Schoenfeld, have control over all stockholder decisions because collectively they control a substantial majority of the combined voting power of our common stock. This will limit or preclude your ability to influence corporate matters, including the election of directors, amendments of our organizational documents and any merger, consolidation, sale of all or substantially all of our assets, or other major corporate transaction requiring stockholder approval.

 

Our Chief Executive Officer, Aaron LoCascio, and our President and Chief Strategy Officer, Adam Schoenfeld, are senior executives and board members, and they and their affiliates will beneficially own 100% of our Class C common stock and thereby collectively control approximately           % of the combined voting power of our common stock (or           % if the underwriters exercise their option to purchase additional shares in full) after the completion of this offering and the application of the net proceeds from this offering.

 

As a result, Messrs. LoCascio and Schoenfeld will have the ability to substantially control us, including the ability to control any action requiring the general approval of our stockholders, including the election of our board of directors, the adoption of amendments to our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and bylaws and the approval of any merger or sale of substantially all of our assets. This concentration of ownership and voting power may also delay, defer or even prevent an acquisition by a third party or other change of control of us and may make some transactions more difficult or impossible without their support, even if such events are in the best interests of minority stockholders. This concentration of voting power with Messrs. LoCascio and Schoenfeld may have a negative impact on the price of our Class A common stock.

 

45

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

As our Chief Executive Officer, Mr. LoCascio has control over our day-to-day management and the implementation of major strategic investments of our company, subject to authorization and oversight by our board of directors. As members of our board of directors, Messrs. LoCascio and Schoenfeld owe fiduciary duties to our company, including those of care and loyalty, and must act in good faith and with a view to the interests of the corporation. However, Delaware law provides that a director or officer shall not be personally liable to a corporation for a breach of fiduciary duty except for an act or omission constituting a breach and which involves intentional misconduct, fraud or a knowing violation of law. In addition, a director or officer is entitled to a presumption that he or she acted in good faith, on an informed basis and with a view to the interests of the corporation, and is not individually liable unless that presumption is found by a trier of fact to have been rebutted. As a stockholder, even a controlling stockholder, each of Messrs. LoCascio and Schoenfeld is entitled to vote his shares, and shares over which he has voting control, in his own interests, which may not always be in the interests of our stockholders generally. Because Messrs. LoCascio and Schoenfeld hold their economic interest in our business through Greenlane Holdings, LLC, rather than through the public company, they may have conflicting interests with holders of shares of our Class A common stock. For example, Messrs. LoCascio and Schoenfeld may have different tax positions from us, which could influence their decisions regarding whether and when we should dispose of assets or incur new or refinance existing indebtedness, especially in light of the existence of the Tax Receivable Agreement, and whether and when we should undergo certain changes of control within the meaning of the Tax Receivable Agreement or terminate the Tax Receivable Agreement. In addition, the structuring of future transactions may take into consideration these tax or other considerations even where no similar benefit would accrue to us. See “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—The Transactions—Tax Receivable Agreement.” In addition, the significant ownership of Messrs. LoCascio and Schoenfeld in us and their resulting ability to effectively control us may discourage someone from making a significant equity investment in us, or could discourage transactions involving a change in control, including transactions in which you as a holder of shares of our Class A common stock might otherwise receive a premium for your shares over the then-current market price.

 

Under certain circumstances, redemptions of Common Units by Members will result in dilution to the holders of our Class A common stock.

 

Redemptions of Common Units by Members in accordance with the terms of the Greenlane Operating Agreement will result in a corresponding increase in our membership interest in Greenlane Holdings, LLC, increase in the number of shares of Class A common stock outstanding and decrease in the number of shares of Class B common stock or Class C common stock outstanding. In the event that Common Units are exchanged at a time when Greenlane Holdings, LLC has made cash distributions to Members, including our company, and we have accumulated such distributions and neither reinvested them in Greenlane Holdings, LLC in exchange for additional Common Units nor distributed them as dividends to the holders of our Class A common stock, the holders of our Class A common stock would experience dilution with respect to such accumulated distributions.

 

Our organizational structure, including the Tax Receivable Agreement, confers certain benefits upon the Members that will not benefit Class A common stockholders to the same extent as it will benefit the Members.

 

Our organizational structure, including the Tax Receivable Agreement, confers certain benefits upon the Members that will not benefit the holders of our Class A common stock to the same extent as it will benefit the Members. We will enter into the Tax Receivable Agreement with Greenlane Holdings, LLC and the Members and it will provide for the payment by us to the Members of 85% of the amount of tax benefits, if any, that we actually realize, or in some circumstances are deemed to realize, as a result of (1) the increases in the tax basis of assets of Greenlane Holdings, LLC resulting from any redemptions or exchanges of Common Units from the Members as described under “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—The Transactions—Greenlane Operating Agreement—Common Unit Redemption Right” and (2) certain other tax benefits related to our making payments under the Tax Receivable Agreement. See “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—The Transactions—Tax Receivable Agreement.” Although we will retain 15% of the amount of such tax benefits, this and other aspects of our organizational structure may adversely impact the future trading market for the Class A common stock.

 

46

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

In certain cases, payments under the Tax Receivable Agreement to the Members may be accelerated or significantly exceed the actual benefits we realize in respect of the tax attributes subject to the Tax Receivable Agreement.

 

The Tax Receivable Agreement provides that upon certain mergers, asset sales, other forms of business combinations or other changes of control or if, at any time, we elect an early termination of the Tax Receivable Agreement, then our obligations, or our successor’s obligations, under the Tax Receivable Agreement to make payments thereunder would be based on certain assumptions, including an assumption that we would have sufficient taxable income to fully utilize all potential future tax benefits that are subject to the Tax Receivable Agreement.

 

As a result of the foregoing, (i) we could be required to make payments under the Tax Receivable Agreement that are greater than the specified percentage of the actual benefits we ultimately realize in respect of the tax benefits that are subject to the Tax Receivable Agreement, and (ii) if we elect to terminate the Tax Receivable Agreement early, we would be required to make an immediate cash payment equal to the present value of the anticipated future tax benefits that are the subject of the Tax Receivable Agreement, which payment may be made significantly in advance of the actual realization, if any, of such future tax benefits. In these situations, our obligations under the Tax Receivable Agreement could have a substantial negative impact on our liquidity and could have the effect of delaying, deferring or preventing certain mergers, asset sales, other forms of business combinations or other changes of control. There can be no assurance that we will be able to fund or finance our obligations under the Tax Receivable Agreement.

 

We will not be reimbursed for any payments made to the Members under the Tax Receivable Agreement in the event that any tax benefits are disallowed.

 

Payments under the Tax Receivable Agreement will be based on the tax reporting positions that we determine, and the IRS or another tax authority may challenge all or part of the tax basis increases, as well as other related tax positions we take, and a court could sustain such challenge. If the outcome of any such challenge would reasonably be expected to materially affect a recipient’s payments under the Tax Receivable Agreement, then we will not be permitted to settle or fail to contest such challenge without the consent (not to be unreasonably withheld or delayed) of each Member that directly or indirectly owns at least 10% of the outstanding Common Units. We will not be reimbursed for any cash payments previously made to the Members under the Tax Receivable Agreement in the event that any tax benefits initially claimed by us and for which payment has been made to a Member are subsequently challenged by a taxing authority and are ultimately disallowed. Instead, any excess cash payments made by us to a Member will be netted against any future cash payments that we might otherwise be required to make to such Member under the terms of the Tax Receivable Agreement. However, we might not determine that we have effectively made an excess cash payment to a Member for a number of years following the initial time of such payment and, if any of our tax reporting positions are challenged by a taxing authority, we will not be permitted to reduce any future cash payments under the Tax Receivable Agreement until any such challenge is finally settled or determined. As a result, payments could be made under the Tax Receivable Agreement in excess of the tax savings that we realize in respect of the tax attributes with respect to a Member that are the subject of the Tax Receivable Agreement.

 

Fluctuations in our tax obligations and effective tax rate and realization of our deferred tax assets may result in volatility of our operating results.

 

We are subject to taxes by the U.S. federal, state, local and foreign tax authorities, and our tax liabilities will be affected by the allocation of expenses to differing jurisdictions. We record tax expense based on our estimates of future earnings, which may include reserves for uncertain tax positions in multiple tax jurisdictions, and valuation allowances related to certain net deferred tax assets. At any one time, many tax years may be subject to audit by various taxing jurisdictions. The results of these audits and negotiations with taxing authorities may affect the ultimate settlement of these matters. We expect that throughout the year there could be ongoing variability in our quarterly tax rates as events occur and exposures are evaluated. Our future effective tax rates could be subject to volatility or adversely affected by a number of factors, including:

 

changes in the valuation of our deferred tax assets and liabilities;

 

expected timing and amount of the release of any tax valuation allowances;

 

tax effects of stock-based compensation;

 

47

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

changes in tax laws, regulations or interpretations thereof; or

 

future earnings being lower than anticipated in countries where we have lower statutory tax rates and higher than anticipated earnings in countries where we have higher statutory tax rates.

 

In addition, our effective tax rate in a given financial statement period may be materially impacted by a variety of factors including but not limited to changes in the mix and level of earnings, varying tax rates in the different jurisdictions in which we operate, fluctuations in valuation allowances, deductibility of certain items, or by changes to existing accounting rules or regulations. Further, tax legislation may be enacted in the future which could negatively impact our current or future tax structure and effective tax rates. We may be subject to audits of our income, sales, and other transaction taxes by U.S. federal, state, local, and foreign taxing authorities. Outcomes from these audits could have an adverse effect on our operating results and financial condition.

 

If we were deemed to be an investment company under the U.S. Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended (the “1940 Act”), as a result of our ownership of Greenlane Holdings, LLC, applicable restrictions could make it impractical for us to continue our business as contemplated and could have a material adverse effect on our business.

 

Under Sections 3(a)(1)(A) and (C) of the 1940 Act, a company generally will be deemed to be an “investment company” for purposes of the 1940 Act if (i) it is, or holds itself out as being, engaged primarily, or proposes to engage primarily, in the business of investing, reinvesting or trading in securities or (ii) it engages, or proposes to engage, in the business of investing, reinvesting, owning, holding or trading in securities and it owns or proposes to acquire investment securities having a value exceeding 40% of the value of its total assets (exclusive of U.S. government securities and cash items) on an unconsolidated basis. We do not believe that we are an “investment company,” as such term is defined in either of those sections of the 1940 Act.

 

As the sole manager of Greenlane Holdings, LLC, we will control and operate Greenlane Holdings, LLC. On that basis, we believe that our interest in Greenlane Holdings, LLC is not an “investment security” as that term is used in the 1940 Act. However, if we were to cease participation in the management of Greenlane Holdings, LLC, our interest in Greenlane Holdings, LLC could be deemed an “investment security” for purposes of the 1940 Act.

 

We and Greenlane Holdings, LLC intend to conduct our operations so that we will not be deemed an investment company. However, if we were to be deemed an investment company, restrictions imposed by the 1940 Act, including limitations on our capital structure and our ability to transact with affiliates, could make it impractical for us to continue our business as contemplated and could have a material adverse effect on our business.

 

Risks Related to this Offering and Ownership of Our Class A Common Stock

 

The initial public offering price of our Class A common stock may not be indicative of the market price of our Class A common stock after this offering. In addition, an active trading market for our Class A common stock may not develop or be maintained, and our stock price may be volatile.

 

Prior to this offering, our Class A common stock was not traded on any market. While we have applied to list our Class A common stock on the Canadian Securities Exchange, an active trading market for our Class A common stock may not develop or be maintained. Active trading markets usually result in less price volatility and more efficiency in carrying out investors’ purchase and sale orders. The market price of our Class A common stock could vary significantly as a result of a number of factors, some of which are beyond our control. In the event of a drop in the market price of our Class A common stock, you could lose a substantial part or all of your investment in our Class A common stock. The initial public offering price will be negotiated between us and representatives of the underwriters, based on numerous factors which we discuss in “Underwriting,” and may not be indicative of the market price of our Class A common stock after this offering. Consequently, you may not be able to sell shares of our Class A common stock at prices equal to or greater than the price paid by you in this offering. The following factors could affect our stock price:

 

our operating and financial performance;

 

quarterly variations in the rate of growth of our financial indicators, such as net income per share, net income and revenues;

 

48

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

strategic actions by our competitors or our suppliers;

 

product recalls or product liability claims;

 

changes in revenue or earnings estimates, or changes in recommendations or withdrawal of research coverage, by equity research analysts;

 

liquidity and activity in the market for our Class A common stock;

 

speculation in the press or investment community;

 

sales of our Class A common stock by us or other stockholders, or the perception that such sales may occur;

 

changes in accounting principles;

 

additions or departures of key management personnel;

 

significant acquisitions or business combinations, strategic partnerships, joint ventures or capital commitments by or involving us or our competitors;

 

news reports relating to trends, concerns or competitive developments, regulatory changes and other related issues in our industry or target markets;

 

investors’ general perception of us and the public’s reaction to our press releases, our other public announcements and our filings with the SEC and Canadian securities regulators;

 

actions by our stockholders; and

 

domestic and international economic, legal and regulatory factors.

 

The stock markets in general have experienced extreme volatility that has often been unrelated to the operating performance of particular companies. These broad market fluctuations may adversely affect the trading price of our Class A common stock. Securities class action litigation has often been instituted against companies following periods of volatility in the overall market and in the market price of a company’s securities. Such litigation, if instituted against us, could result in very substantial costs, divert our management’s attention and resources and harm our business, operating results and financial condition.

 

The reduced disclosure requirements applicable to “emerging growth companies” may make our Class A common stock less attractive to investors, potentially decreasing our stock price.

 

For as long as we continue to be an “emerging growth company”, we may take advantage of certain exemptions from various reporting requirements that are applicable to other public companies that are not “emerging growth companies.” Investors may find our Class A common stock less attractive because we may rely on these exemptions, which include but are not limited to, not being required to comply with the auditor attestation requirements of Section 404 of SOX (“Section 404”), reduced disclosure obligations regarding executive compensation in our periodic reports and proxy statements, and exemptions from the requirements of holding a nonbinding advisory vote on executive compensation and shareholder approval of any golden parachute payments not previously approved. In addition, Section 107 of the Jumpstart Our Business Startups Act of 2012 (“JOBS Act”) enacted on April 5, 2012 provides that an “emerging growth company” can take advantage of the extended transition period provided in Section 7(a)(2)(B) of the Securities Act for complying with new or revised accounting standards. We have elected not to use the extended transition period for complying with any new or revised financial accounting standards. Therefore, we will be subject to the same new or revised accounting standards as other public companies that are not emerging growth companies.

 

If investors find our Class A common stock less attractive as a result of exemptions and reduced disclosure requirements, there may be a less active trading market for our Class A common stock and our stock price may be more volatile or decrease.

 

49

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

The requirements of being a public company in the United States and Canada may strain our resources and distract our management, which could make it difficult to manage our business, particularly after we are no longer an “emerging growth company.”

 

We are required to comply with various regulatory and reporting requirements, including those required by the SEC and the Ontario Securities Commission. Complying with these reporting and other regulatory requirements is time-consuming and expensive and could have a negative effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition. As a public company in the United States, we are subject to the reporting requirements of the Exchange Act, and requirements of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act (“SOX”). The cost of complying with these requirements may place a strain on our systems and resources. The Exchange Act requires that we file annual, quarterly and current reports with respect to our business and financial condition. SOX requires that we maintain effective disclosure controls and procedures and internal controls over financial reporting. To maintain and improve the effectiveness of our disclosure controls and procedures, we must commit significant resources, will be required to hire additional staff and need to continue to provide effective management oversight. We will be implementing additional procedures and processes for the purpose of addressing the standards and requirements applicable to public companies. Sustaining our growth also will require us to commit additional management, operational and financial resources to identify new professionals to join our company and to maintain appropriate operational and financial systems to adequately support expansion. These activities may divert management’s attention from other business concerns, which could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations, financial condition and cash flows.

 

In connection with becoming a public company in the United States and Canada, we have increased our directors’ and officers’ insurance coverage, which will increase our insurance cost. In the future, it may be more expensive for us to obtain director and officer liability insurance, and we may be required to accept reduced coverage or incur substantially higher costs to obtain coverage. These factors could also make it more difficult for us to attract and retain qualified members to our board of directors in the future, particularly to serve on our audit committee, and qualified executive officers.

 

As an “emerging growth company” as defined in the JOBS Act, we may take advantage of certain temporary exemptions from various reporting requirements, including, but not limited to, not being required to comply with the auditor attestation requirements of Section 404 of SOX (and rules and regulations of the SEC thereunder, which we refer to as Section 404) and reduced disclosure obligations regarding executive compensation in our periodic reports and proxy statements.

 

When these exemptions cease to apply, we expect to incur additional expenses and devote increased management effort toward ensuring compliance with them. We will remain an “emerging growth company” for up to five years, although we may cease to be an “emerging growth company” earlier under certain circumstances. We cannot predict or estimate the amount of additional costs we may incur as a result of becoming a public company or the timing of such costs.

 

New investors purchasing our Class A common stock will experience immediate and substantial dilution.

 

Our initial public offering price is substantially higher than the book value per share of our Class A common stock. If you purchase Class A common stock in this offering, you will incur immediate dilution of approximately $        in net tangible book value per share of Class A common stock, based on the initial public offering price of $          per share. In addition, the number of shares available for issuance under our 2018 Equity Incentive Plan will increase annually without further, the stockholder approval. Investors will incur additional dilution upon the exercise of stock options and warrants. See “Dilution.”

 

We have not paid dividends in the past and do not expect to pay dividends in the future, and any return on investment may be limited to the value of our stock.

 

While our predecessor, Greenlane Holdings, LLC, as a pass-through entity for tax purposes has historically made distributions to members for tax purposes, we do not anticipate paying cash dividends in the foreseeable future. The payment of dividends will depend on our earnings, capital requirements, financial condition, prospects and other factors our board of directors may deem relevant. If we do not pay dividends, our stock may be less valuable because a return on your investment will only occur if you sell our Class A common stock after our stock price appreciates.

 

50

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Future sales of our Class A common stock in the public market, or the perception that such sales may occur, could reduce our stock price, and any additional capital raised by us through the sale of equity or convertible securities may dilute your ownership in us.

 

Subject to certain limitations and exceptions, the Members of Greenlane Holdings, LLC may redeem their Common Units for shares of Class A common stock (on a one-for-one basis, subject to conversion rate adjustments for stock splits, stock dividends and reclassification and other similar transactions) and then sell those shares of Class A common stock. Additionally, we may issue additional shares of Class A common stock or convertible securities in subsequent public offerings. After the completion of this offering, we will have                outstanding shares of Class A common stock,              outstanding shares of Class B common stock and                outstanding shares of Class C common stock, assuming an initial offering price at the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus. This number includes                   shares of Class A common stock that the selling stockholders are selling in this offering if the underwriters’ option to purchase additional shares is fully exercised, which may be resold immediately in the public market. Following the completion of this offering, the Founder Members will own shares of Class C common stock, which will be exchangeable for                 shares of Class A common stock, assuming an initial offering price at the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus in connection with a redemption of the corresponding Common Units, representing approximately            % of our total outstanding common stock (or                   shares of Class C common stock, which will be exchangeable for shares of Class A common stock in connection with a redemption of the corresponding Common Units, assuming an initial offering price at the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus representing approximately                % of our total outstanding common stock if the underwriters’ option to purchase additional shares is exercised in full). In addition, following the completion of this offering, the Non-Founder Members will own                  shares of Class B common stock, assuming an initial offering price at the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus which will be exchangeable for                    shares of Class A common stock, assuming an initial offering price at the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus in connection with a redemption of the corresponding Common Units, representing approximately                  % of our total outstanding common stock (or                       shares of Class B common stock, which will be exchangeable for               shares of Class A common stock, assuming an initial offering price at the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus in connection with a redemption of the corresponding Common Units, representing approximately                % of our total outstanding common stock if the underwriters’ option to purchase additional shares is exercised in full). All such shares are restricted from immediate resale under the federal securities laws and are subject to the lock-up agreements between such parties and the underwriters described in “Underwriting,” but may be sold into the market in the future. We will be party to a registration rights agreement between us and the Members, which will require us to effect the registration of their shares in certain circumstances no earlier than the expiration of the lock-up period contained in the Underwriting Agreement entered into in connection with this offering. See “Shares Eligible for Future Sale” and “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—The Transactions—Registration Rights Agreement.”

 

We cannot predict the size of future issuances of our Class A common stock or securities convertible into Class A common stock or the effect, if any, that future issuances and sales of shares of our Class A common stock will have on the market price of our Class A common stock. Sales of substantial amounts of our Class A common stock (including shares issued in connection with an acquisition), or the perception that such sales could occur, may adversely affect prevailing market prices of our Class A common stock.

 

The underwriters of this offering may waive or release parties to the lock-up agreements entered into in connection with this offering, which could adversely affect the price of our Class A common stock.

 

Our executive officers and directors and our significant stockholders, including all of the Members, have entered into lock-up agreements with respect to their Class A common stock, pursuant to which they are subject to certain resale restrictions for a period of 180 days following the effective date of the registration statement of which this prospectus forms a part, subject to certain exceptions. The underwriters at any time and without notice, may release all or any portion of the Class A common stock subject to the foregoing lock-up agreements. If the restrictions under the lock-up agreement are waived, then Class A common stock will be available for sale into the public markets, which could cause the market price of our Class A common stock to decline and impair our ability to raise capital.

 

51

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

  

If securities analysts do not publish research or publish inaccurate or unfavorable research about our business, our stock price and trading volume could decline.

 

The trading market for our stock will depend in part on the research and reports that securities or industry analysts publish about us or our industry. We currently do not, and in the future may not, have research coverage by securities analysts. If no securities analysts commence coverage of our company, the trading price for our stock could be negatively impacted. In the event we obtain securities analyst coverage, if one or more of the analysts who cover us downgrade our stock or publish inaccurate or unfavorable research about our business, our stock price could decline as a result. If one or more of these analysts cease coverage of our company or fail to publish reports on us regularly, demand for our stock could decrease, which might cause our stock price and trading volume to decline.

 

The terms and covenants relating to our existing credit facility could adversely impact our financial performance and liquidity.

 

Our existing credit facility contains covenants requiring us to, among other things, provide financial and other information reporting and provide notice upon the occurrence of certain events affecting our company or our business. These covenants also place restrictions on our ability to incur additional indebtedness, make investments and loans, and enter into certain transactions, including selling assets, engaging in mergers or acquisitions, or engaging in transactions with affiliates. If we fail to satisfy one or more of the covenants under our credit facility, we would be in default thereunder, and may be required to repay such debt with capital from other sources or otherwise not be able to draw down against our line of credit. Under such circumstances, due to the industry in which we operate, we may have difficulty in locating another commercial lender that would be willing to extend credit to our company, and other sources of capital may not be available to us on reasonable terms or at all.

 

Our internal controls over financial reporting may not be effective and our independent registered public accounting firm may not be able to certify as to their effectiveness, which could have a significant and adverse effect on our business and reputation.

 

As a public company, we will be required to evaluate our internal controls over financial reporting. Furthermore, at such time as we cease to be an “emerging growth company,” as more fully described in these Risk Factors, we shall also be required to comply with Section 404. At such time we may identify material weaknesses that we may not be able to remediate in time to meet the applicable deadline imposed upon us for compliance with the requirements of Section 404. In addition, if we fail to achieve and maintain the adequacy of our internal controls, as such standards are modified, supplemented or amended from time to time, we may not be able to ensure that we can conclude on an ongoing basis that we have effective internal controls over financial reporting in accordance with Section 404. We cannot be certain as to the timing of completion of our evaluation, testing and any remediation actions or the impact of the same on our operations. If we are not able to implement the requirements of Section 404 in a timely manner or with adequate compliance, our independent registered public accounting firm may issue an adverse opinion due to ineffective internal controls over financial reporting and we may be subject to sanctions or investigation by regulatory authorities, such as the SEC. As a result, there could be a negative reaction in the financial markets due to a loss of confidence in the reliability of our financial statements. In addition, we may be required to incur costs in improving our internal control system and the hiring of additional personnel. Any such action could negatively affect our results of operations and cash flows.

 

52

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

We have broad discretion in the use of proceeds from this offering.

 

The net proceeds of this offering will be allocated to the potential acquisitions of complementary products, technologies and businesses, the purchase of additional inventory, additions and improvements to our internal infrastructure, the implementation of various sales and marketing initiatives, and to general corporate purposes. Within those categories, our board of directors and management will have broad discretion over the use and investment of the net proceeds of this offering, and accordingly investors in this offering will need to rely upon the judgment of our board of directors and our management with respect to the use of proceeds with only limited information concerning our specific intentions.

 

Investors in Canada may have difficulty bringing actions and enforcing judgments against us and others based on securities law civil liability provisions.

 

We are incorporated under the laws of Delaware and our corporate headquarters is located in the State of Florida. Most of our directors and officers and some of the experts named in this prospectus reside outside of Canada and a substantial portion of their assets and our assets are located outside of Canada. Consequently, it may be difficult for investors in Canada to bring an action against such directors, officers or experts or to enforce against those persons or us a judgment obtained in a Canadian court predicated upon the civil liability provisions of Canadian securities laws or other laws of Canada.

 

Anti-takeover provisions in our certificate of incorporation and amended and restated bylaws and Delaware law could discourage a takeover.

 

Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated bylaws, as adopted in connection with this offering, will contain provisions that might enable our management to resist a takeover. These provisions include:

 

advance notice requirements applicable to stockholders for matters to be brought before a meeting of stockholders and requirements as to the form and content of a stockholder’s notice;
   
 restrictions on the transfer of our outstanding shares of Class B common stock and Class C common stock, which shares will represent          % of the voting rights of our capital stock following this offering, or      % of the voting rights if the underwriters exercise in full their option to purchase additional shares of Class A common stock;

 

a supermajority stockholder vote requirement for amending certain provisions of our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated bylaws;

 

the inability of our stockholders to act by written consent;

 

a requirement that the authorized number of directors may be changed only by resolution of the board of directors;

 

allowing all vacancies, including newly created directorships, to be filled by the affirmative vote of a majority of directors then in office, even if less than a quorum, except as otherwise required by law;

 

limiting the forum for certain litigation against us to Delaware; and

 

limiting the persons that can call special meetings of our stockholders to our board of directors or the chairperson of our board of directors.

 

These provisions might discourage, delay or prevent a change in control of our company or a change in our board of directors or management. The existence of these provisions could adversely affect the voting power of holders of Class A common stock and limit the price that investors might be willing to pay in the future for shares of our Class A common stock. In addition, because we are incorporated in Delaware, we are governed by the provisions of Section 203 of the Delaware General Corporation Law, which generally prohibits a Delaware corporation from engaging in any of a broad range of business combinations with any “interested” stockholder for a period of three years following the date on which the stockholder became an “interested” stockholder. See “Description of Capital Stock.”

 

Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and bylaws will provide that the Court of Chancery of the State of Delaware will be the sole and exclusive forum for substantially all disputes between us and our stockholders, which could limit our stockholders’ ability to obtain a favorable judicial forum for disputes with us or our directors, officers or employees.

 

Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and bylaws, which will become effective prior to the completion of this offering, provide that, unless we consent to the selection of an alternative forum, the Court of Chancery of the State of Delaware is the sole and exclusive forum for (i) any derivative action or proceeding brought on our behalf, (ii) any action asserting a claim of breach of fiduciary duty owed by any of our directors, officers or other employees to us or to our stockholders, (iii) any action asserting a claim arising pursuant to the Delaware General Corporation Law or our amended and restated certificate of incorporation or bylaws (iv) any action to interpret apply, enforce or determine the validity of our amended and restated certificate of incorporation or bylaws or (v) any action asserting a claim governed by the internal affairs doctrine. The choice of forum provision may limit a stockholder’s ability to bring a claim in a judicial forum that it finds favorable for disputes with us or our directors, officers or other employees, which may discourage such lawsuits against us and our directors, officers and other employees. Alternatively, if a court were to find the choice of forum provision contained in our amended and restated certificate of incorporation to be inapplicable or unenforceable in an action, we may incur additional costs associated with resolving such action in other jurisdictions, which could harm our business, operating results and financial condition.

 

53

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

CAUTIONARY NOTE REGARDING FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS

 

This prospectus contains forward-looking statements that involve risks and uncertainties, such as statements about our plans, objectives, expectations, assumptions or future events. In some cases, you can identify forward-looking statements by terminology such as “anticipate,” “estimate,” “plan,” “project,” “continuing,” “ongoing,” “expect,” “believe,” “intend,” “may,” “will,” “should,” “could” and similar expressions. Examples of forward-looking statements include, without limitation:

 

statements regarding our growth and other strategies, results of operations or liquidity;

 

statements concerning projections, predictions, expectations, estimates or forecasts as to our business, financial and operational results and future economic performance;

 

statements regarding our industry;

 

statements of management’s goals and objectives;

 

projections of revenue, earnings, capital structure and other financial items;

 

assumptions underlying statements regarding us or our business; and

 

other similar expressions concerning matters that are not historical facts.

 

Forward-looking statements should not be read as a guarantee of future performance or results and will not necessarily be accurate indications of the times at, or by, which such performance or results will be achieved. Forward-looking statements are based on information available at the time those statements are made or management’s good faith belief as of that time with respect to future events and are subject to risks and uncertainties that could cause actual performance or results to differ materially from those expressed in or suggested by the forward-looking statements. Important factors that could cause such differences include, but are not limited to, factors discussed under the headings “Risk Factors,” “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and “Business.”

 

Forward-looking statements involve estimates, assumptions, known and unknown risks, uncertainties and other factors that could cause actual results to differ materially from any future results, performances, or achievements expressed or implied by the forward-looking statements. These risks include, but are not limited to, those listed below and those discussed in greater detail under the heading “Risk Factors” above:

 

our strategy, outlook and growth prospects;

 

general economic trends and trends in the industry and markets;

 

our dependence on third-party suppliers;

 

the competitive environment in which we operate;

 

our vulnerability to third-party transportation risks;

 

the impact of governmental laws and regulations and the outcomes of regulatory or agency proceedings;

 

our ability to accurately estimate demand for our products and maintain our levels of inventory;

 

our ability to maintain our operating margins and meet sales expectations;

 

our ability to adapt to changes in consumer spending and general economic conditions;

 

our ability to use or license certain trademarks;

 

our ability to maintain a consumer brand recognition and loyalty of our products;

 

our and our customers’ ability to establish or maintain banking relationships;

 

fluctuations in U.S. federal, state, local and foreign tax obligation and changes in tariffs;

 

our ability to address product defects;

 

54

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

our exposure to potential various claims, lawsuits and administrative proceedings;

 

contamination of, or damage to, our products;

 

any unfavorable scientific studies on the long-term health risks of vaporizers, electronic cigarettes or e-liquids products;

 

failure of our information technology systems to support our current and growing business;

 

our ability to prevent and recover from Internet security breaches;

 

our ability to generate adequate cash from our existing business to support our growth;

 

our ability to protect our intellectual property rights;

 

our dependence on continued market acceptance by consumers;

 

our sensitivity to global economic conditions and international trade issues;

 

our ability to comply with certain environmental, health and safety regulations;

 

our ability to successfully identify and complete strategic acquisitions;

 

natural disasters, adverse weather conditions, operating hazards, environmental incidents and labor disputes;

 

increased costs as a result of being a public company;

 

our failure to maintain adequate internal controls over financial reporting; and

 

other risks, uncertainties and factors set forth in this prospectus, including those set forth under “Risk Factors.

 

Additional risks and uncertainties not currently known to us or that we currently deem to be immaterial also may materially adversely affect our business, financial condition or operating results.

 

The forward-looking statements speak only as of the date on which they are made, and, except as required by law, we undertake no obligation to update any forward-looking statement to reflect events or circumstances after the date on which the statement is made or to reflect the occurrence of unanticipated events. In addition, we cannot assess the impact of each factor on our business or the extent to which any factor, or combination of factors, may cause actual results to differ materially from those contained in any forward-looking statements. Consequently, you should not place undue reliance on forward-looking statements.

 

INDUSTRY AND MARKET DATA

 

This prospectus includes industry data, forecasts and information that we have prepared based, in part, upon data, forecasts and information obtained from independent industry publications and surveys and other information available to us. We caution you not to give undue weight to such projections, assumptions and estimates. Some data contained in this prospectus is also based on our good faith estimates, which are derived from management’s knowledge of the industry and independent sources. Industry publications, surveys and forecasts generally state that the information contained therein has been obtained from sources believed to be reliable; however we have not independently verified any of the data from third-party sources nor have we ascertained the underlying economic assumptions relied upon therein. In addition, statements as to our market position and projections, assumptions and estimates of our future performance and the future performance of our industry are based on data currently available to us, and such estimates involve risks and uncertainties and are subject to change based on various factors, including those discussed under the heading “Risk Factors” in this prospectus.

 

55

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

THE TRANSACTIONS

 

Existing Organization

 

Prior to the completion of this offering and the organizational transactions described below, the Members are the only members of Greenlane Holdings, LLC. Greenlane Holdings, LLC is treated as a partnership for U.S. federal income tax purposes and, as such, is not subject to any U.S. federal entity-level income taxes. Rather, taxable income or loss is included in the U.S. federal income tax returns of Greenlane Holdings, LLC’s members.

 

Greenlane Holdings, Inc. was incorporated as a Delaware corporation on May 2, 2018 to serve as the issuer of the Class A common stock offered hereby.

 

Transactions

 

In connection with the completion of this offering, we will consummate the following organizational transactions:

 

we will amend and restate Greenlane Holdings, LLC’s existing operating agreement effective as of the completion of this offering to, among other things, convert the Members’ existing interests in Greenlane Holdings, LLC into Common Units and appoint Greenlane Holdings, Inc. as the sole manager of  Greenlane Holdings, LLC;

 

we will amend and restate our certificate of incorporation to, among other things, provide for Class A common stock, Class B common stock and Class C common stock;

 

we will issue shares of Class B common stock to the Non-Founder Members on a one-to-one basis with the number of Common Units they own, for nominal consideration, and shares of Class C common stock to the Founder Members on a three-to-one basis with the number of Common Units they own, for nominal consideration;

 

we will issue         shares of our Class A common stock, or           shares if the underwriters exercise in full their option to purchase additional shares of Class A common stock, assuming an initial public offering price at the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page, to the Members upon exchange of an equal number of Common Units, which shares will be sold by the Members as selling stockholders in this offering;

 

we will issue               shares of our Class A common stock to the purchasers in this offering, assuming an initial public offering price at the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page, and will use all of the net proceeds received by us from such issuance to acquire Common Units from Greenlane Holdings, LLC at a purchase price per Common Unit equal to the initial public offering price per share of Class A common stock, less underwriting discounts and commissions, which Common Units, when added to the Common Units we receive from the selling stockholders, will collectively represent           % of Greenlane Holdings, LLC’s outstanding Common Units following this offering, or approximately         % if the underwriters exercise in full their option to purchase additional shares of Class A common stock from the selling stockholders;

 

Greenlane Holdings, LLC intends to use the proceeds from the sale of Common Units to Greenlane Holdings, Inc. as described in “Use of Proceeds,” including to pay the expenses of this offering and for acquisitions of complementary businesses, acquisitions of proprietary brands, dispensary service infrastructure and licenses, capital expenditures for operations and warehouses and other facilities, inventory investment, and working capital and general corporate purposes;

 

the Members will continue to own their Common Units not exchanged for the shares of Series A common stock to be sold by them in this offering and will have no economic interests in Greenlane Holdings, Inc. despite their ownership of Class B common stock and Class C common stock, where “economic interests” means the right to receive any distributions or dividends, whether cash or stock, in connection with their common stock; and

 

Greenlane Holdings, Inc. will enter into (i) a Tax Receivable Agreement with Greenlane Holdings, LLC and the Members and (ii) a Registration Rights Agreement with the Members who, assuming that all of the Common Units of such Members are redeemed or exchanged for newly-issued shares of Class A common stock on a one-to-one basis, will own          shares of Greenlane Holdings, Inc.’s Class A common stock, representing approximately          % of the combined voting power of all of Greenlane Holdings, Inc.’s common stock, or approximately         % if the underwriters exercise in full their option to purchase additional shares of Class A common stock. Although the actual timing and amount of any payments that we make to the Members under the Tax Receivable Agreement will vary, we expect those payments will be significant.

 

56

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Following this offering, Common Units will be redeemable at the election of such Members for newly-issued shares of Class A common stock on a one-to-one basis (and their shares of Class B common stock or Class C common stock, as the case may be, will be cancelled on a one-to-one basis in the case of Class B common stock or three-to-one basis in the case of Class C common stock upon any such issuance). We will have the option to instead make a cash payment equal to a volume weighted average market price of one share of Class A common stock for each Common Unit redeemed (subject to customary adjustments, including for stock splits, stock dividends and reclassifications) in accordance with the terms of the Greenlane Operating Agreement. Our decision to make a cash payment upon a Member’s election will be made by our independent directors (within the meaning of applicable securities laws) who are disinterested.

 

Our corporate structure following this offering, as described above, is commonly referred to as an “Up-C” structure, which is often used by partnerships and limited liability companies when they undertake an initial public offering of their business. The Up-C structure will allow the Members to continue to realize tax benefits associated with owning interests in an entity that is treated as a partnership, or “pass-through” entity, for income tax purposes following this offering. One of these benefits is that future taxable income of Greenlane Holdings, LLC that is allocated to the Members will be taxed on a flow-through basis and therefore will not be subject to corporate taxes at the entity level. Additionally, because the Members may redeem their Common Units for shares of our Class A common stock or, at our option, for cash, the Up-C structure also provides the Members with potential liquidity that holders of non-publicly-traded limited liability companies are not typically afforded. See “Description of Capital Stock.”

 

Greenlane Holdings, Inc. will receive the same benefits as the Members because of our ownership of Common Units in an entity treated as a partnership, or “pass-through” entity, for income tax purposes. As we redeem additional Common Units from the Members under the mechanism described above, we will obtain a step-up in tax basis in our share of Greenlane Holdings, LLC’s assets. This step-up in tax basis will provide us with certain tax benefits, such as future depreciation and amortization deductions that can reduce the taxable income allocable to us. We expect to enter into the Tax Receivable Agreement with Greenlane Holdings, LLC and each of the Members that will provide for the payment by us to the Members of 85% of the amount of tax benefits, if any, that we actually realize (or in some cases are deemed to realize) as a result of (i) increases in tax basis resulting from the redemption of Common Units and (ii) certain other tax benefits attributable to payments made under the Tax Receivable Agreement.

 

For a description of the terms of the Registration Rights Agreement and the Tax Receivable Agreement, see “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions.”

 

Organizational Structure Following this Offering

 

Immediately following the completion of the Transactions, including this offering and assuming an offering price of $         , the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus:  

 

we will be a holding company and our principal asset will be Common Units;

 

we will be the sole manager of Greenlane Holdings, LLC and will control the business and affairs of Greenlane Holdings, LLC and its subsidiaries;

 

our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and the Greenlane Operating Agreement will require that (i) we at all times maintain a ratio of one Common Unit owned by us for each share of Class A common stock issued by us (subject to certain exceptions for treasury shares and shares underlying certain convertible or exchangeable securities), and (ii) Greenlane Holdings, LLC at all times maintain (x) a one-to-one ratio between the number of shares of Class A common stock issued by us and the number of Common Units owned by us, (y) a one-to-one ratio between the number of shares of Class B common stock owned by the Non-Founder Members and the number of Common Units owned by the Non-Founder Members, and (z) a three-to-one ratio between the number of shares of Class C common stock owned by the Founder Members and their affiliates and the number of Common Units owned by the Founder Members and their affiliates;

 

57

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

we will own      Common Units representing        % of the economic interest in Greenlane Holdings, LLC, or            Common Units representing        % of the economic interest in Greenlane Holdings, LLC if the underwriters exercise in full their option to purchase additional shares of Class A common stock, where “economic interests” means the right to receive any distributions, whether cash, property or securities of Greenlane Holdings, LLC, in connection with Common Units;

 

the purchasers in this offering (i) will own            shares of Class A common stock, representing approximately           % of the combined voting power of all of our common stock, or approximately             % if the underwriters exercise in full their option to purchase additional shares of Class A common stock, (ii) will own 100% of the economic interest in us, and (iii) through our ownership of Common Units, indirectly will hold           approximately             % of the economic interest in Greenlane Holdings, LLC, or             % if the underwriters exercise in full their option to purchase additional shares of Class A common stock;

 

the Non-Founder Members will own (i)           Common Units, of which              Common Units will be subject to certain vesting conditions (the “Non-Vested Common Units”), representing        % of the economic interest in Greenlane Holdings, LLC, or            % if the underwriters exercise in full their option to purchase additional shares of Class A common stock, and (ii) through their ownership of Class B common stock, approximately       % of the voting power in Greenlane Holdings, Inc., or approximately           % if the underwriters exercise in full their option to purchase additional shares of Class A common stock;

 

the Founder Members will own (i)          Common Units, representing       % of the economic interest in Greenlane Holdings, LLC, or          % if the underwriters exercise in full their option to purchase additional shares of Class A common stock, and (ii) through their ownership of Class C common stock, approximately            % of the voting power in Greenlane Holdings, Inc., or approximately          % if the underwriters exercise in full their option to purchase additional shares of Class A common stock;

 

following the offering, each Common Unit, other than the Non-Vested Common Units, held by the Members will be immediately redeemable, at the election of such Members, for newly-issued shares of Class A common stock on a one-for-one basis or, at our option, a cash payment equal to a volume weighted average market price of one share of Class A common stock for each Common Unit redeemed (subject to customary adjustments, including for stock splits, stock dividends and reclassifications) in accordance with the terms of the Greenlane Operating Agreement. See “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—The Transactions—Greenlane Operating Agreement.” Our decision to make a cash payment upon a Member’s election will be made by our independent directors (within the meaning of applicable securities laws) who are disinterested. Shares of our Class B common stock and Class C common stock, as the case may be, will be cancelled on a one-to-one or a three-to-one basis, respectively, if we, at the election of a Member, redeem or exchange Common Units of such Member pursuant to the terms of the Greenlane Operating Agreement; and

 

the Members collectively (i) will own Class B common stock and Class C common stock representing approximately         % of the combined voting power of all of our common stock, or approximately         % if the underwriters exercise in full their option to purchase additional shares of Class A common stock, and (ii) will own           % of the economic interest in Greenlane Holdings, LLC, or         %, if the underwriters exercise in full their option to purchase additional shares of Class A common stock, representing a direct interest through the Members’ ownership of Common Units.

 

58

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

As the sole manager of Greenlane Holdings, LLC, we will operate and control all of the business and affairs of Greenlane Holdings, LLC, and, through Greenlane Holdings, LLC, and its subsidiaries, conduct our business. Although we will have a minority economic interest in Greenlane Holdings, LLC, we will have the sole voting interest in, and control the management of, Greenlane Holdings, LLC, and will have the obligation to absorb losses of, and receive benefits from, Greenlane Holdings, LLC, that could be significant. As a result, we have determined that, after the Transactions, Greenlane Holdings, LLC will be a variable interest entity, or VIE, and that we will be the primary beneficiary of Greenlane Holdings, LLC. Accordingly, pursuant to the VIE accounting model, we will consolidate Greenlane Holdings, LLC in our consolidated financial statements and will report a non-controlling interest related to the Common Units held by the Members on our consolidated financial statements. We will have a board of directors and executive officers, but will have no employees. The business operating functions of all of our employees are expected to reside at Greenlane Holdings, LLC or its subsidiaries.

 

The following diagram shows our organizational structure after giving effect to the Transactions, including this offering, assuming an initial public offering price at the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page and no exercise by the underwriters of their option to purchase additional shares of Class A common stock:

 

 

 

59

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

USE OF PROCEEDS

 

Business Objectives

 

Our primary business objectives over the next 12 to 18 months are as follows:

 

  Continue to expand our B2B and B2C business operations and, as our business expands, to open additional distribution facilities, increase our inventory levels, including the inventory levels of our proprietary brands;

 

  Invest in supply chain initiatives that will enable us to meet the exacting requirements of large retail chains in Canada, increase our abilities to service dispensaries and enhance our abilities for international distribution of our products;

 

  Expand our existing product lines, including our specialty packaging offerings and the products offered under our proprietary brands, such as our Higher Standards brand, and additional high-margin product line extensions;

 

  Implement initiatives to improve our existing B2C websites, to develop our new Vapor.com website and to roll out e-commerce websites in different languages;

 

  Relocate our Boca Raton, Florida headquarters to a larger leased or owned facility, and establish additional distribution facilities in North America and Europe;

 

  Invest in our internal IT infrastructure to enhance our accounting and financial reporting capabilities, improve reporting for business decision-making purposes and to enhance the automation of our distribution facilities;

 

  Obtain additional intellectual property or licenses for intellectual property to allow us to fulfill market requirements and meet our suppliers’ expectations;

 

  Hire additional employees to meet our growth strategies and needs; and

 

  Acquire complementary businesses in our sector, including possibly distributors of similar product lines and other specialty products.

  

Use of Funds

We estimate that the net proceeds from our issuance and sale of                shares of Class A common stock in this offering will be approximately $              , assuming an initial public offering price of $                per share, which is the midpoint of the price range listed on the cover page of this prospectus, and after deducting underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses of approximately $                  payable by us.

 

The selling stockholders expect to receive net proceeds of approximately $                from the sale of shares of Class A common stock in this offering, assuming an initial public offering price of $               per share, which is the midpoint of the price range listed on the cover page of this prospectus, and after deducting underwriting discounts and commissions payable by the selling stockholders (or if the underwriters exercise in full their over-allotment option, we estimate that the selling stockholders will receive net proceeds of approximately $               million). We will not receive any proceeds from the sale of shares by the selling stockholders.

 

Each $1.00 increase (decrease) in the assumed initial public offering price of $            per share, the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, would increase (decrease) the net proceeds to us by approximately $             million, assuming that the number of shares offered by us, as set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, remains the same, and after deducting the estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and the estimated offering expenses. We may also increase or decrease the number of shares we are offering. Each increase (decrease) of 1,000,000 shares in the number of shares offered by us would increase (decrease) the net proceeds to us by approximately $              million, assuming that the assumed initial public offering price remains the same, and after deducting the estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and the estimated offering expenses.

 

60

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

We intend to use the net proceeds to us from this offering to purchase Common Units directly from Greenlane Holdings, LLC at a purchase price per Common Unit equal to the initial public offering price per share of Class A common stock, less underwriting discounts and commissions.

 

We intend to cause Greenlane Holdings, LLC to use the proceeds it receives to pay the expenses of this offering, which are estimated at approximately $             , and for the following principal purposes:

 

  ●  Acquisitions of complementary businesses
     
  Acquisitions of proprietary brands, dispensary service infrastructure, licenses
     
  Capital expenditures for systems, operations, warehouses and other facilities
     
  Inventory investment

  

Upon the completion of the offering, we expect that Greenlane Holdings, LLC will have sufficient working capital to support its growth strategies and fund ongoing operations for at least the next 12 months. While we intend to allocate the net funds available to Greenlane Holdings, LLC for the purposes outlined above, there may be circumstances under which, for sound business reasons, a reallocation of funds may be necessary. As a result, our management will retain broad discretion over the allocation of the net proceeds of this offering. See “Risk Factors.”

 

We intend to use a portion of the net proceeds from this offering to fund possible investments in, and acquisitions of, complementary companies or their assets, businesses, partnerships, minority investments, products or technologies. Currently, however, we have no commitments or agreements regarding any such acquisitions or investments. If no suitable acquisitions or investments are identified, the portion of the net proceeds we have allocated for such purposes will be used to fund general corporate activities and working capital requirements.

 

Greenlane Holdings, LLC was profitable and cash flow positive in 2017. While we expect it to be profitable and to generate positive cash flow over the next 12 months, there is no assurance that it will do so, and it may never be profitable or generate positive cash flow again. Our board of directors and management will have broad discretion to direct Greenlane Holdings, LLC in its use of the net proceeds of this offering. See “Risk Factors.”

 

Total Funds Available

Assuming completion of this offering and the allocation of the net proceeds therefrom, Greenlane Holdings, LLC will have approximately $                       in available funds (representing the net proceeds of this offering and approximately $8,279,000 in estimated working capital as of March 31, 2018). We define working capital as current assets, less current liabilities. Greenlane Holdings, LLC, though an affiliate, currently has an existing secured line of credit from a U.S. commercial bank in the amount of $8,000,000 that is primarily utilized for its inventory needs. We are currently negotiating with that bank to increase this line of credit. See “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations—Line of Credit.”

 

Until we use the net proceeds of this offering in our business, such funds will be managed through a treasury management program under the supervision of our Chief Financial Officer and invested in short-term, interest-bearing investments, which may include interest-bearing bank accounts, money market funds, certificates of deposit and U.S. government securities.

 

In addition, in an effort to reduce our interest expense on our bank line of credit, we may use such net proceeds to repay all or a portion of our borrowings under our line of credit, but only if we will be permitted under our line of credit to re-borrow such amounts, and to use such funds when required for one or more of the purposes outlined above.

 

61

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

DIVIDEND POLICY

 

We currently do not plan to declare cash dividends on shares of our Class A common stock in the foreseeable future. Holders of our Class B common stock and our Class C common stock are not entitled to participate in any dividends declared by our board of directors. No decision has been made with respect to the amount and timing of dividend payments, if any.  However, we expect that we will retain all of our future earnings for use in the operation and expansion of our business. Subject to the foregoing, the payment of cash dividends in the future, if any, to holders of Class A common stock will be at the discretion of our board of directors and will depend upon, among other things, our future operations and earnings, capital requirements and surplus, general financial conditions, contractual restrictions, including restrictions in Greenlane Holdings, LLC’s debt agreements, number of shares of Class A common stock outstanding and other factors our board of directors may deem relevant.

 

As a holding company, substantially all of our operations are carried out by Greenlane Holdings, LLC and its subsidiaries. As a result, our ability to pay dividends depends on our receipt of loans, distributions or dividends and other payments from our operating subsidiaries, which may further restrict our ability to make distributions or pay dividends as a result of restrictions on their ability to pay dividends to us under future indebtedness that we or they may incur. Under its current credit agreement, Greenlane Holdings, LLC is restricted from making distributions or paying cash dividends or making certain other restricted payments, and we expect these restrictions to continue in the future, which may in turn limit our ability to pay dividends on our Class A common stock. Our ability to pay dividends may also be restricted by the terms of any future credit agreement or any future debt or preferred equity securities of us or our subsidiaries. See “Risk Factors -- Risks Related to this Offering and Ownership of Our Class A Common Stock” and “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations—Line of Credit.”

 

62

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

CAPITALIZATION

 

The following table sets forth the cash and cash equivalents and capitalization as of March 31, 2018 of:

 

  Greenlane Holdings, LLC and its subsidiaries on an actual basis;

 

  Greenlane Holdings, Inc. and its subsidiaries on a pro forma basis after giving effect to the organizational transactions described under “The Transactions”, excluding this offering, and

 

  Greenlane Holdings, Inc. and its subsidiaries on a pro forma after giving effect to the organizational transactions described under “The Transactions”, and further adjusted to include the sale of shares of Class A common stock in this offering at an assumed initial public offering price of $ per share (which is the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus), after deducting the estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses that we expect to pay, and the application of the net proceeds from this offering as described under “Use of Proceeds.”

 

This table should be read in conjunction with “Use of Proceeds”, “Selected Historical Consolidated Financial and Other Data”, “Unaudited Pro Forma Consolidated Financial Information”, “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations”, and the consolidated financial statements and notes thereto appearing elsewhere in this prospectus.

  

   As of March 31, 2018 
   Greenlane Holdings, LLC Actual   Pro Forma Greenlane Holdings, Inc.   Pro Forma As Adjusted Greenlane Holdings, Inc. (2) 
       (unaudited)     
             
Cash  $3,099,076   $3,099,076   $  
Debt, including current portion               
Note payable   175,714    175,714      
Due to parent - line of credit   4,690,000    4,690,000      
Loans payable to members   565,249    565,249      
Total long term debt, including current portion   5,430,963    5,430,963      
Redeemable Class B Units   8,890,000    -      
                
Total members/stockholders’ equity:               
Members’ equity               
Class A units   6,449,921    -      
Class B units   -    -      
Common units   -    -      
Profits interest units   -           
Stockholders’ equity               
Class A common stock, par value $0.0001 per share,         shares authorized on a pro forma basis,         shares issued and outstanding on an as adjusted basis   -           
Class B common stock, par value $0.0001 per share,         shares authorized on a pro forma basis,         shares issued and outstanding on an as adjusted basis   -           
Class C common stock, par value $0.0001 per share,         shares authorized on a pro forma basis,         shares issued and outstanding on an as adjusted basis   -           
Additional paid-in-capital   -           
Retained earnings   4,446,177           
Accumulated other comprehensive loss   (228,636)          
Total members’/stockholders’ equity   10,667,462           
Non-controlling interest (1)   -           
Total capitalization  $24,988,425   $     $  

 

 

(1) On a pro forma basis and a pro forma as adjusted basis, includes the ownership interests not owned by Greenlane Holdings, Inc., which represents         % of the outstanding Common Units of Greenlane Holdings, LLC, held by the Members.

(2) Each $1.00 increase or decrease in the assumed initial public offering price of $         per share (which is the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus) would increase or decrease each of additional paid-in capital, total members’ / stockholders’ equity and total capitalization on a pro forma as adjusted basis by approximately $             million, assuming the number of shares offered, as set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, remains the same, and after deducting the estimated underwriting discounts and commissions.

 

63

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

In the table above, the number of shares of Class A common stock outstanding as of March 31, 2018 on a pro forma as adjusted basis excludes:

 

           shares of our Class A common stock that may be issuable upon exercise of the Members’ rights to redeem their Common Units, assuming an offering price per share of $           , the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus;

 

           shares of our Class A common stock reserved for future issuance under our 2018 Equity Incentive Plan, including           shares of Class A common stock (based on an assumed initial public offering price in this offering of $           per share, the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus) issuable upon the exercise of stock options our board of directors has approved in connection with this offering; and

  

           shares of Class A common stock issuable upon the exercise of the compensation warrants to be issued to the underwriters as underwriter compensation in this offering, assuming an offering price per share of $           , the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus.

 

The shares of Class B common stock to be outstanding on a pro forma and pro forma as adjusted basis is based on           Common Units held by the Non-Founder Members as of March 31, 2018 (based on an assumed initial public offering price in this offering of $           per share, the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus). The shares of Class C common stock to be outstanding on a pro forma and pro forma as adjusted basis following this offering is based on           Common Units held by the Founder Members and their affiliates as of March 31, 2018 (based on an assumed initial public offering price in this offering of $           per share, the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus).

 

The foregoing table assumes no exercise of the underwriters’ option to purchase additional shares of Class A common stock in this offering from the selling stockholders.

 

64

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

DILUTION

 

The Members will maintain holdings of Common Units in Greenlane Holdings, LLC after the Transactions. Because the Members will not own any Class A common stock or have any right to receive distributions from Greenlane Holdings, Inc. immediately following this offering, absent further action involving the redemption or exchange of by the Members Common Units for shares of our Class A common stock, we have presented the dilution in pro forma net tangible book value per share both before and after this offering assuming that all of the holders of Common Units (other than our company) had their Common Units redeemed or exchanged for newly-issued shares of Class A common stock on a one-to-one basis (rather than for cash) and the cancellation for no consideration of all of their shares of Class B common stock and Class C common stock (which are not entitled to receive distributions or dividends, whether cash or stock from our company) in order to more meaningfully present the potential dilutive impact on the investors in this offering. We refer to the assumed redemption or exchange of all Common Units for shares of Class A common stock as described in the previous sentence as the “Assumed Redemption.”

 

If you purchase our Class A common stock in this offering, your ownership interest will be immediately diluted to the extent of the difference between the initial public offering price per share of our Class A common stock and the net tangible book value per share of our Class A common stock after this offering. Dilution results from the fact that the initial public offering price per share of our Class A common stock is substantially in excess of the book value per share of Class A common stock attributable to the existing stockholders for the currently outstanding shares of Class A common stock after giving effect to the Assumed Redemption.

 

Our net tangible book value as of March 31, 2018 was $9.5 million, or $           per share of our Class A common stock owned by our Founder and Non-Founder Members. Pro forma net tangible book value represents the amount of our total tangible assets (total assets less total intangible assets) less total liabilities, after giving effect to the assumed completion of the organizational transactions described under “The Transactions.” Pro forma net tangible book value per share represents our pro forma net tangible book value divided by the total number of shares of Class A common stock outstanding as of March 31, 2018 (           share, assuming an initial offering price of $           per share, the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover of this prospectus), after giving effect to the Transactions described under “The Transactions” and the “Assumed Redemption.”

 

After giving effect to the sale of the           shares of Class A common stock offered by us in this offering at an assumed initial public offering price of $           per share, the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover of this prospectus, less estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us, our net tangible book value as of March 31, 2018 would have been approximately $           million, or $           per share of Class A common stock after giving effect to the Transactions described under the caption “The Transactions” and the Assumed Redemption. This represents an immediate increase in net tangible book value to our existing stockholders of $           per share and an immediate dilution to purchasers in this offering of $           per share. The following table illustrates this pro forma per share dilution in net tangible book value to purchasers.

 

Assumed initial public offering price per share   $          
Net tangible book value per share as of March 31, 2018      
Increase per share attributable to purchasers in this offering      
Net tangible book value per share after giving effect to this offering      
Dilution in net tangible book value per share to purchasers in this offering      

 

A $1.00 increase or decrease in the assumed initial public offering price of $           per share, the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover of this prospectus, would increase or decrease net tangible book value by $           million, or $           per share, and would increase or decrease the dilution per share to purchasers in this offering by $           , based on the assumptions set forth above.

 

65

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

The following table presents, as of March 31, 2018, after giving effect to the Assumed Redemption and the sale by us of shares of our Class A common stock in this offering at the assumed initial public offering price of $            per share, which is the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, the difference between the existing stockholders, which are the Members, and the investors purchasing shares of our Class A common stock in this offering with respect to the number of shares of our common stock purchased from us, the total consideration paid or to be paid to us, and the average price per share paid or to be paid to us, before deducting estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us:

 

   Shares Purchased   Total Consideration   Average Price 
   Number   Percent   Amount   Percent   Per Share 
Existing stockholders                            %                                 %                   
New investors                          
Total          %               %     

 

Each $1.00 increase or decrease in the assumed initial public offering price of $           per share, which is the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, would increase or decrease, as applicable, the total consideration paid by investors purchasing shares in this offering and total consideration paid by all stockholders by approximately $           million, assuming the number of shares of our Class A common stock offered by us, as set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, remains the same and after deducting estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us.

 

Except as otherwise indicated, the above discussion and tables assume no exercise of the underwriters’ option to purchase additional shares of our Class A common stock from the selling stockholders. If the underwriters’ option to purchase additional shares of our Class A common stock were exercised in full, our existing stockholders, which are the Members, would own           % and the investors purchasing shares of our Class A common stock in this offering would own           % of the total number of shares of our Class A common stock outstanding immediately after completion of this offering, assuming the redemption or exchange of all outstanding Common Units for shares of Class A common stock.

 

In the discussion above, the number of shares of our Class A common stock that will be outstanding after this offering excludes:

 

          shares of Class A common stock that may be issuable upon the redemption of unvested Common Units to be issued in connection with the Transactions in respect of unvested profits interests in Greenlane Holdings, LLC outstanding as of March 31, 2018 that have since been exchanged for unvested membership interests in Greenlane Holdings, LLC;

 

          shares of our Class A common stock reserved for future issuance under our 2018 Equity Incentive Plan, including           shares of Class A common stock (based on an assumed initial public offering price in this offering of $           per share, the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus) issuable upon the exercise of stock options our board of directors has approved in connection with this offering; and

 

          shares of Class A common stock issuable upon the exercise of the compensation warrants to be issued to the underwriters as underwriter compensation in this offering, assuming an offering price per share of $           , the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus.

 

66

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

SELECTED HISTORICAL CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL AND OTHER DATA

 

The following tables set forth the selected consolidated historical financial information and other data for Greenlane Holdings, LLC and its subsidiaries. Greenlane Holdings, LLC is our predecessor for financial reporting purposes. You should read the information set forth below in conjunction with “Use of Proceeds,” “Capitalization,” “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and the consolidated historical financial statements and notes thereto of Greenlane Holdings, LLC included elsewhere in this prospectus.

 

The statements of operations data for the years ended December 31, 2017 and 2016 and the balance sheet data as of December 31, 2017 and 2016 are derived from the audited consolidated financial statements of Greenlane Holdings, LLC included elsewhere in this prospectus. The statements of income data for the three months ended March 31, 2018 and 2017 and the balance sheet data as of March 31, 2018 are derived from Greenlane Holdings, LLC’s unaudited condensed consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this prospectus. Results of interim periods are not necessarily indicative of the results expected for a full year or for future periods. The selected consolidated financial and other data of our company, Greenlane Holdings, Inc., has not been presented as we are a newly-incorporated entity, have had no business transactions or activities to date and had no assets or liabilities during the periods presented in this section.

 

See “Index to Consolidated Financial Statements.”

 

   

Three Months Ended

March 31,

   

Year Ended

December 31,

 
    2018     2017     2017     2016  
    (unaudited)              
Statement of Operations Data:                        
Net sales   $ 43,257,643     $ 19,178,993     $ 88,259,975     $ 66,689,944  
Gross profit     9,053,094       4,357,677       20,570,397       14,954,003  
Operating expenses     6,727,112       3,710,264       17,854,624       14,839,513  
Income from operations     2,325,982       647,413       2,715,773       114,490  
Other income (expense)     54,564       (46,276 )     (241,683 )     81,422  
Income before income taxes     2,380,546       601,137       2,474,090       195,912  
Net income     2,298,729       563,755       2,291,557       86,985  
                                 
Other Data:                                
EBITDA(1)   $ 2,665,214     $ 806,374     $ 3,535,009     $ 951,945  

 

(1)EBITDA is a Non-GAAP financial measure and generally differs from income from operations, the most directly comparable GAAP financial measure. See “Management’s Discussion and Analyis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations—Non-GAAP Financial Measure-EBITDA” for more information.

 

   March 31,   As of
December 31,
 
   2018   2017   2016 
   (unaudited)         
Balance Sheet Data:            
             
Cash  $3,099,076   $2,080,397   $1,691,196 
Accounts receivable, net   5,713,790    3,759,551    1,336,982 
Inventories   28,442,048    14,159,693    5,618,328 
Total current assets   44,327,595    23,288,456    10,003,631 
Goodwill and intangible assets, net   10,069,022    4,769,957    4,748,092 
Total assets   56,351,978    29,571,827    15,999,866 
                
Total current liabilities   36,048,668    19,519,682    6,439,943 
Total liabilities   36,794,516    20,175,994    8,551,227 
Total members’ equity   10,667,462    9,395,833    7,448,639 
Total liabilities and members’ equity   56,351,978    29,571,827    15,999,866 

 

67

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

UNAUDITED PRO FORMA CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL INFORMATION

 

The following summary unaudited pro forma consolidated statement of operations data for the year ended December 31, 2017 and the three months ended March 31, 2018 presents our consolidated results of operations after giving effect to (i) the organizational transactions described under “The Transactions,” (ii) this offering and the use of proceeds from this offering, and (iii) the acquisition by Greenlane Holdings, LLC of Better Life Holdings, LLC, as if each had been completed as of January 1, 2017. The following pro forma consolidated balance sheet data presents our consolidated financial position as of March 31, 2018 after giving effect to (i) the organizational transactions described under “The Transactions,” and (ii) this offering and the use of proceeds from this offering, as if each had been completed as of March 31, 2018.  

 

As a public company, we will be implementing additional procedures and processes for the purpose of addressing the standards and requirements applicable to public companies. We expect to incur additional annual expenses related to these steps and, among other things, additional directors’ and officers’ liability insurance, director fees, reporting requirements of the SEC transfer agent fees, hiring additional accounting, legal and administrative personnel, increased auditing and legal fees and similar expenses. We have not included any pro forma adjustments relating to these costs.

 

The unaudited pro forma consolidated financial information has been prepared based on the historical financial statements of Greenlane Holdings, LLC, our predecessor, and the assumptions and adjustments as described in the notes to the unaudited pro forma consolidated financial information. The pro forma adjustments are based upon available information and methodologies that are factually supportable and directly attributable to the Transactions. In addition, the unaudited pro forma consolidated statements of income reflect only those adjustments that are expected to have a continuing impact on our results of operations. The unaudited pro forma consolidated financial statements are presented for illustrative purposes only and do not purport to represent our consolidated results of operations or consolidated financial position that would actually have occurred had the Transactions and Greenlane Holdings, LLC’s acquisition of Better Life Holdings, LLC referred to above been consummated on the dates assumed or to project our consolidated results of operations or consolidated financial position for any future date or period.

 

As described in greater detail under “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—The Transactions—Tax Receivable Agreement,” in connection with the completion of this offering, we will enter into the Tax Receivable Agreement with the Members that will provide for the payment by our company to the Members of 85% of the amount of tax benefits, if any, that we actually realize as a result of (i) increases in the tax basis of assets of Greenlane Holdings, LLC resulting from any redemptions or exchanges of Common Units as described under “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—The Transactions—Greenlane Operating Agreement—Common Unit Redemption Right” and (ii) certain other tax benefits related to our making payments under the Tax Receivable Agreement. Due to the uncertainty in the amount and timing of future exchanges of Common Units by the Members, the unaudited pro forma consolidated financial information assumes that no exchanges of Common Units have occurred and therefore no increases in tax basis in Greenlane Holdings, LLC’s assets or other tax benefits that may be realized thereunder have been assumed in the unaudited pro forma consolidated financial information. However, if all of the Members were to exchange their Common Units, we would recognize a deferred tax asset of approximately $            million and a liability of approximately $            million, assuming (i) all exchanges occurred on the same day; (ii) a price of $            per share (the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus); (iii) a constant corporate tax rate of           %; (iv) we will have sufficient taxable income to fully utilize the tax benefits; and (v) no material changes in tax law. For each 5% increase (decrease) in the amount of Common Units exchanged by the Members, our deferred tax asset would increase (decrease) by approximately $            million and the related liability would increase (decrease) by approximately $            million, assuming that the price per share and corporate tax rate remain the same. For each $1.00 increase (decrease) in the assumed share price of $            per share, our deferred tax asset would increase (decrease) by approximately $            million and the related liability would increase (decrease) by approximately $            million, assuming that the number of Common Units exchanged by the Members and the corporate tax rate remain the same. These amounts are estimates and have been prepared for informational purposes only. The actual amount of deferred tax assets and related liabilities that we will recognize will differ based on, among other things, the timing of the exchanges, the price of our shares of Class A common stock at the time of the exchange, and the tax rates then in effect.

 

The presentation of the unaudited pro forma consolidated financial information is prepared in conformity with Article 11 of Regulation S-X.

 

Our historical financial information has been derived from our consolidated financial statements and accompanying notes included elsewhere in this prospectus. The unaudited pro forma consolidated financial information should be read together with “Capitalization,” “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations,” the historical consolidated financial statements and related notes thereto of Greenlane Holdings, LLC included elsewhere in this prospectus and the historical consolidated financial statements and notes thereto of Better Life Holdings, LLC included elsewhere in this prospectus.

 

68

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Greenlane Holdings, Inc.

Unaudited Pro Forma Condensed Consolidated Balance Sheet

As of March 31, 2018

 

   Historical Greenlane Holdings, LLC (a)   Transactions    As
Adjusted Before Offering
   Offering Adjustments   Pro Forma Greenlane Holdings, Inc.  
ASSETS                     
Current assets                             
Cash  $3,099,076   $-    $3,099,076   $ $  
Accounts receivable, net   5,713,790       -     5,713,790    -    
Inventories, net   28,442,048    -     28,442,048    -    
Vendor deposits   5,341,115    -     5,341,115    -    
Other current assets   1,731,566    -     1,731,566    -    
Total current assets   44,327,595    -     44,327,595        
                              
Property and equipment, net   1,012,426    -     1,012,426    -    
Intangible assets, net   4,623,331    -     4,623,331    -    
Goodwill   5,445,691    -     5,445,691    -    
Investments in associated entities   942,935    -     942,935    -    
Total assets  $56,351,978   $-    $56,351,978   $ $  
                              
LIABILITIES                             
Current liabilities                             
Accounts payable  $27,159,894   $-    $27,159,894   $- $
Accrued expenses   3,931,627    -     3,931,627    -    
Due to parent   4,690,000    -     4,690,000    -    
Note payable   175,714    -     175,714    -  
Current portion of capital lease obligations   91,433    -     91,433    -  
Current portion of Tax Receivable Agreement liability   -    -     -     (d)         
Total current liabilities   36,048,668    -     36,048,668              
                              
Loans payable to shareholders   565,249    -     565,249    -    
Capital lease obligations   180,599    -     180,599    -    
Tax Receivable Agreement liability, net of current portion   -    -     -    (d)        
Total long-term liabilities   745,848    -     745,848              
Total liabilities   36,794,516    -     36,794,516              
                              
Commitments and contingencies                             
                              
REDEEMABLE CLASS B UNITS   8,890,000    (8,890,000)(c)    -    -    
                              
EQUITY                             
Members’ equity                             
Class A units   6,449,921     (c)         -         
Class B units   -     (c)         -         
Common Units   -    8,890,000(c)    8,890,000    -         
Profits interest units   -     (b)         -         
Stockholders’ equity                             
Class A common stock, par value $0.0001 per share,         shares authorized on a pro forma basis,        shares issued and outstanding on an as adjusted basis   -       (c)          (e)        
Class B common stock, par value $0.0001 per share,         shares authorized on a pro forma basis,        shares issued and outstanding on an as adjusted basis   -       (c)                   
Class C common stock, par value $0.0001 per share,         shares authorized on a pro forma basis,        shares issued and outstanding on an as adjusted basis        (c)                   
Additional paid-in-capital   -     (c)         (e)(f)(d) 
Retained earnings   4,446,177     (g)         (d)(g) 
Accumulated other comprehensive loss   (228,636)   -     (228,636)   -    
Total members’/stockholders’ equity   10,667,462                         
Total liabilities, redeemable Class B units and members’/stockholders’ equity  $56,351,978    $      $     $ $    

 

See accompanying Notes to the Unaudited Pro Forma Condensed Consolidated Balance Sheet

 

69

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Greenlane Holdings, Inc.

Notes to Unaudited Pro Forma Condensed Consolidated Balance Sheet

 

(a)

Greenlane Holdings, Inc. was incorporated on May 2, 2018, and will have no material assets or results of operations until the completion of this offering. As a result, its historical financial position is not shown in a separate column in this unaudited pro forma condensed consolidated balance sheet.

   
(b) Profits interest unit holders will continue to own Common Units after the Transactions and may, subject to contractual stipulations following the completion of this offering, exchange their Common Units for shares of our Class A common stock.
   
(c) In connection with the completion of this offering, we will consummate the following organizational transactions:

 

(1)we will amend and restate Greenlane Holdings, LLC’s existing operating agreement effective as of the completion of this offering to, among other things, convert the Members’ existing interests in Greenlane Holdings, LLC into Common Units and appoint Greenlane Holdings, Inc. as the manager of Greenlane Holdings, LLC;

 

(2)we will amend and restate our certificate of incorporation to, among other things, provide for Class A common stock, Class B common stock and Class C common stock;
   
(3)we will issue shares of Class B common stock to the Non-Founder Members on a one-to-one basis with the number of Common Units they own, for nominal consideration, and shares of Class C common stock to the Founder Members on a three-to-one basis with the number of Common Units they own, for nominal consideration;
   

  (4) we will issue             shares of our Class A common stock to the purchasers in this offering in exchange for net proceeds of approximately $         million based upon an assumed initial public offering price of $        per share (which is the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus);
     
(5)we will use all of the net proceeds from this offering to purchase newly-issued Common Units directly from Greenlane Holdings, LLC at a price per Common Unit equal to the initial public offering price per share of Class A common stock in this offering less the underwriting discounts and commissions; and
   
 (6)we will receive             Common Units (or           Common Units if the underwriters exercise in full their option to purchase additional shares of Class A common stock) directly from the Members as selling stockholders in exchange for           shares of Class A common stock (or               shares if the underwriters exercise in full their option to purchase additional shares of Class A common stock), which Common Units will represent         % of Greenlane Holdings, LLC’s outstanding Common Units following this offering (or          % if the underwriters exercise in full their option to purchase additional shares of Class A common stock);

 

(d) We will receive the same benefits as the Members because of our ownership of Common Units in an entity treated as a partnership, or “pass-through” entity, for income tax purposes. As we redeem additional Common Units from the Members under the mechanism described above, we will obtain a step-up in tax basis in our share of Greenlane Holdings, LLC’s assets. This step-up in tax basis will provide us with certain tax benefits, such as future depreciation and amortization deductions that can reduce the taxable income allocable to us. We expect to enter into the Tax Receivable Agreement with Greenlane Holdings, LLC and each of the Members that will provide for the payment by us to the Members of 85% of the amount of tax benefits, if any, that we actually realize (or in some cases are deemed to realize) as a result of (i) increases in tax basis resulting from the redemption of Common Units and (ii) certain other tax benefits attributable to payments made under the Tax Receivable Agreement. For a description of the terms of the Registration Rights Agreement and the Tax Receivable Agreement, see “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions.”

 

The net impact of the adjustments to net deferred taxes and the Tax Receivable Agreement liability of $         has been recorded as an increase to additional paid-in capital, as these adjustments arise from equity transactions of our company.

 

The amounts to be recorded for both the net deferred tax assets and the liability for our obligations under the Tax Receivable Agreement have been estimated. All of the effects of changes to both the net deferred tax assets and our obligations under the Tax Receivable Agreement after the date of the purchase will be included in net income. Similarly, the effect of subsequent changes in the enacted tax rates will be included in net income.

 

70

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

  

(e) We estimate that the net proceeds from our issuance and sale of shares of Class A common stock in this offering will be approximately $                      , assuming an initial public offering price of $           per share, which is the midpoint of the price range listed on the cover page of this prospectus, and after deducting underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses of approximately $                     payable by us. A reconciliation on the gross proceeds from this offering to the net proceeds is set forth below:

 

  Assumed initial public offering price per share  $ 
  Shares of Class A common stock issued in this offering     
  Gross proceeds     
  Less: underwriting discounts and commissions     
  Less: offering expenses     
  Net proceeds  $    

 

(f) We intend to use the proceeds received by us from this offering to purchase            Common Units directly from Greenlane Holdings, LLC at a price per Common Unit equal to the initial public offering price per share of Class A common stock in this offering, less underwriting discounts and commissions. We will not receive any proceeds from the sale of Class A common stock by the selling stockholders, including any shares sold to the underwriters upon exercise of their right to purchase additional shares of Class A common stock. We will receive Common Units from the selling stockholders in exchange for the shares of Class A common stock to be sold by the selling stockholders in this offering. We intend to cause Greenlane Holdings, LLC to use the net proceeds from the sale of Common Units to us to pay the expenses of this offering and for acquisitions of complementary businesses, acquisitions of proprietary brands, dispensary service infrastructure and licenses, capital expenditures for operations and warehouses and other facilities, inventory investment, and working capital and general corporate purposes. See “Use of Proceeds.”

  

(g) The reconciliation of Greenlane Holdings, LLC Members’ income to Greenlane Holdings, Inc. retained earnings as of March 31, 2018 is as follows ($ in thousands):

 

  Retained earnings — “Transactions” Column    
  Members’ deficit at Greenlane Holdings, LLC  $ 
  Non-controlling interest in Greenlane Holdings, LLC by Members     
  Retained earnings     
  Retained earnings — “Offering Adjustments” Column     
  Offset to the non-controlling interest     
  Retained earnings — “Offering Adjustments” column     
  Retained earnings, Historical Greenlane Holdings, LLC     
  Total pro forma Greenlane Holdings, Inc. retained earnings  $ 

 

71

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Greenlane Holdings, Inc.

Unaudited Pro Forma Interim Condensed Consolidated Statement of Operations

For The Three Months Ended March 31, 2018

 

   Historical
Greenlane
Holdings, LLC
(a)
   Historical
Better Life
Holdings, LLC
(b)
   Business
Combination
Adjustments
(c)
   Greenlane
Holdings, LLC
Pro Forma
   Transactions
Adjustments
   As
Adjusted
Before
Offering
   Offering
Adjustments
   Pro Forma
Greenlane
Holdings, Inc.
 
                                 
Net sales  $43,257,643   $2,564,582   $(496,398)(c)  $45,325,827   $-   $45,325,827   $-   $ 
Cost of sales   34,204,549    1,913,692    (496,398)(c)   35,621,843    -    35,621,843    -     
Gross profit   9,053,094    650,890    -    9,703,984    -    9,703,984    -    
Operating expenses:                                        
Salaries, benefits and payroll taxes   2,947,006    295,284    -    3,242,290    -    3,242,290     (d)     
General and administrative   3,534,389    261,764    (134,186 )(c)   3,661,967    -    3,661,967    -    3,661,967 
Depreciation and amortization   245,717    4,533    161,525(c)   411,775    -    411,775    -     
Total operating expenses   6,727,112    561,581    27,339    7,316,032    -    7,316,032           
Income from operations   2,325,982    89,309    (27,339)   2,387,952    -    2,387,952           
Other income (expense):                                        
Interest expense   (38,951)   (324)   -    (39,275)   -    (39,275)   -    
Other income (loss), net   93,515    2,408    -    95,923    -    95,923    -     
Other income (expense)   54,564    2,084    -    56,648    -    56,648    -     
Income before income taxes   2,380,546    91,393    (27,339)   2,444,600    -    2,444,600    -     
Provision for income taxes   81,817    -    -    81,817    -    -     (e)     
Net income (loss)  $2,298,729   $91,393   $(27,339)  $2,362,783   $-   $2,444,600   $    $  
Net income attributable to non-controlling interests                  -     (f)               
Net income attributable to Greenlane Holdings, Inc.                 $2,362,783   $    $    $    $  
Pro-forma net income per share data (g):                                        
Weighted average shares of Class A common stock outstanding                                        
Basic                                        
Diluted                                        
Net income available to Class A common stock per share:                                        
Basic                                     $  
Diluted                                     $  

 

See accompanying Notes to the Unaudited Pro Forma Interim Condensed Consolidated Statement of Operations

 

72

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Greenlane Holdings, LLC

Notes to Unaudited Pro Forma Interim Condensed Consolidated Statement of Operations

 

(a) Greenlane Holdings, Inc. was formed on May 2, 2018, and will have no results of operations until the completion of this offering. Therefore, its historical results of operations are not shown in a separate column in this unaudited pro forma interim condensed consolidated statement of operations.
   
(b) Better Life Holdings, LLC’s financial statements presented in the accompanying unaudited pro forma interim condensed consolidated statement of operations for the three months ended March 31, 2018 reflect the historical results of operations for the period starting January 1 through February 19, 2018. The operating results of Better Life Holdings, LLC since the February 20, 2018 date of acquisition have been included in our historical results of operations for the three months ended March 31, 2018.
   
(c) In accordance with the rules of Article 11 of Regulation S-X, the following adjustments were made for the acquisition of Better Life Holdings, LLC:

 

(1)The adjustment to net sales represents the eliminating consolidation entries to remove total merchandise sales to Better Life Holdings, LLC. For the three months ended March 31, 2018, approximately $496,000 of revenue was recorded as a result of sales to Better Life Holdings, LLC.

 

(2)The adjustment to cost of sales represents the cost incurred by Better Life Holdings, LLC for the three months ended March 31, 2018, related to product purchased from Greenlane Holdings, LLC.

 

(3)Increased depreciation and amortization expense reflects identified intangible assets in the acquisition of Better Life Holdings, LLC. The weighted-average amortization period for all intangibles acquired is five years.

 

(4)Direct, incremental transaction costs, which are reflected in our interim condensed consolidated results of operations for the three months ended March 31, 2018, are removed from general and administrative expenses.

 

(d) Represents the increase in compensation expense we expect to incur following the completion of this offering. We expect to grant options to purchase approximately       shares of our Class A common stock to certain of our directors, executive officers and other employees in connection with this offering. This amount was calculated assuming the stock options were granted on          with the stock options having an exercise price equal to $      per share, the assumed initial public offering price based on the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus. The grant date fair values of the stock options were determined using the Black-Scholes valuation model using the following assumptions:

 

  Expected volatility    %
  Expected dividend yield   %
  Expected term (in years)     
  Risk-free interest rate    %

 

(e) Greenlane Holdings, LLC is a limited liability company and is treated as a partnership for U.S. federal and most applicable state and local income tax purposes. As a result, it is not liable for U.S. federal or state and local income taxes in most jurisdictions in which we operate, and the income, expenses, gains and losses are reported on the returns of our members. It is subject to state and local income tax in certain jurisdictions in which it is not treated like a partnership, where it pays income taxes. After the consummation of this offering, we will become subject to U.S. federal, state and local income taxes with respect to our allocable share of any taxable income of Greenlane Holdings, LLC and will be taxed at the prevailing corporate tax rates. In addition to tax expenses, we also will incur expenses related to our operations, plus payments under the Tax Receivable Agreement, which will be significant. After the consummation of this offering, pursuant to the Greenlane Operating Agreement, Greenlane Holdings, LLC will generally make pro rata tax distributions to its members in an amount sufficient to fund all or part of their tax obligations with respect to the taxable income of Greenlane Holdings, LLC that is allocated to them and possibly in excess of such amount. See “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—Greenlane Operating Agreement—Distributions.” As a result, the unaudited pro forma consolidated statements of income reflect adjustments to our income tax expense to reflect an effective income tax rate of        % for the three months ended March 31, 2018, which was calculated assuming the U.S. federal rates currently in effect and the highest statutory rates apportioned to each applicable state, local and foreign jurisdiction.

 

The income tax expense for the offering adjustments is determined using the Founder Members’ economic interest in Greenlane Holdings, LLC of         % after giving effect to the issuance of shares of Class A common stock in this offering. The effective tax rate derived from the face of the unaudited pro forma consolidated statement of income will be lower than the stated effective tax rate because the effective tax rate is applied to only        % of the income before taxes based on Greenlane Holdings, Inc.’s economic interest in Greenlane Holdings, LLC. Our pro forma allocable share of taxable income from Greenlane Holdings, LLC was $        , and our income tax was $       for the three months ended March 31, 2018.

 

73

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

(f) Upon completion of the Transactions, Greenlane Holdings, Inc. will become the sole managing member of Greenlane Holdings, LLC. As the manager of Greenlane Holdings, LLC, we will operate and control all of the business and affairs of Greenlane Holdings, LLC, and, through Greenlane Holdings, LLC and its subsidiaries, conduct our business. Although we will have a minority economic interest in Greenlane Holdings, LLC, we will have the sole voting interest in, and control the management of, Greenlane Holdings, LLC, and will have the obligation to absorb losses of, and receive benefits from, Greenlane Holdings, LLC, that could be significant. As a result, we have determined that, after the Transactions, Greenlane Holdings, LLC will be a variable interest entity, or VIE, and that we will be the primary beneficiary of Greenlane Holdings, LLC. Accordingly, pursuant to the VIE accounting model, we will consolidate Greenlane Holdings, LLC in our consolidated financial statements and will report a non-controlling interest related to the Common Units held by the Members on our consolidated financial statements.

 

The Transactions adjustments include adjustments to report pro forma Greenlane Holdings, LLC net income attributable to non-controlling interests equal to the Members’ economic interest in Greenlane Holdings, LLC of         % after giving effect to the conversion of Common Units for shares of Class A common stock.

 

The offering adjustments include adjustments to report a non-controlling interest equal to the Members’ economic interest in Greenlane Holdings, LLC of        %, after giving effect to the issuance of shares of Class A common stock in this offering and the Members’ conversion of their ownership interest in Common Units of Greenlane Holdings, LLC for shares of Class A common stock based on the pro forma Greenlane Holdings, LLC. Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and the Greenlane Operating Agreement will require that we and Greenlane Holdings, LLC, respectively, at all times maintain (i) a ratio of one Common Unit owned by us for each share of Class A common stock issued by us (subject to certain exceptions for treasury shares and shares underlying certain convertible or exchangeable securities), (ii) a one-to-one ratio between the number of shares of Class B common stock owned by the Non-Founder Members and the number of Common Units owned by the Non-Founder Members and (iii) a three-to-one ratio between the number of shares of Class C common stock owned by the Founder Members and the number of Common Units owned by the Founder Members or their affiliates.

 

(g)Pro forma basic net income per share is computed by dividing the net income available to Class A common stockholders by the weighted-average shares of Class A common stock outstanding during the period. Pro forma diluted net income per share is computed by adjusting the net income available to Class A common stockholders and the weighted-average shares of Class A common stock outstanding to give effect to potentially dilutive securities. Shares of our Class B common stock and Class C common stock are not entitled to receive any distributions or dividends and have no rights to convert into Class A common stock. When a Common Unit is exchanged for, at our election, cash or Class A common stock by a Member who holds shares of our Class B common stock or Class C common stock, such Member will be required to surrender one share of Class B common stock or three shares of Class C common stock, as the case may be, which we will cancel for no consideration. Therefore, we did not include shares of our Class B common stock or Class C common stock in the computation of pro forma basic or diluted net loss per share. The following table sets forth a reconciliation of the numerators and denominators used to compute pro forma basic and diluted net loss per share:

 

     Greenlane Holdings, Inc.
Three months ended
March 31,
2018
 
  Basic net income per share:    
  Numerator    
  Net income  $      
  Less: Net income attributable to non-controlling interests     
  Net income attributable to Class A common stockholders     
  Denominator     
  Shares of Class A common stock held by Members     
  Shares of Class A common stock sold in this offering     
  Weighted average shares of Class A common stock outstanding     
  Basic net income per share  $  

 

74

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Greenlane Holdings, Inc.

Unaudited Pro Forma Consolidated Statement of Operations

Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2017

 

   Historical
Greenlane
Holdings, LLC
(a)
   Historical
Better Life
Holdings, LLC
(b)
   Business
Combination
Adjustments
(c)
   Greenlane
Holdings, LLC
Pro Forma
   Transactions
Adjustments
   As
Adjusted
Before
Offering
   Offering
Adjustments
   Pro Forma
Greenlane
Holdings, Inc.
 
                                 
Net sales  $88,259,975   $17,213,584   $(885,029)(c)  $104,588,530   $     -   $104,588,530   $     -    
Cost of sales   67,689,578    13,031,972    (885,029)(c)   79,836,521    -    79,836,521    -     
Gross profit   20,570,397    4,181,612    -    24,752,009    -    24,752,009    -    
Operating expenses:                                        
Salaries, benefits and payroll taxes   8,254,449    2,536,123         10,790,572    -    10,790,572     (d)     
General and administrative   8,808,966    1,993,003        10,801,969    -    10,801,969    -     
Depreciation and amortization   791,209    18,019    646,100(c)   1,455,328    -    1,455,328    -     
Total operating expenses   17,854,624    4,547,145    646,100    23,047,869    -    23,047,869           
Income (loss) from operations   2,715,773    (365,533)   (646,100)   1,704,140    -    1,704,140           
Other income (expense):                                        
Interest expense   (269,710)   (2,815)   -    (272,525)   -    (272,525)   -    
Other income (loss), net   28,027    10,103    -    38,130    -    38,130    -     
Other income (expense)   (241,683)   7,288    -    (234,395)   -    (234,395)   -    
Income (loss) before income taxes   2,474,090    (358,245)   (646,100)   1,469,745    -    1,469,745    -    
Provision for income taxes   182,533    -         182,533    -    -     (e)     
Net income (loss)  $2,291,557   $(358,245)  $(646,100)  $1,287,212   $-   $1,469,745   $    $  
Net income attributable to non-controlling interests                  -     (f)               
Net income attributable to Greenlane Holdings, Inc.                 $1,287,212   $    $    $    $  
Pro-forma net income per share data (g):                                        
Weighted average shares of Class A common stock outstanding                                        
Basic                                        
Diluted                                        
Net income available to Class A common stock per share:                                        
Basic                                     $  
Diluted                                     $  

 

See accompanying Notes to the Unaudited Pro Forma Consolidated Statement of Operations

 

75

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Greenlane Holdings, Inc.

Notes to Unaudited Pro Forma Consolidated Statement of Operations

 

(a) Greenlane Holdings, Inc. was formed on May 2, 2018, and will have no results of operations until the completion of this offering. Therefore, its historical results of operations are not shown in a separate column in this unaudited pro forma interim condensed consolidated statement of operations.
   
(b) Better Life Holdings, LLC’s financial statements presented in the accompanying unaudited pro forma condensed statement of operations reflect the historical results of operations for the year ended December 31, 2017 from the audited financial statements. In accordance with Regulation S-X 11-02(c)(3), no adjustments were required to modify the period of Better Life Holdings, LLC’s historical statement of operations.
   
(c) In accordance with the rules of Article 11 of Regulation S-X, the following adjustments were made for the acquisition of Better Life Holdings, LLC:

 

(1)The adjustment to net sales represents the eliminating consolidation entries to remove total merchandise sales to Better Life Holdings, LLC. For the year ended December 31, 2017, approximately $885,000 of revenue was recorded as a result of sales to Better Life Holdings, LLC.

 

(2)The adjustment to cost of sales represents the cost incurred by Better Life Holdings, LLC for the year ended December 31, 2017, related to product purchased from Greenlane Holdings, LLC.

 

(3)Increased amortization expense reflects identified intangible assets in the acquisition of Better Life Holdings, LLC. The weighted-average amortization period for all intangibles acquired is five years.

 

(d) Represents the increase in compensation expense we expect to incur following the completion of this offering. We expect to grant options to purchase approximately          shares of our Class A common stock to certain of our directors, executive officers and other employees in connection with this offering. This amount was calculated assuming the stock options were granted on          with the stock options having an exercise price equal to $      per share, the assumed initial public offering price based on the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus. The grant date fair values of the stock options were determined using the Black-Scholes valuation model using the following assumptions:

 

  Expected volatility    %
  Expected dividend yield   %
  Expected term (in years)     
  Risk-free interest rate    %

 

(e) Greenlane Holdings, LLC is a limited liability company and is treated as a partnership for U.S. federal and most applicable state and local income tax purposes. As a result, it is not liable for U.S. federal or state and local income taxes in most jurisdictions in which we operate, and the income, expenses, gains and losses are reported on the returns of our members. It is subject to local income tax in certain jurisdictions in which it is not treated like a partnership, where it pays income taxes. After the consummation of this offering, we will become subject to U.S. federal, state and local income taxes with respect to our allocable share of any taxable income of Greenlane Holdings, LLC and will be taxed at the prevailing corporate tax rates. In addition to tax expenses, we also will incur expenses related to our operations, plus payments under the Tax Receivable Agreement, which will be significant. After the consummation of this offering, pursuant to the Greenlane Operating Agreement, Greenlane Holdings, LLC will generally make pro rata tax distributions to its members in an amount sufficient to fund all or part of their tax obligations with respect to the taxable income of Greenlane Holdings, LLC that is allocated to them and possibly in excess of such amount. See “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—Greenlane Operating Agreement—Distributions.” As a result, the unaudited pro forma consolidated statements of income reflect adjustments to our income tax expense to reflect an effective income tax rate of        % for the year ended December 31, 2017, which was calculated assuming the U.S. federal rates currently in effect and the highest statutory rates apportioned to each applicable state, local and foreign jurisdiction.
   
  The income tax expense for the offering adjustments is determined using the Founder Members’ economic interest in Greenlane Holdings, LLC of         % after giving effect to the issuance of shares of Class A common stock in this offering. The effective tax rate derived from the face of the unaudited pro forma consolidated statement of income will be lower than the stated effective tax rate because the effective tax rate is applied to only        % of the income before taxes based on Greenlane Holdings, Inc.’s economic interest in Greenlane Holdings, LLC. Our pro forma allocable share of taxable income from Greenlane Holdings, LLC was $        , and our income tax was $       for the year ended December 31, 2017.

 

76

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

(f) Upon completion of the Transactions, Greenlane Holdings, Inc. will become the sole managing member of Greenlane Holdings, LLC. As the manager of Greenlane Holdings, LLC, we will operate and control all of the business and affairs of Greenlane Holdings, LLC, and, through Greenlane Holdings, LLC and its subsidiaries, conduct our business. Although we will have a minority economic interest in Greenlane Holdings, LLC, we will have the sole voting interest in, and control the management of, Greenlane Holdings, LLC, and will have the obligation to absorb losses of, and receive benefits from, Greenlane Holdings, LLC, that could be significant. As a result, we have determined that, after the Transactions, Greenlane Holdings, LLC will be a variable interest entity, or VIE, and that we will be the primary beneficiary of Greenlane Holdings, LLC. Accordingly, pursuant to the VIE accounting model, we will consolidate Greenlane Holdings, LLC in our consolidated financial statements and will report a non-controlling interest related to the Common Units held by the Members on our consolidated financial statements.

 

The Transactions adjustments include adjustments to report pro forma Greenlane Holdings, LLC net income attributable to non-controlling interests equal to the Founder members’ economic interest in Greenlane Holdings, LLC of         % after giving effect to the Former Equity Owners’ conversion of Common Units for shares of Class A common stock.

 

The offering adjustments include adjustments to report a non-controlling interest equal to the Founder Members’ economic interest in Greenlane Holdings, LLC of        %, after giving effect to the issuance of shares of Class A common stock in this offering and the Former Equity Owners’ conversion of their ownership interest in Common Units of Greenlane Holdings, LLC for shares of Class A common stock based on the pro forma Greenlane Holdings, LLC. Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and the Greenlane Operating Agreement will require that we and Greenlane Holdings, LLC, respectively, at all times maintain (i) a ratio of one Common Unit owned by us for each share of Class A common stock issued by us (subject to certain exceptions for treasury shares and shares underlying certain convertible or exchangeable securities), (ii) a one-to-one ratio between the number of shares of Class B common the number of shares of Class C common stock owned by the Founder Members and the number of Common Units owned by the Founder Members or their affiliates.

 

(g)Pro forma basic net income per share is computed by dividing the net income available to Class A common stockholders by the weighted-average shares of Class A common stock outstanding during the period. Pro forma diluted net income per share is computed by adjusting the net income available to Class A common stockholders and the weighted-average shares of Class A common stock outstanding to give effect to potentially dilutive securities. Shares of our Class B common stock and Class C common stock are not entitled to receive any distributions or dividends and have no rights to convert into Class A common stock. When a Common Unit is exchanged for, at our election, cash or Class A common stock by a Member who holds shares of our Class B common stock or Class C common stock, such Member will be required to surrender one share of Class B common stock or three shares of Class C common stock, as the case may be, which we will cancel for no consideration. Therefore, we did not include shares of our Class B common stock or Class C common stock in the computation of pro forma basic or diluted net loss per share. The following table sets forth a reconciliation of the numerators and denominators used to compute pro forma basic and diluted net loss per share:

 

   Greenlane Holdings, Inc.
Year ended
December 31,
2017
 
Basic net income per share:    
Numerator    
Net income  $      
Less: Net income attributable to non-controlling interests     
Net income attributable to Class A common stockholders     
Denominator     
Shares of Class A common stock held by Members     
Shares of Class A common stock sold in this offering     
Weighted average shares of Class A common stock outstanding     
Basic net income per share  $  

 

77

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

   

The following discussion of our financial condition and results of operations should be read in conjunction with the information under the caption “Selected Historical Consolidated Financial and Other Data” and the historical financial statements and the related notes thereto included elsewhere in this prospectus. In addition to historical financial information, the following discussion and analysis contains forward-looking statements that involve risks, uncertainties and assumptions. Our actual results and timing of selected events may differ materially from those anticipated in these forward-looking statements as a result of many factors, including those discussed under “Risk Factors” and elsewhere in this prospectus.

 

Overview

 

We are the largest distributor of premium consumption accessories and vaporization products in the United States and have a growing presence in Canada. Our customers include over 5,700 independent smoke shops and regional retail chain stores, which collectively operate through an estimated 8,000 retail locations, and hundreds of licensed cannabis cultivators, processors and dispensaries. We also own and operate two of the leading direct-to-consumer e-commerce websites in the consumption accessories and vaporization products industry, VaporNation.com and VapeWorld.com, which offer convenient, flexible shopping solutions directly to consumers. Through our expansive North American distribution network and internet presence, we offer a comprehensive selection of more than 4,000 stock keeping units (“SKUs”), including premium vaporizers and parts, cleaning products, grinders and storage containers, pipes, rolling papers and customizable lines of premium specialty packaging. We have cultivated a reputation for carrying the highest-quality products from both large, established manufacturers that sell leading brands, such as the Volcano vaporizers by Storz & Bickel, PAX 3 vaporizers by PAX Labs and JUUL vaporizers by JUUL Labs, and promising start-up manufacturers that offer innovative, up-and-coming products and to which we offer the ability to grow and scale quickly. We also provide value-added consultative services to complement our product offerings and to help our customers operate and grow their businesses. We believe our market leadership, distribution network, broad product selection and extensive technical expertise provide us with significant competitive advantages and create a compelling value proposition for both our customers and our suppliers. 

 

We market and sell our products in both the B2B and B2C areas of the marketplace. We have a diverse base of B2B customers, and our top 10 customers accounted for approximately 10.9% and 12.9% of our net sales in the year ended December 31, 2017 and the three-month period ended March 31, 2018, respectively, with no single customer accounting for more than 2.0% and 3.5% of our net sales in the year ended December 31, 2017 and the three-month period ended March 31, 2018, respectively. While we are preparing to distribute our products to a growing number of large national and regional retailers in Canada, our typical B2B customer is an independent retailer operating in a single market. Our customer service teams interact regularly with customers as most of them have frequent restocking needs. We believe our high-touch customer service model strengthens relationships, builds loyalty and drives repeat business. In addition, our premium product lines, broad product portfolio and strategically-located distribution centers position us well to meet the needs of our B2B customers and ensure timely delivery of products.

 

We also have a large base of B2C customers who we reach via our VaporNation and VapeWorld websites. While these customers are predominantly in North America, we also ship to Europe, Australia and other select countries. These sites are the most trafficked within our segment according to Alexa Traffic Rankings, and as of March 31, 2018, we ranked first in over 15 Google key search terms and in the top five in over 150 Google key search terms. During the three months ended March 31, 2018, these sites averaged over 360,000 unique monthly visitors and generated approximately 6,000 monthly transactions. Across all B2C platforms, we shipped more than 180,000 parcels during the year ended December 31, 2017 and more than 57,000 parcels during the three-month period ended March 31, 2018.

 

In the first quarter of 2018, our B2B sales represented approximately 82.1% of our net sales, our B2C sales represented approximately 10.9% of our net sales and the balance of our net revenues was generated from drop-shipping product on behalf of third-party website operators and our other service offerings.

 

78

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Key Factors Affecting Our Performance

 

Our historical financial performance has been, and we expect our financial performance in the future to be, primarily driven by the following factors:

 

Growth in the Market for Consumption Accessories and Vaporization Products. Our operating results and prospects will be impacted by developments in the market for premium consumption accessories and vaporization products. Our business has benefitted from recent developments and trends that have increased the use of vaporizers and other consumption accessories, including (1) technological innovation that has facilitated the ease of use of vaporizers and generally reduced their costs, (2) the development of a wider variety of premium products, (3) the desire of consumers to reduce nicotine consumption through smoking, (4) changes in state laws that have legalized the use of cannabis in an increasing number of jurisdictions and (4) an increase in the number of celebrity endorsers of vaporizer and other consumption brands. These trends have contributed to significant recent growth in the demand for consumption accessories and vaporization products like ours in recent years; however, consumer demand for branded vaporization products and trends can and does shift rapidly and without warning. To the extent we are unable to offer products that appeal to consumers, our operating results will be adversely affected. This is particularly true given the concentration of our sales under certain brands.

 

Relationships with Suppliers. We generate substantially all of our net sales from products manufactured by others. We have strong relationships with many large, well-established suppliers, and seek to establish distribution relationships with smaller or more recently established manufacturers in our industry. While we purchase our products from over 125 suppliers, a significant percentage of our net sales is dependent on sales of products from a small number of key suppliers. For example, products manufactured by PAX Labs represented approximately 17.0%, 34.9%, 29.4% and 29.0% of our net sales in the three-month periods ended March 31, 2018 and 2017 and the years ended December 31, 2017 and 2016, respectively, and products manufactured by JUUL Labs represented approximately 42.2%, 1.0%, 11.4% and 4.5% of our net sales in the three-month periods ended March 31, 2018 and 2017 and the years ended December 31, 2017 and 2016, respectively. Additionally, Grenco Science represented approximately 9.4%, 23.3%, 21.1% and 29.9% of our net sales in the three-month periods ended March 31, 2018 and 2017 and the years ended December 31, 2017 and 2016, respectively, and products manufactured by Storz & Bickel represented approximately 6.0%, 7.3%, 6.5% and 10.1% of our net sales in the three-month periods ended March 31, 2018 and 2017 and the years ended December 31, 2017 and 2016.

 

We believe there is a trend of suppliers in our industry to consolidate their relationships to do more business with fewer distributors. We believe our ability to help maximize the value and extend the distribution of our suppliers’ products has allowed us to benefit from this trend. Although we have a successful track record of renewing and extending the scope of our distribution agreements with suppliers, our distribution agreements typically have short terms (generally two or three years), are not automatically renewable, and, in some cases, give the supplier the right to terminate the distribution agreement at will. In addition, the efforts of our senior management team have been integral to our relationships with our suppliers. Our inability to enter into distribution agreements for the then-current most trendy or up-and-coming products, the termination or lack of renewal of one or more of our distribution agreements, or the renewal of a distribution agreement on less favorable terms, could adversely affect our business.

 

Retail Industry Dynamics; Relationships with B2B Customers. Historically, a substantial portion of our net sales have been derived from our B2B customers, upon which we rely to reach many of the consumers who are the ultimate purchasers of our products. We depend on retailers to provide adequate and attractive space for our products and point-of-purchase displays in their stores. In 2017, we sold our products through over 5,700 U.S. and Canadian retailers, which represented 82.1% of our 2017 net sales. Our top ten B2B customers represented approximately 12.9% and 11.5% of our net sales for the three months ended March 31, 2018 and 2017, respectively, and approximately 10.9% and 11.4% of our net sales for the years ended December 31, 2017 and 2016, respectively. In recent years, traditional retailers have been affected by a shift in consumer preferences towards other channels, particularly e-commerce. We believe that this shift may have benefitted our business as retailers dedicated additional shelf space to premium, higher-margin products to drive additional traffic to their stores and improve sales in previously less productive shelf space. However, our B2B customers make no long-term commitments to us regarding purchase volumes and can therefore freely reduce their purchases of our products. Significant reductions in purchases of our products by our B2B customers, or the loss of any key B2B customer for any reason, could adversely affect our business. In addition, our future growth depends upon our ability to successfully execute our business strategy.

 

79

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Product Mix. The mix of products we sell in any given quarter or year will depend on various factors, including the timing and popularity of new releases by third-party suppliers and our ability to distribute products based on these releases. We have diversified our product offerings across numerous categories. Our results of operations may fluctuate significantly from quarter to quarter or year to year depending on the timing and popularity of new product releases. Sales of a certain products or groups of products tied to particular supplier can dramatically increase our net sales in any given period. For example, our net sales for the period beginning on April 1, 2017 and ending on December 31, 2017 were positively impacted by growth of an emerging line of products by JUUL Labs, for which we had net sales of approximately $10.0 million during such period. In addition, if the performance of one or more of these products fails to meet expectations or are delayed in their release, our operating results could be adversely affected.

 

Post-Offering Taxation and Expenses. After consummation of this offering, we will become subject to U.S. federal, state and local income taxes with respect to our allocable share of any taxable income of Greenlane Holdings, LLC, and we will be taxed at the prevailing corporate tax rates. In addition to tax expenses, we also will incur expenses related to our operations, as well as payments under the Tax Receivable Agreement, which we expect to be significant. We intend to cause Greenlane Holdings, LLC to make payments and distributions in amounts sufficient to allow us to pay our tax obligations and operating expenses, including amounts to fund any ordinary course payments due under the Tax Receivable Agreement. See “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—Greenlane Operating Agreement—Distributions.”

 

Public Company Reporting Expenses. As a public company following this offering, we will be implementing additional procedures and processes for the purpose of addressing the standards and reporting requirements applicable to U.S. and Canadian public companies. We expect to incur additional annual expenses related to these requirements. In addition, we will incur additional expenses for, among other things, directors’ and officers’ liability insurance, director fees, transfer agent fees, hiring additional accounting, legal and administrative personnel, increased auditing and legal fees and similar expenses. We also expect to recognize certain non-recurring costs as part of our transition to a publicly-traded company, consisting of professional fees and other expenses.

 

Key Metrics

 

We monitor the following key metrics to help us measure and evaluate the effectiveness of our operations, develop financial forecasts, and make strategic decisions:

 

   Three Months Ended   Year Ended 
   March 31,   December 31, 
   2018   2017   2017   2016 
   (unaudited)         
Net sales  $43,257,643   $19,178,993   $88,259,975   $66,689,944 
Period-over-period growth   125.5%        32.3%     
Operating cash flow  $(2,836,422)  $(1,415,604)  $3,160,754   $2,643,586 
EBITDA  $2,665,214   $806,374   $3,535,009   $951,945 
Average B2B order size  $1,318   $760   $857   $645 
Number of orders   29,214    22,184    92,179    87,232 

 

80

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Total Revenue and Growth. We are focused on driving continued revenue growth through increased sales of new and existing products to new and existing customers.

 

Operating Cash Flow. We monitor our operating cash flow as a measure of our overall business performance, which enables us to analyze our financial performance without the effects of certain non-cash items such as stock-based compensation expenses and depreciation and amortization. Our operating cash flow is significantly impacted by accounts payable disbursements, changes in our investment in inventory, timing of commission and bonus payments and collections of accounts receivable.

 

EBITDA.  We monitor our EBITDA, which is equal to net income before interest expense, provision for income taxes, depreciation and amortization. EBITDA is a non-GAAP liquidity measure that we believe assists investors and analysts in assessing our ability to generate sufficient cash flows to fund interest expense, debt payments and make distributions to the Members and, following this offering, dividend payments to our stockholders.

 

Average B2B Order Size. We receive purchase orders from our B2B and B2C customers, as well as fulfillment orders from third-party manufacturers and retailers for which we provide shipping and other logistics services. We believe that our average B2B order size and the number of B2B customers that we service is an indicator of our market share at the store level and an indicator of the penetration and future growth of our business.

 

Number of Orders.  In addition to monitoring order size, we monitor the number of sales orders we receive from all of our market channels, including our B2B customers and our B2C customers.  We believe the number of orders we receive is a valuable indicator of the success of our marketing efforts and the health of our customer relationships and is a valuable measure of our ability to seek out and offer a functionally superior mix of products offered at competitive price points.

 

Components of Results of Operations

 

Net Sales

 

We sell a broad array of premium consumption accessories and vaporization products across a variety of categories, including premium vaporizers and parts, cleaning products, grinders and storage containers, pipes, rolling papers and customizable lines of premium specialty packaging, primarily to B2B customers, including retailers, distributors and licensed cannabis cultivators, processors and dispensaries. We also sell our products directly to consumers (“B2C”) through our e-commerce operations and, to a lesser extent, our recently-opened retail store.

 

Revenue from the sale of our products is recognized when all of the following criteria are met: persuasive evidence of an arrangement exists, there are no uncertainties regarding customer acceptance, the selling price is fixed or determinable, and collectability is reasonably assured. Sales terms typically do not allow for a right of return except in relation to a manufacturing defect. Shipping costs billed to our customers are included in net sales, while shipping and handling costs, which include inbound freight costs and the cost to ship products to our customers, are typically included in cost of sales.

 

Cost of Sales

 

Cost of sales consists primarily of product costs and the cost to ship our products, including both inbound freight and handling and outbound freight of products sold to customers. Our cost of sales excludes depreciation and amortization. Our shipping costs, both inbound and outbound, will fluctuate from period to period based on customer and product mix due to varying shipping terms and other factors.

 

Our products are produced by our suppliers who may use their own third-party manufacturers. Our product costs and gross margins will be impacted from period to period based on the product mix we sell in any given period. Our vaporizer products tend to have a higher product cost and lower gross margins than our grinder products.

  

We expect our cost of sales to increase on an absolute dollar basis in the near term as we continue to grow our revenue, but to remain relatively consistent as a percentage of total net sales.

 

Gross Margin

 

Gross margin, or gross profit as a percentage of net sales, has been and will continue to be affected and fluctuate based upon a variety of factors, including the average mark-up over cost of our products, the mix of products sold and operating efficiencies.

 

81

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Operating Expenses

 

Operating expenses consist of salaries, benefits and payroll taxes, general and administrative expenses and depreciation and amortization expenses.

 

Salaries, Benefits and Payroll Taxes. Salaries, benefits and payroll taxes consist of wages for all department personnel including salaries, bonuses, stock-based compensation and other employment related costs, as well as workers compensation insurance, and our portion of medical insurance and 401K expenses. 

 

General and Administrative Expense. General and administrative expense consists of legal, travel and entertainment, subcontracting, professional fees, insurance and other overhead. Also included are marketing activities and promotional events, training costs and rent.

 

We expect general and administrative expense to increase on an absolute dollar basis in the near term as we continue to increase investments to support our growth. In addition, following the completion of this offering, we also expect to incur additional general and administrative expenses as a result of operating as a public company, including expenses related to compliance with the rules and regulations of the SEC and those of any national securities exchange on which our securities are traded, additional insurance expenses, investor relations activities and other administrative and professional services. As a result, we expect that our general and administrative expense will increase in absolute dollars but may fluctuate as a percentage of our revenue from period to period

 

Depreciation and Amortization Expenses. We depreciate and amortize the cost of our property and equipment using the straight-line method over the estimated useful lives of the assets, which is three to seven years in the case of furniture, equipment and software and the lesser of the lease term or five years in the case of leasehold improvements.

 

Interest Income (Expense), Net

 

Interest income (expense), net consists of interest incurred on our outstanding line of credit and other debt obligations.

 

Income from equity method investments

 

Our investment in a company that is accounted for on the equity method of accounting consisted of a 33.3% non-controlling interest in NWT Holdings, LLC (“NWT”), a manufacturer of aromatic devices. The investment in NWT amounted to approximately $916,000 and $894,000 at December 31, 2017 and 2016, respectively. The income from the equity method investment in 2017 and 2016 was approximately $22,000 and $238,000, respectively.

 

Provision for (Benefit from) Income Taxes

 

Greenlane Holdings, LLC is treated as a partnership for U.S. federal and most applicable state and local income tax purposes. As a partnership, taxable income or loss is passed through to and included in the taxable income of its members. Accordingly, the consolidated financial statements of Greenlane Holdings, LLC included herein do not include a provision for U.S. federal income taxes. Greenlane Holdings, LLC is liable for various other state and local taxes and is subject to income taxes in foreign jurisdictions. Therefore, the provision for income taxes includes only income taxes on income from our Canadian subsidiary and state income tax, if any, in the consolidated financial statements.

 

82

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Critical Accounting Policies and Estimates

 

We prepare our consolidated financial statements in conformity with U.S. GAAP. The preparation of these financial statements requires us to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities and disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the financial statements, and the reported amounts of revenue and expenses during the reporting period. Actual results could differ from those estimates. We believe that the estimates, assumptions and judgments involved in the accounting policies described below have the greatest potential impact on our financial statements and, therefore, we consider these to be our critical accounting policies. Accordingly, we evaluate our estimates and assumptions on an ongoing basis. We base our estimates on historical experience, outside advice from parties believed to be experts in such matters, and on various other assumptions that are believed to be reasonable under the circumstances, the results of which form the basis for making judgments about the carrying value of assets and liabilities that are not readily apparent from other sources. Judgments and uncertainties affecting the application of those policies may result in materially different amounts being reported under different conditions or using different assumptions. Our significant accounting policies can be found in Note 2 to our audited consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this prospectus.

 

Inventory

 

Inventory consists principally of finished goods that are valued at the lower of cost or net realizable value on a weighted average cost basis. ASU 2015-11, Simplifying the Measurement of Inventory, was adopted during the year ended December 31, 2017. We have established an allowance for slow-moving or obsolete inventory based upon assumptions about future demands and market conditions. Our inventory is pledged as collateral for our bank line of credit

 

Accounts Receivable

 

Accounts receivable represent amounts due from customers for merchandise sales and are recorded when product has shipped. An account is considered past due when payment has not been rendered by its due date based upon the terms of the sale. Generally, accounts receivable are due 30 days after the billing date. We evaluate our accounts receivable and establish an allowance for doubtful accounts based on a history of collections as well as current credit conditions. Accounts are written off as uncollectible on a case-by-case basis. Our accounts receivable are pledged as collateral for our bank line of credit.

 

Income Taxes

 

Greenlane Holdings, LLC is a limited liability company and is treated as a partnership for U.S. federal and most applicable state and local income tax purposes. As a result, it is not liable for U.S. federal or state and local income taxes in most jurisdictions in which we operate, and the income, expenses, gains and losses are reported on the returns of our members. It is subject to Canadian, and state and local income tax in certain jurisdictions in which it is not treated like a partnership, where it pays an immaterial amount of taxes.

 

After the consummation of this offering, we will become subject to U.S. federal, state and local income taxes with respect to our allocable share of any taxable income of Greenlane Holdings, LLC and will be taxed at the prevailing corporate tax rates. In addition to tax expenses, we also will incur expenses related to our operations, plus payments under the Tax Receivable Agreement, which will be significant. After the consummation of this offering, pursuant to the Greenlane Operating Agreement, Greenlane Holdings, LLC will generally make pro rata tax distributions to its members in an amount sufficient to fund all or part of their tax obligations with respect to the taxable income of Greenlane Holdings, LLC that is allocated to them and possibly in excess of such amount. See “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—Greenlane Operating Agreement—Distributions.

 

83

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Results of Operations

 

The following table sets forth our selected statements of operations data:

 

  

Three Months Ended
March 31,

  

Year Ended
December 31,

 
   2018   2017   2017   2016 
   (unaudited)         
Net sales  $43,257,643   $19,178,993   $88,259,975   $66,689,944 
Cost of sales   34,204,549    14,821,316    67,689,578    51,735,941 
Gross Profit   9,053,094    4,357,677    20,570,397    14,954,003 
Operating expenses:                    
Salaries, benefits and payroll taxes   2,947,006    1,665,650    8,254,449    6,315,114 
General and administrative   3,534,389    1,888,506    8,808,966    7,952,244 
Depreciation and amortization   245,717    156,108    791,209    572,155 
                     
Total operating expenses   6,727,112    3,710,264    17,854,624    14,836,513 
                     
Income from operations   2,325,982    647,413    2,715,773    114,490 
Other Income (expense):                    
Interest expense   (38,951)   (49,129)   (269,710)   (183,878)
Other income, net   93,515    2,853   28,027    265,300 
Other income(expense)   54,564    (46,276)   (241,683)   81,422 
                     
Income before income taxes   2,380,546    601,137    2,474,090    195,912 
Provision for income taxes   81,817    37,382    182,533    108,927 
                     
Net income  $2,298,729   $563,755   $2,291,557   $86,985 

 

84

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

The following table sets forth our selected consolidated statements of operations data expressed as a percentage of net sales:

 

   Three Months Ended
March 31,
  

Year Ended
December 31,

 
   2018   2017   2017   2016 
   (unaudited)         
Net sales   100.0%   100.0%   100.0%   100.0%
Cost of sales   79.1%   77.3%   76.7%   77.6%
Operating expenses                    
Salaries, benefits and payroll taxes   6.8%   8.7%   9.4%   9.5%
General and administrative   8.2%   9.8%   10.0%   11.9%
Depreciation and amortization   0.6%   0.8%   0.9%   0.9%
                     
Total operating expenses   15.6%   19.3%   20.2%   22.3%
                     
Income from operations   5.4%   3.4%   3.1%   0.2%
Other Income(expense):                    
Interest expense   (0.1)%   (0.3)%   (0.3)%   (0.3)%
Other income, net   0.2%   0.0%   0.0%   0.4%
                     
Income before income taxes   5.5%   3.1%   2.8%   0.3%
Provision for income taxes   0.2%   0.2%   0.2%   0.2%
                     
Net income   5.3%   2.9%   2.6%   0.1%

 

Comparison of Three Months Ended March 31, 2018 and 2017

 

Net Sales

 

  

Three Months Ended
March 31,

  

Change

 
   2018   2017   $   % 
   (unaudited)         
Net Sales   $43,257,643   $19,178,993   $24,078,650    125.5%

 

Net sales increased $24,078,650, or 125.5%, in the three months ended March 31, 2018 compared to the three months ended March 31, 2017 primarily due to the addition of new product lines in 2017, such as JUUL, EYCE and LEVO, which together generated net sales of $19,425,125 during the three months ended March 31, 2018 compared to $572,177 during the three months ended March 31, 2017, an increase of $18,852,948, or 3,295%. In addition, we consummated the acquisition of Better Life Holdings, LLC in February 2018, which added net sales of $2,015,485 in the three months ended March 31, 2018. During 2017, we executed certain exclusive or lead distribution agreements with key suppliers, such as Pax Labs and Storz & Bickel, which generated aggregate net sales of $9,948,368 during the three months ended March 31, 2018 compared to $8,075,547 during the three months ended March 31, 2017, an increase of $1,872,821, or 23.2%. We also increased the number of our sales representatives to 51 as of March 31, 2018 compared to an average of approximately 30 during the three months ended March 31, 2017, an increase of 21 or 70.0%.

 

85

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Cost of Sales

 

  

Three Months Ended

March 31,

  

Change

 
   2018   2017   $   % 
   (unaudited)         
Cost of sales  $34,204,549   $14,821,316   $19,383,233    130.8%
Percentage of net sales   79.1%   77.3%          
Gross profit percentage   20.9%   22.7%          

 

Cost of sales increased $19,383,233, or 130.8%, in the three months ended March 31, 2018 compared to the three months ended March 31, 2017, primarily due to increased merchandise expenses of $18,781,559, principally driven by our increased net sales. We expect our cost of sales to increase on an absolute dollar basis in the near term as we continue to grow our sales, but to remain relatively consistent as a percentage of total net sales.

 

Salaries, benefits and payroll taxes

 

  

Three Months Ended
March 31,

  

Change

 
   2018   2017   $   % 
   (unaudited)         
Salaries, benefits and payroll taxes  $2,947,006   $1,665,650   $1,281,356    76.9%
Percentage of net sales   6.8%   8.7%          

 

Salaries, benefits and payroll taxes expenses increased $1,281,356, or 76.9%, in the three months ended March 31, 2018 compared to the three months ended March 31, 2017, primarily due to the addition of employees as we continued to expand our domestic sales and marketing efforts. In connection with our acquisition of Better Life Holdings, LLC in February 2018, we acquired approximately 40 additional employees.

 

General and Administrative Expenses

 

  

Three Months Ended
March 31,

  

Change

 
   2018   2017   $   % 
   (unaudited)         
General and administrative  $3,534,389   $1,888,506   $1,645,883    87.2%
Percentage of net sales    8.2%   9.8%          

 

General and administrative expenses increased $1,645,883 in the three months ended March 31, 2018 compared to the three months ended March 31, 2017, primarily due to an increase in total bank merchant fees of $387,281, or 118.2%, to $715,042 in the three months ended March 31, 2018 compared to $327,761 in the three months ended March 31, 2017, principally due to an increase in sales volume as we continued to expand our domestic sales and marketing efforts and the acquisition of Better Life Holdings, LLC. Additionally, our consulting and legal expenses increased by $349,227, or 494.0%, to $419,914 in the three months ended March 31, 2018 compared to $70,687 in the three months ended March 31, 2017, principally due to fees paid in connection with the acquisition of Better Life Holdings, LLC.

 

86

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Depreciation and Amortization Expenses

  

   Three Months Ended
March 31,
   Change 
   2018   2017   $   % 
   (unaudited)         
Depreciation and amortization expense  $245,717   $156,108   $89,609    57.4%
Percentage of net sales    0.6%   0.8%          

 

Depreciation and amortization expense was $245,717 for the three months ended March 31, 2018, an increase of 57.4%, compared to $156,108 for the three months ended March 31, 2017. The increase in depreciation and amortization primarily related to the increase in depreciation and amortization related to our acquisition of Better Life Holdings.

 

Other Income (Expense), Net

 

  

Three Months Ended

March 31,

  

Change

 
   2018   2017   $   % 
   (unaudited)         
Other income (expense), net  $54,564   $(46,276)  $100,840    (217.9)%
Percentage of net sales    0.1%   (0.2)%          

 

Other income (expense), net increased $100,840 in the three months ended March 31, 2018 compared to the three months ended March 31, 2017 primarily due to a $50,000 payment received in relation to the early termination of a distribution agreement by the new owners of a manufacturer. The new owners of the manufacturer subsequently signed a new agreement with the Company upon termination of the former agreement. The remaining increase in other income (expense), net, is primarily attributable to an increase of approximately $31,000 related to the equity method investment in NWT for the three months ended March 31, 2018 as compared to March 31, 2017.

 

Provision for Income Taxes

 

  

Three Months Ended

March 31,

  

Change

 
   2018   2017   $   % 
   (unaudited)         
Provision for income taxes  $81,817   $37,382   $44,435    118.9%
Percentage of net sales    0.2%   0.2%          

 

Our provision for income taxes, which primarily related to the estimated annual income generated by our Canadian subsidiary, increased $44,435, or 118.9%, for the three months ended March 31, 2018 compared to the three months ended March 31, 2017, and was based on an effective tax rate of approximately 26%. After the consummation of this offering, we will become subject to U.S. federal, state and local income taxes with respect to our allocable share of any taxable income of Greenlane Holdings, LLC and will be taxed at the prevailing corporate tax rates. As a result, we expect our provision for income taxes, both in amount and as a percentage of our net sales, to increase in future periods.

 

Comparison of Years ended December 31, 2017 and 2016

 

Net Sales

 

  

Years Ended
December 31,

  

Change

 
   2017   2016   $   % 
                     
Net Sales  $88,259,975   $66,689,944   $21,570,031    32.3%

 

Net sales increased $21,570,031, or 32.3%, in the year ended December 31, 2017 compared to the year ended December 31, 2016 primarily due to the addition of new products, by JUUL, EYCE, PAX, Organicix and Pollen Gear, during 2016 and 2017, which collectively resulted in net sales of $43,364,689 in the year ended December 31, 2017 compared to $23,562,696 in the year ended December 31, 2016, an increase of $19,801,993, or 84.0%.

 

87

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Cost of Sales

 

  

Years Ended

December 31,

  

Change

 
   2017   2016   $   % 
             
Cost of sales  $67,689,578   $51,735,941   $15,953,637    30.8%
Percentage of cost of sales   76.7%   77.6%          
Gross profit percentage   23.3%   22.4%          

 

Cost of sales increased $15,953,637 in the year ended December 31, 2017 compared to the year ended December 31, 2016, primarily due to increased merchandising expense of $62,349,186 in the year ended December 31, 2017 compared to $45,804,540 in the year ended December 31, 2016, an increase of $16,644,646, or 36%.

 

Salaries, benefits and payroll taxes

 

  

Years Ended
December 31,

  

Change

 
   2017   2016   $   % 
             
Salaries, benefits and payroll taxes  $8,254,449   $6,315,114   $1,939,335    30.7%
Percentage of net sales   9.4%   9.5%          

 

Salaries, benefits and payroll taxes expenses increased $1,939,335 in the year ended December 31, 2017 compared to the year ended December 31, 2016, primarily due to an increase in personnel expenses of $1,753,422, resulting from the addition of employees as we continued to expand our domestic sales and marketing efforts.

 

General and Administrative Expenses

 

  

Years Ended

December 31,

  

Change

 
   2017   2016   $   % 
             
General and administrative  $8,808,966   $7,952,244   $856,722    10.8%
Percentage of net sales   10.0%   11.9%          

 

General and administrative expenses increased $856,722 in the year ended December 31, 2017 compared to the year ended December 31, 2016, primarily due to an increase of $245,879 in subcontracted services, labor and temporary employee expenses and an increase of $303,602 in bank fee expense due to our increased sales volume.

 

Depreciation and Amortization Expenses

 

   

Years Ended

December 31,

    Change  
    2017     2016     $     %  
                   
Depreciation and amortization expense   $ 791,209     $ 572,155     $ 219,054       38.3 %
Percentage of net sales     0.9 %     0.9 %                

 

Depreciation and amortization expense increased $219,054 in the year ended December 31, 2017 as compared to the year ended December 31, 2016 primarily due to fixed asset additions and capitalized leased equipment used at our distribution centers, which we capitalize and depreciate over the estimated useful lives of the assets.

 

88

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Other Income, Net

 

  

Years Ended
December 31,

  

Change

 
   2017   2016   $   % 
             
Other income, net  $28,027   $265,300   $(237,273)   (89.4)%
Percentage of net sales   0.0%   0.4%          

 

Other income, net decreased by $237,273 in the year ended December 31, 2017 compared to the year ended December 31, 2016, primarily due to a decrease of $215,253 in income from our equity investment in NWT.

 

Provision for Income Taxes

 

  

Years Ended
December 31,

  

Change

 
   2017   2016   $   % 
             
Provision for income taxes  $182,533   $108,927   $73,606    67.6%
Percentage of net sales   0.2%   0.2%          

 

Provision for income taxes increased $73,606, or 67.6%, in the year ended December 31, 2017 compared to the year ended December 31, 2016, primarily due to the increased income we generated in Canada, and was based on an estimated annual effective income tax rate of 26%. As discussed above, after the consummation of this offering, we will become subject to U.S. federal, state and local income taxes with respect to our allocable share of any taxable income of Greenlane Holdings, LLC and will be taxed at the prevailing corporate tax rates. As a result, we expect our provision for income taxes, both in amount and as a percentage of our net sales, to increase in future periods.

  

Non-GAAP Financial Measure – EBITDA 

 

EBITDA is equal to net income before interest expense, provision for income taxes, depreciation and amortization. We disclose EBITDA, which is a non-GAAP liquidity measure, because management believes this metric assists investors and analysts in assessing our ability to generate sufficient cash flows to fund debt payments and, after this offering, to make dividend payments to our stockholders. You should not consider EBITDA as an alternative to income from operations or net income, each as determined in accordance with GAAP, as an indicator of our cash flows. 

 

EBITDA has limitations as an analytical tool. Some of these limitations are: 

 

EBITDA does not reflect cash expenditures or future cash capital expenditures or contractual commitments;

     

EBITDA does not reflect changes in, or cash requirements for, our working capital needs;

   

EBITDA does not reflect the significant interest expense, or the cash requirements necessary to service interest or principal payments, on our debt;

 

EBITDA does not reflect payments made or future requirements for income taxes or required distributions to members; and

     

Although depreciation and amortization are non-cash charges, the assets being depreciated and amortized will often have to be replaced in the future and EBITDA does not reflect any cash requirements for such replacements.

  

Because of these limitations, EBITDA should not be considered in isolation or as a substitute for measures calculated in accordance with GAAP. 

   

89

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

The following table presents a reconciliation of EBITDA to cash flow from operating activities for each of the periods indicated:

 

EBITDA Reconciliation to Income from Operations

 

   Three Months Ended
March 31,
   Twelve Months Ended
December 31,
 
   2018   2017   2017   2016 
EBITDA  $2,665,214   $806,374   $3,535,009   $951,945 
Depreciation and Amortization   245,717    156,108    791,209    572,155 
Other Income   93,515    2,853    28,027    265,300 
Income from Operations  $2,325,982   $647,413   $2,715,773   $114,490 

 

Liquidity and Capital Resources

 

As of March 31, 2018, we had $3.1 million of cash and cash equivalents and $8.3 million of working capital, which is calculated as current assets minus current liabilities, compared with $2.1 million of cash and cash equivalents and $3.8 million of working capital as of December 31, 2017. Working capital is impacted by the seasonal trends of our business and the timing of new product releases. See “—Seasonality.”

 

Sources of Funds

 

Our primary requirements for liquidity and capital are working capital, capital expenditures, debt service and general corporate needs. Historically, these cash requirements have been met through cash provided by operating activities, cash and cash equivalents and borrowings under our bank revolving line of credit. For a description of our line of credit, see “—Line of Credit.”

 

Uses of Funds

 

Additional future liquidity needs may include public company costs, the redemption rights of Common Units held by the Members that they may exercise from time to time (should we elect to exchange such Common Units for a cash payment), payments under the Tax Receivable Agreement and state and federal taxes to the extent not sheltered by our tax assets, including those arising as a result of purchases, redemptions or exchanges of Common Units for Class A common stock. The Members may exercise their redemption right for as long as their Common Units remain outstanding. Although the actual timing and amount of any payments that may be made under the Tax Receivable Agreement will vary, we expect that the payments that we will be required to make to the Members will be significant. Any payments made by us to the Members under the Tax Receivable Agreement will generally reduce the amount of overall cash flow that might have otherwise been available to us or to Greenlane Holdings, LLC and, to the extent that we are unable to make payments under the Tax Receivable Agreement for any reason, the unpaid amounts generally will be deferred and will accrue interest until paid by us; provided, however, that nonpayment for a specified period may constitute a material breach of a material obligation under the Tax Receivable Agreement and therefore may accelerate payments due under the Tax Receivable Agreement. For a discussion of the Tax Receivable Agreement, see “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—The Transactions—Tax Receivable Agreement” and “Unaudited Pro Forma Financial Information.” For a discussion of the Members’ redemption rights, see “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—The Transactions—Greenlane Operating Agreement.”

 

90

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Notwithstanding our obligations under the Tax Receivable Agreement, we believe that our sources of liquidity and capital will be sufficient to finance our continued operations and growth strategy, our planned capital expenditures and the additional expenses we expect to incur as a public company for at least the next 12 months. However, we cannot assure you that our cash provided by operating activities, cash and cash equivalents or cash available under our bank line of credit will be sufficient to meet our future needs. If we are unable to generate sufficient cash flows from operations in the future, and if availability under our bank line of credit is not sufficient, we may have to obtain additional financing. If we obtain additional capital by issuing equity securities, the interests of our existing stockholders will be diluted. If we incur additional indebtedness, that indebtedness may contain significant financial and other covenants that may significantly restrict our operations. We cannot assure you that we can obtain refinancing or additional financing on favorable terms or at all. See “Risk Factors—Risks Related to our Business and Industry.” We may not be able to secure additional financing on favorable terms, or at all, to meet our future capital needs.

 

Cash Flows

 

The following summary of cash flows for the periods indicated has been derived from the consolidated financial statements of Greenlane Holdings, LLC included elsewhere in this prospectus:

 

  

Three Months Ended

March 31,

  

Year Ended
December 31,

 
   2018   2017   2017   2016 
Cash provided by (used in) operating activities  $(2,836,422)  $(1,415,604)  $3,160,754   $2,643,586 
Cash provided by (used in) investing activities   547,347    (707,867)   (1,056,021)   (76,342)
Cash provided by (used in) financing activities   3,327,679    1,454,782    (1,753,641)   (1,285,542)
Effect of exchange rates on cash   (19,925)   (2,203)   38,109   (4,670)
Net increase in cash   1,018,679    (670,892)  389,201   1,277,032 

 

Cash Flows from Operating Activities

 

In the three months ended March 31, 2018 and 2017, we used $2,836,422 and $1,415,604 respectively, of cash for operating activities. Net cash used by operating activities increased $1.4 million to $2.8 million for the three months ended March 31, 2018 from $1.4 million for the three months ended March 31, 2017. The increase of $4.2 million in working capital components was primarily driven by an increase in accounts receivable of $4.3 million, an increase in vendor deposits of $2.3 million, and an increase in inventories of $18.2 million while being impacted by increases in accounts payable of $18.1 million and an increase in accrued expense of $2.1 million. The change in working capital is also offset by the increase in net cash provided by operating activities resulting from an increase in net income of $1.7 million.

 

In the years ended December 31, 2017 and 2016, we provided $3,160,754 and $2,643,586, respectively, of cash for operating activities. Net cash provided by operating activities increased $.5 million to $3.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2017 from $2.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2016. The increase in net cash provided by operating activities resulted from an increase in net income of $2.2 million. Working capital decreased by $.5 million driven primarily by an increase in accounts payable of $10.9 million, and an increase in accrued expenses of $2.2 million while being offset by increases in inventory of $8.5 million, net accounts receivable of $2.4 million and vendor deposits of $1.3 million.

 

Cash Flows from Investing Activities

 

In the three months ended March 31, 2018 and 2017, we provided $547,347 and used ($707,867), respectively, of cash for capital expenditures, including computer hardware and software to support our growth and development, and acquired cash of approximately $785,000 from the acquisition of Better Life Holdings.

 

In the years ended December 31, 2017 and 2016, we used $1,056,021 and $76,341, respectively, of cash for capital expenditures, including computer hardware and software to support our growth and development, and to purchase warehouse supplies and equipment. In the year ended December 31, 2017, we also used $650,000 to purchase an intangible asset relating to a master distribution agreement.

 

91

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Cash Flows from Financing Activities

 

In the three months ended March 31, 2018, cash provided by financing activities of $3,327,679 was primarily attributable to an increase in borrowings on the line of credit of $4.1 million offset by member distribution paid of $1.0 million.

 

In the year ended December 31, 2017, cash used by financing activities of $1,753,641 was primarily attributable to payments on long-term debt.

 

Line of Credit

 

On October 4, 2017, Jacoby & Co. Inc., the managing member of Greenlane Holdings, LLC, entered into a credit agreement with Fifth Third Bank. The credit agreement provides for a revolving credit facility of up to $8.0 million. Jacoby & Co. Inc.’s obligations under the credit facility are guaranteed by Aaron LoCascio and Adam Schoenfeld and by all of our operating subsidiaries and are secured by a first priority security interest in certain assets of Greenlane Holdings, LLC and its operating subsidiaries. The revolving credit facility matures on October 3, 2018.

 

As of March 31, 2018, we had borrowings of $4,690,000 outstanding under the credit agreement. Repayments are made daily on the line of credit through our sweep arrangement with Fifth Third Bank.

 

The credit agreement contains generally customary affirmative and negative covenants, including, but not limited to, restrictions on the ability of Jacoby & Co. Inc. and each guarantor that is a subsidiary of Jacoby & Co. Inc. to incur additional indebtedness, create liens, make guarantees, sell or transfer any notes or other obligations, change or alter the nature of the business in any material respects, make changes to accounting policies and procedures or tax status, enter into certain transactions with affiliates, fail to comply with certain requirements and obligations relating to employee benefit plans, enter into or undertake certain liquidations, mergers, consolidations or acquisitions, permit the borrower group’s fixed charge coverage ratio to be less than 1.25 and transfer and/or dispose of assets. As of March 31, 2018, we were in compliance with all covenants under the credit agreement.

 

Borrowings under the credit agreement bear interest at a rate equal to LIBOR plus 3.5% per annum provided that no default has occurred. During the continuance of an event of default, the interest rate would increase by an additional 5% per annum, and the lender would be able to terminate the loans and declare all outstanding obligations thereunder to be due and payable. The credit agreement contains customary events of default.

 

Contractual Obligations

 

Our principal commitments consist of obligations under our outstanding leases for office space and distribution facilities and capital lease and third-party software maintenance obligations. The following table summarizes our approximate contractual cash obligations, including future interest payments, at December 31, 2017 and the effect such obligations are expected to have on our liquidity and cash flows in future periods:

 

   Payment Due by Period 
Contractual Obligations  Total   Less Than
1 Year
   1-3
Years
   3-5
Years
   More than
5 Years
 
     
Operating lease obligations(1)  $1,822,000   $478,000   $656,000   $490,000   $198,000 
Capital lease obligations(2)  $174,100   $72,100   $66,200   $35,800      
                          
Total  $1,996,100   $550,100   $722,200   $525,800   $198,000 

 

 

(1)Operating lease obligations represent our obligations to make payments under the lease agreements for our facilities and office equipment leases. During the three months ended March 31, 2018, we made regular payments on our operating lease obligations of $82,375.

 

(2)Capital lease obligations represent financing on computer equipment and software purchases. During the three months ended March 31, 2018, we made regular payments on our capital lease obligations of $19,300.

   

92

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements

 

During the periods presented, we did not have, nor do we currently have, any relationships with unconsolidated entities or financial partnerships, such as entities often referred to as structured finance or special purpose entities.

 

JOBS Act

 

We are an “emerging growth company,” as defined in the JOBS Act. Section 107 of the JOBS Act provides that an “emerging growth company” can take advantage of the extended transition period provided in Section 7(a)(2)(B) of the Securities Act for complying with new or revised accounting standards. This means that an “emerging growth company” can make an election to delay the adoption of certain accounting standards until those standards would apply to private companies. We have elected not to use the extended transition period for complying with any new or revised financial accounting standards. Therefore, we will be subject to the same new or revised accounting standards as other public companies that are not emerging growth companies.

 

Seasonality

 

While our B2B customers typically operate in highly-seasonal businesses, we have historically experienced only moderate seasonality in our business. For the years ended December 31, 2017 and 2016, approximately 34.7% and 26.4%, respectively, of our net sales were made in the fourth quarter, as our customers build up their inventories in anticipation of the holiday season. However, the rapid growth we have experienced in recent years may have masked the full effects of seasonal factors on our business to date, and as such, seasonality may have a greater effect on our results of operations in future periods.

 

Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures about Market Risk

 

Interest Rate Risk. We currently have no material exposure to interest rate risk. In the future, we intend to invest our excess cash primarily in money market funds, debt instruments of the U.S. government and its agencies and in high quality corporate bonds and commercial paper. Due to the short-term nature of these investments, we do not believe that there will be material exposure to interest rate risk arising from our investments.

 

Foreign Currency Risk. Prior to August 23, 2013, all of our product sales, inventory purchases, and operating expenses were denominated in U.S. dollars. We therefore did not have any foreign currency risk associated with these activities. In August 2013, we commenced operation in Canada through our newly-formed subsidiary Vapeworld Distribution. The functional currency of all of our entities is the U.S. dollar, other than Vapeworld Distribution, which is the Canadian dollar. While currently a material portion of our inventory purchases for Vapeworld Distribution are in U.S. dollars, its product sales will primarily be in Canadian dollars. Additionally, Vapeworld Distribution incurs its operating expenses in Canadian dollars. Therefore, our results of operations and cash flows are subject to fluctuations due to changes in foreign currency exchange rates, principally the Canadian dollar. However, we believe that the exposure to foreign currency fluctuation from product sales and operating expenses is immaterial at this time as the related product sales and costs do not constitute a significant portion of our total net sales and expenses. As we grow our operations, our exposure to foreign currency risk could become more significant. To date, we have not entered into any foreign currency exchange contracts and currently do not expect to enter into foreign currency exchange contracts for trading or speculative purposes.

 

93

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Impact of Inflation. Our results of operations and financial condition are presented based on historical cost. While it is difficult to accurately measure the impact of inflation due to the imprecise nature of the estimates required, we believe the effects of inflation, if any, on our historical results of operations and financial condition have been immaterial. We cannot assure you, however, that our results of operations and financial condition will not be materially impacted by inflation in the future.

 

Recent Accounting Pronouncements

 

In February 2016, the FASB issued ASU 2016-02, Leases (Topic 842) (“ASU 2016-02”), which, among other things, requires lessees to recognize most leases on their balance sheets related to the rights and obligations created by those leases. ASU 2016-02 also requires new disclosures to help financial statement users better understand the amount, timing, and uncertainty of cash flows arising from leases. The new standard becomes effective for us on January 1, 2019, with early adoption permitted. We plan to adopt ASU 2016-02 beginning on January 1, 2019. The amendments in ASU 2016-02 should be applied under a modified retrospective approach. We are in the process of evaluating the effect that ASU 2016-02 will have on our consolidated financial statements and related disclosures.

 

In June 2016, the FASB issued ASU 2016-13, Financial Instruments —Credit Losses (Topic 326): Measurement of Credit Losses on Financial Instruments (“ASU 2016-13”), which significantly changes how entities will account for credit losses for most financial assets and certain other instruments that are not measured at fair value through net income. Among other things, ASU 2016-13 requires the measurement of all expected credit losses for financial assets held at the reporting date based on historical experience, current conditions, and reasonable and supportable forecasts. We are in the process of evaluating the effect that ASU 2016-13 will have on our consolidated financial statements and related disclosures.

 

In August 2016, the FASB issued ASU 2016-15, Statement of Cash Flows (Topic 320): Classification of Certain Cash Receipts and Cash Payments (“ASU 2016-15”). ASU 2016-15 addresses the diversity in how certain cash receipts and cash payments are presented and classified in the statement of cash flows, including debt prepayment or debt extinguishment costs, contingent consideration payments made soon after a business combination, proceeds from the settlements of insurance claims, and proceeds from the settlements of bank-owned life insurance policies. This amendment is effective for public business entities for reporting periods beginning after December 15, 2017, including interim periods within that reporting period. Early adoption is permitted. Adoption of ASU 2016-15 on January 1, 2018 had no material impact on our consolidated financial statements.

 

In January 2017, the FASB issued ASU 2017-01, Business Combinations (Topic 805): Clarifying the Definition of a Business (ASU 2017-01”), which amended existing guidance to clarify the definition of a business with the objective of adding guidance to assist entities with evaluating whether transactions should be accounted for as acquisitions of assets or businesses. The amendments provide a screen to determine when a set of assets and activities (collectively referred to as a “set”) is not a business. The screen requires that when substantially all of the fair value of the group assets acquired is concentrated in a single identifiable asset or a group of similar identifiable assets, the set is not a business. If the screen is not met, the amendments (1) require that to be considered a business, a set must include, at a minimum, an input and a substantive process that together significantly contribute to the ability to create output and (2) remove the evaluation of whether a market participant could replace missing elements. ASU 2017-01 is effective for public business entities for annual periods beginning after December 15, 2017, including interim periods within those periods. Our adoption of ASU 2017-01 on January 1, 2018 had no material impact on our consolidated financial statements.

 

94

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Revenue Recognition

 

In May 2014, the FASB issued ASU 2014-09, Revenue from Contracts with Customers (Topic 606). The new revenue standard outlines a new, single comprehensive model for entities to use in accounting for revenue arising from contracts with customers and supersedes most current revenue recognition guidance, including industry-specific guidance. The new revenue standard contains principles to determine the measurement of revenue and timing of when it is recognized. The guidance provides a five-step analysis of transactions to determine when and how revenue is recognized. Under the new model, recognition of revenue occurs when a customer obtains control of promised goods or services in an amount that reflects the consideration to which the entity expects to be entitled in exchange for those goods or services. In addition, the new standard requires that reporting companies disclose the nature, amount, timing, and uncertainty of revenue and cash flows arising from contracts with customers.

 

We adopted the provisions of this guidance on January 1, 2017 using the modified retrospective approach with a cumulative-effect adjustment to beginning members’ equity at January 1, 2017. The comparative information has not been restated and continues to be reported under the accounting standards in effect for the period presented.

 

Profits Interests

 

In January 2017, Greenlane Holdings, LLC entered into a profits interest award agreement with one of its executives, which represented a 2% non-voting interest in Greenlane Holdings, LLC when fully vested. Similarly, in June and December 2016, Greenlane Holdings, LLC entered into profits interest award agreements with two of its executives, which, in the aggregate, represented a 3% non-voting interest in Greenlane Holdings, LLC when fully vested. All three of the profits interests agreements originally vested over a four-year period. Any unvested portion of the profits interest were to vest upon the consummation of a capital event that is also a change in control (as defined) of Greenlane Holdings, LLC. The agreements specified that the award entitled the grantee to only participate in certain net profit and net proceeds in excess of a threshold amount (as defined) from a capital event that is also a change in control of Greenlane Holdings, LLC, allocated and distributed to the profits interest from and after the grant date, and did not entitle the grantee to any other profits of Greenlane Holdings, LLC. We determined that these awards represented equity instruments and they were accounted for under ASC 718, Stock Compensation. The grant date fair value of these awards was de minimis. As a result, no compensation expense was recognized during the years ended December 31, 2017 and 2016. In August 2018, Greenlane Holdings, LLC converted the profits interests into membership interests of Greenlane Holdings, LLC, a portion of which remain subject to contractual vesting provisions.

 

Phantom Equity Units

 

As part of an incentive package awarded during 2017 to certain key employees (nine employees as of December 31, 2017), we have has offered these individuals the opportunity to participate in the phantom equity program of Warehouse Goods LLC. Under these agreements, each participant is guaranteed a “phantom equity payment” in respect to an agreed upon number of bonus units. The number of units varies for each recipient, as defined in his/her individual agreement. Under the phantom equity program, there were 3,000,000 units authorized (representing 3% of WHG), with 950,000 units granted under this plan as of December 31, 2017. The bonus units contain a stated service condition, and the units cannot be settled unless a change in control event occurs under specified terms. The Company determined that the bonus units represent share-based compensation awards which are accounted for under ASC 718, Stock Compensation. Recognition of compensation cost is appropriately deferred until the consummation of a Sale event (as defined in the agreements), and as such, no associated compensation expense was recognized during the year ended December 31, 2017. Because liability-classified awards must be remeasured each period, the compensation cost to be recognized upon a change in control event will be equal to the then fair value of the phantom equity awards.

 

95

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

BUSINESS

 

Overview

 

We are the largest distributor of premium vaporization products and consumption accessories in the United States and have a growing presence in Canada. Our customers include over 5,700 independent smoke shops and regional retail chain stores, which collectively operate through an estimated 8,000 retail locations, and hundreds of licensed cannabis cultivators, processors and dispensaries. We also own and operate two of the leading North American direct-to-consumer e-commerce websites in the vaporization products and consumption accessories industry, VaporNation.com and VapeWorld.com, which offer convenient, flexible shopping solutions directly to consumers. Through our expansive North American distribution network and e-commerce presence, we offer a comprehensive selection of more than 4,000 stock keeping units (“SKUs”), including premium vaporizers and parts, cleaning products, grinders and storage containers, pipes, rolling papers and customized lines of premium specialty packaging. We have cultivated a reputation for carrying the highest-quality products from both large, established manufacturers that offer leading brands, such as the Volcano vaporizers by Storz & Bickel, PAX 3 vaporizers by PAX Labs and JUUL vaporizers by JUUL Labs, as well as promising start-up manufacturers that offer innovative, up-and-coming products, to which we extend the ability to grow and scale quickly. We also provide value-added sales services to complement our product offerings and help our customers operate and grow their businesses. We believe our market leadership, distribution network, broad product selection and extensive technical expertise provide us with significant competitive advantages and create a compelling value proposition for both our customers and our suppliers. 

 

Our Customers. We market and sell our products in both the business to business (“B2B”) and business to consumer (“B2C”) sectors of the marketplace. We believe our B2B customers choose us for a number of reasons, including the breadth and availability of the products we offer, our extensive expertise, the quality of our customer service, the convenience of our distribution centers and the consistency of our timely delivery. Our ability to provide a “one-stop shop” experience allows us to be the preferred vendor to many of these customers by streamlining their supply chain. In addition, we believe that our customers find great value in the advice and recommendations provided by our knowledgeable sales and service associates, which further increases demand for our products.

 

We have a diverse base of more than 5,700 B2B customers, and our top ten customers accounted for 10.9% and 12.9% of our net sales in the year ended December 31, 2017 and the three-month period ended March 31, 2018, respectively, with no single customer accounting for more than 2.0% and 3.5% of our net sales in the year ended December 31, 2017 and the three-month period ended March 31, 2018, respectively. While we distribute our products to a growing number of large national and regional retailers in Canada, our typical B2B customer is an independent retailer operating in a single market. Our customer service teams interact regularly with our B2B customers as most of them have frequent restocking needs. We believe our high-touch customer service model strengthens relationships, builds loyalty and drives repeat business. In addition, we believe our premium product lines, broad product portfolio and strategically-located distribution centers position us well to meet our customers’ needs and ensure timely delivery of products.

 

We also have a large base of B2C customers who we reach via our VaporNation.com and VapeWorld.com websites. While these customers are predominantly in North America, we also ship to Europe, Australia and other select regions. Our websites are among the most trafficked within our segment according to Alexa Traffic Rankings, and as of March 31, 2018, we ranked first in over 15 Google key search terms and in the top five in over 150 Google key search terms. These websites currently attract over 360,000 unique monthly visitors and generate approximately 6,000 monthly transactions. We shipped more than 180,000 parcels to our B2C customers during the year ended December 31, 2017 and more than 57,000 parcels during the three-month period ended March 31, 2018. In addition to our e-commerce platform, in 2018 we opened our first retail location in the high-traffic shopping center, Chelsea Market, in New York City under our proprietary Higher Standards brand.

 

In the first quarter of 2018, our B2B revenue represented approximately 82.1% of our net sales, B2C revenues represented approximately 10.9% of our net sales, and the balance of our net sales was comprised of revenues derived from drop-shipping on behalf of other website operators and providing other services.

 

96

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Our Suppliers. Our strong supplier relationships allow us to distribute a broad selection of in-demand premium products at attractive prices. We are the exclusive or lead distributor for many of our suppliers due to our scale, nationwide footprint, leading market positions, knowledgeable professionals, high service levels and strong customer relationships. We believe many of our suppliers choose us because of our track record for successfully growing and launching brands in our trade channels. We offer suppliers feedback and support through all stages of the product sale cycle, including customer service and warranty support. We are often the largest or most visible exhibitor at industry trade shows where we work closely together with our premium suppliers in presenting, demonstrating and exposing their products. We believe these value-added services foster an ongoing and lasting relationship with our suppliers, and they serve as a key element of our business strategy.

 

We source our products from more than 125 suppliers, including leading vaporizer equipment manufacturers, a wide range of smaller companies that are applying breakthrough innovations for up-and-coming products, and a variety of suppliers who specialize in low, or no-technology industry staple products, such as rolling paper, cleaning supplies and child-resistant packaging. We have exclusive or lead distribution relationships with some of our largest suppliers, including North America channel exclusivity for Pax Lab’s Pax 2 and 3 products, U.S. exclusivity for the full line of Storz & Bickel products (Volcano, Plenty, Mighty and Crafty), worldwide exclusivity for all Grenco Science products, and other geographic exclusivity with Da Vinci, Pollen Gear, Banana Bros, Eyce and others. We are also one of the largest distributors of products made by JUUL Labs. We believe our exclusive and lead distribution relationships are a principal competitive advantage. Additionally, we develop and sell innovative products under our proprietary brands, such as Higher Standards. Our portfolio of highly-regarded brands helps us to attract and retain our B2B and B2C customers, which allows us to generate incremental sales opportunities.

 

Our Distribution Facilities. In 2017, we shipped more than 225,000 parcels comprising more than 2.0 million product units. To facilitate these volumes and in anticipation of future growth, we have established a network of five strategically-located distribution centers that provide full coverage of the United States and Canada and ensure timely and cost-effective transportation and delivery of our products. We estimate that, as of March 31, 2018, 90% of our North American customers could be reached within two days via FedEx Ground or similar ground delivery services. Due to our mature and continuously-evolving operational efficiencies, we provide our customers with accurate transaction fulfillment, logistics and customer support services. We expect to open an additional distribution facility in British Columbia, Canada, in the third quarter of 2018.

 

Our Growth. In February 2018, we completed the acquisition of Better Life Holdings, LLC, a leading west coast distributor of like products that does business under the trade name VaporNation (“VaporNation”), to expand and grow our business and market leadership. We intend to pursue additional acquisitions to complement our organic growth and to achieve our strategic objectives. Since January 1, 2016, we have grown our employee count from 89 employees to 220 employees as of June 1, 2018, of which 75 were focused on sales. Our organic and acquisition-driven growth strategies have led to significant increases in consolidated net sales, gross profit and EBITDA. For the three-month period ended March 31, 2018, which included the results of Better Life Holdings, LLC only for the period commencing on February 20, 2018 we generated consolidated net sales of $43.3 million, gross profit of $9.1 million and EBITDA of $2.7 million, compared to net sales of $19.2 million, gross profit of $4.4 million and EBITDA of $0.8 million for the three-month period ended March 31, 2017.  For the year ended December 31, 2017, without any pro forma adjustment for our acquisition of Better Life Holdings, LLC we generated consolidated net sales of $88.3 million, gross profit of $20.6 million and EBITDA of $3.5 million, compared to consolidated net sales of $66.7 million, gross profit of $15.0 million and EBITDA of $1.0 million for the year ended December 31, 2016. See “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations—Non-GAAP Financial Measure-EBITDA” for a reconciliation of our EBITDA to net income.

 

Investment Highlights

 

Leading Distributor of Premium Vaporization Products and Consumption Accessories in North America

 

We are the largest distributor of premium vaporization products and consumption accessories in the United States and have a growing presence in Canada. We have exclusive rights from a number of suppliers to distribute premium brands and products. As of March 31, 2018, we carried more than 4,000 SKUs that were sourced from more than 125 brands and suppliers. For the year ended December 31, 2017 and the three-month period ended March 31, 2018, we had consolidated net sales of $88.3 million and $43.3 million, respectively, and we believe we are positioned to grow substantially as the cannabis regulatory landscape evolves.

 

97

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Strong and Loyal Customer Base with Robust Sales Infrastructure to Support Scale

 

Our B2B customers include over 5,700 independent smoke shops and regional retail chain stores, which collectively operate through an estimated 8,000 retail locations, and hundreds of licensed cannabis producers, processors and dispensaries. We intend to further expand into new or recently-entered trade channels, including mass retail and big box. We believe our highly-specialized sales force and robust infrastructure are well-positioned to support this growth. We invest in our talent by providing every sales representative with an extensive and ongoing education, including programs that provide comprehensive product knowledge, as well as the tools needed to have a unique understanding of our customers’ personalities and decision-making processes.

 

A Significant E-Commerce Retailer Positioned to Become a Global Leader in Direct-to-Consumer

 

We own and operate two of the leading North American direct-to-consumer e-commerce websites in our industry, VaporNation.com and VapeWorld.com. Our e-commerce properties increase our reach on a global scale and provide higher gross profit margins than our B2B operations. With a database consisting of more than 260,000 B2C customers, we are able to continually expand our audience and business. In addition to our own fulfillment, we also exclusively fulfill web orders for many of the top industry suppliers, as well as for other leading e-commerce websites. We are developing a unique e-commerce platform, Vapor.com, that should further increase our leadership position in the direct-to-consumer channel.

 

Strategically-Located Distribution Footprint  

 

We have established our distribution network across the U.S. and Canada, including five distribution centers that allow us to deliver to approximately 90% of our customers within two days via FedEx Ground or similar ground delivery services. In the twelve months ended March 31, 2018, our expansive distribution network allowed us to ship over 4.1 million units to our B2B customers. Our infrastructure is built to support our company as it grows and scales. We believe our distribution network would be difficult and expensive for new entrants in our industry to replicate. 

 

Demonstrated Strong Financial Performance and Future Growth Prospects

 

We have operated profitably since our inception in 2005. We believe our products are best-in-class and our “white glove” customer service, complemented by our intensive financial management, have driven strong growth and financial performance. We emphasize and incentivize profitability at the transaction level and foster relationships with customers to drive repeat purchasing. We have experienced consistent year-over-year growth and achieved revenue growth of 32.3% for the year ended December 31, 2017 (“fiscal 2017”) compared to the prior year period.

 

Total revenue increased from $66.7 million in the year ended December 31, 2016 (“fiscal 2016”) to $88.3 million in fiscal 2017, representing an annual growth rate of 32.3%, or to $104.6 million in fiscal 2017 on a pro forma basis giving effect to our acquisition of Better Life Holdings, LLC in February 2018, representing a growth rate of 56.8%.

 

Total revenue increased from $19.2 million in the quarter ended March 31, 2017 (“Q1 2017”) to $43.3 million in the quarter ended March 31, 2018 (“Q1 2018”), representing an increase of 125.5%.

 

Net income was $87,000 for fiscal 2016 and $2.3 million for fiscal 2017.

 

EBITDA increased from $1.0 million in the year ended December 31, 2016 to $3.5 million for fiscal 2017, representing an annual growth rate of 250.0%.

 

We believe our results of operations for Q1 2018 are a first look at our future growth prospects as we continue to rapidly scale and execute on new growth opportunities. We experienced revenue growth of 125.5% for Q1 2018 compared to Q1 2017.

 

98

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Passionate and Committed Executive Team with Proven Track Record of Delivering Strong Results

 

Our executive team has over 225 years of cumulative experience across various industries, including distribution, marketing, sales, financial services, public accounting, logistics, information technology, and luxury retail. Through steady brand discipline and strategic business planning, our executive team has transformed a small, single-product distributor into a leading multi-product, omni-channel distributor with a diverse and strategic portfolio mix of premium brands and products. Our executive team’s passion and dedication to our company permeates across our employees and organizational culture, which fosters innovation, teamwork, passion for our products and personalized customer service.

  

Our Business Relating to the Cannabis Industry

 

While we do not cultivate, distribute or dispense cannabis or any cannabis derivatives, several of the products we distribute, may be used for the consumption of cannabis, cannabis derivatives and nicotine using items such as vaporizers, pipes and rolling papers.

 

We believe the global cannabis industry is experiencing a transformation from a state of prohibition toward a state of legalization. We expect the number of states, countries and other jurisdictions implementing legalization legislation to continue to increase, which will create numerous and sizable opportunities for market participants, including us. Further, we believe that the trend of users seeking to consume nicotine will continue to evolve from traditional cigarettes to e-cigarettes, vaporizers and heat-not-burn platforms a trend which we are well-positioned to capitalize on.

 

Global Landscape

 

A June 2018 report of Arcview Market Research, a leading market research firm in the cannabis industry, projects that spending in the global legal cannabis market will be approximately $12.9 billion in 2018, of which the United States, Canada and rest of the world are projected to comprise $11 billion, $1.3 billion and $0.6 billion, respectively, and projects that by 2022 spending in the global legal cannabis market will reach $32.0 billion, of which the United States, Canada and rest of the world comprises $23.4 billion, $5.5 billion, and $3.1 billion, respectively.

 

Wells Fargo Securities, LLC believes the global e-cigarette and vapor market will generate $5.5 billion of revenue in 2018, of which vaporizers, tanks and mods are projected to comprise $3.5 billion.

 

Our experience and awareness of the markets in which we operate lead us to believe that demand for the types of products we distribute will grow in tandem with the industry.

The North American Cannabis Landscape

 

United States and Territories. Thirty-one states, the District of Columbia, Puerto Rico, and Guam have legalized medical cannabis in some form, although not all of those jurisdictions have fully implemented their legalization programs. Nine of these states and the District of Columbia have legalized cannabis for adult use. Fifteen additional states have legalized high-cannabidiol (CBD), low tetrahydrocannabinol (THC) oils for a limited class of patients. Only four states continue to prohibit cannabis entirely. Notwithstanding the continued trend toward further state legalization, cannabis continues to be categorized as a Schedule I controlled substance under the Federal Controlled Substances Act and, accordingly, the cultivation, processing, distribution, sale and possession of cannabis violate federal law in the United States as discussed further in “Risk Factors—Our business depends partly on continued purchases by businesses and individuals selling or using cannabis pursuant to state laws in the United States or Canadian and provincial laws.”

 

99

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

  

We believe support for cannabis legalization in the United States is gaining momentum. According to a 2017 poll by Gallup, public support for the legalization of cannabis in the United States has increased from approximately 16% in 1974 to approximately 64% in 2017.

 

 

 

The U.S. cannabis industry has experienced significant growth over the past 12 months fueled in part by increasing consumer acceptance and the legalization of medical and recreational cannabis across the United States. A May 2018 research report of Cowen and Company, a diversified financial services firm, estimated the United States to have 34 million adult cannabis users and projects that this number will grow to approximately 43 million in 2022 and 58 million by 2030. However, many of these consumers do not reside in states where recreational or medical cannabis is legal under applicable state law. With increasing adult usage and further states expecting to legalize recreational cannabis use, some business participants in sectors such as wine, beer, spirits and tobacco have publicly expressed their views on the threats to their businesses from the growth of the cannabis industry.

 

 

 

100

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

The following map illustrates states that have fully legalized cannabis (for medical and recreational purposes); have partially legalized cannabis (for medical purposes only); and have not legalized cannabis for medical or recreational purposes are outlined below (as of August 1, 2018).

 

 

 

Canada. Legal access to dried cannabis for medical purposes was first allowed in Canada in 1999. The Access to Cannabis for Medical Purposes Regulations (“ACMPR”) currently govern the production, sale and distribution of cannabis products in Canada. Health Canada recently reported that over 235,000 patients had registered for medical cannabis prescription by September 30, 2017.

 

On April 13, 2017, the Government of Canada introduced legislation to legalize, and regulate access to cannabis (Bill C-45). The Cannabis Act (Canada) (the “Cannabis Act”) created a strict legal framework for controlling the production, distribution, sale and possession of cannabis in Canada. On June 21, 2018, the Government of Canada announced that Bill C-45 received Royal Assent and Prime Minister Trudeau announced that marijuana would be legal and available to the consuming public by October 2018.

 

In a 2018 publication by Deloitte, a leading professional services and consulting firm, the projected size of the Canadian adult-use market in 2019 ranged from C$1.8 billion to C$4.3 billion and in a 2018 research report, CIBC World Markets indicated that it expects the sector to grow to C$6.5 billion by 2020.

The outlook for the North American cannabis industry is largely positive. The industry is expected to continue benefiting from increasingly favorable attitudes toward both medical cannabis and recreational cannabis with expected significant consumer spending increases.

 

The International Cannabis Landscape

 

Europe. Europe’s population is more than twice the size of the U.S. and Canadian markets combined, suggesting the potential of a very significant market. Prohibition Partners, a London-based strategic consultancy firm, estimated in 2018 that approximately 12% of the continent’s adult population were “irregular” or “intensive” users of cannabis and a fully-regulated cannabis market would be worth more than $70 billion annually, with medical usage comprising $46 billion.

Currently, only Germany, Italy, Austria, Czech Republic, Finland, Portugal, Poland and Spain allow cannabis use for medicinal purposes, although it has been widely reported that other countries are considering following suit.

 

101

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

The progress of some key international markets is outlined below.

 

Germany. In January 2017, the German parliament legalized cannabis for medical consumption. In Germany, the cost of dried cannabis and cannabis extracts will be covered by health insurance for patients who have no other treatment options. Germany has created a “Cannabis Agency” to regulate the formation of a domestic cultivation and production of the medical cannabis supply chain. According to Rheinische Post, in the first 10 months of Germany’s medical cannabis reform, over 13,000 applications for medical cannabis have been received by the largest three public health insurance companies in Germany.

 

United Kingdom. The U.K is a global leader in legal cannabis production according to the International Narcotics Control Board and the country has also positioned itself as being in the forefront of medical cannabis research and development. The U.K has launched a review into the status of cannabis, which is currently classified as a Class B drug, the second most harmful category of narcotics.

  

Australia. In February 2016, Australia legalized medical cannabis at the federal level to allow for the manufacturing of medicinal cannabis products in Australia. In October 2016, the Australian regulatory authority released a detailed application process to license domestic cultivators and producers of medical cannabis. In the interim, until local licenses have been awarded and have reached production capacity, Australia is allowing medical cannabis to be imported from locally-authorized producers. In January 2018, the Australian government announced that it will now permit the export of medicinal cannabis products to provide increasing opportunities for domestic producers.

 

Israel. In February 2017, legislation was passed allowing Israeli cannabis companies to export cannabis internationally. According to the country’s health minister, as of December 2017, there are 383 farmers that had applied for growing licenses in Israel, and 250 nurseries, 95 pharmacies and 60 processing facilities had applied for cannabis distribution and/or processing licenses. According to the European Journal of Internal Medicine as of March 2018, there was estimated to be 32,000 registered users of medical cannabis in Israel. Recreational cannabis use is currently illegal in Israel, but it is expected to be decriminalized by late 2018.

 

Uruguay. In December 2013, Uruguay became the first country to legalize cannabis for both medicinal and recreational purposes. According to a news report published by The Independent as of December 2017, there were over 16,000 government-registered cannabis users, a three-fold increase from approximately 5,000 users in July 2017.

 

Product Information

 

Consumers of cannabis, herbs, flavored compounds and nicotine are likely going to require the types of products we distribute, including vaporizers, pipes, rolling papers and packaging. We believe we distribute the “picks & shovels” for these rapidly-growing industries.

 

Inhalation Delivery Methods. There are two prevalent types of inhalation methods for cannabis and nicotine—combustion and vaporization. Recent advances in vaporization technology offer users a cleaner alternative to combustion with fewer health concerns.

 

Vaporizers are personal devices that heat materials to temperatures below the point of combustion, extracting the flavors, aromas and effects of dry herbs and concentrates in the form of vapor. Measured by revenue, vaporizers are our largest product category. In 2017, the vaporizers and components category, which is comprised of desktops, portables and pens, generated 79.9% of our net sales.

 

The Science and Popularity of Vaporization

 

Vaporizers have elements that are designed to quickly heat combustible material, which generates a vapor that is immediately inhaled through the mouthpiece on the device itself, or a hose, pipe or an inflatable bag. Vaporizers can heat a variety of dry materials, viscous liquids and waxes and provides a convenient way for users to consume the active ingredients. Common ingredients used in vaporizers include cannabis, nicotine extracts, tobacco, herbs and propylene glycol and glycerin blends.

 

102

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Vaporizers have become a popular way to consume cannabis, flavored compounds and nicotine. According to the Cowen Vaping Survey conducted in April 2016, cannabis users comprised 20% of the vaporizer market. Heating rather than burning cannabis affords the consumer more control over the substances being consumed as vaporizers produce no smoke, are more discreet and emit less odor compared to combustible methods of consumption. As a result, vaporizers are expected to gain significantly more market share.

 

Currently, vaporization technology is utilized for the following substances:

 

 

 

Vaporization Technology

 

Cannabis consumers have a wide array of vaporization devices, at their disposal which can be broadly categorized into two primary segments—desktop and portable vaporizers. Our vaporizer offering spans over 100 distinct products across 34 brands.

 

Desktop Vaporizers. Vaporizers were first developed as desktop models that were powered through traditional electric power sources. Desktop vaporizers are capable of heating the material to a more precise temperature choice determined by the consumer or as advised by a health practitioner. Some models dispense the vapor through a pipe or wand, and others into an inflatable bag in order to allow users to more accurately monitor their consumption.

 

Portable Vaporizers. With the development of lithium batteries, vaporizers have now become portable. Technological advances are resulting in lighter, sleeker and more visually-appealing units that are capable of quickly heating the material to the user’s desired temperature setting. The temperature setting can be fixed by the manufacturer, set manually by the consumer or via a Bluetooth connection to the consumer’s smartphone. Portable vaporizers, of which pens are a sub-set, are differentiated by many features, including output, battery life, recharge time, material, capacity and design.

 

Other Methods of Consumption

 

In addition to vaporizers, consumers have a wide array of methods of consumption at their disposal, including, among others, hand pipes, water pipes, rolling papers, and oral and topical delivery methods.

 

Hand and Water Pipes. We offer a diverse portfolio of approximately 77 products and seven brands, including our own proprietary Higher Standards brand. Many display iconic, licensed logos and artwork as pipes have grown into an artistic expression and are available in countless creative forms and functionality.

 

Hand pipes are small, portable and simple to use and function by trapping the smoke produced from burning materials, which is then inhaled by the user. Water pipes include large table-top models and bubblers and are more complex because they incorporate the cooling effects of water to the burning materials, before inhalation.

 

Rolling Papers. Rolling papers are a traditional consumption method used to smoke dried plant material in a “roll-your-own application”. Our rolling papers category is comprised of approximately 41 products across six brands.

 

Edibles, Tinctures, Ingestible Oils and Topicals are additional methods of consumption.

  

103

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

History and Development of Our Company

 

Over the last 13 years, we have evolved from a single-product distributor of desktop vaporizers into a market leader in the sale, marketing and distribution of premium vaporization products and consumption accessories. While our growth and advancement has continued, our corporate culture has remained steadfast. We are focused on a customer-centric platform that is strengthened by an emphasis on technological advancement, innovations and maintaining long-term relationships with our suppliers, vendors and employees. We believe the following events have influenced the general development of our business:

 

2005: Founded as a single-product U.S. distributor of German desktop vaporizers

 

2007: Established VapeWorld.com as a B2C e-commerce website and B2B wholesale distributor

 

2010: Leased our first self-managed warehouse in Boca Raton, FL

 

2011: Enhanced bi-coastal fulfillment capabilities by adding distribution facilities in New Jersey and Nevada

 

2012: Entered into a distribution agreement with PAX Labs and introduced the Pax Vaporizer into our product portfolio

 

2013: Expanded our footprint into Canada with the addition of an Ontario-based subsidiary and distribution facility

 

2016: Rebranded our business as Greenlane and commenced distribution of the JUUL line of products

 

2017: Relocated our Boca Raton, FL distribution center to Jacksonville, FL to help facilitate additional shipping efficiencies

 

2017: Relocated our Las Vegas, NV distribution center to Visalia, CA to enhance our delivery capabilities

 

2018: Acquired VaporNation, one of our major competitors

 

Our Competitive Strengths

 

We attribute our success to the following competitive strengths.

 

Clear Market Leader in an Attractive Industry. We are the largest North American distributor of premium vaporization products and consumption accessories.

 

Market Knowledge and Understanding. Because of our experience and our extensive and long-term industry relationships, we believe we have a deep understanding of customer needs and desires in both our B2B and B2C channels. This allows us to influence customer demand and to insert ourselves in the pipeline between product manufacturers, suppliers, advertisers and the marketplace. Further, we have generated significant databases relating to our suppliers and customers, allowing us to anticipate market dynamics.

 

Broadest Product Offering. We believe we offer the industry’s most comprehensive portfolio of vaporization products and consumption accessories with over 4,000 SKUs from more than 125 suppliers. This broad product offering creates a “one-stop” shop for our customers and positively distinguishes us from our competitors. We maintain a high level of product availability and timely delivery. In addition, we have carefully cultivated a portfolio of well-known brands and premium products, and have helped many of the brands we distribute to become established names in the industry. These products are staples for many of our B2B customers and many of those customers are dependent upon them for a significant portion of their revenue. Most of our B2B customers order products from us on a regular basis, which provides us an opportunity to efficiently add other items to each order. In addition, with long-term exclusive and lead distribution rights for many key brands, we believe we have established a sustainable market-leading role. Not only are we the key relationship for the purchasing requirements of many of our B2B customers, but we are also the preeminent go-to-market partner for product suppliers wishing to gain access to these accounts.

 

104

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Entrepreneurial Culture. We believe our entrepreneurial, results-driven culture fosters highly-dedicated employees who provide our customers with superior service that differentiates us from our competition. We invest in our talent by providing every sales representative with an extensive and ongoing education, and have successfully developed programs that provide comprehensive product knowledge, as well as the tools needed to have a unique understanding of our customers’ personalities and decision-making processes. Further, we incentivize sales employees throughout our company to generate business and execute it profitably through a compensation program that includes variable and longer-term compensation arrangements. We also believe our entrepreneurial culture, combined with our dedication to developing, training and providing opportunities for all of our employees, helps us attract and retain top talent. Similarly, we believe these characteristics have also positioned us as an attractive acquirer of smaller distributors whose owners are looking to scale business, pursuing faster growth or seeking liquidity.

 

Unwavering Focus on Relationships and Superior Service. We aim to be the premier partner of choice for our customers, suppliers and employees.

 

Customers. We believe we offer superior services and solutions due to our comprehensive product offering, proprietary industry data and analytics, product expertise and the quality of our service. We deliver products to our customers in a precise, safe and timely manner with complementary support from our dedicated sales and service teams.

 

Suppliers. Our industry knowledge, market reach and resources allow us to establish trusted professional relationships with many of our product suppliers. We offer them a variety of value-added services, such as marketing support, supply chain management, customer feedback, market data and customer service to support the sale of their products. Further, we offer our suppliers product returns and warranty repair services. As a result, we have become a significant and, in some cases, exclusive vendor for a number of our suppliers, which enables us to secure long-term relationships, competitive pricing and access to new and innovative products.

 

Employees. We provide our employees with an entrepreneurial culture, a safe work environment, financial incentives and career development opportunities.

 

Experienced and Proven Management Team Driving Organic and Acquisition Growth. We believe our management team is among the most experienced in the industry. In addition to our co-founder and Chief Executive Officer, Aaron LoCascio, and our co-founder, President and Chief Strategy Officer, Adam Schoenfeld, our senior management team brings experience in accounting, mergers and acquisitions, financial services, consumer packaged goods, retail operations, third-party logistics, information technology, product development and specialty retail, and an understanding of the cultural nuances of the sectors that we serve. Members of our executive leadership team have a strong track record of improving performance and successfully driving both internal and acquisitive growth during their tenure with us and prior to joining our company. Our team not only has a clearly-defined operational strategy to promote growth and profitability for our company, but also has an ambitious vision to be a global leader in the industry. We believe the scale of our business, our leading market position and our corporate culture will allow us to continue to attract and develop industry-leading talent.

 

105

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Our Strategies

 

We intend to leverage our competitive strengths to increase shareholder value through the following core strategies:

  

Build Upon Strong Customer and Supplier Relationships to Expand Organically. Our North American footprint and broad supplier relationships, combined with our regular interaction with our large and diverse customer base, provides us key insights and positions us to be a critical link in the supply chain for premium vaporization products and consumption accessories. Our suppliers benefit from access to more than 5,700 B2B customers and more than 260,000 B2C customers as we are a single point of contact for improved production, planning and efficiency. We believe we are unique in our ability to work with our suppliers to launch new products quickly and on a national scale. We intend to continue to increase our size and scale in customer, geographic and product reach, which we believe will continue to benefit our supplier base. Our customers, in turn, benefit from our market leadership, talented sales associates, broad product offering and high inventory availability, timely delivery and complementary value-added services. We will continue to work with new and existing suppliers to maintain a broad product offering for our customers at competitive prices and to enhance our role as a valued partner in the supply chain. We believe our strong customer and supplier relationships will enable us to expand and broaden our market share in the premium vaporization products and consumption accessories marketplace.

 

Expand Our Operations Internationally. We currently focus our marketing and sales efforts on the United States and Canada, the two largest and most developed markets for our products. While we currently support and ship products to customers in Europe, Australia, and parts of South America on a limited basis, we are aware of the growth opportunities in these markets. As we continue to expand our marketing, supplier relationships, sales bandwidth and expertise, we anticipate capturing market share in those regions by opening our own distribution centers, acquiring existing international distributors and partnering with local operators.

 

Expand our E-Commerce Reach and Capabilities. We own and operate two of the leading direct-to-consumer e-commerce websites in our industry, VaporNation.com and VapeWorld.com. These sites are the most trafficked within our segment according to Alexa Traffic Rankings, a leading data analytics firm, and as of March 31, 2018, we ranked first in over 15 Google key search terms and over 150 in the top five key search term positions. With a database consisting of more than 260,000 consumers, our e-commerce websites increase our reach on a global scale and enable us to continually expand our audience and business. We intend to continue to optimize our e-commerce platforms to improve conversion rates, increase average order values, and grow our margins. In addition, we are developing a unique online website, Vapor.com, which is scheduled to launch within the fourth quarter of 2018, that we expect will further increase our industry leadership position in e-commerce.

  

Pursue Value-Enhancing Strategic Acquisitions. Through our recently-completed acquisition of Better Life Holdings, LLC, we have added new markets within the United States, new product lines, talented employees and operational best practices. In addition, we increased our sales by introducing products from our existing portfolio to customers of VaporNation. We believe this acquisition is the first of many and that as a public company, we will be able to offer owners of smaller distributors and suppliers a combination of resources, expertise, liquidity and the opportunity to continue to operate their business in an entrepreneurial manner while relieving them of the risks and burdens associated with owning a small business. We intend to continue pursuing strategic acquisitions to grow our market share and enhance our leadership positions by taking advantage of our scale, operational experience and acquisition know-how to pursue and integrate attractive targets. We believe we have significant opportunities to add product categories through our knowledge of our industry and possible acquisition targets. In addition, we are focused on identifying and reviewing attractive new geographic markets for expansion through acquisitions. We will continue to apply a selective and disciplined acquisition strategy.

 

Enhance Our Operating Margins. We expect to enhance our operating margins as our business expands through a combination of additional product purchasing discounts, reduced inbound and outbound shipping and handling rates, reduced transaction processing fees, increased operating efficiencies and realizing the benefits of leveraging our existing assets and distribution facilities. Additionally, we expect that our operating margins will increase as our product mix continues to evolve to include a greater portion of our proprietary branded products. We are committed to supporting our proprietary brands, such as Higher Standards, which offer better price points and significantly higher gross margins than supplier-branded products. We recently opened our first Higher Standards retail store in New York City’s famed Chelsea Market, and we plan to roll out an additional five Higher Standards retail stores by December 31, 2019. We also continuously monitor, adjust and improve the way we source and distribute products to our customers in an effort to achieve greater operating efficiencies and supply chain optimization. Because of recent substantial investments in our corporate infrastructure, and existing levels of fixed costs, we believe that, except for the additional expenses associated with being a public company, we will not have material increases in our general and administrative expenses as we pursue our growth plans.

 

Developing A World-Class Portfolio of Proprietary Brands. We intend to develop a portfolio of our own proprietary brands, which over time should improve our blended margins and create long-term value. Our brand development will be based upon our proprietary industry intelligence that allows us to identify market opportunities for new brands and products. We plan to leverage our distribution infrastructure and customer relationships to penetrate the market quickly with our proprietary brands and to gain placement in thousands of stores. In addition, we plan to sell such products directly to consumers via the brand websites and our e-commerce properties. Our existing proprietary brands include our Higher Standards and Aerospaced brands. We have short term plans to introduce a brand in partnership with the estate of the iconic artist Keith Haring and a rolling paper brand with one of the most influential celebrities in the industry today. In addition, we are absorbing the Marley Natural accessory line as a house brand. In creating our proprietary brands, we intend to stay mindful of our key supplier relationships and to identify opportunities within our product portfolio and in the market where we can introduce compelling products that do not directly compete with the products of our core suppliers. We believe that, over time, our proprietary brands will have a significant positive impact on our results of operations.

 

106

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Execute on Identified Operational Initiatives. We continue to evaluate operational initiatives to improve our profitability, enhance our supply chain efficiency, strengthen our pricing and category management capabilities, streamline and refine our marketing process and invest in more sophisticated information technology systems and data analytics. In addition, we continue to further automate our distribution facilities and improve our logistical capabilities. Although we are still in the early stages of some of these initiatives, they have already contributed to improvements in our profitability and customer service levels. We believe we will continue to benefit from these and other operational improvements.

 

Be the Employer of Choice. We believe our employees are the key drivers of our success, and we aim to recruit, train, promote and retain the most talented and success-driven personnel in the industry. Our size and scale enable us to offer structured training and career path opportunities for our employees, while in our sales and marketing teams, we have built a vibrant and entrepreneurial culture that rewards performance. We promote ongoing, open and honest communication with our employees to ensure mutual trust, engagement and performance improvement. We believe that high-performing managers coupled with creative, adaptable and engaged sales, marketing and logistical employees are critical to our success and to maintaining our competitive position. We are committed to being the employer of choice in our industry.

 

Our Brands and Products

 

We offer a mix of premium brands, products and services to our omni-channel customer distribution network. As of March 31, 2018, we carried more than 4,000 SKUs provided by more than 125 suppliers. Our product offering ranges from basic, non-technical items, such as rolling papers and cleaning supplies, to sophisticated, highly-technical vaporizers and extraction devices, as well as customizable items such as child-resistant packaging and branded storage devices. We believe our broad product offering creates a “one-stop” shop for our customers and positively distinguishes us from our competitors.

 

The following table illustrates the growth in the number of SKUs we carried at year end since December 31, 2015.

 

 

 

107

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Product Categories and Select Brands. We believe we have the widest array of premium brands and products in our industry, and we are continually expanding our offerings to ensure that our customers’ preferences are met. The following table provides summary information regarding the product categories we offer and the brands we represent.

 

   

 

Vaporizers &
Components

 

 

Tools &

Appliances

 

 

Grinders &

Storage

 

 

Parts &

Accessories

 

 

Pipes &

Rigs

 

 

Papers /

Blunts

  Custom Products / Packaging
                             

Fiscal 2017

% Net Sales

  79.9%   2.0%   2.4%   8.8%   4.8%   0.6%   0.9%
                             
Product Types  

●  Desktop

●  Pen

●  Portable

 

●  E-Rig

●  E-Nail

●  Extraction Machine

●  Torch

 

●  Acrylic 3 PC

●  Aluminum 2-Piece

●  Aluminum 4-Piece

●  Storage

 

●  Glass Ash Catcher

●  Glass Banger

●  Glass Bases

 

●  Glass Blunt

●  Glass Bubbler

●  Glass Concentrate Rig

 

●   Cones

●   Paper

●   Tips

 

●  Exit Bags

●  Glass Jar

●  Pop Box

                             
Representative Brands  

●  Storz & Bickel

●  PAX Labs

●  Firefly

●  DaVinci

●  Arizer

●  Dr. Dabber

●  JUUL Labs

●  Grenco Science

●  Cloudious9

●  MONQ

●  BLU

●  Puffco

●  Yocan

 

●  Banana Bros.

●  Dr. Dabber

●  Blazer

●  Higher Standards

●  HYER

●  LEVO

●  MagicalButter

 

 

●  Santa Cruz Shredder

●  Aerospaced

●  Groove

●  EVAK

●  CVault

 

 

●  Higher Standards

 

 

●  EYCE

●  Dr. Dabber

●  Famous Brandz

●  GRAV Labs

●  Higher Standards

●  MJ Arsenal

●  Marley Natural

●  Puffingtons

 

●  Elements

●  Juicy Jay’s

●  OCB

●  RAW

●  Shine

 

●  Pollen Gear

 

Vaporizers and Components. Our vaporizers are personal devices that heat materials at temperatures just below the point of combustion, extracting the flavors, aromas and effects of dry herbs and concentrates in the form of vapor. Measured by revenue, vaporizers and components are our largest product category. In 2017, the vaporizer and components category, which is comprised of desktops, portables and pens, generated 79.9% of our net sales. Our vaporizer and components offering spans over 250 distinct products across 56 brands. To our knowledge, no other distributor in North America carries as large a variety of premium vaporizers.

 

Tools and appliances. Our tools and appliances product categories include cleaning products, torches, rolling machines and rolling trays, as well as highly-technical, sophisticated products such as infusers and extraction devices. Our tools and appliances offerings span 17 distinct products across seven brands, including our own proprietary brand, Higher Standards.

 

Grinders and storage. Our grinders are cylindrical devices that break dry herb down to fine granules, increasing the surface area of the plant material so that it can be thoroughly vaporized or burned. The storage containers that we offer can be used to store dry herb and concentrates in an air-sealed environment, maintaining freshness. Our grinders and storage solutions are comprised of approximately 20 distinct products across nine brands, including our own proprietary Aerospaced grinders.

 

Pipes. We offer a diverse brand portfolio of water pipes in many shapes and sizes. Many products in this category display iconic, licensed logos and artwork, including Marley Natural, Trailer Park Boys, Pounds by Snoop, and Cheech y Chong Up in Smoke. Our pipes category is comprised of approximately 114 products and seven brands, including our own proprietary Higher Standards brand.

 

108

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Rolling papers. We sell high-quality papers for roll-your-own applications. Brands in this category include Elements Rice Papers, I-Tal, Juicy Jay’s, OCB, Raw, and Shine. Our rolling papers category is comprised of approximately 50 products across six brands.

 

Parts and accessories. Our parts and accessories categories consist of screens that enable convection heating, bags and whips/wands used to capture vapor, hard and soft-shell device cases, and portable vaporizer batteries. This category acts as a complement to the majority of our offerings. Our parts and accessories category is comprised of over 1,400 SKUs supplied by approximately 115 brands.

 

Customized products and packaging. We offer a customizable line of premium packaging products, including patented items. Child-resistant packaging solutions are one of our fastest growing sectors and, as a result, we are expanding our product offering to include new silhouettes, sizes and vessels to address more of our customers’ needs. We believe our initiatives in this category will further set us apart from our competition.

 

Key Success Factors of our Product Offerings. We believe our success as a leading distributor in our marketplace is due primarily to the following key factors:

 

Premium Brands. Our premium brands act as a strategic tool that helps us stand out in a diverse and crowded market, gain repute for our products and connect with customers. Retailers can get overwhelmed by the constant introduction of new products and brands in the marketplace, most of which offer average or below average performance and little brand recognition. However, because we dedicate the time and resources necessary to seek out, purchase and offer the products that deliver superior performance, design and brand appeal, our B2B customers can easily and strategically make the right choice. In addition to providing products that are functionally superior at competitive price points, we help to build a culture around these premium brands that creates customer brand loyalty and secures a strong position for us as the pivotal relationship between supplier and customer.

 

Market Knowledge. Our proprietary industry data generated from our strong relationships with industry-leading suppliers allows us to help define, develop and deliver strategies for creating brands, which we believe provides us a strong competitive advantage. Our data also enables us to understand market opportunities and to develop our own brands that provide higher margins, while remaining careful to identify and pursue opportunities that do not directly compete with our key suppliers. To that end, we have developed the Higher Standards brand, as well as our proprietary Groove and Aerospaced grinder brands. We also are developing additional brands, including VIBES, a rolling paper brand created in partnership with one of the industry’s most influential celebrities, and a line of high-end glass pipes and accessories developed in partnership with Keith Haring Studio. We are evaluating numerous other brand development opportunities and intend to directly oversee the manufacturing and marketing of our proprietary brands.

 

Distribution Agreements and Exclusivity. We enter into both exclusive and non-exclusive distribution agreements with our suppliers. When our agreements are exclusive, the exclusivity is typically limited to certain specified channels of distribution, such as sales to independent shops and other “brick and mortar” retail establishments. Our suppliers frequently retain the non-exclusive right to distribute their products via e-commerce channels. These distribution agreements typically have a territorial scope consisting of the United States, and in some cases include Canada and the rest of the world, or a specified group of other countries. In most cases, the agreement is for a term of between one and three years, and thereafter renewable at the discretion of both parties. Our suppliers also grant us a non-exclusive license to use their trademarks and related intellectual property in connection with the distribution and resale of the relevant products.

 

Our distribution agreements frequently include a commitment by us to provide customer service and to provide the supplier with fulfillment services for which we are compensated. We work with the brands to provide compelling in-store materials that help our retail customers advertise and sell products, including posters, countertop displays, window clings, and other in-store advertising, some of which is created by our in-house marketing team. We also are able to provide a range of additional services, which may include inventory investment and logistics, marketing support, live customer service and warranty repair. These value-added services allow us to build an integrated relationship by alleviating our suppliers of some business functions, so they may focus on the development and refinement of their products.

 

109

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

The suppliers of some of the most successful brands in our industry, including Pax Labs, Storz & Bickel, Grenco Science and Firefly, distribute their products through us. These leading brands are secure in knowing that we consistently provide our retail customers with white-glove customer service and support. Our strategic partnerships and exclusivity agreements with industry-leading suppliers reflect on our ability to exceed typical industry service levels and support. 

For the three months ended March 31, 2018 and 2017 and the years ended December 31, 2017 and 2016, 39.8%, 27.1%, 64.6% and 29.2%, respectively, of our consolidated revenues were derived from products purchased through exclusive distribution relationships. 

Information and Education. We supply our employees, suppliers and customers with timely, pertinent information about products, regulatory requirements and trends impacting our industry. Additionally, we provide each sales representative in our company with an extensive and ongoing education on our products and services so they have confidence and knowledge when responding to a customer’s questions. 

We understand the value of technical industry information and make it available to our end users via the “Knowledge Base” link on VapeWorld.com, which allows us to provide our customers with timely and detailed information about our product offerings, including product reviews, warranty information, frequently asked questions, tips and tricks, troubleshooting, cleaning and maintenance, step-by-step usage guides, and much more. 

Merchandising  

Our merchandising strategy is to (i) offer unique, distinctive and often exclusive premium products at affordable prices, (ii) maintain a breadth of merchandise categories, (iii) provide a carefully edited selection of core items within targeted categories, (iv) emphasize new and fresh-to-market products by continually updating our product mix, and (v) market products in a visually appealing manner to create an inviting atmosphere which encourages frequent visits to our B2B and B2C e-commerce websites. Our information systems permit close tracking of product sales, which enables us to react quickly to market trends and identify best sellers. Internally generated daily sales and product margin reports helps us to maximize sales and margins of successful products and categories, and reduce the accumulation of slow-moving inventory. As our industry continues to evolve at a rapid rate, the number and make-up of our active products is continuously changing. 

We purchase merchandise from approximately 125 suppliers and dedicate considerable resources to identifying and evaluating best-in-class brands, as well as identifying the most reliable, innovative and quality-conscious manufacturers. We also actively scout promising start-up suppliers that offer exciting up-and-coming products where we seek to establish exclusive distribution rights in exchange for providing our expertise and resources to assist them grow and scale quickly. 

Our extensive distribution networks, purchasing volumes and financial resources together with exclusive and proprietary products distinguish us from our competition, and provides us the opportunity to increase our sales and gross margins. We believe our selective product sourcing and quality control processes are central to our continued success. 

Sales Channels

While we predominantly market and sell our products in North America, our e-commerce websites increase our global reach and we also ship our products to Europe, Australia and other select countries. The following table sets forth for the three-month periods ended March 31, 2018 and 2017 and the years ended December 31, 2017 and 2016 the amount and percentage of our net sales derived from our sales of products to customers located in the United States, Canada and all foreign countries other than Canada based upon the locations to which our products are shipped. 

   Three Months Ended   Year Ended 
   March 31,   December 31, 
   2018   2017   2017   2016 
   Amount   Percentage   Amount   Percentage   Amount   Percentage   Amount   Percentage 
United States  $40,649,993    94.0%  $17,068,713    89.0%  $79,969,866    90.6%  $59,459,936    89.2%
Canada   2,006,479    4.6    1,635,454    8.5    6,532,005    7.4    5,540,500    8.3 
Other foreign countries   601,171    1.4    474,826    2.5    1,758,104    2.0    1,689,508    2.5 
Totals  $43,257,643    100.0%  $19,178,993    100.0%  $88,259,975    100.0%  $66,689,944    100.0%

  

Our marketing strategy is based on an omni-channel sales approach that allows us to deliver our premium branded products to a broad base of B2B and B2C costumers through four sales channels – wholesale, e-commerce, traditional retail and custom solutions. 

Wholesale. Our B2B channel, which represented approximately 82.4% of our first quarter 2018 net sales, supplies independent retailers, licensed producers, chain stores and dispensaries with many of key premium products they sell. Our strategies to continue to build on this core channel include: 

Sales Team Expansion. Our highly-specialized sales force is well-positioned to drive continued growth. We invest in our talent by providing every sales representative with an extensive and ongoing education, and we have successfully developed programs that provide comprehensive product knowledge, as well as the tools needed to have a unique understanding of customers’ personalities and decision-making processes. Over the next 12 months, we intend to grow our sales force from approximately 75 members to a team of more than 120. We are confident that we can add and effectively train approximately five sales representatives per month. This will allow us to reach more business accounts, which should lead to increased sales, greater share of shelf space, and higher market share.

 

110

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Category Expansion. We believe we are the market leader in the premium vaporizer market and have begun to further expand into new categories. For example, we will increase our limited product offering in the glass and rolling papers categories, which are significant sources of revenue for our B2B partners. We believe that specialty packaging will become a significant category with substantial recurring revenue opportunities and as such, we plan to aggressively expand our product offerings for packaging solutions by introducing innovative and attractive brands, including owned brands, and other products as joint ventures with key influencers and celebrities.

 

Category Management. We believe retailers are frustrated by having to deal with dozens of vendors to stock their shops. Our increasing size, product categories and sophistication allow us to cover more of their product needs and become their one-stop shop for premium products. We offer category management services to help retailers select appropriate product mixes and streamline their inventory management to increase inventory turnover and prevent stockouts. Further, chain stores, particularly in Canada, require their vendors to meet stringent standards which we are well positioned to meet, such as bar coding and labeling requirements, financial conditions and the ability to use the Electronic Data Interchange (EDI) system.

 

We believe our support of these sales channels, together with our market knowledge, business attributes, resources, products and services, will lead to an increased share of our customers’ shelf space and increased market share.

 

Online Retail. We own and operate two of the leading direct-to-consumer e-commerce websites in our industry, VapeWorld.com, which we have operated since the inception of our company, and VaporNation.com, which we acquired in February 2018 as part of our acquisition of VaporNation. Our B2C e-commerce channel represented approximately 10.9% of our net sales in the first quarter of 2018.

 

Our retail websites create convenient, flexible shopping solutions for consumers. We offer premium products, provide access to a knowledgeable customer care team that is available via phone, text, and live chat, run social media initiatives across multiple platforms, and create industry-related blog posts. Our e-commerce websites increase our reach on a global scale. While our B2C customers are predominantly in North America, we also ship to Europe, Australia and other areas. Our websites have been optimized for shopping and purchasing across desktop, mobile phone and tablet devices, and features updates on new products. In addition, we leverage our websites as efficient inventory clearance vehicles by offering discounts and promotions on older products that allows us to keep our wholesale inventory fresh. All of our website orders are fulfilled by our own distribution facilities. In addition to our own B2C fulfillment, we also exclusively fulfill online orders for many of our largest suppliers, as well as for other leading e-commerce websites, including Namaste.com and Firefly.

 

We continually work to optimize our e-commerce platforms to improve conversion rates, increase average order value, and grow margins. In addition, we are actively investing in user acquisition strategies and advertising campaigns to drive traffic that converts to sales. We have built out our internal development team and recently added three full-time search engine optimization (“SEO”) experts, all of whom are helping to improve the Google rankings for our e-commerce properties. As of March 31, 2018, VaporNation.com ranked first for more than 15 Google search terms, including “vaporizers,” and our e-commerce sites currently experience over 360,000 unique monthly visitors and generate approximately 6,000 monthly transactions. In late 2018, we plan to combine and re-launch both of our existing websites under the umbrella of our owned proprietary domain name, Vapor.com. We believe the existing volume of business of the combined websites, together with focused investment in the marketing of Vapor.com, will further establish us as the leading consumer destination for premium vaporization products and consumption accessories.

 

111

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Retail Stores. In December 2017, we opened our first Higher Standards retail store at New York City’s famed Chelsea Market to sell innovative products, including our proprietary Higher Standards brand, and to enhance our direct sales channels by migrating single-channel customers to omni-channel customers. We expect to open up to five additional retail stores by December 31, 2019. We expect these stores to be leased and to range in size from approximately 800 square feet to 1,200 square feet. We intend to leverage our customer databases, including purchasing history and customer demographics to determine the geographic locations for our future retail stores.

 

Supplies and Packaging. Our supply and packaging channel, which represented 6.0% of our first quarter 2018 net sales, supplies state-licensed cannabis cultivators, processors and dispensaries with premium child-resistant packaging to comply with state laws and safety requirements, custom-branded products, and vaporization hardware, each of which has specific growth strategies.

 

Child-resistant Packaging. We offer an attractive line of premium child-resistant and specialty packaging solutions, in comparison to the more generic offerings of our competitors. We expect to aggressively expand our product offering in this category with new silhouettes, sizes and storage vessels to address more of our customers’ needs. We are in the process of increasing our abilities to keep up with growing demand and allow us to service customers efficiently, secure sizable recurring revenue streams and achieve superior margins. We already stock clear packaging and white lids in bulk in the United States which allows us to reduce importation times, and to utilize a network of service providers that can rapidly paint, tint and embellish packaging products with faster delivery to our customers. We believe our market knowledge, on-the-ground relationships with customers and complementary product offerings will further set us apart from our competition.

 

Closed-system Cartridges and Vaporizers. As the industry continues to expand and undergo rapid growth, so too does the evolution of how end users are consuming cannabis, nicotine and other herbs. We believe closed-end systems (where the storage tank or storage compartment “cartridges” connects only with a select vaporizer) represent a tremendous growth opportunity for our company. Essentially, a captive razor-and-replacement blades business model that leads to ongoing replenishment sales and increased lifetime customer value. Our company distributes the vaporizer hardware (razor) to our customers, and we also manages the logistics for the empty cartridges to be ordered and delivered to state-licensed fulfillment businesses, who in turn, fill them and sell them to licensed dispensaries and other licensed intermediaries. We exclusively distribute leading products in this category, such as the G Pen Gio and the Double Barrel. Some of the leading vaporizer brands with the most name recognition are those we have worked with for years and are making a natural migration into these captive products. We believe our market knowledge, relationship with vaporizer brands and on-the-ground relationships with licensed dispensaries and intermediaries, together with our complimentary product offerings, will further add to our business opportunities.

 

Inventory Management and Logistics

 

Inventory Management. We have established procurement procedures within our highly-customized ERP system to optimize our inventory needs and identify lead-time inventory ordering requirements. We conduct weekly reviews to highlight possible overstock situations, which allows us to implement promotions and other strategies before margins and inventory valuations are negatively impacted. We regularly analyze the gross margins on our products to optimize financial returns, monitor inventory turn-over, identify stellar product performance and highlight maturing and slowing products. These disciplines allow us to negotiate better pricing based on volume discounts or set staggered delivery schedules. Our inventory systems enable us to track our inventory levels in real time, empowering our sales force to maintain an elevated level of customer satisfaction which encourages repeat purchases.

 

Location and Delivery Logistics. Our ability to profitably scale our operations and adapt to customer demands are significant advantages in our industry and are dependent upon our logistical capabilities. We have built a network of five strategically-located distribution centers that provide optimal coverage to most of the United States and Canada, and ensure timely and cost-effective transit and delivery of products to our customers. We believe that 90% of our current U.S. customers can be reached within two days via FedEx Ground or similar ground delivery services. Due to our mature infrastructure and continuously-evolving operational efficiencies, we provide our customers with accurate logistics and purchase transactions.

 

112

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Competition

 

Business-to-Business. We operate in an evolving industry in which the market and its participants remain highly fragmented. For example, although it is difficult to find reliable independent research, we believe there are over 24,000 potential B2B customers in North America comprised of independent retail shops, specialty retailers, licensed cannabis dispensaries and regional retailer chains, the latter particularly in Canada. We currently service approximately 5,700 of these businesses. We expect that the number of these outlets will continue to expand as our market segment experiences further and increasing growth. Our B2B business customers compete primarily on the basis of the breadth, style, quality, pricing and availability of merchandise, the level of customer service, brand recognition and loyalty. We successfully reach our B2B customers through our direct sales force and other marketing initiatives, and provide them with our strategically-curated mix of brands and products, merchandise planning strategies, exceptional customer service and value-added services. Among vaporizer product distributors, we compete against both suppliers and other distributors. A number of suppliers choose to distribute directly in some sales channels and may also operate their own e-commerce platforms. We face competition from many small privately-owned regional distributors that carry a narrow range of products. We believe there are only a select few wholesale distributors carrying a complete line of premium vaporization products and consumption accessories. We believe our competitors include Phillips & King International, Windship Trading Co. and West Coast Gifts. Our principal competitors for the sale of supplies and packaging are Kush Bottles, eBottles and large packaging companies, such as Berlin Packaging.

 

Business-to-Consumer. A number of suppliers of vaporizers and specialized products operate their own e-commerce websites through which they sell their items directly to end consumers. Additionally, there are hundreds of websites that sell similar products in North America, Europe, Australia and other parts of the world. We believe we compete effectively with other e-commerce websites. Further, we provide fulfillment services for some of these websites as they do not carry their own inventory, are not able to ship as efficiently as we do and are unable to meet all regulatory requirements such as sales tax collection. These competitor’s web sites rank far below our two primary e-commerce websites, VaporNation.com and VapeWorld.com, which have their own dedicated design, social media and SEO teams. VaporNation.com is the highest ranked website in our niche according to Alexa Website Rankings and first page rankings on numerous Google key term search results. We believe our market knowledge, large product selection, relationship with vaporizer brands, in-house search engine optimization teams, social media focus and distribution facilities spread through North America will enable us to extend our market leadership in this segment.

 

Information Technology and Systems

 

We continue to invest in information systems and technology to drive our business decisions, enhance customer experience, improve sales opportunities and create operating efficiencies. We utilize third-party software for financial reporting, inventory management, customer databases and customer campaign management including “cloud” back-up. We also utilize leading e-commerce platforms hosted by third-party providers and an internally-developed proprietary database to accumulate business information. We have adopted cloud computing solutions for our enterprise resource planning, and we own, operate and maintain elements of these systems with an internal team of engineers and IT professionals with significant portions of these systems operated by third parties. In addition, we utilize best-in-class integrated systems for payroll, freight and logistics, distribution center management, point-of-sale, e-commerce, state and local taxes. We continue to innovate and optimize our technology systems and expect to continue to make significant investments in our technology and infrastructure.

 

113

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Intellectual Property

 

We generally rely on trademark, copyright, patent and trade secret laws, as well as employee and third-party non-disclosure agreements, to protect our intellectual property and proprietary rights, including our customer lists. We currently own, through subsidiaries, 15 U.S. federal trademark registrations, 25 foreign trademark registrations, a number of U.S. and foreign trademark applications and common law trademark rights. Our registered U.S. trademarks include registrations for AEROSPACED®, BIOVAPOR (Stylized)®, DISPENSARY SERVICES®, Flame Logo®, GREENLANE®, GROOVE®, GROOVE BY AEROSPACED®, HIGHER STANDARDS®, HOLD YOUR FIRE®, QUICKDRAW®, VAPE WORLD®, VAPE WORLD and Design® and YOUR ONLINE VAPORIZER SUPERSTORE®. Our trademarks, if not renewed, are scheduled to expire between 2020 and 2030.

 

Seasonality

 

While most of our products are sold consistently throughout the year, we do experience seasonality in the form of increased demand for our products in the fourth quarter of the calendar year, which coincides with Cyber Monday (the first Monday after Thanksgiving, when online retailers typically offer holiday discounts), the holiday season and our related promotional and marketing campaigns. Our fiscal 2017 quarters in sequential order equaled 21.73%, 21.48%, 22.12% and 34.67% of total sales, respectively.

 

Employees

 

As of June 30, 2018, we employed 214 employees, five of which were part-time employees, within the United States and Canada. Of the full-time employees, 35 were employed in administration and corporate management positions, 19 were employed in accounting positions, 89 were employed in marketing and sales positions, 61 were employed in distribution and fulfillment positions and 10 were employed in retail positions.  None of our employees is covered by a collective bargaining agreement and we consider our employee relations to be good. All employees are subject to contractual agreements that specify requirements on confidentiality and restrictions on working for competitors as well as other standard matters.

 

Facilities

 

We are headquartered in Boca Raton, Florida. Our principal executive offices are approximately 16,500 square feet under a lease agreement expiring in January 2019, with options to renew thereafter. In June 2018, we entered into a purchase agreement with an unrelated third party to purchase an approximately 50,000 square foot building in Boca Raton, Florida for $10,000,000 that we will use for our corporate headquarters. The purchase price is expected to be financed, in part, with loans from third-party lenders and the closing is expected to occur in September 2018.

 

We currently have four distribution centers in the United States and one in Canada, comprising a total of approximately 50,000 square feet. The distribution centers allow us to reach more than 90% of our customers in just one or two days via FedEx Ground or similar ground transportation services. Four of these facilities are leased and operated by our company. Our fifth distribution center, which is located in Schenectady, New York, is leased and operated by a third-party logistics contractor.

 

We also lease approximately 1,600 square feet of space in New York City for our flagship Higher Standards retail store.

 

Our new 8,000 square foot distribution center in British Columbia, Canada is scheduled to commence operations in the third quarter of 2018, and we expect to open additional distribution centers as we expand our business to Europe, Australia and South America. We believe that our facilities are sufficient for our current needs and that additional facilities will be available to accommodate the expansion of our business.

 

114

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

MANAGEMENT

 

Executive Officers and Directors

 

The following table provides information with respect to individuals who will serve as our directors and executive officers at the time of this offering

 

Name

 

Age

 

Position(s)

  Residence
Aaron LoCascio   33   Chief Executive Officer and Chairman of the Board of Directors   Florida, United States
Adam Schoenfeld   34   President, Chief Strategy Officer and Director   Florida, United States
Sasha Kadey   34   Chief Marketing Officer   Florida, United States
Jay Scheiner   63   Chief Operating Officer   Florida, United States
Zachary Tapp   63   Chief Financial Officer   Florida, United States

 

Executive Officers

 

Aaron LoCascio, our co-founder, has served as our Chief Executive Officer and Chairman of the Board of Directors since May 2018 and has served as the Chief Executive Officer of Greenlane Holdings, LLC since its inception in 2007. Mr. LoCascio’s term as a director will expire at our next annual meeting. He received his Associate’s degree in Accounting from Valencia Community College. Mr. LoCascio brings to the board extensive executive leadership experience, industry relationships and knowledge, and, through his position as our co-founder and Chief Executive Officer, he will use his full range of skills and perspective to further our success.

 

Adam Schoenfeld, our co-founder, has served as our President, Chief Strategy Officer and Director since May 2018 and has served as Managing Member of Greenlane Holdings, LLC since its inception in 2007. Mr. Schoenfeld’s term as a director will expire at the next annual meeting. Mr. Schoenfeld received his Bachelor’s degree in International Business from Evergreen State College. He brings to the board valuable operational and leadership experience in the industry, extensive industry relationships and experience in customer service, import and export logistics, electronic transaction systems and order fulfillment.

 

Sasha Kadey will serve as our Chief Marketing Officer upon completion of the offering and has served as the Chief Marketing Officer of Greenlane Holdings, LLC since May 2016. From April 2012 to May 2016, Mr. Kadey was a partner at Luxury Brand Partners, an investment company that owns and operates a portfolio of luxury beauty companies. While at Luxury Brand Partners, he held several positions, including Vice President of Digital Marketing and Technology and Operations Manager. From July 2006 to April 2012, Mr. Kadey served as the Director of Marketing of King Estate Winery, a family owned and operated winery. From August 2009 to April 2012, Mr. Kadey served on the board of directors of Food for Lane County, a non-profit food bank. Mr. Kadey received his Bachelor’s degree in Business Administration from the University of Oregon.

 

Jay Scheiner will serve as our Chief Operating Officer upon completion of the offering and has served as the Chief Operating Officer of Greenlane Holdings, LLC since February 2015. From October 2013 to February 2015, Mr. Scheiner served as the Principal of JS Inc, a consulting firm specializing in retail and wholesale operations. From July 2012 to October 2013, he served as the Chief Operating Officer of Crossroads Financial, LLC, a financial services company. He served as the U.S. Supply Chain Consultant for FitFlop, a women’s shoe manufacturer from October 2007 to March 2011 and held several positions with Barrett Distribution Centers, a third-party logistics warehousing services provider, including Director of Operations from October 2010 to March 2011 and Director of Administration from October 2007 to March 2010. Mr. Scheiner received his Bachelor of Arts degree in Political Science from The City College of New York and a Master of Business Administration degree from Suffolk University.

 

Zachary Tapp has served as our Chief Financial Officer since May 2018 and has served as the Chief Financial Officer of Greenlane Holdings, LLC since June 2013. Prior to that, from 1996 to 2011, he was the Chief Financial Officer of National Oak Distributors, a wholesale distributor of automotive collision repair products. Mr. Tapp also previously served as a Senior Manager at Ernst & Young, an international accounting firm, where he worked in various roles from 1981 to 1991. Mr. Tapp is a member of the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants and the Florida Institute of Certified Public Accountants. He received a Bachelor of Science degree in General Business Administration from Arizona State University and a Master of Business Administration degree from Rockhurst University.

 

115

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Board of Directors

 

Our business and affairs are managed under the direction of our board of directors. Our amended and restated bylaws, which will become effective immediately prior to the consummation of this offering, will provide that our board of directors shall be comprised of at least five directors and that the size of our board of directors shall otherwise be determined from time to time by our board of directors. Our board of directors currently consists of two members, one of whom is our chief executive officer and the other of whom is our president and chief strategy officer, each of whom devotes his full time to our affairs.

 

Prior to consummation of this offering, our board of directors will adopt charters relative to its audit committee, compensation committee and nominating and corporate governance committee. We intend to appoint persons to our board of directors and committees of the board of directors as required to meet the corporate governance requirements under applicable securities laws. We also intend to appoint directors in the future so that we have a majority of our directors who will be independent directors under applicable securities laws.

 

Share Ownership by Directors and Officers

 

As of the date of this prospectus and after giving effect to the Transactions and the sale of shares of Class A common stock to be sold in this offering, assuming the underwriters do not exercise their option to purchase additional shares of Class A common stock, as a group, our directors and executive officers will beneficially own, directly or indirectly, or exercise control over            shares of Class A common stock, which shares will be issuable upon the redemption of             Common Units of Greenlane Holdings, LLC and the cancellation of an aggregate of             shares of Class B common stock and             shares of Class C common stock. As of the date of this prospectus and after giving effect to the Transactions and the sale of shares of Class A common stock to be sold in this offering, assuming the underwriters do not exercise their option to purchase additional shares of Class A common stock, as a group, our directors and executive officers will beneficially own, directly or indirectly, or exercise control over             Common Units, representing             % of the ownership, of Greenlane Holdings, LLC, or Common Units, representing              % of the ownership of Greenlane Holdings, LLC if the underwriters exercise in full their option to purchase additional shares of Class A common stock. See “Principal and Selling Stockholders.”

 

Corporate Cease Trade Orders, Bankruptcies, Penalties and Sanctions

 

None of our directors or executive officers is, as at the date of this prospectus, or was within ten years before the date of this prospectus, a director, chief executive officer or chief financial officer of any company (including our company), that was subject to a cease trade order, an order similar to a cease trade order, or an order that denied the relevant company access to any exemption under securities legislation that was in effect for a period of more than 30 consecutive days:

 

(a)that was issued while the director or executive officer was acting in the capacity as director, chief executive officer or chief financial officer, or

 

(b)that was issued after the director or executive officer ceased to be a director, chief executive officer or chief financial officer and which resulted from an event that occurred while that person was acting in the capacity as director, chief executive officer or chief financial officer.

 

None of our directors, executive officers or stockholders beneficially holding a sufficient number of securities of our company to affect materially the control of our company:

 

(a)is, as at the date of this prospectus, or has been within the ten years before the date of this prospectus, a director or executive officer of any company (including our company) that, while that person was acting in that capacity, or within a year of that person ceasing to act in that capacity, became bankrupt, made a proposal under any legislation relating to bankruptcy or insolvency or was subject to or instituted any proceedings, arrangement or compromise with creditors or had a receiver, receiver manager or trustee appointed to hold its assets; or

 

116

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

(b)has, within the ten years before the date of this prospectus, become bankrupt, made a proposal under any legislation relating to bankruptcy or insolvency, or become subject to or instituted any proceedings, arrangement or compromise with creditors, or had a receiver, receiver manager or trustee appointed to hold the assets of the director, executive officer or stockholder.

 

None of our directors, executive officers or stockholders beneficially holding a sufficient number of securities of our company to affect materially the control of our company, has been subject to (a) any penalties or sanctions imposed by a court relating to securities legislation or by a securities regulatory authority or has entered into a settlement agreement with a securities regulatory authority; or (b) any other penalties or sanctions imposed by a court or regulatory body that would likely be considered important to a reasonable investor in making an investment decision.

 

Conflicts of Interest

 

Other than as disclosed herein, none of our directors, officers or principal stockholders and no associates or affiliates of any of them, have or have had any material interest in any transaction which materially affects us during the year ended December 31, 2017 and for the period through March 31, 2018, except as described in “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions.”

 

Board Composition and Structure; Director Independence

 

Our amended and restated bylaws, which will become effective immediately prior to the completion of this offering, will provide that our board of directors shall consist of such number of directors as determined from time to time by resolution adopted by a majority of the total number of authorized directors, whether or not there exist any vacancies in previously authorized directorships. Currently, our board of directors consists of two directors. We plan to appoint up to three additional directors prior to or in connection with the completion of this offering. We are currently in the process of identifying such additional directors and intend to name such directors in an amendment to the registration statement of which this prospectus is a part. Subject to any rights applicable to any preferred stock we may issue from time to time, any additional directorships resulting from an increase in the number of directors may only be filled by the directors then in office unless otherwise required by law or by a resolution passed by our board of directors as provided in our amended and restated bylaws, which will become effective immediately prior to the completion of this offering. The term of office for each director will be until his or her successor is elected at our annual meeting or his or her death, resignation or removal, whichever is earliest to occur.

 

While we do not have a stand-alone diversity policy, in considering whether to recommend any director nominee, including candidates recommended by stockholders, we believe that the backgrounds and qualifications of the directors, considered as a group, should provide a significant mix of experience, knowledge and abilities that will allow our board of directors to fulfill its responsibilities. As set forth in our corporate governance guidelines, when considering whether directors and nominees have the experience, qualifications, attributes or skills, taken as a whole, to enable our board of directors to satisfy its oversight responsibilities effectively in light of our business and structure, the board of directors focuses primarily on each person’s background and experience as reflected in the information discussed in each of the directors’ individual biographies set forth above. We believe that our directors will provide an appropriate mix of experience and skills relevant to the size and nature of our business.

 

Upon completion of this offering, Aaron LoCascio, our Chief Executive Officer, and Adam Schoenfeld, our President and Chief Strategy Officer, together with their affiliates, will control a majority of the combined voting power of our outstanding capital stock. As a result, Messrs. LoCascio and Schoenfeld will be able to control any action requiring the general approval of our stockholders, including the election of our board of directors.

 

Our board of directors has determined that Aaron LoCascio and Adam Schoenfeld, by virtue of their employment by our company, are not considered “independent” for purposes of applicable securities laws.

 

Our board of directors expects a culture of ethical business conduct. Our board of directors encourages each member to conduct a self-review to determine if he or she is providing effective service with respect to both our company and our stockholders. Should it be determined that a member of our board of directors is unable to effectively act in the best interests of our stockholders, such member would be encouraged to resign.

 

117

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Board Leadership Structure

 

Our amended and restated bylaws, which will become effectively immediately prior to consummation of this offering, and Corporate Governance Guidelines provide our board of directors with flexibility to combine or separate the positions of Chairman of the Board and Chief Executive Officer in accordance with its determination that utilizing one or the other structure is in the best interests of our company. Aaron LoCascio currently serves as our Chief Executive Officer and Chairman of the Board.

 

As Chairman of the Board, Mr. LoCascio’s key responsibilities will include facilitating communication between our board of directors and management, assessing management’s performance, managing board members, preparation of the agenda for each board meeting, acting as chair of board meetings and meetings of our company’s stockholders and managing relations with stockholders, other stakeholders and the public.

 

We will take steps to ensure that adequate structures and processes are in place to permit our board of directors to function independently of management. The directors will be able to request at any time a meeting restricted to independent directors for the purposes of discussing matters independently of management and are encouraged to do so should they feel that such a meeting is required.

 

Board Mandate

 

The mandate of our board of directors will be to oversee corporate performance and to provide quality, depth and continuity of management so that we can meet our strategic objectives. Following the completion of this offering, we will adopt a board mandate, which will, among other things, govern the roles, responsibilities and requirements for our board of directors.

 

Orientation and Continuing Education

 

Director orientation and continuing education will be conducted by the nominating and corporate governance committee of our board of directors. All newly-elected directors will be provided with a comprehensive orientation on our business and operations. This will include familiarization with our reporting structure, strategic plans, significant financial, accounting and risk management issues, compliance programs, policies and management and the external auditor. We plan to periodically update existing directors in respect of these matters. The orientation program is designed to assist the directors in fully understanding the nature and operation of our business, the role of our board of directors and its committees, and the contributions that individual directors are expected to make.

 

Committees of our Board of Directors

 

We expect that, immediately following this offering, the standing committees of our board of directors will consist of an audit committee, a compensation committee and a nominating and corporate governance committee. Each of the committees will report to our board of directors as they deem appropriate and as our board may request. Each committee of our board of directors will have a committee charter that will set out the mandate of such committee, including the responsibilities of the chair of such committee.

 

The expected composition, duties and responsibilities of these committees are set forth below.

 

Audit Committee

 

The audit committee will be responsible for, among other matters:

 

appointing, retaining and evaluating our independent registered public accounting firm and approving all services to be performed by them;

 

overseeing our independent registered public accounting firm’s qualifications, independence and performance;

 

overseeing the financial reporting process and discussing with management and our independent registered public accounting firm the interim and annual financial statements that we file with Canadian Securities Regulators and the SEC;

 

reviewing and monitoring our accounting principles, accounting policies, financial and accounting controls and compliance with legal and regulatory requirements;

 

establishing procedures for the confidential anonymous submission of concerns regarding questionable accounting, internal controls or auditing matters; and

 

reviewing and approving related person transactions.

 

118

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Prior to consummation of this offering, our audit committee will consist of three directors who meet the definition of “independent director” for purposes of serving on an audit committee under applicable securities laws (including National Instrument 52-110 – Audit Committees of the Canadian Securities Administrators). In addition, our board of directors will make a determination that at least one of such independent directors qualifies as an “audit committee financial expert,” as such term is defined in Item 407(d)(5) of Regulation S-K under the Securities Act. Our board of directors will adopt a new written charter for our audit committee, which will be available on our corporate website at www.gnln.com, to become effective upon the completion of this offering. The information on our website is not part of this prospectus. We may rely on exemptions provided to “venture issuers” in accordance with National Instrument 52-110 – Audit Committees of the Canadian Securities Administrators.

 

Compensation Committee

 

The compensation committee will be responsible for, among other matters:

 

reviewing key employee compensation goals, policies, plans and programs;

 

reviewing and approving the compensation of our directors, chief executive officer and other executive officers;

 

reviewing and approving employment agreements and other similar arrangements between us and our executive officers; and

 

administering our stock plans and other incentive compensation plans.

 

Prior to consummation of this offering, our compensation committee will consist of three directors who meet the definition of “independent director” under applicable securities laws, and the definition of non-employee director under Rule 16b-3 promulgated under the Exchange Act. Our board of directors will adopt a written charter for the compensation committee in connection with this offering, which will be available on our corporate website at www.gnln.com, to become effective upon the completion of this offering. The information on our website is not part of this prospectus.

 

Nominating and Corporate Governance Committee

 

Our nominating and corporate governance committee will be responsible for, among other matters:

 

identifying individuals qualified to become members of our board of directors, consistent with criteria approved by our board of directors;

 

overseeing the organization of our board of directors to discharge our board’s duties and responsibilities properly and efficiently;

 

identifying best practices and recommending corporate governance principles; and

 

developing and recommending to our board of directors a set of corporate governance guidelines and principles applicable to us.

 

Prior to the consummation of this offering, our nominating and corporate governance committee will consist of three directors, and at least a majority of such directors will meet the definition of “independent director” under applicable securities laws. Our board of directors will adopt a written charter for the nominating and corporate governance committee in connection with this offering, which will be available on our corporate website at www.gnln.com, to become effective upon the completion of this offering. The information on our website is not part of this prospectus.

 

Compensation Committee Interlocks and Insider Participation

 

None of our executive officers currently serves, or in the past fiscal year has served, as a member of the board of directors or compensation committee of another entity that had one or more of its executive officers serving as a member of our board of directors or compensation committee. None of the members of our compensation committee, when appointed, will have at any time been one of our officers or employees.

 

119

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Other Committees

 

Our board of directors may establish other committees as it deems necessary or appropriate from time to time.

 

Director Term Limits

 

Our board of directors will not adopt policies imposing an arbitrary term or retirement age limit in connection with individuals nominated for election as directors as it does not believe that such a limit is in the best interests of our company. Our nominating and corporate governance committee will annually review the composition of our board of directors, including the age and tenure of individual directors. Our board of directors strives to achieve a balance between the desirability of its members having a depth of relevant experience, on the one hand, and the need for renewal and new perspectives, on the other hand.

 

Gender Diversity Policy

 

Our board of directors is committed to nominating the best individuals to fulfill director and executive roles. Our board has not adopted policies relating to the identification and nomination of women directors and executives and as it does not believe that it is necessary in the case of our company to have such written policies at this time. Our board of directors believes that diversity is important to ensure that board members and senior management provide the necessary range of perspectives, experience and expertise required to achieve effective stewardship and management. We have not adopted a target regarding women on our board or regarding women in executive officer positions as our board believes that such arbitrary targets are not appropriate for our company. Currently there are no women directors on our board and one woman holding an executive position within our company.

 

Risk Oversight

 

Our board of directors will oversee the risk management activities designed and implemented by our management. Our board of directors will execute its oversight responsibility for risk management both directly and through its committees. The full board of directors will also consider specific risk topics, including risks associated with our strategic plan, business operations and capital structure. In addition, our board of directors will regularly receive detailed reports from members of our senior management and other personnel that include assessments and potential mitigation of the risks and exposures involved with their respective areas of responsibility.

 

Our board of directors will delegate to the audit committee oversight of our risk management process. Our other board committees will also consider and address risk as they perform their respective committee responsibilities. All committees will report to the full board of directors as appropriate, including when a matter rises to the level of a material or enterprise level risk.

 

Code of Ethics

 

In connection with this offering, we intend to adopt a Code of Ethics, which will become effective immediately prior to the completion of this offering, that will apply to all of our employees, including our chief executive officer, chief financial officer and principal accounting officer. Our Code of Ethics will be available on our website at www.gnln.com by clicking on “Investors.” If we amend or grant a waiver of one or more of the provisions of our Code of Ethics, we intend to satisfy the requirements under Item 5.05 of Form 8-K regarding the disclosure of amendments to or waivers from provisions of our Code of Ethics that apply to our principal executive officer, financial and accounting officers by posting the required information on our website at the above address within four business days of such amendment or waiver. The information on our website is not part of this prospectus.

 

Our board of directors, management and all employees of our company are committed to implementing and adhering to the Code of Ethics. Therefore, it is up to each individual to comply with the Code of Ethics and to be in compliance of the Code of Ethics. Where an individual is concerned that there has been a violation of the Code of Ethics, he or she will be able to report in good faith to his or her superior. While a record of such reports will be kept confidential by our company for the purposes of investigation, the report may be made anonymously and no individual making such a report will be subject to any form of retribution.

120

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

EXECUTIVE COMPENSATION

 

Executive Compensation

 

The following discussion describes the significant elements of our executive compensation program, with emphasis on the process for determining compensation payable to our Chief Executive Officer and our Chief Financial Officer and, other than the Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer, our three most highly-compensated executive officers, or the three most highly-compensated individuals acting in a similar capacity (collectively, the “NEOs”). The NEOs are as follows, each of whom may hold a similar position in one or more of our subsidiaries:

 

Aaron LoCascio, our Chairman and Chief Executive Officer;

 

Adam Schoenfeld, our President and Chief Strategy Officer and a Director of our company;

 

Sasha Kadey, our Chief Marketing Officer;

 

Jay Scheiner, our Chief Operating Officer; and

 

Zachary Tapp, our Chief Financial Officer.

 

Compensation Discussion and Analysis

 

Overview

 

We operate in a highly-competitive and evolving market. To succeed in this market and achieve our strategic business and financial objectives, we need to attract, retain and motivate a highly-talented executive team. Our executive compensation program is designed to achieve the following objectives:

 

to provide compensation opportunities in order to attract and retain talented, high-performing and experienced executive officers, whose knowledge, skills and performance are critical to our success;

 

to motivate our executive team to achieve our strategic business and financial objectives; and

 

to align the interests of our executive officers with those of our shareholders by tying a meaningful portion of compensation directly to the long-term value and growth of our company.

 

We have historically offered our executive officers cash compensation in the form of base salary and an annual bonus. In addition, through 2016 and 2017, each of our executive officers other than our founders, Aaron LoCascio and Adam Schoenfeld, was awarded equity-based compensation in the form of a profits interest in Greenlane Holdings, LLC. On June 1, 2016 and December 5, 2016, Greenlane Holdings, LLC entered into profits interest award agreements with Zachary Tapp and Jay Scheiner, respectively, and on January 20, 2017, Greenlane Holdings, LLC entered into a profits interest award agreement with Sasha Kadey. In August 2018, the profits interest awards were converted into membership interests in Greenlane Holdings, LLC. Additionally, certain other officers and key employees of our subsidiary, Warehouse Goods Inc., have been granted phantom stock awards pursuant to a phantom stock plan dated January 20, 2017 (the “Phantom Equity Program”). We believe that such equity-based compensation awards motivate our executive officers and key personnel to achieve our strategic business and financial objectives, and also align their interests with the long-term interests of our shareholders. As a result, we intend to increase our use of equity-based compensation awards as a publicly-traded company following this offering. While we have determined that our current executive officer compensation program is competitive and effective at attracting and maintaining executive officer talent, we will continue to evaluate our compensation practices on an ongoing basis to ensure that we are providing competitive compensation opportunities for our executive team. Additionally, we will be adopting our 2018 Equity Incentive Plan in connection with the consummation of the Transactions, which, among other things, is intended to replace the Phantom Equity Program.

 

As we transition from being a privately-held company to a publicly-traded company, we will continue to evaluate and adjust our compensation philosophy and compensation program as circumstances require and plan to continue to review the compensation of our executive team on an annual basis. As part of this review process, we expect to be guided by the philosophy and objectives outlined above, as well as other factors which may become relevant, such as the cost, from a financial, reputational and operational perspective of adding to, or failing to retain our existing talent.

 

121

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Compensation-Setting Process

 

Prior to the closing of the offering, our board of directors will establish a compensation committee to assist our board of directors in fulfilling its governance and supervisory responsibilities and to be responsible for, among other matters:

 

reviewing key employee compensation goals, policies, plans and programs;

 

reviewing, evaluating and determining company objectives related to the compensation of our Chief Executive Officer, the performance of our Chief Executive Officer relative to such goals and the compensation of our Chief Executive Officer;

 

reviewing and approving the compensation of our directors and other executive officers; and

 

reviewing and approving employment agreements and other similar arrangements between us and our executive officers.

 

Our board of directors will adopt a written charter for our compensation committee setting out its responsibilities for reviewing and making recommendations to our board of directors concerning the level and nature of the compensation payable to our directors and executive officers. Our compensation committee’s oversight will include reviewing objectives, evaluating performance and ensuring that total compensation paid to our executive officers, personnel who report directly to our Chief Executive Officer and various other key officers and managers is fair, reasonable and consistent with the objectives and philosophy of our compensation program. See “Management—Committees of our Board of Directors—Compensation Committee.”

 

It is anticipated that our Chief Executive Officer will make recommendations to the compensation committee each year with respect to the compensation for the other NEOs.

 

The compensation committee will meet at least annually to review our management compensation program and make recommendations for any program changes to our board of directors, as appropriate. As part of this annual review, the compensation committee may engage an independent compensation consultant to evaluate our executive compensation program against market practice.

 

Executive Compensation

 

In reviewing our compensation policies and practices each year, the compensation committee will seek to ensure the executive compensation program provides an appropriate balance of risk and reward consistent with our risk profile. The compensation committee will also seek to ensure that our compensation practices do not encourage excessive risk-taking behavior by the executive team.

 

Insider Trading Policy

 

All of our executive officers, including the NEOs and our directors and other employees, will be subject to our insider trading policy, which will prohibit trading in our securities while in possession of material undisclosed information. Under this policy, such individuals will also be prohibited from entering into certain types of hedging transactions involving our securities, such as short sales, puts and calls. Furthermore, we will permit our executive officers, including the NEOs, and our directors to trade in our securities, including the exercise of options, only during prescribed trading windows.

 

Components of Compensation

 

Upon completion of this offering, the compensation of our executive officers is expected to include three major elements: (i) base salary, (ii) short-term cash incentives through an annual bonus opportunity, and (iii) long-term equity incentives in the form of equity compensation to be issued in accordance with our 2018 Equity Incentive Plan, which may consist of stock options, stock appreciation rights, restrictive stock grants and phantom stock awards. We do not intend to cause Greenlane Holdings, LLC to grant additional profits interest awards in the future. Perquisites and benefits are not expected to be a significant element of compensation of our executive officers.

 

122

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Base Salaries

 

Base salary is provided as a fixed source of compensation for our executive officers. Base salaries are determined on an individual basis taking into account the scope of the executive officer’s responsibilities and their prior experience. Base salaries are expected to be reviewed annually by the compensation committee and our board of directors and may be changed based on the executive officer’s success in meeting or exceeding individual objectives, as well as to maintain market competitiveness. Base salaries can also be adjusted as warranted throughout the year to reflect promotions or other changes in the scope or breadth of an executive officer’s role or responsibilities or in external market conditions.

 

Annual Bonuses

 

Annual bonuses are designed to motivate our executive officers to meet our strategic business and financial objectives generally and our annual financial performance targets in particular. Employees receive annual performance evaluations and participate in a goal-setting exercise to ensure their individual growth and development. We currently make annual bonus payments in cash and anticipate continuing to do so upon completion of this offering. Following completion of this offering, bonus payments for our executive officers will be determined by the compensation committee based on an individual’s merit and accomplishments and the overall performance of our company.

 

2018 Equity Incentive Plan

 

Upon or prior to the completion of this offering, we will establish our 2018 Equity Incentive Plan. The 2018 Equity Incentive Plan will provide eligible participants with compensation opportunities in the form of cash and equity incentive awards. This plan will enhance our ability to attract, retain and motivate our executive officers and other key management and incentivize executives to increase our long-term growth and equity value in alignment with the interests of our shareholders. The material features of the 2018 Equity Incentive Plan are summarized below.

 

Eligibility and Administration. Our executive officers, employees, consultants and directors, and employees, consultants and directors of our subsidiaries will be eligible to receive awards under the 2018 Equity Incentive Plan. Following the completion of the offering, the 2018 Equity Incentive Plan will be administered by our board of directors. Our board of directors may delegate its duties and responsibilities to committees of our directors and/or officers (referred to collectively as the plan administrator below), subject to certain limitations that may be imposed under Section 162(m) of the U.S. Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the “Code”), Section 16 of the Exchange Act, and/or stock exchange rules, as applicable. The plan administrator will have the authority to make all determinations and interpretations under, prescribe all forms for use with, and adopt rules for the administration of, the 2018 Equity Incentive Plan, subject to its express terms and conditions. The plan administrator will set the terms and conditions of all awards under the 2018 Equity Incentive Plan, including any vesting and vesting acceleration conditions.

 

Limitation on Awards and Shares Available. An aggregate of                            shares of our Class A common stock will be available for issuance under awards granted pursuant to the 2018 Equity Incentive Plan, which shares may be authorized but unissued shares, or shares purchased in the open market. The number of shares available for issuance will be increased by an annual increase on the first day of each calendar year beginning January 1, 2019 and ending on and including January 1, 2028, equal to the least of (A)                shares, (B) 5% of the aggregate number of shares of our Class A, Class B and one-third of Class C common stock outstanding on the final day of the immediately preceding calendar year and (C) such smaller number of shares as is determined by our board of directors. If an award under the 2018 Equity Incentive Plan is forfeited, expires or is settled for cash, any shares subject to such award may, to the extent of such forfeiture, expiration or cash settlement, be used again for new grants under the 2018 Equity Incentive Plan. In addition, shares tendered or withheld to satisfy grant or exercise price or tax withholding obligations associated with an award also may be used again for new grants under the 2018 Equity Incentive Plan. However, the following shares may not be used again for grant under the 2018 Equity Incentive Plan: (1) shares subject to a stock appreciation right, or SAR, that are not issued in connection with the stock settlement of the stock appreciation right on its exercise; and (2) shares purchased on the open market with the cash proceeds from the exercise of options.

 

123

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Awards granted under the 2018 Equity Incentive Plan upon the assumption of, or in substitution for, awards authorized or outstanding under a qualifying equity plan maintained by an entity with which we enter into a merger or similar corporate transaction will not reduce the shares available for grant under the 2018 Equity Incentive Plan.

 

Awards. The 2018 Equity Incentive Plan will provide for the grant of stock options, including incentive stock options, or ISOs, and nonqualified stock options, or NSOs, restricted stock, dividend equivalents, stock payments, restricted stock units, or RSUs, performance shares, other incentive awards, stock appreciation rights, or SARs, and cash awards. No determination has been made as to the types or amounts of awards that will be granted to specific individuals pursuant to the 2018 Equity Incentive Plan. Certain awards under the 2018 Equity Incentive Plan may constitute or provide for a deferral of compensation, subject to Section 409A of the Code, which may impose additional requirements on the terms and conditions of such awards. All awards under the 2018 Equity Incentive Plan will be set forth in award agreements, which will detail all terms and conditions of the awards, including any applicable vesting and payment terms and post-termination exercise limitations. Awards other than cash awards generally will be settled in shares of our Class A common stock, but the plan administrator may provide for cash settlement of any award. A brief description of each award type follows.

 

Stock Options. Stock options provide for the purchase of shares of our Class A common stock in the future at an exercise price set on the grant date. ISOs, by contrast to NSOs, may provide tax deferral beyond exercise and favorable capital gains tax treatment to their holders if certain holding period and other requirements of the Code are satisfied. The exercise price of a stock option may not be less than 100% of the fair market value of the underlying share on the date of grant (or 110% in the case of ISOs granted to certain significant stockholders), except with respect to certain substitute options granted in connection with a corporate transaction. The term of a stock option may not be longer than ten years (or five years in the case of ISOs granted to certain significant stockholders). Vesting conditions determined by the plan administrator may apply to stock options and may include continued service, performance and/or other conditions.

 

SARs. SARs entitle their holder, upon exercise, to receive from us an amount equal to the appreciation of the shares subject to the award between the grant date and the exercise date. The exercise price of a SAR may not be less than 100% of the fair market value of the underlying share on the date of grant (except with respect to certain substitute SARs granted in connection with a corporate transaction) and the term of a SAR may not be longer than ten years. Vesting conditions determined by the plan administrator may apply to SARs and may include continued service, performance and/or other conditions.

 

Restricted Stock and RSUs. Restricted stock is an award of nontransferable shares of our Class A common stock that remain forfeitable unless and until specified conditions are met, and which may be subject to a purchase price. RSUs are contractual promises to deliver shares of our Class A common stock in the future, which may also remain forfeitable unless and until specified conditions are met, and may be accompanied by the right to receive the equivalent value of dividends paid on shares of our Class A common stock prior to the delivery of the underlying shares. Delivery of the shares underlying RSUs may be deferred under the terms of the award or at the election of the participant, if the plan administrator permits such a deferral. Conditions applicable to restricted stock and RSUs may be based on continuing service, the attainment of performance goals and/or such other conditions as the plan administrator may determine.

 

Other Stock or Cash-Based Awards. Other stock or cash-based awards of cash, fully-vested shares of our Class A common stock and other awards valued wholly or partially by referring to, or otherwise based on, shares of our common stock. Other stock or cash based-awards may be granted to participants and may also be available as a payment form in the settlement of other awards, as standalone payments and as payment in lieu of base salary, bonus, fees or other cash compensation otherwise payable to any individual who is eligible to receive awards.

 

124

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Performance Awards. Performance awards include any of the foregoing awards that are granted subject to vesting and/or payment based on the attainment of specified performance goals or other criteria the plan administrator may determine, which may or may not be objectively determinable. Performance criteria upon which performance goals are established by the plan administrator may include but are not limited to: (1) the attainment by a share of a specified fair market value for a specified period of time; (2) book value per share; (3) earnings per share; (4) return on assets; (5) return on equity; (6) return on investments; (7) return on invested capital; (8) total stockholder return; (9) earnings or net income of the Company before or after taxes and/or interest; (10) earnings before interest, taxes, depreciation and amortization; (11) revenues; (12) market share; (13) cash flow or cost reduction; (14) interest expense after taxes; (15) economic value created; (16) improvements in capital structure; (17) gross margin; (18) operating margin; (19) net cash provided by operations; (20) strategic business criteria, consisting of one or more objectives based on meeting specified market penetration, geographic business expansion goals, cost targets, customer satisfaction, reductions in errors and omissions, reductions in lost business, management of employment practices and employee benefits, supervision of litigation and information technology, quality and quality audit scores, efficiency, working capital, goals relating to acquisitions or divestitures, land management, net sales or closings, inventory control, inventory, land or lot improvement or reduction, implementation or completion of critical projects, economic value; (21) adjusted earnings or loss per share; (22) employee satisfaction; (23) certain financial ratios (including those measuring liquidity, activity, profitability or leverage); (24) debt levels, covenants, ratios or reductions; (25) financing and other capital raising transactions; (26) year-end cash; (27) investment sourcing activity; (28) marketing initiatives; or (29) any combination of the foregoing, any of which may be measured either in absolute terms for us or any operating unit of our company or as compared to any incremental increase or decrease or as compared to results of a peer group or to market performance indicators or indices.

 

Certain Transactions. The plan administrator will have broad discretion to take action under the 2018 Equity Incentive Plan, as well as make adjustments to the terms and conditions of existing and future awards, to prevent the dilution or enlargement of intended benefits and facilitate necessary or desirable changes in the event of certain transactions and events affecting our Class A common stock, such as stock dividends, stock splits, mergers, acquisitions, consolidations and other corporate transactions. In addition, in the event of certain non-reciprocal transactions with our stockholders known as “equity restructurings,” the plan administrator will make equitable adjustments to the 2018 Equity Incentive Plan and outstanding awards.

 

Upon or in anticipation of a change in control of our company (as defined in the 2018 Equity Incentive Plan), the plan administrator will be authorized to take such actions as it deems appropriate, including, but not limited to, any of the following actions: (1) cancelling the awards in exchange for either an amount of cash or other property; (2) vesting of the awards, and to the extent applicable, making them exercisable; (3) providing that the awards will be assumed by the successor or survivor corporation or parent or subsidiary, or substituting the awards for awards of the successor or survivor corporation, parent, or subsidiary thereof (with appropriate adjustments as to the number and kind of shares and applicable exercise or purchase price); (4) adjusting the number and type of shares subject to the awards, and/or the terms and conditions of such awards; (5) replacing the awards; and/or (6) terminating and cancelling the awards or otherwise providing that the awards cannot become vested or be exercised following the change in control. Individual award agreements may provide for additional accelerated vesting and payment provisions.

 

Foreign Participants, Claw-Back Provisions, Transferability, Repricing and Participant Payments. The plan administrator may modify award terms, establish subplans and/or adjust other terms and conditions of awards, subject to the share limits described above, in order to facilitate grants of awards subject to the laws and/or stock exchange rules of countries outside of the United States. All awards will be subject to the provisions of any claw-back policy implemented by our company to the extent set forth in such claw-back policy and/or in the applicable award agreement. Subject to applicable limitations of the Code, the plan administrator may increase or reduce the applicable price per share of an award, or cancel and replace an award with another award. With limited exceptions for estate planning, domestic relations orders, certain beneficiary designations and the laws of descent and distribution, awards under the 2018 Equity Incentive Plan are generally non-transferable prior to vesting, and are exercisable only by the participant. With regard to tax withholding, exercise price and purchase price obligations arising in connection with awards under the 2018 Equity Incentive Plan, the plan administrator may, in its discretion, accept cash or check, shares of our common stock that meet specified conditions, a “market sell order” or such other consideration as it deems suitable.

 

Plan Amendment and Termination. Our board of directors may amend or terminate the 2018 Equity Incentive Plan at any time; however, except in connection with certain changes in our capital structure or as provided for in the 2018 Equity Incentive Plan, stockholder approval will be required for any amendment that increases the number of shares available under the 2018 Equity Incentive Plan. No award may be granted pursuant to the 2018 Equity Incentive Plan after the tenth anniversary of the date on which our board of directors adopts the 2018 Equity Incentive Plan.

 

125

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Profits Interest Awards

 

On June 1, 2016 and December 5, 2016, Greenlane Holdings, LLC entered into profits interest award agreements with Zachary Tapp, our Chief Financial Officer, and Jay Scheiner, our Chief Operating Officer, respectively, and on January 20, 2017, Greenlane Holdings, LLC entered into a profits interest award agreement with Sasha Kadey, our Chief Marketing Officer. Under such agreements, Messrs Kadey, Scheiner and Tapp were initially granted an aggregate 5.0% membership interest in Greenlane Holdings, LLC, subject to a vesting schedule. In August 2018, such profits interest awards were converted into membership interests in Greenlane Holdings, LLC, 50% of which were fully vested and 50% of which are subject to a vesting schedule. In connection with the consummation of the Transactions at or prior to the closing of this offering, such membership interests will be represented by Common Units of Greenlane Holdings, LLC and shares of our Class B common stock, subject in the case of the unvested securities to contractual specifications. We do not intend to grant additional profits interest awards in the future.

 

Phantom Stock Awards

 

As part of an incentive program, our subsidiary, Warehouse Goods Inc., offered certain key employees the opportunity to participate in the Phantom Equity Program. Under the Phantom Equity Program, each participant was provided a “Phantom Equity Payment” in respect of an agreed upon number of bonus units. The number of units varied for each recipient. Upon the completion of this offering, we intend to terminate the Phantom Equity Program and to grant the current participants in the Phantom Equity Program stock options under the 2018 Equity Incentive Plan.

 

Benefit Plans

 

We provide our executive officers, including the NEOs, with health and dental insurance programs and we also provide matching contributions to 401 (k) savings plans, subject to a cap, as well as paid time off. We offer these benefits consistent with local market practice.

 

Summary Compensation Table

 

The following table sets out information concerning: (i) the compensation earned by, paid to, or awarded to the NEOs for the fiscal years ended December 31, 2017 and December 31, 2016; and (ii) the compensation expected to be earned by, paid to, or awarded to the NEOs for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2018.

 

Name and Principal Position  Year
ended
   Salary
($)
   Bonus
($)
  

Long term incentive plans
($)(1)

  

All other compensation ($)(4)

   Total Compensation ($) 
Aaron LoCascio  2018   $305,000(2)  $100,000(3)         -   $41,322   $446,322 
Chief Executive Officer  2017    280,000    -    -    45,715    325,286 
   2016    280,000    5,006    -    18,590    303,167 
Adam Schoenfeld  2018    305,000(2)   100,000(3)   -    51,468    431,468 
President, Chief Strategy Officer  2017    280,000    38,500    -    55,165    373,607 
   2016    280,000    7,741    -    82,612    353,680 
Sasha Kadey  2018    263,750(2)   100,000(3)   -    17,000    380,750 
Chief Marketing Officer  2017    233,333    22,000    -    7,370    262,703 
   2016    137,500    -    -    8,607    146,107 
Jay Scheiner  2018    220,000(2)   67,500(3)   -    17,000    304,500 
Chief Operating Officer  2017    191,178    14,000    -    17,228    222,406 
   2016    185,100    14,000    -    17,191    216,291 
Zachary Tapp  2018    192,056(2)   50,000(3)   -    17,000    259,056 
Chief Financial Officer  2017    169,683    11,000    -    7,247    187,930 
   2016    182,550    10,000    -    8,563    201,113 

 

 

(1)Reflects the grant date fair value of stock options that were granted or are expected to be granted (determined in accordance with the Black-Scholes valuation model).
  
(2)Reflects the base salary expected to be paid in the fiscal year ended December 31, 2018, assuming the existing employment agreements with each NEO remain in place until September 30, 2018 and the new employment agreements with each NEO become effective October 1, 2018.
  
(3)Reflects the annual target bonus for each NEO; actual amounts will depend on performance during the fiscal year ending December 31, 2018 and may be higher or lower than these amounts.
  
(4)

Other Compensation includes payments of certain legal fees and premiums on life insurance policies on behalf of our Chief Executive Officer and our President and Chief Strategy Officer.

 

126

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Employee Agreements and Termination and Change of Control Benefit

 

Each of the NEOs has previously entered into an employment agreement with Greenlane Holdings, LLC, which agreements will be replaced by new employment agreements with us in connection with the consummation of the Transactions that will become effective upon the closing of this offering. The new employment agreements include provisions regarding base salary, eligibility for annual bonuses, enrollment of benefits and participation in the 2018 Equity Incentive Plan, among other things. Pursuant to the new employment agreements, each of the NEOs will be entitled to the following compensation:

 

Name and Principal Position  Annual Base Salary  Annual Targeted Bonus

Aaron LoCascio

Chief Executive Officer

  $380,000  Up to 26.3% of base salary

Adam Schoenfeld

President, Chief Strategy Officer

  380,000  Up to 26.3% of base salary

Sasha Kadey

Chief Marketing Officer

  260,000  Up to 38% of base salary

Jay Scheiner

Chief Operating Officer

  220,000  Up to 31% of base salary

Zachary Tapp

Chief Financial Officer

  209,000  Up to 25% of base salary

 

Each of the new employment agreements will be for a term of up to three-years, provided that such agreements will be automatically extended for additional one-year terms unless either party gives written notice of termination not less than sixty (60) days prior to the termination of the then-current term. Each NEO is entitled to the annual compensation described above, and will be eligible to receive an annual incentive bonus as determined by our board of directors equal to a percentage of such NEO’s base salary as described above. During the term of employment, each NEO will be entitled to participate in all employee benefit plans and programs, and fringe benefit plans and programs, made available to our employees generally, subject to the eligibility and participations restrictions of each such plan or program. Each NEO also will be entitled to reimbursement for all reasonable business expenses incurred by such NEO in connection with carrying out such NEO’s duties.

 

Each NEO will be terminable by us or at any time, (i) for cause (as defined in each of the new employment agreements), (ii) without cause upon at least thirty (30) days prior written notice to the NEO, (iii) in the event of the NEO’s death, or (iv) in the event of the NEO’s disability, as determined in good faith by our board of directors. Each NEO may terminate the agreement at any time upon not less than thirty (30) days prior written notice; provided, however, that each NEO may terminate the agreement immediately for good reason (as defined in each of the new employment agreements) if we have not remedied the circumstances giving rise to the basis of such termination for good reason within the applicable cure period. If the NEO’s employment is terminated without cause or by the NEO for good reason, in addition to payment of any accrued obligations, such NEO will be entitled to certain severance benefits based on such NEO’s base salary and targeted incentive bonus amount then in effect, and such NEO shall also be entitled to incentive bonuses with respect to the current year that would otherwise have been payable to such NEO had such NEO’s employment not been terminated.

 

127

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Pursuant to such new employment agreements, each NEO also will be subject to customary confidentiality restrictions and work-product provisions, and each NEO also is subject to customary non-competition covenants and non-solicitation covenants with respect to our employees, consultants and customers.

 

We do not currently maintain any retirement plans other than matching 401K plans for our executives or other employees.

 

Outstanding Share-Based Awards and Option-Based Awards

 

The following table sets out information on the outstanding share-based and option-based awards expected to be held by each of our NEOs upon completion of this offering.

 

   Option-Based Awards   Share-Based Awards 
Name  Number of Securities Underlying Unexercised Options   Option Exercise Price   Option Expiration Date   Value of Unexercised In-the Money Options   Number of shares or units of shares that have not vested   Market or payout value of share-based awards that have not vested   Market or payout value of vested share-based awards not paid out or distributed 

Aaron LoCascio

Chairman and Chief Executive Officer

                                                                                            

Adam Schoenfeld

President and Chief Strategy Officer

                                   

Sasha Kadey

Chief Marketing Officer

                                   

Jay Scheiner

Chief Operating Officer

                                   

Zachary Tapp

Chief Financial Officer

                                   

 

Incentive Plan Awards – Value Vested or Earned During the Year

 

The following table sets out, for each of our NEOs, the value of the option-based awards expected to vest in accordance with their terms during the fiscal year ended December 31, 2018.

 

Name  Option-based awards – Value
vested during
the year
   Share awards-
Value
during the
year on vesting
   Non-equity incentive plan
compensation pay-out during
the year
 

Aaron LoCascio

Chairman and Chief Executive Officer

                                                     

Adam Schoenfeld

President and Chief Strategy Officer

               

Sasha Kadey

Chief Marketing Officer

               

Jay Scheiner

Chief Operating Officer

               

Zachary Tapp

Chief Financial Officer

               

 

128

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

DIRECTOR COMPENSATION

 

General

 

The following discussion describes the significant elements of the expected compensation program for members of the board of directors and its committees. The compensation of our directors is designed to attract and retain committed and qualified directors and to align their compensation with the long-term interests of our shareholders. Directors who are also executive officers (each, an “Excluded Director”) will not be entitled to receive any compensation for his or her service as a director, committee member or Chair of our board of directors or of any committee of our board of directors.

 

Director Compensation

 

Our director compensation program is designed to attract and retain qualified individuals to serve on our board of directors. Our board of directors, on the recommendation of our compensation committee, will be responsible for reviewing and approving any changes to the directors’ compensation arrangements. In consideration for serving on our board of directors, each director (other than Excluded Directors) will be paid an annual retainer. All directors will be reimbursed for their reasonable out-of-pocket expenses incurred while serving as directors.

 

In                      , 2018, our board of directors approved a non-employee director compensation policy, which will be effective for all non-employee directors upon the completion of this offering. Each non-employee director will receive an annual cash retainer of $50,000. Each non-employee director may elect to receive the annual base retainer in the form of stock options, provided that, except in the case of the initial annual base retainer, such election is made in the calendar year preceding the year in which such compensation is earned. We will pay all amounts in quarterly installments.

 

In addition, each non-employee director, who became a director or will become a director after the effectiveness of the registration statement of which this prospectus is a part, will receive a one-time initial award of stock options to purchase approximately $70,000 (determined using the Black-Scholes method) of our common stock, which will fully vest on the one year anniversary of the grant date, subject to the director’s continued service on the board of directors. Thereafter, each non-employee director will receive an annual award of stock options to purchase approximately $50,000 (determined using the Black-Scholes method) of our common stock, which will fully vest on the one year anniversary of the date of grant, subject to the director’s continued service on the board of directors.

 

129

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Outstanding Share-Based Awards and Option-Based Awards

 

The following table sets out information on the outstanding share-based and option-based awards held by each of the individuals who will be a director as of the Closing of this offering, other than the Excluded Directors.

 

   Option-Based Awards   Share-Based Awards 
Name  Number of Securities Underlying Unexercised Options   Option Exercise Price   Option Expiration Date   Value of Unexercised In-the Money Options   Number of shares or units of shares that have not vested   Market or payout value of share-based awards that have not vested   Market or payout value of vested share-based awards not paid out or distributed 

Director

                                                                                                                        

Director

                                   

 

Insurance

 

We maintain an insurance policy with respect to directors’ and officers’ liability covering our directors and officers as well as directors and officers of Greenlane Holdings, LLC as a group. The policy provides coverage to an annual primary limit of $10,000,000. We were quoted an annual premium for the policy for the initial 12-month period of $185,000. Our coverage under the policy is for a period commencing on the closing date of this offering and terminating on the first anniversary of such closing date, with terms and premiums to be established at each renewal.

 

130

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

CERTAIN RELATIONSHIPS AND RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

 

Other than compensation arrangements for our named executive officers and directors, we describe below each transaction or series of similar transactions, since January 1, 2016, to which we or Greenlane Holdings, LLC were a party or will be a party, in which:

 

the amounts involved exceeded or will exceed $120,000; and

 

any of our directors, executive officers or holders of more than 5% of our capital stock, or any member of the immediate family of the foregoing persons, had or will have a direct or indirect material interest.

 

See “Executive Compensation” for a description of certain arrangements with our executive officers and directors.

 

Related Party Agreements in Effect Prior to this Offering

 

On February 29, 2012, Aaron LoCascio, our Chief Executive Officer, made a loan to Greenlane Holdings, LLC in the amount of $675,179. This loan bore interest at a fluctuating rate of interest that was determined annually by the Founding Members. As of March 31, 2018, the outstanding principal amount of this note was $505,536. This note was paid in full in April 2018.

 

In the years ended December 31, 2017 and 2016, Warehouse Goods LLC paid approximately $81,000 and $62,000, respectively, to a company fifty percent (50%) owned by Aaron LoCascio, our Chief Executive Officer, and fifty percent (50%) owned by Zachary Tapp, our Chief Financial Officer, for use of a boat for our marketing and business entertainment. This arrangement will be terminated at the closing of this offering.

 

On October 4, 2017, Jacoby & Co. Inc., a company owned and controlled by our Chief Executive Officer, Aaron LoCascio, and our President and Chief Strategy Officer, Adam Schoenfeld, and that is the majority owner of Greenlane Holdings, LLC, entered into a credit agreement with Fifth Third Bank that provides a revolving credit facility for Greenlane Holdings, LLC of up to $8 million. Interest accrues on borrowings under the credit facility at a rate equal to LIBOR plus 3.5% per annum. Jacoby & Co. Inc.’s obligations under the credit facility are guaranteed by Messrs. LoCascio and Schoenfeld, Greenlane Holdings, LLC and all of the operating subsidiaries of Greenlane Holdings, LLC and are secured by a first priority security interest in certain assets of Greenlane Holdings, LLC and its operating subsidiaries. The revolving credit facility matures on October 3, 2018. The amounts drawn under such credit facility have fluctuated over the term of the credit facility and at times the credit facility has been drawn in full. At March 31, 2018, aggregate borrowings under such credit facility amounted to $4,690,000.

 

Policies and Procedures for Related-Person Transactions

 

Our board of directors recognizes the fact that transactions with related persons present a heightened risk of conflicts of interests and/or improper valuation (or the perception thereof). Our board of directors will adopt a written policy on transactions with related persons, to be effective upon completion of this offering. Under the new policy:

 

any related-person transaction, and any material amendment or modification to a related-person transaction, must be reviewed and approved or ratified by a committee of the board of directors composed solely of independent directors who are disinterested or by the disinterested members of the board of directors; and

 

any employment relationship or transaction involving an executive officer and any related compensation must be approved by the compensation committee of the board of directors or recommended by the compensation committee to the board of directors for its approval.

 

In connection with the review and approval or ratification of a related-person transaction:

 

management must disclose to the committee or disinterested directors, as applicable, the name of the related person and the basis on which the person is a related person, the material terms of the related-person transaction, including the approximate dollar value of the amount involved in the transaction, and all the material facts as to the related person’s direct or indirect interest in, or relationship to, the related-person transaction;

 

131

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

management must advise the committee or disinterested directors, as applicable, as to whether the related-person transaction complies with the terms of our agreements governing our material outstanding indebtedness that limit or restrict our ability to enter into a related-person transaction;

 

management must advise the committee or disinterested directors, as applicable, as to whether the related-person transaction will be required to be disclosed in our applicable filings under the Securities Act or the Exchange Act, and related rules, and, to the extent required to be disclosed, management must ensure that the related-person transaction is disclosed in accordance with such Acts and related rules; and

 

management must advise the committee or disinterested directors, as applicable, as to whether the related person transaction constitutes a “personal loan” for purposes of Section 402 of SOX.

 

In addition, the related-person transaction policy provides that the committee or disinterested directors, as applicable, in connection with any approval or ratification of a related-person transaction involving a non-employee director or director nominee, should consider whether such transaction would compromise the director or director nominee’s status as an “independent,” “outside,” or “non-employee” director, as applicable, under the rules and regulations of the SEC and the Code.

 

The Transactions

 

In connection with the Transactions, we will engage in certain transactions with certain of our directors, executive officers and other persons and entities which are or will become holders of 5% or more of our voting securities upon the completion of the Transactions, including entering into the Greenlane Operating Agreement, the Tax Receivable Agreement and the Registration Rights Agreement. These transactions are described herein under the caption “The Transactions.”

 

Greenlane Operating Agreement

 

We will operate our business through Greenlane Holdings, LLC and its subsidiaries. In connection with the completion of this offering, we and the Members will enter into Greenlane Holdings, LLC’s Third Amended and Restated Operating Agreement, which we refer to as the “Greenlane Operating Agreement.” Among the Members who will be party to the Greenlane Operating Agreement are each of our named executive officers, Aaron LoCascio, Adam Schoenfeld, Sasha Kadey, Jay Scheiner and Zachary Tapp, and each of our stockholders identified in the table in “Principal and Selling Stockholders” as beneficially owning shares of Class B common stock or Class C common stock. The operations of Greenlane Holdings, LLC, and the rights and obligations of the holders of Common Units, will be set forth in the Greenlane Operating Agreement.

 

Appointment as Manager. Under the Greenlane Operating Agreement, we will become a member and the sole manager of Greenlane Holdings, LLC. As the manager, we will be able to control all of the day-to-day business affairs and decision-making of Greenlane Holdings, LLC without the approval of any other Member, unless otherwise stated in the Greenlane Operating Agreement. As such, we, through our officers and directors, will be responsible for all operational and administrative decisions of Greenlane Holdings, LLC and the day-to-day management of Greenlane Holdings, LLC’s business. Pursuant to the terms of the Greenlane Operating Agreement, we cannot be removed as the sole manager of Greenlane Holdings, LLC by the other Members.

 

Compensation. We will not be entitled to compensation for our services as the manager. We will be entitled to reimbursement by Greenlane Holdings, LLC for all fees and expenses incurred on behalf of Greenlane Holdings, LLC, including all expenses associated with this offering and maintaining our corporate existence, and all fees, expenses and costs of being a public company (including expenses incurred in connection with public reporting obligations, proxy statements, stockholder meetings, stock exchange fees, transfer agent fees, legal fees, SEC and FINRA filing fees and offering expenses) and maintaining its corporate existence, including all costs of maintaining our board of directors and committees of the board, executive compensation and certain insurance policies.

 

Capitalization. The Greenlane Operating Agreement provides for a single class of common membership units, which we refer to as the “Common Units.” The Greenlane Operating Agreement will reflect a split of Common Units such that one Common Unit can be acquired with the net proceeds received by us from this offering from the sale of one share of our Class A common stock. Each Common Unit will entitle the holder to a pro rata share of the net profits and net losses and distributions of Greenlane Holdings, LLC.

 

132

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Distributions. The Greenlane Operating Agreement will require “tax distributions,” as that term is defined in the Greenlane Operating Agreement, to be made by Greenlane Holdings, LLC to its “members,” as that term is defined in the Greenlane Operating Agreement. Tax distributions will be made at least annually to each member of Greenlane Holdings, LLC, including us, based on such member’s allocable share of the taxable income of Greenlane Holdings, LLC and at a commencing tax rate equal to the highest effective marginal combined federal, state and local income tax rate applicable to corporate or individual taxpayers that may potentially apply to any Member for the relevant period taking into account (i) any deductions pursuant to Section 199A of the Code, and (ii) the character of the relevant tax items (e.g., ordinary or capital), as we, as the sole manager of Greenlane Holdings, LLC, reasonably determine. For this purpose, the taxable income of Greenlane Holdings, LLC, and our allocable share of such taxable income, shall be determined without regard to any tax basis adjustments that result from our deemed or actual purchase of Common Units from the Members (as described above under “—Tax Receivable Agreement”). The tax rate used to determine tax distributions will apply regardless of the actual final tax liability of any such member. Tax distributions will also be made only to the extent all distributions from Greenlane Holdings, LLC for the relevant period were otherwise insufficient to enable each member to cover its tax liabilities as calculated in the manner described above. The Greenlane Operating Agreement will also allow for distributions to be made by Greenlane Holdings, LLC to its members on a pro rata basis out of “distributable cash,” as that term is defined in the Greenlane Operating Agreement. We expect Greenlane Holdings, LLC may make distributions out of distributable cash periodically to the extent permitted by the agreements governing its indebtedness and as required by Greenlane Holdings, LLC for its capital and other needs, such that we in turn are able to make dividend payments, if any, to the holders of our Class A common stock.

 

Common Unit Redemption Right. The Greenlane Operating Agreement provides a redemption right to the Members which entitles them to have their Common Units redeemed, at the election of each such person, for, at our option, as determined by or at the direction of the independent directors (within the meaning of applicable securities laws) of our board of directors who are disinterested, newly-issued shares of our Class A common stock on a one-to-one basis or a cash payment equal to the five-day average volume weighted average market prices of one share of Class A common stock for each Common Unit redeemed (subject to customary adjustments, including for stock splits, stock dividends and similar events affecting the Class A common stock). If we decide to make a cash payment, the Member has the option to rescind its redemption request within a specified time period. Upon the exercise of the redemption right, the redeeming Member will surrender its Common Units to Greenlane Holdings, LLC for cancellation. The Greenlane Operating Agreement requires that we contribute cash or shares of our Class A common stock to Greenlane Holdings, LLC in exchange for an amount of Common Units in Greenlane Holdings, LLC that will be issued to us equal to the number of Common Units redeemed from the Member. Greenlane Holdings, LLC will then distribute the cash or shares of our Class A common stock to such Member to complete the redemption. In the event of such election by a Member, we may, at our option, effect a direct exchange by us of cash or our Class A common stock for such Common Units in lieu of such a redemption. Whether by redemption or exchange, we are obligated to ensure that at all times the number of Common Units that we own equals the number of shares of Class A common stock issued by us (subject to certain exceptions for treasury shares and shares underlying certain convertible or exchangeable securities).

 

Issuance of Common Units upon Exercise of Options or Issuance of Other Equity Compensation. We may implement guidelines to provide for the method by which shares of Class A common stock may be exchanged or contributed between us and Greenlane Holdings, LLC (or any subsidiary thereof), or may be returned to us upon any forfeiture of shares of Class A common stock, in either case in connection with the grant, vesting and/or forfeiture of compensatory equity awards granted by us, including under the 2018 Equity Incentive Plan, for the purpose of ensuring that the relationship between us and our subsidiaries remains at arm’s-length.

 

Maintenance of one-to-one ratio of shares of Class A common stock and Common Units owned by Our Company. Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and the Greenlane Operating Agreement will require that we and Greenlane Holdings, LLC, respectively, at all times maintain (i) a ratio of one Common Unit owned by us for each share of Class A common stock issued by us (subject to certain exceptions for treasury shares and shares underlying certain convertible or exchangeable securities), (ii) a one-to-one ratio between the number of shares of Class B common stock owned by the Non-Founder Members and the number of Common Units owned by the Non-Founder Members and (iii) a three-to-one ratio between the number of shares of Class C common stock owned by the Founder Members and the number of Common Units owned by the Founder Members or their affiliates.

 

133

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Transfer Restrictions. The Greenlane Operating Agreement generally does not permit transfers of Common Units by Members, subject to limited exceptions or written approval of the transfer by the manager. Any transferee of Common Units must execute the Greenlane Operating Agreement and any other agreements executed by the holders of Common Units and relating to such Common Units in the aggregate.

 

Dissolution. The Greenlane Operating Agreement will provide that the decision of the manager, with the approval of the holders of a majority of the outstanding Common Units, will be required to voluntarily dissolve Greenlane Holdings, LLC. In addition to a voluntary dissolution, Greenlane Holdings, LLC will be dissolved upon a change of control transaction under certain circumstances, as well as upon the entry of a decree of judicial dissolution or other circumstances in accordance with Delaware law. Upon a dissolution event, the proceeds of a liquidation will be distributed in the following order: (i) first, to pay all expenses of winding up Greenlane Holdings, LLC; and (ii) second, to pay all debts and liabilities and obligations of Greenlane Holdings, LLC. All remaining assets of Greenlane Holdings, LLC will be distributed to the Members pro-rata in accordance with their respective percentage ownership interests in Greenlane Holdings, LLC (as determined based on the number of Common Units held by a member relative to the aggregate number of all outstanding Common Units).

 

Confidentiality. Each Member will agree to maintain the confidentiality of Greenlane Holdings, LLC’s confidential information. This obligation excludes information independently obtained or developed by the Members, information that is in the public domain or otherwise disclosed to a member, in either such case not in violation of a confidentiality obligation or disclosures required by law or judicial process or approved by us.

 

Indemnification and Exculpation. The Greenlane Operating Agreement provides for indemnification for all expenses, liabilities and losses reasonably incurred by any person by reason of the fact that such person is or was a Member or is or was serving at the request of Greenlane Holdings, LLC as the manager, an officer, an employee or an agent of Greenlane Holdings, LLC; provided, however, that there will be no indemnification for actions made not in good faith or in a manner which the person did not reasonably believe to be in or not opposed to the best interests of Greenlane Holdings, LLC, or, with respect to any criminal action or proceeding other than by or in the right of Greenlane Holdings, LLC, where the person had reasonable cause to believe the conduct was unlawful, or for breaches of any representations, warranties or covenants by such person or its affiliates contained in the Greenlane Operating Agreement or in other agreements with Greenlane Holdings, LLC.

 

We, as the manager, and our affiliates, will not be liable to Greenlane Holdings, LLC, its members or their affiliates for damages incurred by any acts or omissions as the manager, provided that the acts or omissions of these exculpated persons are not the result of fraud, intentional misconduct, knowing violations of law, or breaches of the Greenlane Operating Agreement or other agreement with Greenlane Holdings, LLC.

 

Amendments. The Greenlane Operating Agreement may be amended with the consent of the holders of a majority in voting power of the outstanding Common Units; provided that if the manager holds greater than 33% of the Common Units, then it may be amended with the consent of the manager together with holders of a majority of the outstanding Common Units, excluding Common Units held by the manager. Notwithstanding the foregoing, no amendment to any of the provisions that expressly require the approval or action of certain members may be made without the consent of such members and no amendment to the provisions governing the authority and actions of the manager or the dissolution of Greenlane Holdings, LLC may be amended without the consent of the manager.

 

Tax Receivable Agreement

 

We expect to obtain an increase in our share of the tax basis of the assets of Greenlane Holdings, LLC when a Member receives cash or shares of our Class A common stock in connection with a redemption or exchange of such Member’s Common Units for Class A common stock or cash (such basis increase, the “Basis Adjustments”). We intend to treat such acquisition of Common Units as a direct purchase by us of Common Units or net capital assets from a Member for U.S. federal income and other applicable tax purposes, regardless of whether such Common Units are surrendered by a Member to Greenlane Holdings, LLC for redemption or sold to us upon the exercise of our election to acquire such Common Units directly. Basis Adjustments may have the effect of reducing the amounts that we would otherwise pay in the future to various tax authorities. The Basis Adjustments may also decrease gains (or increase losses) on future dispositions of certain capital assets to the extent tax basis is allocated to those capital assets.

 

134

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

In connection with the Transactions described above, we will enter into the Tax Receivable Agreement with Greenlane Holdings, LLC and the Members. The Tax Receivable Agreement will provide for the payment by us to such persons of 85% of the amount of tax benefits, if any, that we actually realize, or in some circumstances are deemed to realize, as a result of the Transactions described above, including increases in the tax basis of the assets of Greenlane Holdings, LLC arising from such Transactions, and tax basis increases attributable to payments made under the Tax Receivable Agreement and deductions attributable to imputed interest and other payments of interest pursuant to the Tax Receivable Agreement. Greenlane Holdings, LLC will have in effect an election under Section 754 of the Code effective for each taxable year in which a redemption or exchange of Common Units for shares of our Class A common stock or cash occurs. These Tax Receivable Agreement payments are not conditioned upon any continued ownership interest in either Greenlane Holdings, LLC or us by any Member. The rights of each Member under the Tax Receivable Agreement are assignable by each Member with our consent, which we may not unreasonably withhold, so long as the assignee joins as a party to the Tax Receivable Agreement. We expect to benefit from the remaining 15% of tax benefits, if any, that we may actually realize.

 

The actual Basis Adjustments, as well as any amounts paid to the Members under the Tax Receivable Agreement, will vary depending on a number of factors, including:

 

the timing of any subsequent redemptions or exchanges—for instance, the increase in any tax deductions will vary depending on the fair value, which may fluctuate over time, of the depreciable or amortizable assets of Greenlane Holdings, LLC at the time of each redemption or exchange;

 

the price of shares of our Class A common stock at the time of redemptions or exchanges—the Basis Adjustments, as well as any related increase in any tax deductions, is directly related to the price of shares of our Class A common stock at the time of each redemption or exchange;

 

the extent to which such redemptions or exchanges are taxable—if a redemption or exchange is not taxable for any reason, increased tax deductions will not be available; and

 

the amount and timing of our income—the Tax Receivable Agreement generally will require us to pay 85% of the tax benefits as and when those benefits are treated as realized under the terms of the Tax Receivable Agreement. If we do not have taxable income, we generally will not be required (absent a change of control or other circumstances requiring an early termination payment) to make payments under the Tax Receivable Agreement for that taxable year because no tax benefits will have been actually realized. However, any tax benefits that do not result in realized tax benefits in a given taxable year will likely generate tax attributes that may be utilized to generate tax benefits in previous or future taxable years. The utilization of any such tax attributes will result in payments under the Tax Receivable Agreement.

 

For purposes of the Tax Receivable Agreement, cash savings in income and franchise tax will be computed by comparing our actual income and franchise tax liability to the amount of such taxes that we would have been required to pay had there been no Basis Adjustments and had the Tax Receivable Agreement not been entered into. The Tax Receivable Agreement will generally apply to each of our taxable years, beginning with the first taxable year ending after the completion of this offering. There is no maximum term for the Tax Receivable Agreement; however, the Tax Receivable Agreement may be terminated by us pursuant to an early termination procedure that requires us to pay the Members an agreed upon amount equal to the estimated present value of the remaining payments to be made under the agreement (calculated based on certain assumptions, including regarding tax rates and utilization of the Basis Adjustments).

 

The payment obligations under the Tax Receivable Agreement are obligations of our company and not of Greenlane Holdings, LLC. Although the actual timing and amount of any payments that may be made under the Tax Receivable Agreement will vary, we expect that the payments that we may be required to make to the Members could be substantial. Any payments made by us to Members under the Tax Receivable Agreement will generally reduce the amount of overall cash flow that might have otherwise been available to us or to Greenlane Holdings, LLC and, to the extent that we are unable to make payments under the Tax Receivable Agreement for any reason, the unpaid amounts generally will be deferred and will accrue interest until paid by us.

 

135

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Decisions made by us in the course of running our business, such as with respect to mergers, asset sales, other forms of business combinations or other changes in control, may influence the timing and amount of payments that are received by a Member under the Tax Receivable Agreement. For example, the earlier disposition of assets following a transaction that results in a Basis Adjustment will generally accelerate payments under the Tax Receivable Agreement and increase the present value of such payments.

 

The Tax Receivable Agreement provides that if (i) we materially breach any of our material obligations under the Tax Receivable Agreement, (ii) certain mergers, asset sales, other forms of business combination, or other changes of control were to occur, or (iii) we elect an early termination of the Tax Receivable Agreement, then our obligations, or our successor’s obligations, under the Tax Receivable Agreement would accelerate and become due and payable, based on certain assumptions, including an assumption that we would have sufficient taxable income to fully utilize all potential future tax benefits that are subject to the Tax Receivable Agreement.

 

As a result, (i) we could be required to make cash payments to the Members that are greater than the specified percentage of the actual benefits we ultimately realize in respect of the tax benefits that are subject to the Tax Receivable Agreement, and (ii) if we elect to terminate the Tax Receivable Agreement early, we would be required to make an immediate cash payment equal to the present value of the anticipated future tax benefits that are the subject of the Tax Receivable Agreement, which payment may be made significantly in advance of the actual realization, if any, of such future tax benefits. In these situations, our obligations under the Tax Receivable Agreement could have a material adverse effect on our liquidity and could have the effect of delaying, deferring or preventing certain mergers, asset sales, other forms of business combination, or other changes of control. There can be no assurance that we will be able to finance our obligations under the Tax Receivable Agreement.

 

Payments under the Tax Receivable Agreement will be based on the tax reporting positions that we determine. If any such position is subject to a challenge by a taxing authority the outcome of which would reasonably be expected to materially affect a recipient’s payments under the Tax Receivable Agreement, then we will not be permitted to settle or fail to contest such challenge without the consent (not to be unreasonably withheld or delayed) of each Member that directly or indirectly owns at least 10% of the outstanding Common Units. We will not be reimbursed for any cash payments previously made to any Member pursuant to the Tax Receivable Agreement if any tax benefits initially claimed by us are subsequently challenged by a taxing authority and ultimately disallowed. Instead, in such circumstances, any excess cash payments made by us to a Member will be netted against any future cash payments that we might otherwise be required to make under the terms of the Tax Receivable Agreement. However, we might not determine that we have effectively made an excess cash payment to the Members for a number of years following the initial time of such payment and, if our tax reporting positions are challenged by a taxing authority, we will not be permitted to reduce any future cash payments under the Tax Receivable Agreement until any such challenge is finally settled or determined. As a result, it is possible that we could make cash payments under the Tax Receivable Agreement that are substantially greater than our actual cash tax savings.

 

Payments are generally due under the Tax Receivable Agreement within a specified period of time following the filing of our tax return for the taxable year with respect to which the payment obligation arises, although interest on such payments will begin to accrue at a rate of LIBOR plus 100 basis points from the due date (without extensions) of such tax return. Any late payments that may be made under the Tax Receivable Agreement will continue to accrue interest at LIBOR plus 500 basis points until such payments are made, including any late payments that we may subsequently make because we did not have enough available cash to satisfy our payment obligations at the time at which they originally arose.

 

136

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Registration Rights Agreement

 

We intend to enter into the Registration Rights Agreement with the Members in connection with this offering. Among the Members who will be party to the Registration Rights Agreement are each of our named executive officers and each of our stockholders identified in the table in “Principal and Selling Stockholders” as beneficially owning shares of Class B common stock or Class C common stock. The Registration Rights Agreement will provide the Members who are party to the Registration Rights Agreement the right, at any time from and after 180 days following the date of this prospectus, to require us to register under the Securities Act the shares of Class A common stock issuable to them upon redemption or exchange of their Common Units, including on a short-form registration statement, if and when we are eligible to utilize such registration statement. The Registration Rights Agreement will also provide for piggyback registration rights for such Members in certain circumstances.

 

Indemnification Agreements

 

Our amended and restated bylaws, as will be in effect prior to the closing of this offering, provide that we will indemnify our directors and officers to the fullest extent permitted by the laws of the State of Delaware in effect from time to time, subject to certain exceptions contained in our bylaws. In addition, our amended and restated certificate of incorporation, as will be in effect prior to the closing of this offering, will provide that our directors will not be personally liable to us or our stockholders for any damages other than for breaches of fiduciary duty involving intentional misconduct, fraud or a knowing violation of law.

 

Prior to the closing of this offering, we will enter into indemnification agreements with each of our executive officers and directors. The indemnification agreements will provide the executive officers and directors with contractual rights to indemnification, and expense advancement and reimbursement, to the fullest extent permitted under the laws of the State of Delaware in effect from time to time, subject to certain exceptions contained in those agreements.

 

There is no pending litigation or proceeding naming any of our directors or officers to which indemnification is being sought, and we are not aware of any pending litigation that may result in claims for indemnification by any director or officer.

 

137

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

PRINCIPAL AND SELLING STOCKHOLDERS

 

The following table sets forth information with respect to the beneficial ownership of our Class A common stock, Class B common stock and Class C common stock, after the completion of the Transactions, including this offering, for:

 

each person known by us to beneficially own more than 5% of our Class A common stock, Class B common stock or Class C common stock;

 

each of our directors;

 

each of our named executive officers;

 

all of our executive officers and directors as a group;

 

and each of the selling stockholders.

 

As described in “The Transactions” and “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions,” each Member will be entitled to have their Common Units redeemed for Class A common stock on a one-to-one basis, or, at our option, cash equal to the market value of the applicable number of our shares of Class A common stock. In addition, at our election, upon a redemption request, we may effect a direct exchange of such Class A common stock or such cash for such Common Units. In connection with this offering, we will issue (i) to each Non-Founder Member for nominal consideration one share of Class B common stock for each Common Unit it owns and (ii) to each Founder Member for nominal consideration three shares of Class C common stock for each Common Unit it owns. As a result, the respective numbers of shares of Class B common stock and Class C common stock listed in the table below correlate to the number of Common Units each such Member will own immediately after this offering. See “The Transactions.” The table below assumes the shares of Class A common stock are offered at $           per share (the midpoint of the price range listed on the cover page of this prospectus). See “The Offering.”

 

The number of shares beneficially owned by each stockholder is determined under rules issued by the SEC and includes voting or investment power with respect to securities. Under these rules, beneficial ownership includes any shares as to which the individual or entity has sole or shared voting power or investment power. In computing the number of shares beneficially owned by an individual or entity and the percentage ownership of that person, shares of common stock subject to options or other rights held by such person that are currently exercisable or will become exercisable within 60 days of the date of this prospectus, are considered outstanding, although these shares are not considered outstanding for purposes of computing the percentage ownership of any other person. Notwithstanding the preceding sentence, for purposes of the following table, we assumed that the Members were not entitled to have their Common Units redeemed for Class A common stock. Except as disclosed in the footnotes to this table and subject to applicable community property laws, where applicable, we believe each of the stockholders listed has sole voting and investment power with respect to the shares beneficially owned by the stockholder.

 

Unless otherwise specified in the footnotes, the address of each beneficial owner listed in the table below is c/o Greenlane Holdings, Inc., 6501 Park of Commerce Blvd., Suite 200, Boca Raton, FL 33487.

 

   Class A Common Stock
Beneficially Owned
   Class B Common Stock
Beneficially Owned
   Class C Common Stock
Beneficially Owned
   Combined Voting Power 
Name of Beneficial Owner  After Giving Effect to the Transactions and Before this Offering   After Giving Effect to the Transactions and After this Offering (No Exercise of Option   After Giving Effect to the Transactions and After this Offering (With Full Exercise of Option)   After Giving Effect to the Transactions and After this Offering (With Full Exercise of Option)   After Giving Effect to the Transactions and Before this Offering   After Giving Effect to the Transactions and After this Offering (No Exercise of Option)   After Giving Effect to the Transactions and After this Offering (With Full Exercise of Option)   After Giving Effect to the Transactions and Before this Offering   After Giving Effect to the Transactions and After this Offering (No Exercise of Option)   After Giving Effect to the Transactions and After this Offering (With Full Exercise of Option)   After Giving Effect to the Transactions and After this Offering (No Exercise of Option)   After Giving Effect to the Transactions and After this Offering (With Full Exercise of Option) 
5% Stockholders:                                                                                                                                                                                                                   
Jacoby & Co. Inc. (1)                                                            
Better Life Products Investment Group, Inc. (2)                                                            
                                                             
Named Executive Officers and Directors:                                                            
Aaron LoCascio                                                            
Adam Schoenfeld                                                            
Sasha Kadey                                                            
Jay Scheiner                                                            
Zachary Tapp                                                            
All executive officers and directors as a group (five individuals)                                                            
                                                             
Other Selling Stockholders                                                            
Rochester Vapor Group, LLC (3)                                                            

 

*Less than 1.0%

 

(1)Jacoby & Co. Inc. is beneficially owned and controlled by Aaron LoCascio and Adam Schoenfeld.

(2)Jeffrey  Sherman has voting and dispositive power over such securities. Better Life Products Investment Group, Inc.’s address is 16901 Crown Bridge Drive, Delray Beach, FL 33446.

(3)Clive Fleissig has voting and dispositive power over such securities. Rochester Vapor Group, LLC’s address is 10561 Rochester Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90024.

 

138

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

DESCRIPTION OF CAPITAL STOCK

 

The following is a summary of our capital stock and provisions of our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and our bylaws, as each will be in effect prior to the closing of this offering, and certain provisions of Delaware law. This summary does not purport to be complete and is qualified in its entirety by the provisions of our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated bylaws, copies of which have been or will be filed with the SEC as exhibits to the registration statement of which this prospectus is a part. References in this section to “we” “us” and “our” refer to Greenlane Holdings, Inc. and not to any of its subsidiaries.

 

General

 

Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation will provide that our authorized capital stock will consist of                     shares of Class A common stock, par value $0.01 per share,            shares of Class B common stock, par value $0.0001 per share,                shares of Class C common stock, par value $0.0001 per share. After the consummation of this offering, we expect to have          shares (or          shares if the underwriters exercise in full their option to purchase additional shares) of Class A common stock issued and outstanding,          shares of Class B common stock issued and outstanding (or          shares if the underwriters exercise their option in full to purchase additional shares, and          shares of Class C common stock issued and outstanding (or          shares if the underwriters exercise in full their option to purchase additional shares from the selling stockholders).

 

Class A Common Stock

 

Issuance of Class A common stock with Common Units. We will undertake any action, including, without limitation, a reclassification, dividend, division or recapitalization with respect to shares of Class A common stock to the extent necessary to maintain a one-to-one ratio between the number of Common Units we own, and the number of outstanding shares of Class A common stock, disregarding unvested shares issued in connection with stock incentive plans, shares issuable upon the exercise, conversion or exchange of certain convertible or exchangeable securities and treasury stock.

 

Voting Rights. Holders of our Class A common stock will be entitled to cast one vote per share. Holders of our Class A common stock will not be entitled to cumulate their votes in the election of directors. Generally, holders of all classes of our common stock vote together as a single class and an action is approved by our stockholders if the number of votes cast in favor of the action exceeds the number of votes cast in opposition to the action, while directors are elected by a plurality of the votes cast. Except as otherwise provided by applicable law, amendments to our amended and restated certificate of incorporation must be approved by a majority or, in some cases, two-thirds of the combined voting power of all shares entitled to vote, voting together as a single class.

 

Dividend Rights. Holders of Class A common stock will share ratably (based on the number of shares of Class A common stock held) if and when any dividend is declared by our board of directors out of funds legally available therefor, subject to restrictions, whether statutory or contractual (including with respect to any outstanding indebtedness), on the declaration and payment of dividends and to any restrictions on the payment of dividends imposed by the terms of any class or series of stock having a preference over, or the right to participate with, the Class A common stock with respect to the payment of dividends.

 

Liquidation Rights. On our liquidation, dissolution or winding up, each holder of Class A common stock will be entitled to a pro rata distribution of the net assets, if any, available for distribution to common stockholders.

 

Other Matters. No shares of Class A common stock will be subject to redemption or have preemptive rights to purchase additional shares of Class A common stock. Holders of shares of our Class A common stock do not have subscription, redemption or conversion rights. Upon completion of this offering, all the outstanding shares of Class A common stock will be validly issued, fully paid and non-assessable.

 

Class B Common Stock

 

Issuance of Class B common stock with Common Units. Shares of Class B common stock may be issued only to, and registered in the name of, the Non-Founder Members and persons who acquire shares of Class B common stock, by voluntary conversion of shares of Class C common stock or by a transfer from a holder of shares of Class B common stock. Shares of Class B common stock will only be issued in the future to the extent necessary in connection with the conversion of shares of Class C common stock and to maintain a one-to-one ratio between the number of Common Units owned by all holders of Class B common stock and the number of outstanding shares of Class B common stock owned by all such holders. Shares of Class B common stock will be cancelled on a one-to-one basis if a holder of shares of Class B common stock elects to have its corresponding Common Units redeemed pursuant to the terms of the Greenlane Operating Agreement.

 

139

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Voting Rights. Holders of Class B common stock will be entitled to cast one vote per share, with the number of shares of Class B common stock held by each Non-Founder Member being equal to the number of Common Units held by such Non-Founder Member. Holders of our Class B common stock will not be entitled to cumulate their votes in the election of directors.

 

Generally, holders of all classes of our common stock vote together as a single class and an action is approved by our stockholders if the number of votes cast in favor of the action exceeds the number of votes cast in opposition to the action, while directors are elected by a plurality of the votes cast. Except as otherwise provided by applicable law, amendments to our amended and restated certificate of incorporation must be approved by a majority or, in some cases, two-thirds of the combined voting power of all shares entitled to vote, voting together as a single class.

 

Dividend Rights. Holders of our Class B common stock will not participate in any dividend declared by our board of directors.

 

Liquidation Rights. On our liquidation, dissolution or winding up, holders of our Class B common stock will not be entitled to receive any distribution of our assets.

 

Transfers. Pursuant to our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and the Greenlane Operating Agreement, holders of our Class B common stock are subject to restrictions on transfer of such shares, including that:

 

the holder will not transfer any shares of Class B common stock to any person unless the holder transfers an equal number of Common Units to the same person; and

 

in the event the holder transfers any Common Units to any person, the holder will transfer an equal number of shares of Class B common stock to the same person.

 

Merger, Consolidation, Tender or Exchange Offer. The holders of our Class B common stock will have the right to receive, or the right to elect to receive, the same form and amount (on a per share basis) of consideration, if any, as the holders of our Class C common stock in the event of a merger, consolidation, conversion, exchange or other business combination requiring the approval of our stockholders or a tender or exchange offer to acquire any shares of our common stock. However, in any such event involving consideration in the form of securities, the holders of our Class C common stock will be entitled to receive securities that have no more than three times the voting power of any securities distributed to the holders of our Class B common stock.

 

Other Matters. No shares of Class B common stock will be subject to redemption or have preemptive rights to purchase additional shares of Class B common stock. Holders of shares of our Class B common stock do not have subscription, redemption or conversion rights. Upon completion of this offering, all outstanding shares of Class B common stock will be validly issued, fully paid and non-assessable.

 

Class C Common Stock

 

Issuance of Class C common stock with Common Units. Shares of Class C common stock may be issued only to, and registered in the name of, the Founder Members, and will only be issued in the future to the extent necessary to maintain a one-to-three ratio between the number of Common Units owned by the holders of Class C common stock and the number of shares of Class C common stock owned by such holders. Shares of Class C common stock will be cancelled on a three-to-one basis if a holder of shares of Class C common stock elects to have its corresponding Common Units redeemed pursuant to the terms of the Greenlane Operating Agreement.

 

Voting Rights. Holders of our Class C common stock will be entitled to cast one vote per share, with the number of shares of Class C common stock held by each Founder Member being equal to three times the number of Common Units held by such Founder Member.

 

Generally, holders of all classes of our common stock vote together as a single class and an action is approved by our stockholders if the number of votes cast in favor of the action exceeds the number of votes cast in opposition to the action, while directors are elected by a plurality of the votes cast. Except as otherwise provided by applicable law, amendments to our amended and restated certificate of incorporation must be approved by a majority or, in some cases, two-thirds of the combined voting power of all shares entitled to vote, voting together as a single class.

 

140

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Dividend Rights. Holders of our Class C common stock will not participate in any dividend declared by the board of directors.

 

Liquidation Rights. On our liquidation, dissolution or winding up, holders of Class C common stock will not be entitled to receive any distribution of our assets.

 

Transfers. Pursuant to our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and the Greenlane Operating Agreement, holders of our Class C common stock are subject to restrictions on transfer of such shares, including that:  

 

the holder will not transfer any shares of Class C Common Stock to any person other than Founder Members except as described below under “—Conversion;”

 

the holder will not transfer any shares of Class C common stock to any permitted transferee unless the holder transfers one-third the number of Common Units to the same person; and

 

in the event the holder transfers any Common Units to any permitted transferee, the holder will transfer three times the number of shares of Class C common stock to the same person.

 

Conversion. Every three shares of Class C common stock will be automatically converted into one share of Class B common stock if the holders of a majority of the shares of Class C common stock then outstanding, acting as a single class, approve or consent to such conversion.

 

In addition, if at any time any share of Class C common stock is not owned by, or is transferred to a person other than, (i) Mr. LoCascio or Mr. Schoenfeld, their spouses or any of their lineal descendants, (ii) any entity wholly owned by Mr. LoCascio or Mr. Schoenfeld, their spouses, any of their lineal descendants or any trust or other estate planning vehicle for the benefit of such persons, or (iii) any trust or other estate planning vehicle for the benefit of Mr. LoCascio or Mr. Schoenfeld, their spouses or any of their lineal descendants, such share of Class C common stock shall automatically be converted into one share of Class B common stock.

 

Merger, Consolidation, Tender or Exchange Offer. The holders of our Class C common stock will not be entitled to receive consideration per share, if any, for their shares in excess of one-third of that payable per share to the holders of our Class B common stock in the event of a merger, consolidation, conversion, exchange or other business combination requiring the approval of our stockholders or a tender or exchange offer to acquire any shares of our common stock. However, in any such event involving consideration in the form of securities, the holders of our Class C common stock will be entitled to receive securities that have no more than three times the voting power of any securities distributed to the holders of our Class B common stock.

 

Other Matters. No shares of Class C common stock will be subject to redemption or have preemptive rights to purchase additional shares of Class C common stock. Holders of shares of our Class C common stock do not have subscription, redemption or, except as expressly provided in our amended and restated certificate of incorporation, conversion rights. Upon completion of this offering, all outstanding shares of Class C common stock will be validly issued, fully paid and non-assessable

 

Elimination of Liability in Certain Circumstances

 

Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation eliminates the liability of our directors to us or our stockholders for monetary damages resulting from breaches of their fiduciary duties as directors. Directors will remain liable for breaches of their duty of loyalty to us or our stockholders, as well as for acts or omissions not in good faith or that involve intentional misconduct or a knowing violation of law, and transactions from which a director derives improper personal benefit. Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation will not absolve directors of liability for payment of dividends or stock purchases or redemptions by us in violation of Section 174 (or any successor provision) of the Delaware General Corporation Law.

 

141

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

The effect of this provision is to eliminate the personal liability of directors for monetary damages for actions involving a breach of their fiduciary duty of care, including any such actions involving gross negligence. We do not believe that this provision eliminates the liability of our directors to us or our stockholders for monetary damages under the federal securities laws. Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated by-laws provide indemnification for the benefit of our directors and officers to the fullest extent permitted by the Delaware General Corporation Law as it may be amended from time to time, including most circumstances under which indemnification otherwise would be discretionary.

 

Provisions of Our Certificate of Incorporation and Bylaws and Delaware Anti-takeover Law

 

We are governed by the Delaware General Corporation Law. Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated bylaws contain provisions that could make more difficult the acquisition of our company by means of a tender offer, a proxy contest or otherwise.

 

No written consent of stockholders. Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated bylaws provide that all stockholder actions are required to be taken by a vote of the stockholders at an annual or special meeting, and that stockholders may not take any action by written consent in lieu of a meeting.

 

Super-Majority Vote For Certain Amendments. Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation provides that, notwithstanding any other provisions of our certificate of incorporation or any provision of law that might otherwise permit a lesser vote or no vote, but in addition to any affirmative vote of the holders of any particular class or series of our capital stock required by law or by our certificate of incorporation, or any certificate of designation with respect to a series of our preferred stock, any amendment or repeal of the provision that stockholders may not act by written consent in lieu of a meeting as described above shall require the affirmative vote of the holders of at least two-thirds of the voting power of all of the then-outstanding shares of our capital stock entitled to vote generally at an election of directors, voting together as a single class.

 

Advance notice procedures. Our amended and restated bylaws provide that our chief executive officer, chairperson of the board of directors or a majority of the members of our board of directors then serving may call special meetings of stockholders and only those matters set forth in the notice of the special meeting may be considered or acted upon at a special meeting of stockholders. Our amended and restated bylaws also limit the business that may be conducted at an annual meeting of stockholders to those matters properly brought before the meeting.

 

Our amended and restated bylaws also establish an advance notice procedure for stockholders to make nominations of candidates for election as directors, or bring other business before an annual or special meeting of the stockholders. This notice procedure provides that only persons who are nominated by, or at the direction of, our board of directors or by a stockholder who has given timely written notice to the secretary of our company prior to the meeting at which directors are to be elected, will be eligible for election as directors. The procedure also requires that, in order to raise matters at an annual or special meeting, those matters must be raised before the meeting pursuant to the notice of meeting the company delivers or by, or at the direction of, our board of directors or by a stockholder who is entitled to vote at the meeting and who has given timely written notice to the secretary of our company of his, her or its intention to raise those matters at the annual meeting. If our chairperson or other officer presiding at a meeting determines that a person was not nominated, or other business was not brought before the meeting, in accordance with the notice procedure, that person will not be eligible for election as a director or that business will not be conducted at the meeting.

 

Authorized but Unissued Shares. Our authorized but unissued shares of common stock will be available for future issuance without stockholder approval. We may use these additional shares for a variety of corporate purposes, including future public offerings to raise additional capital, corporate acquisitions and employee benefit plans. The existence of authorized but unissued shares of common stock could render more difficult or discourage an attempt to obtain control of our company by means of a proxy contest, tender offer, merger or otherwise.

 

142

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Limitation of officer and director liability and indemnification arrangements. Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and our amended and restated bylaws limit the liability of our officers and directors to the maximum extent permitted by Delaware law. Delaware law provides that directors will not be personally liable for monetary damages for breach of their fiduciary duties as directors, except liability for:

 

any breach of their duty of loyalty to the corporation or its stockholders;

 

acts or omissions not in good faith or which involve intentional misconduct or a knowing violation of law;

 

unlawful payments of dividends or unlawful stock repurchases or redemptions; or

 

any transaction from which the director derived an improper personal benefit.

 

These provisions of our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated bylaws have no effect on any non-monetary remedies that may be available to us or our stockholders, nor does it relieve us or our officers or directors from compliance with federal or state securities laws. The amended and restated bylaws also generally provide that we will indemnify, to the fullest extent permitted by law, any person who was or is a party or is threatened to be made a party to any threatened, pending or completed action, suit, investigation, administrative hearing or any other proceeding by reason of the fact that he or she is or was our director or officer, or is or was serving at our request as a director, officer, employee or agent of another entity, against expenses incurred by him or her in connection with such proceeding. An officer or director will not be entitled to indemnification by us if:

 

the officer or director did not act in good faith and in a manner reasonably believed to be in, or not opposed to, our best interests; or

 

with respect to any criminal action or proceeding, the officer or director had reasonable cause to believe his or her conduct was unlawful.

 

In addition to the indemnification provided for in our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated bylaws, we have entered into indemnification agreements with our executive officers and our directors. Each indemnification agreement provides that we will indemnify such executive officer or director to the fullest extent permitted by law for claims arising in his or her capacity as our director or officer provided that he or she acted in good faith and in a manner that he or she reasonably believed to be in, or not opposed to, our best interests and, with respect to any criminal proceeding, had no reasonable cause to believe that his or her conduct was unlawful. In the event that we do not assume the defense of a claim against an executive officer or a director, we will be required to advance his or her expenses in connection with his or her defense, provided that he or she undertakes to repay all amounts advanced if it is ultimately determined that he or she is not entitled to be indemnified by us.

 

The overall effect of the foregoing provisions and indemnification agreements may be to deter a future offer to buy our company. Stockholders might view such an offer to be in their best interest should the offer include a substantial premium over the market price of our common stock at that time. In addition, these provisions may have the effect of assisting our management to retain its position and place it in a better position to resist changes that the stockholders may want to make if dissatisfied with the conduct of our business. Insofar as indemnification for liabilities arising under the Securities Act may be permitted to directors, officers or persons controlling our company pursuant to the foregoing provisions, the opinion of the SEC is that such indemnification is against public policy as expressed in the Securities Act and is therefore unenforceable.

 

Number of Directors; Removal; Vacancies

 

Our amended and restated by-laws provide that we have five directors, provided that this number may be changed by our board of directors. Vacancies on our board of directors may be filled only by the affirmative vote of a majority of the remaining directors then in office. Our amended and restated by-laws provide that, subject to the rights of holders of any future series of preferred stock, directors may be removed, with or without cause, at meetings of stockholders by the affirmative vote of the holders of a majority of the outstanding shares entitled to vote generally in the election of directors.

 

Special Meetings of Stockholders; Limitations on Stockholder Action by Written Consent

 

Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation provides that special meetings of our stockholders may be called only by our chairman of the board, our chief executive officer, our board of directors or holders of not less than a majority of our issued and outstanding voting stock. Any action required or permitted to be taken by our stockholders must be effected at an annual or special meeting of stockholders and may not be effected by written consent unless the action to be effected and the taking of such action by written consent have been approved in advance by our board of directors.

 

143

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Amendments; Vote Requirements

 

Certain provisions of our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated by-laws provide that the affirmative vote of a majority of the shares entitled to vote on any matter is required for stockholders to amend our certificate of incorporation or by-laws, including those provisions relating to action by written consent and the ability of stockholders to call special meetings.

 

Authorized but Unissued Shares

 

The authorized but unissued shares of common stock will be available for future issuance without stockholder approval. These additional shares may be utilized for a variety of corporate purposes, including future public offerings to raise additional capital, corporate acquisitions and employee benefit plans. The existence of authorized but unissued shares of common stock could render it more difficult or discourage an attempt to obtain control of us by means of a proxy contest, tender offer, merger or otherwise.

 

Advance Notice Requirements for Stockholder Proposals and Nomination of Directors

 

Our amended and restated by-laws provide that stockholders seeking to bring business before an annual meeting of stockholders, or to nominate candidates for election as directors at an annual meeting of stockholders, must provide timely notice in writing. To be timely, a stockholder’s notice must be delivered to or mailed and received at our principal executive offices not less than 120 days prior to the anniversary date of the immediately preceding annual meeting of stockholders. However, in the event that the annual meeting is called for a date that is not within 30 days before or after such anniversary date, such notice will be timely only if received not later than the close of business on the tenth day following the date on which notice of the date of the annual meeting was mailed to stockholders or made public, whichever first occurs. Our amended and restated by-laws also specify requirements as to the form and content of a stockholder’s notice.

 

Trading

 

We have applied to list our Class A common stock on the Canadian Securities Exchange under the symbol “GNLN.”

 

Transfer Agent and Registrar

 

The transfer agent and registrar for our Class A common stock is Corporate Stock Transfer, Inc. The transfer agent’s address is 3200 Cherry Creek South Drive, Suite 430, Denver, Colorado 80209, and its telephone number is (303) 282-4800.

 

144

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

SHARES ELIGIBLE FOR FUTURE SALE

 

Prior to this offering, there has been no public market for our Class A common stock. Future sales of substantial amounts of our Class A common stock in the public market, or the perception that such sales may occur, could adversely affect the prevailing market price of our Class A common stock. No prediction can be made as to the effect, if any, future sales of shares, or the availability of shares for future sales, will have on the market price of our Class A common stock prevailing from time to time.

 

Rule 144

 

In general, under Rule 144 under the Securities Act (“Rule 144”) as currently in effect, once we have been subject to public company reporting requirements under the Exchange Act for at least 90 days, a person who is not deemed to have been one of our affiliates for purposes of the Securities Act at any time during 90 days preceding a sale and who has beneficially owned the shares proposed to be sold for at least six months, including the holding period of any prior owner other than our affiliates, is entitled to sell such shares without complying with the manner of sale, volume limitation or notice provisions of Rule 144, subject to compliance with the public information requirements of Rule 144.

 

In general, under Rule 144, as currently in effect, our affiliates or persons selling shares on behalf of our affiliates are entitled to sell within any three-month period beginning 90 days after the date of this prospectus, a number of shares that does not exceed the greater of:

 

1% of the number of shares of Class A common stock then outstanding, which will equal approximately         shares immediately after this offering, based on the assumed initial public offering price of $         per share, which is the midpoint of the estimated offering price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus; or

 

the average weekly trading volume of the Class A common stock during the four calendar weeks preceding the filing of a notice on Form 144 with respect to such sale.

 

Such sales under Rule 144 are also subject to prescribed requirements relating to the manner of sale, notice and availability of current public information about us.

 

Rule 701

 

Rule 701 generally allows a stockholder who purchased shares of our Class A common stock pursuant to a written compensatory plan or contract and who is not deemed to have been one of our affiliates during the immediately preceding 90 days to sell such shares in reliance upon Rule 144, but without being required to comply with the public information, holding period, volume limitation or notice provisions of Rule 144. Rule 701 also permits our affiliates to sell their Rule 701 shares under Rule 144 without complying with the holding period requirements of Rule 144.

 

Stock Plans

 

We intend to file a registration statement on Form S-8 under the Securities Act covering all of the shares of our Class A common stock reserved for issuance under the 2018 Equity Incentive Plan, which we intend to adopt in connection with this offering. We expect to file this registration statement as soon as practicable after this offering and adoption of the 2018 Equity Incentive Plan. Accordingly, shares registered under the registration statement on Form S-8 will be available for sale in the open market following its effective date, subject to any applicable vesting provisions and the Rule 144 limitations applicable to affiliates.

 

Lock-Up Agreements

 

In connection with this offering, we and our executive officers and directors and certain other stockholders (whose Common Units will be redeemable for shares of Class A common stock representing           % of our pre-offering shares on a fully-diluted basis) will enter into 180-day lock-up agreements with the underwriters of this offering under which neither we nor they may, with limited exceptions, for a period of 180 days after the date of this prospectus, directly or indirectly sell, dispose of or hedge any shares of Class A common stock or any securities convertible into or exchangeable or exercisable for shares of Class A common stock without the prior written consent of Canaccord Genuity Corp. on behalf of the underwriters.

 

145

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

MATERIAL U.S. FEDERAL INCOME TAX CONSIDERATIONS TO NON-U.S. HOLDERS

 

The following is a summary of the material U.S. federal income and estate tax consequences of the purchase, ownership and disposition of our Class A common stock to a non-U.S. holder (as defined below) that purchases shares of our Class A common stock in this offering. This summary applies only to a non-U.S. holder that holds our Class A common stock as a “capital asset,” within the meaning of Section 1221 of the Code. For purposes of this summary, a “non-U.S. holder” means any beneficial owner of our Class A common stock (other than an entity treated as a partnership) that is not, for U.S. federal income tax purposes, any of the following:

 

an individual citizen or resident of the United States;

 

a corporation or other entity treated as a corporation for U.S. federal income tax purposes created or organized in the United States or under the laws of the United States or any state thereof or the District of Columbia;

 

an estate the income of which is subject to U.S. federal income tax regardless of its source; or

 

a trust if it (1) is subject to the primary supervision of a court within the United States and one or more United States persons have the authority to control all substantial decisions of the trust or (2) has a valid election in effect under applicable U.S. Treasury regulations to be treated as a United States person.

 

In the case of a holder that is classified as a partnership for U.S. federal income tax purposes, the tax treatment of a partner in such partnership generally will depend upon the status of the partner and the activities of the partnership. If you are a partnership or a partner in a partnership considering an investment in our Class A common stock, you are urged to consult your tax advisor.

 

This summary is based upon the provisions of the Code, the U.S. Treasury regulations promulgated thereunder and administrative and judicial interpretations thereof, all as of the date hereof. Those authorities may be changed, perhaps retroactively, so as to result in U.S. federal income and estate tax consequences different from those summarized below. We cannot assure you that a change in law, possibly with retroactive application, will not alter significantly the tax considerations that we describe in this summary. We have not sought and do not plan to seek any ruling from the IRS with respect to statements made and the conclusions reached in the following summary, and there can be no assurance that the IRS or a court will agree with our statements and conclusions.

 

This summary does not address all aspects of U.S. federal income and estate taxes and does not deal with non-U.S., state, local or other tax considerations that may be relevant to non-U.S. holders in light of their particular circumstances (including the Medicare contribution tax on net investment income). In addition, it does not represent a detailed description of the U.S. federal income tax consequences applicable to you if you are subject to special treatment under the U.S. federal income tax laws including, without limitation, if you are:

 

a United States expatriate;

 

a broker, dealer or trader in securities, commodities or currencies;

 

a person who holds our Class A common stock as part of a hedge, straddle, or other risk reduction strategy or as part of a conversion transaction or other integrated investment;

 

a person deemed to sell our Class A common stock under the constructive sale provisions of the Code;

 

a controlled foreign corporation, a passive foreign investment company, or a corporation that accumulates earnings to avoid U.S. federal income tax;

 

a tax-exempt organization;

 

a person subject to the alternative minimum tax;

 

a government, government instrumentality or agency;

 

a person who holds or receives our Class A common stock pursuant to the exercise of any employee stock option or otherwise as compensation;

 

146

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

a bank, insurance company, or other financial institution; and

 

a pass-through entity (including entities that are treated as pass-through entities for U.S. federal income tax purposes) and the owners of such entities that are subject to special treatment under the Code.

 

If you are considering the purchase of our Class A common stock, you are urged to consult your tax advisor to determine the particular U.S. federal income and estate tax consequences that may be relevant to you, as well as the consequences to you arising under the laws of any other taxing jurisdiction.

 

Distributions

 

A distribution of cash or property that we pay in respect of our Class A common stock will be treated as a dividend for U.S. federal income tax purposes to the extent paid from our current or accumulated earnings and profits (as determined under U.S. federal income tax principles). Dividends paid to you generally will be subject to withholding of U.S. federal income tax at a 30% rate or such lower rate as may be specified by an applicable income tax treaty, assuming certain requirements to obtain such reduced rate are met, as discussed below. However, dividends that are effectively connected with the conduct of a trade or business by you within the United States (and, if required by an applicable income tax treaty, are attributable to a permanent establishment or a fixed base maintained by you in the United States) are not subject to such withholding tax, provided certain certification and disclosure requirements are satisfied. Instead, such dividends are subject to U.S. federal income tax on a net income basis in the same manner as if you were a United States person as defined under the Code. Any such effectively connected dividends received by a foreign corporation may be subject to an additional “branch profits tax” at a 30% rate or such lower rate as may be specified by an applicable income tax treaty.

 

If the amount of a distribution paid on our Class A common stock exceeds our current and accumulated earnings and profits, such excess will be treated first as a tax-free return of capital to the extent of your adjusted tax basis in our Class A common stock, and thereafter as capital gain from a sale or other taxable disposition of our Class A common stock that is taxed to you as described below under the heading “Gain on Disposition of Class A Common Stock.” Your adjusted tax basis in our Class A common stock is generally the purchase price of such Class A common stock.

 

If you wish to claim the benefit of an applicable treaty rate and avoid backup withholding, as discussed below, for dividends, then you must (a) provide the withholding agent with a properly completed and executed applicable IRS Form W-8 and certify under penalty of perjury that you are not a United States person as defined under the Code and are eligible for treaty benefits, or (b) if our Class A common stock is held through certain foreign intermediaries, satisfy the relevant certification requirements of applicable U.S. Treasury regulations. Special certification and other requirements apply to certain non-U.S. holders that are pass-through entities rather than corporations or individuals.

 

If you are eligible for a reduced rate of U.S. withholding tax pursuant to an income tax treaty, then you may obtain a refund or credit of any excess amounts withheld by timely filing an appropriate claim with the IRS. Non-U.S. holders are urged to consult their own tax advisors regarding their entitlement to the benefits under any applicable income tax treaty.

 

Gain on Disposition of Class A Common Stock

 

Subject to the discussions below in “Information Reporting and Backup Withholding” and “FATCA,” you generally will not be subject to U.S. federal income tax with respect to gain realized on the sale or other taxable disposition of our Class A common stock, unless:

 

the gain is effectively connected with a trade or business you conduct in the United States (and, if required by an applicable income tax treaty, is attributable to a permanent establishment or fixed base maintained by you in the United States);

 

147

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

if you are an individual who is present in the United States for a period or periods aggregating 183 days or more in the taxable year of the sale or other taxable disposition and certain other conditions are met; or

 

we are or have been during a specified testing period a “United States real property holding corporation” (a “USRPHC”) for U.S. federal income tax purposes, and certain other conditions are met.

 

If you are a person described in the first bullet point above, you will be subject to tax on the net gain derived from the sale under regular graduated U.S. federal income tax rates. In addition, a non-U.S. holder that is a corporation may be subject to the branch profits tax equal to 30% of its effectively connected earnings and profits, subject to adjustments, or at such lower rate as may be specified by an applicable income tax treaty.

 

If you are an individual described in the second bullet point above, you will be subject to a flat 30% tax (or such lower rate as may be specified by an applicable income tax treaty) on the gain derived from the sale, which may be offset by U.S. source capital losses, even though the individual is not considered a resident of the United States, provided the non-U.S. holder timely files a U.S. federal income tax return with respect to such losses

 

We believe that we are not, and we do not anticipate becoming, a USRPHC for U.S. federal income tax purposes.

 

Federal Estate Tax

 

Class A common stock held by an individual non-U.S. holder at the time of death will be included in such holder’s gross estate for U.S. federal estate tax purposes, unless an applicable estate tax treaty provides otherwise.

 

Information Reporting and Backup Withholding

 

Generally, we must report annually to the IRS and to each non-U.S. holder the amount of dividends paid to such holder and the amount of tax, if any, withheld with respect to such dividends. Copies of the information returns reporting such dividends and withholding may also be made available to the tax authorities in the country in which you are resident under the provisions of an applicable income tax treaty.

 

A non-U.S. holder will be subject to backup withholding for dividends paid to such holder unless such holder certifies under penalty of perjury that it is a non-U.S. holder (and the payor does not have actual knowledge or reason to know that such holder is a United States person as defined under the Code), or such holder otherwise establishes an exemption.

 

Information reporting and, depending on the circumstances, backup withholding will apply to the proceeds of a sale of our Class A common stock within the United States or conducted through certain United States-related financial intermediaries, unless the beneficial owner certifies under penalty of perjury that it is a non-U.S. holder (and the payor does not have actual knowledge or reason to know that the beneficial owner is a United States person as defined under the Code), or such owner otherwise establishes an exemption.

 

Backup withholding is not an additional tax. Any amounts withheld under the backup withholding rules may be allowed as a refund or a credit against your U.S. federal income tax liability, provided the required information is timely furnished by you to the IRS.

 

FATCA

 

Under Sections 1471 through 1474 of the Code, such Sections commonly referred to as FATCA, a 30% U.S. federal withholding tax may apply to any dividends paid on our Class A common stock and, for a disposition of our Class A common stock occurring after December 31, 2018, the gross proceeds from such disposition, in each case paid to (i) a “foreign financial institution” (as specifically defined in the Code) which does not provide sufficient documentation, typically on IRS Form W-8BEN-E, evidencing either (x) an exemption from FATCA, or (y) its compliance (or deemed compliance) with FATCA (which may alternatively be in the form of compliance with an intergovernmental agreement with the United States) in a manner which avoids withholding, or (ii) a “non-financial foreign entity” (as specifically defined in the Code) which does not provide sufficient documentation, typically on IRS Form W-8BEN-E, evidencing either (x) an exemption from FATCA, or (y) adequate information regarding certain substantial United States beneficial owners of such entity (if any). If a dividend payment is both subject to withholding under FATCA and subject to the withholding tax discussed above under “—Distributions,” the withholding under FATCA may be credited against, and therefore reduce, such other withholding tax. You should consult your own tax advisor regarding these requirements and whether they may be relevant to your ownership and disposition of our Class A common stock.

 

THE SUMMARY OF CERTAIN U.S. FEDERAL INCOME AND ESTATE TAX CONSEQUENCES ABOVE IS INCLUDED FOR GENERAL INFORMATION PURPOSES ONLY. POTENTIAL PURCHASERS OF OUR CLASS A COMMON STOCK ARE URGED TO CONSULT THEIR TAX ADVISORS TO DETERMINE THE U.S. FEDERAL, STATE, LOCAL AND NON-U.S. TAX AND TAX TREATY CONSIDERATIONS OF PURCHASING, OWNING AND DISPOSING OF OUR CLASS A COMMON STOCK.

 

148

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

UNDERWRITING

 

Canaccord Genuity Corp.,                              and                              are acting as the underwriters of this offering, and Canaccord Genuity Corp. is acting as the representative of the several underwriters. Subject to the terms and conditions stated in the Underwriting Agreement dated the date of this prospectus among us, the selling stockholders and the underwriters, each underwriter named below has severally agreed to purchase from us and the selling stockholders, and we and the selling stockholders have agreed to sell to each such underwriter, the respective number of shares of Class A common stock shown opposite its name below at a price of $                      per share, payable in cash against delivery. We will not receive any proceeds from the sale of shares by the selling stockholders.

 

Underwriter 

Number of

Shares of

Class A

Common Stock

 
Canaccord Genuity Corp.               
Total                

 

This offering is being made concurrently in the United States and in each of the provinces of Canada, except Quebec. The shares of Class A common stock will be offered in the United States through those underwriters or their U.S. affiliates who are registered to offer the shares of Class A common stock for sale in the United States, and in Canada through those underwriters or their Canadian affiliates who are registered to offer the shares of Class A common stock for sale in applicable Canadian provinces or territories, and such other registered dealers as may be designated by the underwriters. Subject to applicable law, the underwriters may offer the shares of Class A common stock outside of the United States and Canada.

 

The obligations of the underwriters under the Underwriting Agreement may be terminated at their discretion based on their assessment of the state of the financial markets and may also be terminated upon the occurrence of certain stated events. The underwriters are, however, obligated to take up and pay for all of the offered shares of Class A common stock if any of the shares of Class A common stock are purchased under the Underwriting Agreement. The Underwriting Agreement also provides that if an underwriter defaults, the purchase commitments of non-defaulting underwriters may also be increased or the offering may be terminated.

 

The underwriters propose to offer the shares of Class A common stock directly to the public at the initial public offering price set forth on the cover page of this prospectus and to certain dealers at that price less a concession not in excess of $         per share. After the initial public offering of the shares of Class A common stock, the offering price and other selling terms may be changed by the underwriters.

 

The underwriters have an option to buy up to                            additional shares of Class A common stock from the selling stockholders at a price of $                      per share to cover sales of shares of Class A common stock by the underwriters which exceed the number of shares of Class A common stock specified in the table above. The underwriters have 30 days from the closing date of this offering to exercise this overallotment option, in whole or from time to time in part. If any shares of Class A common stock are purchased with this overallotment option, the underwriters will purchase shares of Class A common stock in approximately the same proportion as shown in the table above. If any additional shares of Class A common stock are purchased, the underwriters will offer the additional shares on the same terms as those on which the shares of Class A common stock are being offered. We will not receive any proceeds from the exercise of the underwriters’ overallotment option.

 

A purchaser who acquires shares of Class A common stock forming part of the underwriters’ overallotment position acquires such shares under this prospectus, regardless of whether the overallotment position is ultimately filled through the sales of shares of Class A common stock by the selling stockholders upon exercise of the overallotment option or secondary market purchases. Any naked short position shall form part of the underwriters’ overallotment position.

 

149

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

The following table shows the per share and total underwriters’ commission to be paid to the underwriters, assuming both no exercise and full exercise of the underwriters’ option to purchase additional shares of Class A common stock.

 

   Per Share   Total 
   Without   With   Without   With 
   Over-   Over-   Over-   Over- 
   Allotment   Allotment   Allotment   Allotment 
Public offering price  $                  $                  $                 $              
Underwriting commissions and discounts paid by us  $    $    $    $  
Underwriters’ commissions paid by the selling stockholders  $    $    $    $  

 

The public offering price for our shares of Class A common stock, wherever offered, is payable in U.S. dollars, except as may otherwise be agreed by the underwriters.

 

We have agreed to issue to the underwriters warrants exercisable to acquire up to                              shares of common stock (                      shares if the overallotment option is exercised). The warrants are not included in the securities being sold in this offering. The shares of Class A common stock issuable upon exercise of the warrant are identical to those offered by this prospectus. The warrant is exercisable at a per share price equal to the initial public offering price per share in this offering. Each warrant will be exercisable at any time, from time to time, in whole or in part, until the second anniversary of the closing date of this offering.

 

In addition to the underwriting commissions and discounts, we are responsible for reimbursing the expenses of the underwriters incurred in relation to this offering, including legal expenses and expenses related to road show and marketing activities subject to certain limitations described in the Underwriting Agreement. We estimate that the total amount of such reimbursable expenses will be approximately $              .

 

We estimate that the total expenses of this offering to us, including registration, filing and listing fees, printing fees, and legal and accounting expenses, but excluding the underwriters’ commission, will be approximately $              .

 

We and each of our directors and executive officers and certain other stockholders have entered into lock-up agreements with the underwriters pursuant to which each of these persons or entities, with limited exceptions, for a period of 180 days after the date of the closing of this offering, may not, without the prior written consent of Canaccord Genuity Corp., on behalf of the underwriters, (1) offer, pledge, sell, contract to sell, sell any option or contract to purchase, purchase any option or contract to sell, grant any option, right, or warrant to purchase, or otherwise transfer or dispose of, directly or indirectly, any of our shares or any securities convertible into or exercisable or exchangeable for our shares (including, without limitation, our shares or such other securities which may be deemed to be beneficially owned by such persons in accordance with the rules and regulations of the SEC and securities which may be issued upon exercise of a stock option or warrant), or publicly disclose the intention to do any of the foregoing, (2) enter into any swap or other agreement that transfers, in whole or in part, any of the economic consequences of ownership of our shares or such other securities, whether any such transaction described in clause (1) or (2) above is to be settled by delivery of our shares or such other securities, in cash, or otherwise, or (3) file, request or make any demand for or exercise any right with respect to the registration of any of our shares or any security convertible into or exercisable or exchangeable for our shares. In addition, the lock-up agreements will not restrict the transfer of shares of Class A common stock as bona fide gifts, transfer by will or the laws of intestacy, transfers to family members (including to vehicles of which they are beneficial owners), or transfers pursuant to domestic relations or court orders or (in the case of corporations or other entities) transfers to affiliates that do not involve any disposition for value, in each case so long as (i) the transferee agrees to be bound by the restrictions in the lock-up agreement and (ii) no filing under the Exchange Act or Canadian securities laws, or other public announcement, is required or is voluntarily made in connection with such transfer.

 

We and the selling stockholders have agreed to indemnify the underwriters against certain liabilities, including liabilities under the Securities Act and applicable Canadian securities laws.

 

Pursuant to Canadian securities laws and the Universal Market Integrity Rules for Canadian Marketplaces, the underwriters may not, throughout the period of distribution, bid for, or purchase our shares, except in accordance with certain permitted transactions, including market stabilization and passive market making activities.

 

150

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

In connection with this offering, the underwriters may engage in stabilizing transactions, which involves making bids for, purchasing, and selling our shares of Class A common stock in the open market for the purpose of preventing or retarding a decline in the market price of our shares of Class A common stock while this offering is in progress. These stabilizing transactions may include making short sales of our shares of Class A common stock, which involves the sale by the underwriters of a greater number of our shares of Class A common stock than they are required to purchase in this offering, and purchasing our shares of Class A common stock on the open market to cover positions created by short sales. Short sales may be “covered” shorts, which are short positions in an amount not greater than the underwriters’ overallotment option referred to above, or may be “naked” shorts, which are short positions in excess of that amount. The underwriters may close out any covered short position either by exercising their overallotment option, in whole or in part, or by purchasing shares of Class A common stock in the open market. In making this determination, the underwriters will consider, among other things, the price of shares of Class A common stock available for purchase in the open market compared to the price at which the underwriters may purchase shares of Class A common stock through the overallotment option. A naked short position is more likely to be created if the underwriters are concerned that there may be downward pressure on the price of our shares of Class A common stock in the open market that could adversely affect investors who purchase in this offering. To the extent that the underwriters create a naked short position, they will purchase shares of Class A common stock in the open market to cover the position.

 

The underwriters have advised us that, pursuant to Regulation M of the Securities Act and applicable Canadian securities laws, they may also engage in other activities that stabilize, maintain, or otherwise affect the price of our shares, including the imposition of penalty bids. This means that if the underwriters purchase our shares of Class A common stock in the open market in stabilizing transactions or to cover short sales, the joint book-running managers can require the underwriters that sold those shares of Class A common stock as part of this offering to repay the underwriters’ commission received by them.

 

These activities may have the effect of raising or maintaining the market price of our shares of Class A common stock or preventing or retarding a decline in the market price of our shares of Class A common stock, and, as a result, the price of our shares of Class A common stock may be higher than the price that otherwise might exist in the open market. If the underwriters commence these activities, they may discontinue them at any time. The underwriters may carry out these transactions on applicable stock exchanges, in the over-the-counter market, or otherwise.

 

Prior to this offering, there has been no public market for our shares of Class A common stock. The initial public offering price will be determined by negotiations between us, the selling stockholders and the underwriters. In determining the initial public offering price, we and the underwriters expect to consider a number of factors including:

 

the information set forth in this prospectus and otherwise available to us and the underwriters;

 

our prospects and the history and prospects for the industry in which we compete;

 

an assessment of our management;

 

our prospects for future earnings;

 

the general condition of the securities markets at the time of this offering;

 

the recent market prices of, and demand for, publicly traded common stock of generally comparable companies; and

 

other factors deemed relevant by the underwriters and us.

 

151

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Neither we nor the underwriters can assure investors that an active trading market will develop for our shares of Class A common stock, or that the shares of Class A common stock will trade in the public market at or above the initial public offering price.

 

Other than in the United States and in each of the Canadian provinces (except Quebec), no action has been taken by us or the underwriters that would permit a public offering of the securities offered by this prospectus in any jurisdiction where action for that purpose is required. The securities offered by this prospectus may not be offered or sold, directly or indirectly, nor may this prospectus or any other offering material or advertisements in connection with the offer and sale of any such securities be distributed or published in any jurisdiction, except under circumstances that will result in compliance with the applicable rules and regulations of that jurisdiction. Persons into whose possession this prospectus comes are advised to inform themselves about and to observe any restrictions relating to the offering and the distribution of this prospectus. This prospectus does not constitute an offer to sell or a solicitation of an offer to buy any securities offered by this prospectus in any jurisdiction in which such an offer or a solicitation is unlawful.

 

Conflicts of Interest

 

Subscriptions will be received subject to rejection or allotment in whole or in part and the right is reserved to close the subscription books at any time without notice. We expect that delivery of our shares of Class A common stock will be made against payment therefor on or about the date specified on the cover page of this prospectus, which will be the business day following the date of pricing of our shares of Class A common stock (such settlement cycle being herein referred to as “T +                ”). Pursuant to SEC Rule 15c6-1 under the Exchange Act, trades in the secondary market generally are required to settle in three business days, unless the parties to any such trade expressly agree otherwise. Accordingly, purchasers who wish to trade our shares of Class A common stock on the date of pricing or the succeeding business day will be required, by virtue of the fact that our shares of Class A common stock initially will settle T +                , to specify an alternate settlement cycle at the time of any such trade to prevent a failed settlement and should consult their own advisor.

 

Our offered shares of Class A common stock (other than any shares of Class A common stock issuable or to be sold on exercise of the overallotment option) are to be taken up by the underwriters, if at all, on or before a date not later than 42 days after the date of the receipt for the final Canadian prospectus.

 

152

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

NOTICE TO INVESTORS REGARDING U.S. GAAP

 

We prepare our financial information in accordance with U.S. GAAP, which differs in certain material respects from Canadian generally accepted accounting principles. We have historically provided financial information prepared in accordance with U.S. GAAP. As we will become an SEC issuer (as such term is defined in NI-52-107—Acceptable Accounting Principles and Auditing Standards of the Canadian Securities Administrators), we are not required to provide, and have not provided, a reconciliation of our financial statements to the International Financial Reporting Standards.

 

LEGAL MATTERS

 

The validity of the Class A common stock offered hereby will be passed upon for us by Pryor Cashman LLP, New York, New York. Certain Canadian legal matters relating to this offering are being passed upon for us by Dentons Canada LLP. Certain legal matters in connection with this offering will be passed upon for the underwriters by DLA Piper LLP (US), with respect to U.S. law, and DLA Piper (Canada) LLP, with respect to Canadian law. As of the date hereof the partners and associates of Pryor Cashman LLP, as a group, the partners and associates of Dentons Canada LLP, as a group, the partners and associates of DLA Piper LLP (US), as a group, and the partners and associates of DLA Piper (Canada) LLP, as a group, each beneficially own, directly or indirectly, less than one percent of the outstanding shares of Class A Common Stock.

 

EXPERTS

 

The consolidated financial statements of Greenlane Holdings, LLC and its subsidiaries as of December 31, 2017 and 2016 and for each of the years then ended, have been included herein in reliance upon the report of BDO USA, LLP, independent registered public accounting firm, appearing elsewhere herein, and upon the authority of said firm as experts in accounting and auditing.

 

The financial statements of Better Life Holdings, LLC as of December 31, 2017 and for the year then ended, have been included herein in reliance upon the report of Squar Milner LLP, independent registered public accounting firm, appearing elsewhere herein, and upon the authority of said firm as experts in accounting and auditing.

 

The financial statements of Better Life Holdings, LLC as of December 31, 2016 and for the year then ended, have been included herein in reliance upon the report of LBB & Associates Ltd., LLP, independent registered public accounting firm, appearing elsewhere herein, and upon the authority of said firm as experts in accounting and auditing.

 

WHERE YOU CAN FIND MORE INFORMATION

 

We have filed with the SEC a registration statement on Form S-1 under the Securities Act with respect to the shares of Class A common stock offered hereby. This prospectus, which constitutes a part of the registration statement, does not contain all of the information set forth in the registration statement or the exhibits filed therewith. For further information about us and the Class A common stock offered hereby, reference is made to the registration statement and the exhibits filed therewith. Statements contained in this prospectus regarding the contents of any contract or any other document that is filed as an exhibit to the registration statement are not necessarily complete, and in each instance we refer you to the copy of such contract or other document filed as an exhibit to the registration statement. We currently do not file periodic reports with the SEC. Upon closing of our initial public offering, we will be required to file periodic reports, proxy statements and other information with the SEC pursuant to the Exchange Act. A copy of the registration statement and the exhibits filed therewith may be inspected without charge at the public reference room maintained by the SEC, located at 100 F Street, NE, Washington, DC 20549, and copies of all or any part of the registration statement may be obtained from that office. Please call the SEC at 1-800-SEC-0330 for further information about the public reference room. The SEC also maintains a website that contains reports, proxy and information statements and other information regarding registrants that file electronically with the SEC. The address of the website is www.sec.gov.

 

153

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

INDEX TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

   Page
Greenlane Holdings, LLC   
    
Interim Condensed Consolidated Financial Statements as of and for the Three Months Ended March 31, 2018 and 2017 (Unaudited) 
    
Condensed Consolidated Balance Sheets as of March 31, 2018 and December 31, 2017  F-2
    
Condensed Consolidated Statements of Operations for the Three Months Ended March 31, 2018 and 2017  F-3
    
Condensed Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income for the Three Months Ended March 31, 2018 and 2017  F-4
    
Condensed Consolidated Statement of Changes in Redeemable Class B Units and Members’ Equity for the Three Months ended March 31, 2018  F-5
    
Condensed Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows for the Three Months Ended March 31, 2018 and 2017  F-6
    
Notes to Interim Condensed Consolidated Financial Statements  F-7
    
Audited Consolidated Financial Statements as of and for the Years Ended December 31, 2017 and 2016   
    
Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm  F-20
    
Consolidated Balance Sheets as of December 31, 2017 and 2016  F-21
    
Consolidated Statements of Operations for the Years Ended December 31, 2017 and 2016  F-22
    
Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income for the Years Ended December 31, 2017 and 2016  F-23
    
Consolidated Statements of Changes in Members’ Equity for the Years Ended December 31, 2017 and 2016  F-24
    
Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows for the Years Ended December 31, 2017 and 2016  F-25
    
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements  F-26
    
Better Life Holdings, LLC   
    
Audited Financial Statements   
    
Independent Auditor’s Report  F-43
    
Balance Sheet as of December 31, 2017  F-44
    
Statement of Operations for the Year Ended December 31, 2017  F-45
    
Statement of Changes in Members’ Equity for the Year Ended December 31, 2017  F-46
    
Statement of Cash Flows for the Year Ended December 31, 2017  F-47
    
Notes to Financial Statements  F-48
    
Audited Financial Statements   
    
Independent Auditor’s Report  F-55
  
Balance Sheets as of December 31, 2016 and 2015  F-56
    
Statements of Operations for the Years Ended December 31, 2016 and 2015  F-57
    
Statements of Changes in Members’ Equity for the Years Ended December 31, 2016 and 2015   F-58
    
Statements of Cash Flows for the Years Ended December 31, 2016 and 2015   F-59
    
Notes to Financial Statements  F-60

 

Greenlane Holdings, Inc.

 

The financial statements of Greenlane Holdings, Inc. have been omitted because this entity is a business combination related shell company, as defined in Rule 405 under the Securities Act, has only nominal assets, has not commenced operations and has not engaged in any business or other activities except in connection with its formation. Greenlane Holdings, Inc. does not have any contingent liabilities or commitments.

 

F-1

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

GREENLANE HOLDINGS, LLC

Consolidated Balance Sheets

(Unaudited)

 

   As of   As of 
   March 31,   December 31, 
   2018   2017 
ASSETS        
Current assets        
Cash  $3,099,076   $2,080,397 
Accounts receivable, net of allowance of $266,831 and $156,472 at March 31, 2018 and December 31, 2017, respectively   5,713,790    3,759,551 
Inventories, net   28,442,048    14,159,693 
Vendor deposits   5,341,115    2,338,312 
Other current assets   1,731,566    950,503 
Total current assets   44,327,595    23,288,456 
           
Property and equipment, net   1,012,426    597,494 
Intangible assets, net   4,623,331    1,619,836 
Goodwill   5,445,691    3,150,121 
Investments in associated entities   942,935    915,920 
Total assets  $56,351,978   $29,571,827 
           
LIABILITIES          
Current liabilities          
Accounts payable  $27,159,894   $15,500,519 
Accrued expenses   3,931,627    3,337,672 
Due to parent   4,690,000    610,544 
Note payable   175,714    7,792 
Current portion of capital lease obligations   91,433    63,155 
Total current liabilities   36,048,668    19,519,682 
           
Loans payable to members   565,249    565,249 
Capital lease obligations   180,599    91,063 
Total long-term liabilities   745,848    656,312 
Total liabilities   36,794,516    20,175,994 
           
Commitments and contingencies (Note 10)          
           
REDEEMABLE CLASS B UNITS   8,890,000    - 
           
MEMBERS’ EQUITY          
Common units   6,449,921    6,449,921 
Retained earnings   4,446,177    3,154,623 
Accumulated other comprehensive loss   (228,636)   (208,711)
Total members’ equity   10,667,462    9,395,833 
           
Total liabilities, redeemable Class B units and members’ equity  $56,351,978   $29,571,827 

 

The accompanying Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements are an integral part of these statements.

 

 F-2 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

GREENLANE HOLDINGS, LLC

Consolidated Statements of Operations

(Unaudited)

 

   For the three months ended 
   March 31, 
   2018   2017 
Net sales  $43,257,643   $19,178,993 
Cost of sales   34,204,549    14,821,316 
Gross profit   9,053,094    4,357,677 
Operating expenses:          
Salaries, benefits and payroll taxes   2,947,006    1,665,650 
General and administrative   3,534,389    1,888,506 
Depreciation and amortization   245,717    156,108 
Total operating expenses   6,727,112    3,710,264 
Income from operations   2,325,982    647,413 
Other income (expense):          
Interest expense   (38,951)   (49,129)
Other income (loss), net   93,515    2,853 
Other income (expense)   54,564    (46,276)
Income before income taxes   2,380,546    601,137 
Provision for income taxes   81,817    37,382 
Net income  $2,298,729   $563,755 
           
Pro-forma earnings per unit:          
Basic and diluted  $22,987   $5,638 
Pro-forma weighted-average units outstanding:          
Basic and diluted   100    100 

 

The accompanying Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements are an integral part of these statements.

 

 F-3 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

GREENLANE HOLDINGS, LLC

Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income

(Unaudited)

 

   For the three months ended 
   March 31, 
   2018   2017 
Net income  $2,298,729   $563,755 
Other comprehensive income (loss):          
Foreign currency translation adjustments   (19,925)   (2,203)
Total comprehensive income  $2,278,804   $561,552 

 

The accompanying Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements are an integral part of these statements.

 

 F-4 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

GREENLANE HOLDINGS, LLC

Consolidated Statement of Changes in Redeemable Class B Units and Members’ Equity

(Unaudited)

  

       Common       Accumulated     
   Redeemable   Units       Other     
   Class B   Capital   Retained   Comprehensive     
   Units   Contribution   Earnings   Loss   Total 
Balance, December 31, 2017  $-   $6,449,921   $3,154,623   $(208,711)  $9,395,833 
Issuance of Class B redeemable units   8,890,000    -    -    -    - 
Net income   -    -    2,298,729    -    2,298,729 
Member distributions   -    -    (1,007,175)   -    (1,007,175)
Effects of foreign currency exchange   -    -    -    (19,925)   (19,925)
Balance, March 31, 2018  $8,890,000   $6,449,921   $4,446,177   $(228,636)  $10,667,462 

  

The accompanying Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements are an integral part of these statements.

  

 F-5 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

GREENLANE HOLDINGS, LLC

Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows

 (Unaudited)

 

   For the three months ended 
   2018   2017 
Cash flows from operating activities:        
Net income  $2,298,729   $563,755 
Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash used in operating activities:          
Depreciation and amortization   245,717    156,108 
Provision for doubtful accounts   266,831    201,368 
Provision for slow moving or obsolete inventory   32,510    16,140 
Other   -    (100,000)
Changes in operating assets and liabilities, net of the effects of acquisitions:          
Accounts receivable, net   (2,098,100)   (263,147)
Vendor deposits   (3,002,803)   (1,995,259)
Inventories   (10,949,803)   (4,613,087)
Other assets   (716,273)   (556,175)
Accounts payable   10,778,643    4,473,725 
Accrued expenses   335,142    700,968 
Income from equity method investments in associated entities   (27,015)   - 
Net cash used in operating activities   (2,836,422)   (1,415,604)
Cash flows from investing activities:          
Better Life Holdings, Inc. acquisition, net of cash acquired   785,081    - 
Purchase of property and equipment   (218,254)   (57,867)
Purchase of intangible assets   (19,480)   (650,000)
Net cash provided by (used in) investing activities   547,347    (707,867)
Cash flows from financing activities:          
Payments on long-term debt   (29,204)   (627,681)
Proceeds from note payable   167,922    - 
Proceeds from related parties - line of credit, net   4,079,456    1,489,214 
Proceeds from long-term debt   -    702,916 
Increase in capital lease obligations   135,963    - 
Payments of capital lease obligations   (19,283)   (9,667)
Member distributions   (1,007,175)   (100,000)
Net cash provided by financing activities   3,327,679    1,454,782 
Effects of exchange rate changes on cash   (19,925)   (2,203)
Net increase (decrease) in cash   1,018,679    (670,892)
Cash, as of beginning of the period   2,080,397    1,691,196 
Cash, as of end of period  $3,099,076   $1,020,304 
           
SUPPLEMENTAL DISCLOSURES OF CASH FLOW INFORMATION          
Cash paid during the period for interest  $38,951   $49,129 
Non-cash investing activities:          
Class B Units issued for acquisition of Better Life Holdings, LLC.  $8,890,000   $- 

 

The accompanying Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements are an integral part of these statements.

 

 F-6 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

GREENLANE HOLDINGS, LLC

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

(UNAUDITED)

 

NOTE 1. BUSINESS OPERATIONS

 

Greenlane Holdings, LLC (formerly known as Jacoby Holdings, LLC) (the “Company”), is a holding company with investments in several companies that merchandise vaporizers and other products in the United States and Canada. Through its operating subsidiaries, the Company distributes to retailers through its wholesale operations and to consumers through its e-commerce activities. The Company operates four distribution centers in the United States and one distribution facility in Canada.

 

The Company was organized under the laws of the state of Delaware on October 28, 2015, and is based in Boca Raton, Florida.

 

NOTE 2. SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES

 

Basis of Presentation

 

The accompanying unaudited consolidated financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the principles of accounting measurement in Accounting Standard Codification (“ASC”) 270, Interim Reporting, (“ASC 270”) and Article 10 of Regulation S-X and, therefore, omit or condense certain footnotes and other information normally included in financial statements prepared in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States (“U.S. GAAP”). In the opinion of the Company’s management, all adjustments (consisting of normal recurring accruals) considered necessary for fair financial statement presentation have been made. Certain reclassifications have been made to prior year amounts or balances to conform to the presentation adopted in the current year. Operating results for the three-month period ended March 31, 2018 are not necessarily indicative of the results that may be expected for the year ending December 31, 2018 or any other period. For further information, refer to the consolidated financial statements and footnotes thereto included in the Company’s annual financial statements for the year ended December 31, 2017.

 

Principles of Consolidation

 

The consolidated financial statements have been prepared in accordance with U.S. GAAP for all periods presented and include the accounts of the Company and its wholly-owned subsidiaries. All significant intercompany balances and transactions have been eliminated in consolidation. The Company is planning for an initial public offering in 2018; therefore these consolidated financial statements include the application of U.S. GAAP for public entities.

 

The accompanying financial statements include the accounts of the Company consolidated with its 100% wholly-owned subsidiaries, Warehouse Goods LLC (“WHG”), Aerospaced LLC, BioVapor Solutions LLC (“BVS”), Mid-Atlantic Holdings Group LLC (“MAHG”) and MSI Imports, LLC. WHG owns 100% of GS Fulfillment LLC (“GS Fulfillment) and Vape World Distribution LTD (“VWDL”), the Company’s Canadian subsidiary.

 

In August 2017, WHG formed HS Products, LLC (“HS Products”), which operates the Higher Standards retail website. In September 2017, WHG formed Higher Standards Chelsea Market LLC (“HSCM”), a wholly-owned subsidiary. Both entities were organized in the state Delaware. In late December 2017, HSCM opened its first flagship store in New York City’s Chelsea Market area.

 

Use of Estimates

 

The preparation of financial statements in conformity with U.S. GAAP requires the use of estimates that affect certain reported amounts and disclosures. These estimates are based on management’s knowledge and experience. Significant items subject to such estimates include the accounts receivable allowance for doubtful accounts and allowance for slow-moving or obsolete inventory. Accordingly, actual results could differ from those estimates.

 

Segment Reporting

 

The Company has two distinct operating segments (the United States operations and Canadian operations). The Canadian operating segment consists of VWDL, the Company’s wholly-owned Canadian subsidiary. The United States operating segment is comprised of all other subsidiaries. The Company has one reportable segment, which has been identified based on how the chief operating decision maker (“CODM”) manages the business, makes operating decisions and evaluates operating performance. The Company’s CODM is the Chief Executive Officer.

 

 F-7 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

GREENLANE HOLDINGS, LLC

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

(UNAUDITED)

 

Business Combinations

 

Business combinations are accounted for under the acquisition method of accounting in accordance with ASC Topic 805, Business Combinations (“ASC 805”). Under the acquisition method, the acquiring entity in a business combination recognizes 100 percent of the acquired assets and assumed liabilities, regardless of the percentage owned, at their estimated fair values as of the date of acquisition. Any excess of the purchase price over the fair value of net assets and other identifiable intangible assets acquired is recorded as goodwill. To the extent the fair value of net assets acquired, including other identifiable assets, exceeds the purchase price, a bargain purchase gain is recognized. Assets acquired, and liabilities assumed from contingencies, must also be recognized at fair value if the fair value can be determined during the measurement period. Results of operations of an acquired business are included in the consolidated statement of operations from the date of acquisition. Acquisition-related costs, including conversion and restructuring charges, are expensed as incurred. See Note 13.

 

Share-Based Compensation

 

The Company granted certain incentive awards in the form of profits interests and phantom unit awards to certain individuals currently employed by the Company. The phantom unit awards and the profits interest awards include both a service condition and a performance condition which must be satisfied in order for the awards to vest and for settlement to occur. Vesting of the profits interest awards is based on satisfying either the service or the performance condition. As a result, the initial requisite service period is the shorter of the explicit service period for the service condition or the explicit or implicit service period for the performance condition. The Company accounts for these awards in accordance with ASC Topic 718, Stock Compensation, (“ASC 718”). See Note 15.

 

Fair Value Measurements

 

The carrying amounts of the Company’s financial instruments, including cash and cash equivalents, accounts receivable, accounts payable, accrued expenses and short-term debt, are carried at historical cost basis, which approximates their fair values because of the short-term nature of these instruments. The fair value of long-term debt is the estimated amount the Company would have to pay to repurchase the debt, including any premium or discount attributable to the difference between the stated interest rate and market rate of interest at each balance sheet date. As of March 31, 2018, and December 31, 2017, the carrying amount of the Company’s long-term debt approximated its fair value.

 

The Company determines the fair market values of its financial instruments based on the fair value hierarchy, which requires an entity to maximize the use of observable inputs and minimize the use of unobservable inputs when measuring fair value. The following three levels of inputs may be used to measure fair value:

 

Level 1  Quoted prices in active markets for identical assets or liabilities that the Company has the ability to access at the measurement date.

 

Level 2  Observable inputs other than Level 1 prices, such as quoted prices for similar assets or liabilities; quoted prices in markets that are not active; or other inputs that are observable or can be corroborated by observable market data for substantially the full term of the assets or liabilities.

 

Level 3  Unobservable inputs that are supported by little or no market activity and that are significant to the fair value of the assets or liabilities.

 

Cash

 

The Company considers all highly-liquid investments with original maturities of three months or less from date of purchase to be cash equivalents. As of March 31, 2018, and December 31, 2017, the Company had no cash equivalents.

 

 F-8 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

GREENLANE HOLDINGS, LLC

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

(UNAUDITED)

 

Accounts Receivable

 

Accounts receivable represent amounts due from customers for merchandise sales and are recorded when product has shipped. An account is considered past due when payment has not been rendered by its due date based upon the terms of the sale. Generally, accounts receivable are due 30 days after the billing date. The Company evaluates its accounts receivable and establishes an allowance for doubtful accounts based on a history of collections as well as current credit conditions. Accounts are written off as uncollectible on a case-by-case basis. Accounts receivable were reported net of the allowance for doubtful accounts of $267,000 and $156,000 at March 31, 2018 and December 31, 2017, respectively. Accounts receivable are pledged as collateral for the line of credit. See Note 8.

 

Inventory

 

Inventory consists principally of finished goods that are valued at the lower of cost or net realizable value on a weighted average cost basis. ASU 2015-11, Simplifying the Measurement of Inventory, was adopted during the year ended December 31, 2017. The Company has established an allowance for slow-moving or obsolete inventory based upon assumptions about future demands and market conditions. At March 31, 2018 and December 31, 2017, the reserve for obsolescence was approximately $280,000, and $151,000, respectively. Inventory is pledged as collateral for the line of credit. See Note 8.

 

Property and Equipment, net

 

Property and equipment are recorded at historical cost, less accumulated depreciation and amortization. Depreciation and amortization are computed using the straight-line method over the estimated useful lives of the asset. Upon the sale or retirement of equipment, the cost and related accumulated depreciation are removed from the accounts and the difference between book value and any proceeds realized on the sale is charged or credited to income. Expenditures for repairs and maintenance are charged to operations as incurred. Depreciation and amortization are recorded under the straight-line method over the estimated useful lives which are as follows:

 

Furniture, equipment and software 3-7 years
Leasehold improvements Lesser of lease term or 5 years

 

Impairment of Long-Lived Assets

 

The Company assesses the recoverability of the carrying amount of its property and equipment whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying amount of an asset or asset group may not be recoverable. An impairment loss would be assessed when estimated undiscounted future cash flows from the operation and disposition of the asset group are less than the carrying amount of the asset group. Asset groups have identifiable cash flows and are largely independent of other asset groups. Measurement of an impairment loss is based on the excess of the carrying amount of the asset group over its fair value. There was no impairment loss for intangible assets for the three months ended March 31, 2018 and 2017. See Note 3.

 

Intangible Assets

 

Intangible assets consist of domain names, intellectual property, distribution agreements, proprietary technology, trademarks and trade names, and other rights. The Company assesses the recoverability of finite-lived intangible assets, other than goodwill, in the same manner as for property and equipment, as described above. There was no impairment loss for intangible assets for the three months ended March 31, 2018 and 2017. See Note 4.

 

Goodwill

 

Goodwill, representing the difference between total purchase price and fair value of assets acquired (tangible and intangible) and liabilities assumed at the date of acquisition, is reviewed for impairment annually, and more frequently as circumstances warrant, and written down only in the period in which the recorded value of such assets and liabilities exceeds fair value. See Note 4 and Note 13.

 

 F-9 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

GREENLANE HOLDINGS, LLC

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

(UNAUDITED)

 

Equity Method Investments

 

Investee companies that are not consolidated, but over which the Company exercises significant influence, are accounted for under the equity method of accounting. Whether or not the Company exercises significant influence with respect to an investee depends on an evaluation of several factors including, among others, representation on the investee company’s board of directors and ownership level, which is generally a 20% to 50% interest in the voting securities of the investee company. Under the equity method of accounting, an investee company’s accounts are not reflected within the Company’s consolidated balance sheets and statements of operations; however, the Company’s share of the earnings or losses of the Investee company is reflected in the caption “Other income, net’’ in the consolidated statements of operations. The Company’s carrying value in an equity method Investee company is reflected in the caption “Investments in associated entities” in the Company’s consolidated balance sheets. When the Company’s carrying value in an equity method investee company is reduced to zero, no further losses are recorded in the Company’s consolidated financial statements unless the Company has guaranteed obligations of the investee company or has committed additional funding. When the investee company subsequently reports income, the Company will not record its share of such income until it equals the amount of its share of losses not previously recognized.

 

The Company’s investment in a company that is accounted for on the equity method of accounting consisted of a 33.3% non-controlling interest in NWT Holdings, LLC (“NWT”), a manufacturer of vaporizers. The investment in NWT amounted to approximately $943,000 and $916,000 at March 31, 2018 and December 31, 2017, respectively. The income from the equity method investment for the three months ended March 31, 2018 and 2017, was approximately $27,000 and $0, respectively.

 

Vendor Deposits

 

Vendor deposits represent prepayments made to vendors for inventory purchases. A significant number of vendors require prepayment for inventory purchases made by the Company. The Company had approximately $5,341,000 and $2,338,000 in vendor deposits at March 31, 2018 and December 31, 2017, respectively.

 

Accrued Royalties

 

As part of its distribution agreement with Grenco Science, Inc. (“Grenco Science”), the Company distributes licensed products with associated royalties. Grenco Science manufactures products licensed with various artists and music personalities. The Company accrues royalties associated with the sale of such products. Accrued royalties at March 31, 2018 and December 31, 2017, were approximately $293,000 and $300,000, respectively. See Note 5.

 

Customer Deposits

 

In August 2016, the Company launched a dedicated dispensary division and established a supply chain for premium, patented, child-resistant packaging, closed-system vaporization solutions and custom-branded retail products. For some of these product offerings, the Company receives a deposit from the customer (generally 50% of the total order cost, but the amount can vary by customer contract). These orders are typically completed within six weeks to three months from the date of order, depending on the complexity of the customization and the size of the order. Customer deposits at March 31, 2018 and December 31, 2017 were approximately $1,516,000 and $721,000, respectively. See Note 5.

 

Foreign Currency

 

The accompanying consolidated financial statements are presented in United States (U.S.) dollars. The functional currency of VWDL, the Company’s Canadian subsidiary, is the Canadian dollar. The assets and liabilities of VWDL are translated into U.S. dollars at current exchange rates and revenue and expenses are translated at average exchange rates for the year. Capital accounts are translated at their historical exchange rates when the capital transactions occurred. The foreign currency translation adjustments are included in accumulated other comprehensive loss, a separate component of members’ equity in the consolidated balance sheets. Other exchange gains and losses are reported in the consolidated statements of operations. See Note 9.

 

 F-10 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

GREENLANE HOLDINGS, LLC

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

(UNAUDITED)

 

Shipping and Handling

 

Shipping and handling revenue is included in net sales. Shipping and handling costs for merchandise sold are included in cost of sales.

 

Taxes on Revenue Producing Transactions

 

Taxes assessed by governmental authorities on revenue producing transactions, including sales, excise and use taxes, are recorded on a net basis (excluded from revenue) in the consolidated statements of operations.

 

Comprehensive Income

 

Comprehensive income includes net income as currently reported by the Company, adjusted for other comprehensive items. Other comprehensive items for the Company consist of foreign currency translation gains and losses.

 

Advertising

 

Advertising costs are expensed as incurred and are included in general and administrative expenses in the accompanying consolidated statements of operations. Advertising costs totaled approximately $841,000 and $609,000 for the three months ended March 31, 2018 and 2017, respectively.

 

Warranties

 

The Company provides no warranty on products sold. Product warranty is provided by the manufacturers.

 

Income Taxes

 

The Company is treated as a partnership for U.S. federal and most applicable state and local income tax purposes. As a partnership, taxable income or loss is passed through to and included in the taxable income of the Company’s members. Accordingly, the consolidated financial statements do not include a provision for federal income taxes. The Company is liable for various other state and local taxes and is subject to taxes in foreign jurisdictions. Therefore, the provision for income taxes includes only income taxes on income from the Company’s Canadian subsidiary and state income tax, if any, in the consolidated financial statements.

 

The Company utilizes a two-step approach for recognizing and measuring uncertain tax positions accounted for in accordance with the asset and liability method. The first step is to evaluate the tax position for recognition by determining whether evidence indicates that it is more likely than not that a position will be sustained if examined by a taxing authority. The second step is to measure the tax benefit as the largest amount that is 50% likely of being realized upon settlement with a taxing authority. There were no amounts required to be recorded at March 31, 2018 and December 31, 2017 related to uncertain tax positions.

 

Income tax amounts reflected in the accompanying financial statements relate primarily to income generated by the Company’s Canadian subsidiary, and based upon an estimated annual effective income tax rate of approximately 26%, resulting in income tax expense of approximately $82,000 and $38,000, which is included in the consolidated statement of operations for the three months ended March 31, 2018 and 2017, respectively.

 

Interest and penalties associated with uncertain tax positions, if any, are recognized as part of the income tax provision. As of March 31, 2018, and December 31, 2017, respectively, no uncertain tax positions had been identified and no interest or penalties had been accrued.

 

 F-11 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

GREENLANE HOLDINGS, LLC

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

(UNAUDITED)

 

Revenue Recognition

 

The Company recognizes revenue in accordance with ASU 2014-09, Revenue from Contracts with Customers (“ASC 606”). Under ASC 606, the Company recognizes revenue when a customer obtains control of the promised goods or services. The amount of revenue that is recorded reflects the consideration that the Company expects to receive in exchange for those goods or services, net of any variable considerations (e.g., rights to return product, sales incentives, others) and any taxes collected from customers and subsequently remitted to governmental authorities. The Company uses a best estimate approach to measure variable consideration which approximates the expected value method. The Company applies the following five-step model in order to determine this amount: (i) identify the contract(s) with a customer; (ii) identify the performance obligations in the contract; (iii) determine the transaction price; (iv) allocate the transaction price to the performance obligations in the contract; and (v) recognize revenue when (or as) the Company satisfies a performance obligation. The Company only applies the five-step model to contracts when it is probable that the Company will collect the consideration it is entitled to in exchange for the goods or services the Company transfers to the customer. At contract inception, once the contract is determined to be within the scope of ASC 606, management reviews the contract to determine which performance obligations must be delivered and which of these performance obligations are distinct. The Company recognizes as revenue the amount of the transaction price that is allocated to the respective performance obligation when the performance obligation is satisfied.

 

The Company generates revenue primarily from the sale of finished products to customers, whereby each product unit represents a single performance obligation. The performance obligation is satisfied when the customer obtains control of the product, which typically occurs at the time of shipping. Upon shipping, the customer has legal title of the product and bears the significant risks and rewards of ownership, including the right to sell or redirect the product. As such, customer orders are recorded as revenue once the order is shipped from one of the Company’s distribution centers. The Company’s performance obligations for services are satisfied when the services are rendered within the arranged service period. Total service revenue is not material and accounted for less than 0.5% of revenues for the three months ended March 31, 2018 and 2017, respectively.

 

Revenue is presented net of sales taxes, discounts and expected refunds.

 

Product revenues are recorded net of estimated rebates or sales incentives as well as estimated product returns as elements of variable consideration. The actual amounts of consideration ultimately received may differ from the Company’s estimates. If actual results in the future vary from the Company’s estimates, the Company will adjust these estimates, which would affect net revenue from products in the period such variances become known. The Company estimates product returns based on historical experience and records them on a gross basis as a refund liability that reduces the net sales for the period. The Company analyzes actual historical returns, current economic trends and changes in order volume when evaluating the adequacy of the sales returns allowance in any accounting period. The liability for returns is included in accrued expenses on the Company’s consolidated balance sheets and was approximately $400,000 at both March 31, 2018 and December 31, 2017.

 

The Company holds several exclusive distribution agreements with its manufacturers that are evaluated against the criteria outlined in ASC 606-10-55, Principal versus Agent Considerations, in determining whether it is appropriate to record the gross amount of product sales and related costs or the net amount earned. In all arrangements, the Company determined that it acts as the principal in the transaction, controlling the good or service before it is transferred to the customer. As such, the Company records gross revenue for such arrangements.

 

Recently Issued Accounting Pronouncements

 

In February 2016, the Financial Accounting Standards Board (“FASB”) issued ASU 2016-02, Leases (Topic 842), which, among other things, requires lessees to recognize most leases on their balance sheets related to the rights and obligations created by those leases. The new standard also requires new disclosures to help financial statement users better understand the amount, timing, and uncertainty of cash flows arising from leases. The new standard becomes effective for the Company on January 1, 2019, with early adoption permitted. The Company plans to adopt this ASU beginning on January 1, 2019. The amendments in this update should be applied under a modified retrospective approach. The Company is in the process of evaluating the effect that ASU 2016-02 will have on its consolidated financial statements and related disclosures.

 

In August 2016, the FASB issued ASU 2016-15, Statement of Cash Flows (Topic 320): Classification of Certain Cash Receipts and Cash Payments. This ASU addresses the diversity in how certain cash receipts and cash payments are presented and classified in the statement of cash flows, including debt prepayment or debt extinguishment costs, contingent consideration payments made soon after a business combination, proceeds from the settlements of insurance claims, and proceeds from the settlements of bank-owned life insurance (“BOLI”) policies. This amendment became effective for public business entities for reporting periods beginning after December 15, 2017, including interim periods within that reporting period. Early adoption was permitted. Adoption of this ASU on January 1, 2018 had no material impact on the Company’s consolidated financial statements.

 

 F-12 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

GREENLANE HOLDINGS, LLC

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

(UNAUDITED)

 

In January 2017, the FASB issued ASU 2017-01, Business Combinations (Topic 805): Clarifying the Definition of a Business, which amended existing guidance to clarify the definition of a business with the objective of adding guidance to assist entities with evaluating whether transactions should be accounted for as acquisitions of assets or businesses. The amendments provide a screen to determine when a set of assets and activities (collectively referred to as a “set”) is not a business. The screen requires that when substantially all of the fair value of the group assets acquired is concentrated in a single identifiable asset or a group of similar identifiable assets, the set is not a business. If the screen is not met, the amendments (1) require that to be considered a business, a set must include, at a minimum, an input and a substantive process that together significantly contribute to the ability to create output and (2) remove the evaluation of whether a market participant could replace missing elements. The amendments became effective for public business entities for annual periods beginning after December 15, 2017, including interim periods with those periods. Adoption of the guidance on January 1, 2018 had no material impact on the Company’s consolidated financial statements.

 

In January 2017, the FASB issued ASU No. 2017-04, Intangibles—Goodwill and Other: Simplifying the Test for Goodwill Impairment (Topic 350), which removes step two of the goodwill impairment test. A goodwill impairment will now be the amount by which a reporting unit’s carrying value exceeds its fair value, not to exceed the carrying amount of goodwill. For public companies, this ASU is effective for annual or any interim goodwill impairment tests in fiscal years beginning after December 15, 2019, but early adoption is permitted for impairment tests after January 1, 2017. The Company has adopted this standard as of January 1, 2017. There was no impact on the Company’s 2017 consolidated financial statements.

 

NOTE 3. PROPERTY AND EQUIPMENT

 

The following is a summary of property and equipment, at cost less accumulated depreciation and amortization:

 

  

As of

March 31,

2018

  

As of

December 31,

2017

 
Furniture, equipment and software  $1,439,688   $988,584 
Leasehold Improvements   179,926    169,506 
    1,619,614    1,158,090 
Less: accumulated depreciation and amortization   607,188    560,596 
Property and equipment, net  $1,012,426   $597,494 

  

Depreciation expense for property and equipment for the three months ended March 31, 2018 and 2017 was approximately $54,000 and $74,000, respectively.

 

Property and equipment include assets recorded under capital lease agreements. The cost of this equipment was approximately $603,000 and $305,000 at March 31, 2018 and December 31, 2017, respectively. Depreciation expense for these assets is included with depreciation and amortization expense in the consolidated statement of operations.

 

Property and equipment are pledged as collateral for the Company’s line of credit. See Note 8.

 

NOTE 4. GOODWILL AND INTANGIBLE ASSETS

 

Goodwill represents the excess of the purchase price paid over the fair value of the net assets acquired in business combinations. Goodwill is not amortized but is tested for impairment at least annually. When evaluating whether goodwill is impaired, the Company performs a qualitative assessment to determine if it is more likely than not that the fair value of a reporting unit is less than its carrying amount. The Company would then recognize an impairment charge for the amount by which carrying amount exceeds the reporting unit’s estimated fair value; however, goodwill would not be reduced below zero.

 

 F-13 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

GREENLANE HOLDINGS, LLC

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

(UNAUDITED)

 

The Company tests for impairment of goodwill annually or when we deem that a triggering event has occurred. There were no impairments to goodwill recorded during the three months ended March 31, 2018 and 2017. For three months ended March 31, 2018, we recognized $2.3 million in goodwill related to a business acquisition as described in Note 13, “Business Acquisition”.

  

Identified intangible assets consisted of the following:

 

   As of March 31, 2018
   Gross           Estimated
   carrying   Accumulated   Net book   useful lives
   amount   amortization   value   (in years)
Domain Names  $131,000   $(53,195)  $77,805   15
Distribution Agreements   1,650,000    (1,234,722)   415,278   5
Proprietary Technology   1,040,000    (502,667)   537,333   5
Trademarks and Tradenames   2,282,000    (155,033)   2,126,967   5-10
Non-competition Agreements   218,000    (3,633)   214,367   2
Customer Relationships   1,196,000    (19,933)   1,176,067   5
Other Intangibles   94,392    (18,878)   75,514   5
   $6,611,392   $(1,988,061)  $4,623,331    

 

   As of December 31, 2017
   Gross           Estimated
   carrying   Accumulated   Net book   useful lives
   amount   amortization   value   (in years)
Domain Names  $131,000   $(47,015)   83,985   15
Distribution Agreements   1,650,000    (1,180,555)   469,445   5
Proprietary Technology   1,040,000    (450,667)   589,333   5
Trademarks and Tradenames   520,000    (112,667)   407,333   10
Other Intangibles   84,358    (14,618)   69,740   5
   $3,425,358   $(1,805,522)  $1,619,836    

 

Amortization expense for the three months ended March 31, 2018 and 2017 was approximately $187,000 and $82,000, respectively.

 

 F-14 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

GREENLANE HOLDINGS, LLC

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

(UNAUDITED)

 

NOTE 5. COMPOSITION OF CERTAIN FINANCIAL STATEMENT CAPTIONS

  

   As of   As of 
   March 31,   December 31, 
   2018   2017 
Accrued expenses:        
Customer deposits  $1,515,619   $720,527 
Refund liability   400,000    400,000 
Accrued royalties   293,391    299,577 
Accrued bonuses   219,839    200,000 
Employee benefits   125,086    701,304 
Taxes payable   96,846    140,690 
Other   1,280,846    875,574 
   $3,931,627   $3,337,672 

 

NOTE 6. LONG TERM DEBT

  

The Company’s long-term debt consisted of the following amounts at the dates indicated:

 

   As of   As of 
   March 31,   December 31, 
   2018   2017 
         
7.1% note payable to a lender in relation to short term financing of the Company’s insurance premiums. The loan is due within one year.  $175,714   $7,792 
           
10% note payable to a member, interest payable monthly and principal payments deferred indefinitely. See Note 17.   460,967    460,967 
           
6% unsecured loan payable to a director of MSI Imports LLC. The loan has been classified as long-term. See Note 17.   44,569    44,569 
           
Non-interest bearing unsecured loan from a member. The loan has been classified as long-term. See Note 17.   36,000    36,000 
           
10% unsecured note payable to a member. The loan has been classified as long-term. See Note 17.   23,713    23,713 
    740,963    573,041 
Current portion   175,714    7,792 
Long-term portion  $565,249   $565,249 

 

NOTE 7. LEASES

 

Operating Leases

 

The Company leases distribution centers in Florida, California and Ontario, Canada, an administrative office in Boca Raton, Florida and a returns facility in Seattle, Washington from unrelated parties. Rent expense under the Company’s operating leases amounted to approximately $228,000 and $113,000 for the three months ended March 31, 2018 and 2017, respectively.

  

 F-15 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

GREENLANE HOLDINGS, LLC

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

(UNAUDITED)

 

Capital Leases

 

The asset and liability under capital leases have been recorded at the present value of the minimum lease payments.

 

   As of   As of 
   March 31,   December 31, 
   2018   2017 
         
Equipment under capital lease included in property and equipment (Note 3)  $272,032   $154,218 
Less: current portion   (91,433)   (63,155)
Long term capital lease obligation  $180,599   $91,063 

 

NOTE 8. RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

 

WHG expensed approximately $20,000 in the three months ended March 31, 2018 and 2017, respectively, for use of a boat, owned by a related entity, for the Company’s marketing and business entertainment. The related entity is owned by two officers of the Company.

 

WHG purchased approximately $308,000 and $810,000 of merchandise inventory from NWT in the three months ended March 31, 2018 and 2017, respectively. WHG sold approximately $405,000 and $677,000 in merchandise and services to NWT in the three months ended March 31, 2018 and 2017, respectively. As a result of business operations, the Company has both amounts due from NWT and amounts payable to NWT. Such amounts are offset in either accounts receivable or accounts payable at March 31, 2018 and December 31, 2017. As of March 31, 2018, and December 31, 2017, the Company had net accounts receivable of approximately $242,000 and $116,000, respectively, which represented the total amounts due from NWT offset by the total amounts payable to NWT, which is included in “Accounts receivable, net” in the accompanying consolidated balance sheet. A 33.3% interest in NWT is owned by MAHG, and the Company owned 100% of MAHG as of March 31, 2018 and December 31, 2017, respectively.

 

At March 31, 2018 and December 31, 2017, the Company had notes payable to its two members of approximately $565,000. See Note 6. Interest of approximately $15,000 and $12,000 was paid for the three months ended March 31, 2018 and 2017, respectively, to the members in relation to these notes payable.  The balance of these notes payable was paid in full subsequent to March 31, 2018. See Note 17.

 

On October 4, 2017, Jacoby & Co. Inc., the managing member of the Company, entered into a credit agreement which provides for a revolving credit facility of up to $8.0 million. The revolving credit facility matures on October 3, 2018. Interest is payable monthly at LIBOR plus 3.50% per annum provided that no default has occurred. Jacoby & Co. Inc.’s obligations under the credit facility are guaranteed by the Company and all of its operating subsidiaries, and collateralized by the Company’s accounts receivable, inventory, property and equipment, deposit accounts, intangibles and other assets, and an assignment of member life insurance policies. The line of credit borrowing base is 80% of eligible accounts receivable plus 50% of eligible inventory. The line of credit covenants require a fixed charge coverage ratio of no less than 1.25, to be calculated on a quarterly basis, on the last day of each calendar quarter. All draws under the line of credit are advanced by Jacoby & Co, Inc. to the Company’s subsidiary, WHG, and WHG remits all payments required under the line of credit to the third-party lender on behalf of Jacoby & Co., Inc. Therefore, all activity under the line of credit and the outstanding balance are included in the caption Due to Parent in the accompanying consolidated financial statements. Jacoby & Co., Inc. was in compliance with its covenants as of March 31, 2018 and December 31, 2017. The line of credit payable as of March 31, 2018 and December 31, 2017 was approximately $4,690,000 and $611,000, respectively. See Note 17.

 

 F-16 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

GREENLANE HOLDINGS, LLC

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

(UNAUDITED)

 

NOTE 9. CONCENTRATION OF CREDIT RISK AND FOREIGN EXCHANGE RISK

 

Cash balances are maintained at several financial institutions. Accounts are guaranteed by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC) up to $250,000 per institution. At December 31, 2017, none of the Company’s domestic cash balances exceeded the FDIC insured limits. At March 31, 2018, balances in certain accounts exceeded federally insured limits. However, to date, the Company has not incurred any losses on deposits of cash.

 

At March 31, 2018 and December 31, 2017, approximately $101,000 and $192,000, respectively, of the Company’s cash balances were in foreign bank accounts and uninsured.

 

Currency adjustment expense, which is included in general and administrative expense in the accompanying consolidated statements of operations, was approximately $9,000 and $2,000 for the three months ended March 31, 2018 and 2017, respectively. This expense relates to the conversion of transactions of VWD denominated in the functional currency of Canadian dollars into U.S. dollars.

 

Customer Concentration

 

One customer represented approximately 17.4% and  19.1% of the Company’s accounts receivable as of March 31, 2018 and December 31, 2017, respectively. No individual customer or groups of affiliated customers represented more than 5% of the Company’s sales for the three months ended March 31, 2018 or 2017, respectively.

 

Supplier Concentration

 

The Company has two major vendors that accounted for an aggregate of approximately 37% and $33.1 million in purchases from these vendors for the three months ended March 31, 2018, and an aggregate of approximately 23% and $14.3 million in purchases from these same vendors for the three months ended March 31, 2017.  The Company expects to maintain its relationships with these vendors.

 

NOTE 10. COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES

 

In the ordinary course of its business, the Company is involved in various legal proceedings involving a variety of matters. The Company does not believe there are any pending legal proceedings that will have a material adverse effect on the Company’s business, consolidated financial position, results of operations, or cash flows. However, the outcome of such legal matters is inherently unpredictable and subject to significant uncertainties. The Company expenses legal fees in the period in which they are incurred. See Note 7 for discussion of lease commitments.

 

NOTE 11. MEMBERS’ EQUITY

 

Effective February 20, 2018, the Company amended its limited liability company operating agreement (the “LLC Agreement”) and created Class A and Class B membership units in conjunction with the Company’s acquisition of a 100% interest in Better Life Holdings LLC (“BLH”). See Note 13. The Class A units have voting rights and participate in the residual equity of the Company pro-rata with Class B units. See Note 12.

 

Each member’s percentage interest in the Company is outlined in an appendix to the LLC Agreement, whereby it is noted that Jacoby & Co. Inc. holds a 75.00% percentage interest, Adam Schoenfeld holds a 15.00 % percentage interest, Better Life Products Inc. holds a 7.90% percentage interest, and Rochester Vapor Group, LLC holds a 2.10% percentage interest. The LLC Agreement does not provide a number of authorized membership units.

 

NOTE 12. REDEEMABLE CLASS B UNITS

 

Effective February 20, 2018, the Company acquired a 100% interest in BLH in exchange for an aggregate ten percent (10.0%) equity interest in the Company. As consideration for the transaction, the Company issued its Class B membership units, which are contingently redeemable by the holder.

 

The Class B units are non-voting and contain a put right whereby, at any time after the third anniversary of the acquisition of BLH (in each case prior to an effective IPO or Capital Event) each of the holders of Class B Units has the right to require that the Company purchase all, but not less than all, of its Class B Units at an aggregate price equal to the fair market value of the Class B units as of the date of the put notice (as defined), in the form of a cash payment. The Class B units do not contain any mandatory redemption provisions.

 

 F-17 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

GREENLANE HOLDINGS, LLC

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

(UNAUDITED)

 

The Company classifies the redeemable Class B units outside of members’ equity as the units contain contingent redemption features that are not solely within the Company’s control. The initial carrying value of the amount classified in temporary equity for the Class B Units, which were not issued in conjunction with any other freestanding instruments, was based on the issuance date fair value of the Class B Units. As of March 31, 2018, the Company determined that the Class B Units are not probable of becoming redeemable as management believes an IPO event is probable to occur before the third anniversary of the LLC agreement. As a result, the carrying value of the Class B units was not adjusted.

 

NOTE 13. BUSINESS ACQUISITION

 

Effective February 20, 2018, the Company acquired a 100% interest in BLH in exchange for an aggregate ten percent (10.0%) equity interest in the Company. As consideration for the transaction, the Company issued the Class B Units, which are contingently redeemable by the holders. BLH has been consolidated in the Company’s 2018 consolidated financial statements from the February 20, 2018 date of acquisition. The BLH acquisition was accounted for as a business combination under the acquisition method under ASC 805, Business Combinations. The Company has performed a preliminary valuation analysis of the fair market value of BLH’s assets and liabilities. The Company utilized a third-party valuation specialist to determine the fair value of consideration paid and assets acquired, and liabilities assumed. The fair values initially assigned to assets acquired and liabilities assumed are preliminary and could change for up to one year after the closing date of the acquisition as new information and circumstances relative to closing date fair values are known. The following table summarizes the allocation of the preliminary purchase price allocation as of the acquisition date:

 

Better Life Holdings, LLC    
Cash  $785,000 
Accounts receivable   123,000 
Inventory, net   2,977,000 
Non-competition agreements   218,000 
Tradename   1,762,000 
Customer relationships   1,196,000 
Goodwill   2,296,000 
Other assets   703,000 
Accounts payable and other liabilities   (1,170,000)
Total purchase price  $8,890,000 

 

NOTE 14. EARNINGS PER UNIT

 

The Company’s membership interests are defined as percentage interests in the LLC Agreement as the LLC Agreement does not define a number of membership units outstanding or authorized. The Company considered a total of 100 membership units as the denominator of the earnings per unit calculation. Pro forma basic earnings per unit was computed by dividing net income by the pro forma weighted-average number of units outstanding during the period. Pro forma diluted earnings per unit was computed by dividing net income by the pro forma weighted-average number of units outstanding adjusted to give effect to potentially dilutive securities. No such potentially dilutive securities existed for the three months ended March 31, 2018 and 2017, respectively. See Note 15.

 

NOTE 15. SHARE BASED COMPENSATION

 

Profits Interests

 

In January 2017, the Company entered into a profits interest award agreement with one of the Company’s executives, which represents a 2% non-voting interest in the Company when fully vested. Similarly, in 2016, the Company entered into profits interest award agreements with two of the Company’s executives, which, in the aggregate, represent a 3% non-voting interest in the Company when fully vested. All three of the profits interests agreements vest over a four year period. Any unvested portion of the profits interest will vest upon the consummation of a capital event that is also a change in control (as defined) of the Company. The agreements specify that the award entitles the grantee to only participate in certain net profit and net proceeds in excess of a threshold amount (as defined) from a capital event that is also a change in control of the Company, allocated and distributed to the profits interest from and after the grant date, and does not entitle the grantee to any other profits of the Company, and as such is intended to constitute a profits interest under the Company’s LLC Agreement. The Company determined that these awards represent equity instruments and are accounted for under ASC 718, Stock Compensation. The profits interest award provisions include both a service condition (explicit requisite service period) and a performance condition (i.e., change in control). Vesting of the profits interest awards is based on satisfying either the service or the performance condition. As a result, the initial requisite service period is the shorter of the explicit service period for the service condition or the explicit or implicit service period for the performance condition. Under ASC 718, the total fair value of the profits interest awards is measured at grant date and compensation cost is recognized over the service vesting period or accelerated if a change of control occurs prior to the completion of service vesting. The grant date fair value of awards made in 2017 and 2016 was de minimis. As a result, no compensation expense was recognized during the three months ended March 31, 2018 and 2017, respectively.

 

 F-18 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

GREENLANE HOLDINGS, LLC

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

(UNAUDITED)

 

Phantom Equity Units

 

As part of an incentive package awarded during 2017 to certain key employees, the Company has granted these individuals the opportunity to participate in the phantom equity program of WHG.

 

Under these agreements, each participant is guaranteed a “Phantom Equity Payment” in respect to an agreed upon number of bonus units. The number of units varies for each recipient, as defined in his/her individual agreement. Under the phantom equity program, there were 3,000,000 units authorized (representing 3% of WHG), with 1,000,000 and 950,000 units granted under this plan as of March 31, 2018 and December 31, 2017, respectively. The bonus units contain a stated service condition as well as a performance condition whereby the units cannot be settled unless a change in control event occurs under specified terms. The Company determined that the bonus units represent share-based compensation awards which are accounted for as liability awards under ASC 718, Stock Compensation. Recognition of compensation cost is deferred until the consummation of a Sale event (as defined in the agreements), and as such, no associated compensation expense was recognized during the three months ended March 31, 2018 and 2017, respectively. Because liability-classified awards must be remeasured each period, the compensation cost to be recognized upon a change in control event will be equal to the then fair value of the phantom equity awards.

 

NOTE 16. EMPLOYEE BENEFIT PLAN

 

The Company has a 401(k)-retirement savings plan. Eligible employees must be at least 18 years of age and have completed six months of service. Participants are eligible to receive a Company matching contribution up to the first 3% of compensation plus 50% of participant contributions between 3% and 5% of compensation. Matching contributions, other than safe harbor contributions, vest 33% per year and are 100% vested after three years of service. Safe harbor matching contributions are 100% vested as of the date of the contribution. The Company safe harbor matching contributions to the plan totaled approximately $53,000 and $32,000 for the three months ended March 31, 2018 and 2017, respectively.

  

NOTE 17. SUBSEQUENT EVENTS

 

Subsequent events have been evaluated through August 13, 2018, which is the date the financial statements were available to be issued.

 

The Company is subject to certain covenants related to the line of credit described in Note 8. Subsequent to March 31, 2018, the Company obtained a waiver for the line of credit covenant to prevent a covenant violation for the untimely submission of audited financial statements, which has now been met.

 

Shareholder notes payable

 

In April 2018, the Company paid down all of its outstanding promissory notes payable to members and affiliates, which totaled $565,249 at March 31, 2018.

 

All amounts of such notes are classified as long-term debt in the March 31, 2018 consolidated balance sheet.

 

Purchase and sale agreement

 

On June 25, 2018, the Company’s wholly-owned subsidiary, WHG, entered into a purchase and sale agreement with an unrelated third party to purchase a building for $10,000,000, which will serve as the Company’s new corporate headquarters office facility. The closing of the purchase is expected to be financed with a loan of $8,000,000 from an unrelated third party lender and to take place in September 2018.

 

 F-19 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

Members and Board of Directors

Greenlane Holdings, LLC

Boca Raton, Florida

Opinion on the Consolidated Financial Statements

We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of Greenlane Holdings, LLC (the “Company”) and subsidiaries as of December 31, 2017 and 2016, the related consolidated statements of operations, comprehensive income, members’ equity, and cash flows for each of the two years in the period ended December 31, 2017, and the related notes (collectively referred to as the “consolidated financial statements”). In our opinion, the consolidated financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of the Company and subsidiaries at December 31, 2017 and 2016, and the results of their operations and their cash flows for each of the two years in the period ended December 31, 2017, in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America.

Basis for Opinion

These consolidated financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the Company’s consolidated financial statements based on our audits. We are a public accounting firm registered with the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States) (“PCAOB”) and are required to be independent with respect to the Company in accordance with the U.S. federal securities laws and the applicable rules and regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission and the PCAOB.

We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the PCAOB and in accordance with auditing standards generally accepted in the United States of America. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the consolidated financial statements are free of material misstatement, whether due to error or fraud. Our audits included performing procedures to assess the risks of material misstatement of the consolidated financial statements, whether due to error or fraud, and performing procedures that respond to those risks. Such procedures included examining, on a test basis, evidence regarding the amounts and disclosures in the consolidated financial statements. Our audits also included evaluating the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall presentation of the consolidated financial statements. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

 

/s/ BDO USA, LLP

 

We have served as the Company's auditor since 2016.

 

West Palm Beach, Florida

August 13, 2018

 

 F-20 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

  

GREENLANE HOLDINGS, LLC

Consolidated Balance Sheets

 

   December 31, 
   2017   2016 
ASSETS        
Current assets        
Cash  $2,080,397   $1,691,196 
Accounts receivable, net of allowance of $156,472 and $68,600 at December 31, 2017 and 2016, respectively   3,759,551    1,336,982 
Inventories, net   14,159,693    5,618,328 
Vendor deposits   2,338,312    1,026,431 
Other current assets   950,503    330,694 
Total current assets   23,288,456    10,003,631 
           
Property and equipment, net   597,494    354,548 
Intangible assets, net   1,619,836    1,597,971 
Goodwill   3,150,121    3,150,121 
Investments in associated entities   915,920    893,595 
Total assets  $29,571,827   $15,999,866 
           
LIABILITIES AND MEMBERS’ EQUITY          
Current liabilities          
Accounts payable  $15,500,519   $4,603,448 
Accrued expenses   3,337,672    1,138,807 
Due to parent   610,544    - 
Note payable   7,792    - 
Current portion of long-term debt   -    627,681 
Current portion of capital lease obligations   63,155    70,007 
Total current liabilities   19,519,682    6,439,943 
           
Long-term debt   -    1,440,000 
Loans payable to members   565,249    565,249 
Capital lease obligations   91,063    106,035 
Total long-term liabilities   656,312    2,111,284 
Total liabilities   20,175,994    8,551,227 
           
Commitments and contingencies (Note 11)          
           
Members’ equity          
Common units   6,449,921    6,449,921 
Retained earnings   3,154,623    1,245,538 
Accumulated other comprehensive loss   (208,711)   (246,820)
Total members’ equity   9,395,833    7,448,639 
Total liabilities and members’ equity  $29,571,827   $15,999,866 

  

The accompanying Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements are an integral part of these statements.

 

 F-21 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

GREENLANE HOLDINGS, LLC

Consolidated statements of operations

 

   For the years ended
December 31,
 
   2017   2016 
Net sales  $88,259,975   $66,689,944 
Cost of sales   67,689,578    51,735,941 
Gross profit   20,570,397    14,954,003 
Operating expenses          
Salaries, benefits and payroll taxes   8,254,449    6,315,114 
General and administrative   8,808,966    7,952,244 
Depreciation and amortization   791,209    572,155 
Total operating expenses   17,854,624    14,839,513 
Income from operations   2,715,773    114,490 
Other income (expense):          
Interest expense   (269,710)   (183,878)
Other income, net   28,027    265,300 
Other income (expense)   (241,683)   81,422 
Income before income taxes   2,474,090    195,912 
Provision for income taxes   182,533    108,927 
Net income  $2,291,557   $86,985 
           
Pro-forma earnings per unit:          
Basic and diluted  $22,916   $870 
Pro-forma weighted-average units outstanding:          
Basic and diluted   100    100 

  

The accompanying Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements are an integral part of these statements.

 

 F-22 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

GREENLANE HOLDINGS, LLC

Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income

 

   For the years ended
December 31,
 
   2017   2016 
Net income  $2,291,557   $86,985 
Other comprehensive income (loss):          
Foreign currency translation adjustments   38,109    (4,670)
Total comprehensive income  $2,329,666   $82,315 

 

The accompanying Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements are an integral part of these statements.

 

 F-23 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

GREENLANE HOLDINGS, LLC

Consolidated Statements of Changes in Members’ Equity

 

   Common Units Capital Contribution   Retained Earnings   Accumulated Other Comprehensive Loss   Total 
Balance, December 31, 2015  $6,449,921   $1,588,721   $(242,150)  $7,796,492 
Net income   -    86,985    -    86,985 
Member distributions   -    (430,168)   -    (430,168)
Effects of foreign currency exchange   -    -    (4,670)   (4,670)
Balance, December 31, 2016   6,449,921    1,245,538    (246,820)   7,448,639 
Net income   -    2,291,557    -    2,291,557 
Member distributions   -    (282,472)   -    (282,472)
Retrospective adjustment related to adoption of ASC 606   -    (100,000)   -    (100,000)
Effects of foreign currency exchange   -    -    38,109    38,109 
Balance, December 31, 2017  $6,449,921   $3,154,623   $(208,711)  $9,395,833 

 

The accompanying Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements are an integral part of these statements.

 

 F-24 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

GREENLANE HOLDINGS, LLC

Consolidated Statements of Cash flows

 

   For the years ended
December 31,
 
   2017   2016 
Cash flows from operating activities:        
Net income  $2,291,557   $86,985 
Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by operating activities:          
Depreciation and amortization   791,209    572,026 
Provision for doubtful accounts   247,836    201,368 
Provision for slow moving or obsolete inventory   67,466    21,915 
Other   (100,000)   - 
Changes in operating assets and liabilities:          
Accounts receivable, net   (2,670,405)   324,472 
Vendor deposits   (1,311,881)   105,868 
Inventories   (8,608,831)   350,409 
Other assets   (619,809)   54,006 
Accounts payable   10,897,072    833,090 
Accrued expenses   2,198,865    331,025 
Income from equity method investments in associated entities   (22,325)   (237,578)
Net cash provided by operating activities   3,160,754    2,643,586 
Cash flows from investing activities:          
Purchase of property and equipment   (393,125)   (76,342)
Purchase of intangible assets   (662,896)   - 
Net cash used in investing activities   (1,056,021)   (76,342)
Cash flows from financing activities:          
Payments on long-term debt   (2,067,681)   (763,865)
Proceeds from related parties - line of credit, net   610,544    - 
Payments on line of credit, net   -    (26,215)
Proceeds from note payable   7,792    - 
Payments of capital lease obligations   (21,824)   (65,294)
Member distributions   (282,472)   (430,168)
Net cash used in financing activities   (1,753,641)   (1,285,542)
Effects of exchange rate changes on cash   38,109    (4,670)
Net increase in cash   389,201    1,277,032 
Cash, as of beginning of year   1,691,196    414,164 
Cash, as of end of year  $2,080,397   $1,691,196 
           
SUPPLEMENTAL DISCLOSURES OF CASH FLOW INFORMATION          
Cash paid during the year for interest  $269,710   $183,878 
Cash paid during the year for income taxes  $181,203   $- 

  

The accompanying Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements are an integral part of these statements.

 

 F-25 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

GREENLANE HOLDINGS, LLC

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 1. BUSINESS OPERATIONS

 

Greenlane Holdings, LLC (formerly known as Jacoby Holdings, LLC) (the “Company), is a holding company with investments in several companies that merchandise vaporizers and other products in the United States and Canada. Through its operating subsidiaries, the Company distributes to retailers through its wholesale operations and to consumers through its e-commerce activities. The Company operates four distribution centers in the United States and one distribution facility in Canada. In both 2017 and 2016, approximately 7% of net sales were generated through the Company’s Canadian operations.

 

The Company was organized under the laws of the state of Delaware on October 28, 2015, and is based in Boca Raton, Florida.

 

NOTE 2. SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES

 

Principles of Consolidation

 

The consolidated financial statements have been prepared in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States (“U.S. GAAP”) for all periods presented and include the accounts of the Company and its wholly-owned subsidiaries. All significant intercompany balances and transactions have been eliminated in consolidation. The Company is planning for an initial public offering in 2018; therefore these consolidated financial statements include the application of U.S. GAAP for public entities.

 

The accompanying financial statements include the accounts of the Company consolidated with its 100% wholly-owned subsidiaries, Warehouse Goods LLC (“WHG”), Aerospaced LLC, BioVapor Solutions LLC (“BVS”), Mid-Atlantic Holdings Group LLC (“MAHG”) and MSI Imports, LLC. WHG owns 100% of GS Fulfillment LLC (“GS Fulfillment) and Vape World Distribution LTD (“VWDL”), the Company’s Canadian subsidiary.

 

In August 2017, WHG formed HS Products, LLC (“HS Products”), which operates the Higher Standards retail website. In September 2017, WHG formed Higher Standards Chelsea Market LLC (“HSCM”), a wholly-owned subsidiary. Both entities were organized in the state Delaware. In late December 2017, HSCM opened its first flagship store in New York City’s Chelsea Market area.

 

Use of Estimates

 

The preparation of financial statements in conformity with U.S. GAAP requires the use of estimates that affect certain reported amounts and disclosures. These estimates are based on management’s knowledge and experience. Significant items subject to such estimates include the accounts receivable allowance for doubtful accounts and allowance for slow-moving or obsolete inventory. Accordingly, actual results could differ from those estimates.

 

Segment Reporting

 

The Company has two distinct operating segments (the United States operations and Canadian operations). The Canadian operating segment consists of VWDL, the Company’s wholly-owned Canadian subsidiary. The United States operating segment is comprised of all other subsidiaries. Each of the Company’s operating segments share similar economic and other qualitative characteristics that meet all the criteria to be aggregated as one reportable segment. The Company has one reportable segment, which has been identified based on how the chief operating decision maker (“CODM”) manages the business, makes operating decisions and evaluates operating performance. The Company’s CODM is the Chief Executive Officer.

 

Business Combinations

 

Business combinations are accounted for under the acquisition method of accounting in accordance with ASC Topic 805, Business Combinations (“ASC 805”). Under the acquisition method, the acquiring entity in a business combination recognizes 100 percent of the acquired assets and assumed liabilities, regardless of the percentage owned, at their estimated fair values as of the date of acquisition. Any excess of the purchase price over the fair value of net assets and other identifiable intangible assets acquired is recorded as goodwill. To the extent the fair value of net assets acquired, including other identifiable assets, exceeds the purchase price, a bargain purchase gain is recognized. Assets acquired, and liabilities assumed from contingencies, must also be recognized at fair value if the fair value can be determined during the measurement period. Results of operations of an acquired business are included in the consolidated statement of operations from the date of acquisition. Acquisition-related costs, including conversion and restructuring charges, are expensed as incurred.

 

 F-26 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

GREENLANE HOLDINGS, LLC

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

Share-Based Compensation

 

The Company granted certain incentive awards in the form of profits interests and phantom unit awards to certain individuals currently employed by the Company. The phantom unit awards and the profits interest awards include both a service condition and a performance condition which must be satisfied in order for the awards to vest and for settlement to occur. Vesting of the profits interest awards is based on satisfying either the service or the performance condition. As a result, the initial requisite service period is the shorter of the explicit service period for the service condition or the explicit or implicit service period for the performance condition. The Company accounts for these awards in accordance with ASC Topic 718, Stock Compensation (“ASC 718”). See Note 14.

 

Fair Value Measurements

 

The carrying amounts of the Company’s financial instruments, including cash and cash equivalents, accounts receivable, accounts payable, accrued expenses and short-term debt, are carried at historical cost basis, which approximates their fair values because of the short-term nature of these instruments. The fair value of long-term debt is the estimated amount the Company would have to pay to repurchase the debt, including any premium or discount attributable to the difference between the stated interest rate and market rate of interest at each balance sheet date. As of December 31, 2017 and 2016, the carrying amount of the Company’s long-term debt approximated its fair value.

 

The Company determines the fair market values of its financial instruments based on the fair value hierarchy, which requires an entity to maximize the use of observable inputs and minimize the use of unobservable inputs when measuring fair value. The following three levels of inputs may be used to measure fair value:

 

Level 1   Quoted prices in active markets for identical assets or liabilities that the Company has the ability to access at the measurement date.
   
Level 2 Observable inputs other than Level 1 prices, such as quoted prices for similar assets or liabilities; quoted prices in markets that are not active; or other inputs that are observable or can be corroborated by observable market data for substantially the full term of the assets or liabilities.
   
Level 3 Unobservable inputs that are supported by little or no market activity and that are significant to the fair value of the assets or liabilities.

 

Cash

 

The Company considers all highly-liquid investments with original maturities of three months or less from date of purchase to be cash equivalents. As of December 31, 2017 and 2016, the Company had no cash equivalents.

 

Accounts Receivable

 

Accounts receivable represent amounts due from customers for merchandise sales and are recorded when product has shipped. An account is considered past due when payment has not been rendered by its due date based upon the terms of the sale. Generally, accounts receivable are due 30 days after the billing date. The Company evaluates its accounts receivable and establishes an allowance for doubtful accounts based on a history of collections as well as current credit conditions. Accounts are written off as uncollectible on a case-by-case basis. Accounts receivable were reported net of the allowance for doubtful accounts of approximately $156,000 and $69,000 at December 31, 2017 and 2016, respectively. Accounts receivable are pledged as collateral for the line of credit. See Note 6.

 

Inventory

 

Inventory consists principally of finished goods that are valued at the lower of cost or net realizable value on a weighted average cost basis. ASU 2015-11, Simplifying the Measurement of Inventory, was adopted during the year ended December 31, 2017. The Company has established an allowance for slow-moving or obsolete inventory based upon assumptions about future demands and market conditions. At December 31, 2017 and 2016, the reserve for obsolescence was approximately $151,000 and $83,000, respectively. Inventory is pledged as collateral for the line of credit. See Note 6.

 

 F-27 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

GREENLANE HOLDINGS, LLC

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

Property and Equipment, net

 

Property and equipment are recorded at historical cost, less accumulated depreciation and amortization. Depreciation and amortization are computed using the straight-line method over the estimated useful lives of the asset. Upon the sale or retirement of equipment, the cost and related accumulated depreciation are removed from the accounts and the difference between book value and any proceeds realized on the sale is charged or credited to income. Expenditures for repairs and maintenance are charged to operations as incurred.

 

Depreciation and amortization are recorded under the straight-line method over the estimated useful lives which are as follows:

 

Furniture, equipment and software 3-7 years
Leasehold improvements Lesser of lease term or 5 years

 

Impairment of Long-Lived Assets

 

The Company assesses the recoverability of the carrying amount of its property and equipment whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying amount of an asset or asset group may not be recoverable. An impairment loss would be assessed when estimated undiscounted future cash flows from the operation and disposition of the asset group are less than the carrying amount of the asset group. Asset groups have identifiable cash flows and are largely independent of other asset groups. Measurement of an impairment loss is based on the excess of the carrying amount of the asset group over its fair value. During the years ended December 31, 2017 and 2016, management determined that no impairment charges on long-lived assets were required to be recorded.

 

Intangible Assets, net

 

Intangible assets consist of domain names, intellectual property, distribution agreements, proprietary technology, trademarks and trade names, and other rights. The Company assesses the recoverability of finite-lived intangible assets, other than goodwill, in the same manner as for property and equipment, as described above. There was no impairment loss for intangible assets for the years ended December 31, 2017 and 2016. See Note 5.

 

Goodwill

 

Goodwill, representing the difference between total purchase price and fair value of assets acquired (tangible and intangible) and liabilities assumed at the date of acquisition, is reviewed for impairment annually, and more frequently as circumstances warrant, and written down only in the period in which the recorded value of such assets and liabilities exceeds fair value. 

 

In January 2017, the Financial Accounting Standards Board (“FASB”) issued Accounting Standard Update No: 2017-04 (“ASU 2017-04”) - Intangibles – Goodwill and Other (Topic 350): Simplifying the Test for Goodwill Impairment, which simplifies the accounting for goodwill impairment. This updated guidance removed Step 2 of the goodwill impairment test, which required a hypothetical purchase price allocation. The amendment requires the Company to perform the goodwill impairment test by comparing the fair value of a reporting unit with its carrying amount and recognizing an impairment charge for the amount by which the carrying amount exceeds the fair value. Additionally, an entity should consider the tax effects from any tax-deductible goodwill on the carrying amount when measuring the impairment loss. This amendment is effective for public business entities for reporting periods beginning after December 15, 2019, including interim periods within that reporting period. Early adoption is permitted on annual goodwill impairment tests performed after January 1, 2017.

 

In the fourth quarter of 2017, the Company determined that it would elect early adoption of ASU 2017-04. The Company performed its annual goodwill impairment assessment effective October 1, 2017 and determined there was no impairment. See Note 5.

 

 F-28 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

GREENLANE HOLDINGS, LLC

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

Equity Method Investments

 

Investee companies that are not consolidated, but over which the Company exercises significant influence, are accounted for under the equity method of accounting. Whether or not the Company exercises significant influence with respect to an investee depends on an evaluation of several factors including, among others, representation on the investee company’s board of directors and ownership level, which is generally a 20% to 50% interest in the voting securities of the investee company. Under the equity method of accounting, an investee company’s accounts are not reflected within the Company’s consolidated balance sheets and statements of operations; however, the Company’s share of the earnings or losses of the investee company is reflected in the caption “Other income, net” in the consolidated statements of operations. The Company’s carrying value in an equity method investee company is reflected in the caption “Investments in associated entities” in the Company’s consolidated balance sheets. When the Company’s carrying value in an equity method investee company is reduced to zero, no further losses are recorded in the Company’s consolidated financial statements unless the Company has guaranteed obligations of the investee company or has committed additional funding. When the investee company subsequently reports income, the Company will not record its share of such income until it equals the amount of its share of losses not previously recognized.

 

The Company’s investment in a company that is accounted for on the equity method of accounting consisted of a 33.3% non-controlling interest in NWT Holdings, LLC (“NWT”), a manufacturer of vaporizers. The investment in NWT amounted to approximately $916,000 and $894,000 at December 31, 2017 and 2016, respectively. The income from the equity method investment for the years ended December 31, 2017 and 2016 was approximately $22,000 and $238,000, respectively.

 

The following tables present summarized financial information for NWT:

 

   For the years ended
December 31,
 
   2017   2016 
         
Net sales  $7,644,788   $9,286,012 
Gross profit   2,881,114    3,752,483 
Income from continuing operations   67,021    712,221 
Net income   67,021    712,221 

  

   December 31, 
   2017   2016 
         
Current assets  $1,387,347   $4,632,808 
Noncurrent assets   403,277    513,194 
Current liabilities   2,161,103    5,585,745 
Noncurrent liabilities   251,855    250,708 

  

Vendor Deposits

 

Vendor deposits represent prepayments made to vendors for inventory purchases. A significant number of vendors require prepayment for inventory purchases made by the Company. The Company had approximately $2,338,000 and $1,026,000 in vendor deposits at December 31, 2017 and 2016, respectively.

 

Accrued Royalties

 

As part of its distribution agreement with Grenco Science, Inc. (“Grenco Science”), the Company distributes licensed products with associated royalties. Grenco Science manufactures products licensed with various artists and music personalities. The Company accrues royalties associated with the sale of such products. Accrued royalties at December 31, 2017 and 2016, were approximately $300,000 and $203,000, respectively. See Note 6.

 

Customer Deposits

 

In August 2016, the Company launched a dedicated dispensary division and established a supply chain for premium, patented, child-resistant packaging, closed-system vaporization solutions and custom-branded retail products. For these product offerings, the Company receives a deposit from the customer (generally 50% of the total order cost, but the amount can vary by customer contract). These orders are typically completed within six weeks to three months from the date of order, depending on the complexity of the customization and the size of the order. Customer deposits at December 31, 2017 and 2016 were approximately $721,000 and $18,000, respectively. See Note 6.

 

 F-29 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

GREENLANE HOLDINGS, LLC

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

Foreign Currency

 

The accompanying consolidated financial statements are presented in United States (U.S.) dollars. The functional currency of VWDL, the Company’s Canadian subsidiary, is the Canadian dollar. The assets and liabilities of VWDL are translated into U.S. dollars at current exchange rates and revenue and expenses are translated at average exchange rates for the year. Capital accounts are translated at their historical exchange rates when the capital transactions occurred. The foreign currency translation adjustments are included in accumulated other comprehensive loss, a separate component of members’ equity in the consolidated balance sheets. Other exchange gains and losses are reported in the consolidated statements of operations. See Note 10.

 

Shipping and Handling

 

Shipping and handling revenue is included in net sales. Shipping and handling costs for merchandise sold are included in cost of sales.

 

Taxes on Revenue Producing Transactions

 

Taxes assessed by governmental authorities on revenue producing transactions, including sales, excise and use taxes, are recorded on a net basis (excluded from revenue) in the consolidated statements of operations.

 

Comprehensive Income

 

Comprehensive income includes net income as currently reported by the Company, adjusted for other comprehensive items. Other comprehensive items for the Company consist of foreign currency translation gains and losses.

 

Advertising

 

Advertising costs are expensed as incurred and are included in general and administrative expenses in the accompanying consolidated statements of operations. Advertising costs totaled approximately $2,291,000 and $2,265,000 for the years ended December 31, 2017 and 2016, respectively.

 

Warranties

 

The Company provides no warranty on products sold. Product warranty is provided by the manufacturers.

 

Income Taxes

 

The Company is treated as a partnership for U.S. federal and most applicable state and local income tax purposes. As a partnership, taxable income or loss is passed through to and included in the taxable income of the Company’s members. Accordingly, the consolidated financial statements do not include a provision for federal income taxes. The Company is liable for various other state and local taxes and is subject to taxes in foreign jurisdictions. Therefore, the provision for income taxes includes only income taxes on income from the Company’s Canadian subsidiary and state income tax, if any, in the consolidated financial statements.

 

The Company utilizes a two-step approach for recognizing and measuring uncertain tax positions accounted for in accordance with the asset and liability method. The first step is to evaluate the tax position for recognition by determining whether evidence indicates that it is more likely than not that a position will be sustained if examined by a taxing authority. The second step is to measure the tax benefit as the largest amount that is 50% likely of being realized upon settlement with a taxing authority. There were no amounts required to be recorded at December 31, 2017 or 2016 related to uncertain tax positions.

 

 F-30 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

GREENLANE HOLDINGS, LLC

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

Income tax amounts reflected in the accompanying financial statements relate primarily to income generated by the Company’s Canadian subsidiary, are based upon an estimated annual effective income tax rate of approximately 26%, resulting in income tax expense of approximately $183,000 and $109,000, which is included in the consolidated statement of operations for 2017 and 2016, respectively.

 

Interest and penalties associated with uncertain tax positions, if any, are recognized as part of the income tax provision. As of December 31, 2017, and 2016, no uncertain tax positions had been identified and no interest or penalties had been accrued.

 

Revenue Recognition

 

In May 2014, the FASB issued ASU 2014-09, Revenue from Contracts with Customers (Topic 606). The new revenue standard outlines a new, single comprehensive model for entities to use in accounting for revenue arising from contracts with customers and supersedes most current revenue recognition guidance, including industry-specific guidance. The new revenue standard contains principles to determine the measurement of revenue and timing of when it is recognized. The guidance provides a five-step analysis of transactions to determine when and how revenue is recognized. Under the new model, recognition of revenue occurs when a customer obtains control of promised goods or services in an amount that reflects the consideration to which the entity expects to be entitled in exchange for those goods or services. In addition, the new standard requires that reporting companies disclose the nature, amount, timing, and uncertainty of revenue and cash flows arising from contracts with customers. 

 

The Company adopted the provisions of this guidance on January 1, 2017 using the modified retrospective approach with a cumulative-effect adjustment to beginning members’ equity at January 1, 2017. The comparative information has not been restated and continues to be reported under the accounting standards in effect for the period presented.

 

See Note 3 - Revenue Recognition, for additional accounting policy and transition disclosures.

 

Recently Issued Accounting Pronouncements

 

In February 2016, the FASB issued ASU 2016-02, Leases (Topic 842), which, among other things, requires lessees to recognize most leases on their balance sheets related to the rights and obligations created by those leases. The new standard also requires new disclosures to help financial statement users better understand the amount, timing, and uncertainty of cash flows arising from leases. The new standard becomes effective for the Company on January 1, 2019, with early adoption permitted. The Company plans to adopt this ASU beginning on January 1, 2019. The amendments in this update should be applied under a modified retrospective approach. The Company is in the process of evaluating the effect that ASU 2016-02 will have on its consolidated financial statements and related disclosures.

 

In August 2016, the FASB issued ASU 2016-15, Statement of Cash Flows (Topic 320): Classification of Certain Cash Receipts and Cash Payments. This ASU addresses the diversity in how certain cash receipts and cash payments are presented and classified in the statement of cash flows, including debt prepayment or debt extinguishment costs, contingent consideration payments made soon after a business combination, proceeds from the settlements of insurance claims, and proceeds from the settlements of bank-owned life insurance (“BOLI”) policies. This amendment became effective for public business entities for reporting periods beginning after December 15, 2017, including interim periods within that reporting period. Early adoption was permitted. Adoption of this ASU on January 1, 2018 had no material impact on the Company’s consolidated financial statements.

 

In January 2017, the FASB issued ASU 2017-01, Business Combinations (Topic 805): Clarifying the Definition of a Business, which amended existing guidance to clarify the definition of a business with the objective of adding guidance to assist entities with evaluating whether transactions should be accounted for as acquisitions of assets or businesses. The amendments provide a screen to determine when a set of assets and activities (collectively referred to as a “set”) is not a business. The screen requires that when substantially all of the fair value of the group assets acquired is concentrated in a single identifiable asset or a group of similar identifiable assets, the set is not a business. If the screen is not met, the amendments (1) require that to be considered a business, a set must include, at a minimum, an input and a substantive process that together significantly contribute to the ability to create output and (2) remove the evaluation of whether a market participant could replace missing elements. The amendments became effective for public business entities for annual periods beginning after December 15, 2017, including interim periods with those periods. Adoption of the guidance on January 1, 2018 had no material impact on the Company’s consolidated financial statements.

 

In January 2017, the FASB issued ASU No. 2017-04, Intangibles—Goodwill and Other: Simplifying the Test for Goodwill Impairment (Topic 350), which removes step two of the goodwill impairment test. A goodwill impairment will now be the amount by which a reporting unit’s carrying value exceeds its fair value, not to exceed the carrying amount of goodwill. For public companies, this ASU is effective for annual or any interim goodwill impairment tests in fiscal years beginning after December 15, 2019, but early adoption is permitted for impairment tests after January 1, 2017. The Company has adopted this standard as of January 1, 2017. There was no impact on the Company’s 2017 consolidated financial statements.

 

 F-31 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

  

GREENLANE HOLDINGS, LLC

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 3.  REVENUE RECOGNITION

 

On January 1, 2017, the Company adopted ASU 2014-09, Revenue from Contracts with Customers (“ASC 606” or “Topic 606”) applying the modified retrospective method. Results for reporting periods beginning January 1, 2017 are presented under Topic 606, while prior period amounts are not adjusted and continue to be reported under the FASB Accounting Standard Codification Topic 605 (“Topic 605”) in effect for the prior periods and are, therefore, not comparative. The Company applied the practical expedient in paragraph 606-10-65-1(h) of Topic 606, and did not restate the accounting for contracts that were completed as of the date of initial application, i.e., January 1, 2017. Furthermore, the Company applied the practical expedient in paragraph 606-10-65-1(f)(4) of Topic 606, and did not separately evaluate the effects of contract modifications. Instead, the Company reflected the aggregate effect of all the modifications that occurred before the initial application date, i.e., January 1, 2017.

 

Prior to the adoption of Topic 606, revenue was recognized when persuasive evidence of an arrangement existed, shipment had occurred, customers took ownership and assumed the risk of loss, price was fixed and determinable and collectability was reasonably assured. The timing of revenue recognition based on this criteria typically coincided with product delivery. Furthermore, under Topic 605, revenue was recognized net of sales returns, incentives, and allowances.

 

Under Topic 606, the Company recognizes revenue when a customer obtains control of the promised goods or services. The amount of revenue that is recorded reflects the consideration that the Company expects to receive in exchange for those goods or services, net of any variable considerations (e.g., rights to return product, sales incentives, others) and any taxes collected from customers and subsequently remitted to governmental authorities. The Company uses a best estimate approach to measure variable consideration which approximates the expected value method. The Company applies the following five-step model in order to determine this amount: (i) identify the contract(s) with a customer; (ii) identify the performance obligations in the contract; (iii) determine the transaction price; (iv) allocate the transaction price to the performance obligations in the contract; and (v) recognize revenue when (or as) the Company satisfies a performance obligation. The Company only applies the five-step model to contracts when it is probable that the Company will collect the consideration it is entitled to in exchange for the goods or services the Company transfers to the customer. At contract inception, once the contract is determined to be within the scope of Topic 606, management reviews the contract to determine which performance obligations must be delivered and which of these performance obligations are distinct. The Company recognizes as revenue the amount of the transaction price that is allocated to the respective performance obligation when the performance obligation is satisfied.

 

The Company generates revenue primarily from the sale of finished products to customers, whereby each product unit represents a single performance obligation. The performance obligation is satisfied when the customer obtains control of the product, which typically occurs at the time of shipping. Upon shipping, the customer has legal title of the product and bears the significant risks and rewards of ownership, including the right to sell or redirect the product. As such, customer orders are recorded as revenue once the order is shipped from one of the Company’s distribution centers. The Company’s performance obligations for services are satisfied when the services are rendered within the arranged service period. Total service revenue is not material and accounted for less than 0.5% of revenues for the year ended December 31, 2017.

 

The Company elected to account for shipping and handling expenses that occur after the customer has obtained control of products as a fulfillment activity in cost of sales. Shipping and handling fees charged to customers are included in net sales upon completion of the Company’s performance obligations. Revenue is presented net of sales taxes, discounts and expected refunds.

 

 F-32 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

GREENLANE HOLDINGS, LLC

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

Product revenues are recorded net of estimated rebates or sales incentives as well as estimated product returns as elements of variable consideration. The actual amounts of consideration ultimately received may differ from the Company’s estimates. If actual results in the future vary from the Company’s estimates, the Company will adjust these estimates, which would affect net revenue from products in the period such variances become known. The Company estimates product returns based on historical experience and records them on a gross basis as a refund liability that reduces the net sales for the period. The Company analyzes actual historical returns, current economic trends and changes in order volume when evaluating the adequacy of the sales returns allowance in any accounting period. The liability for returns is included in accrued expenses on the Company’s consolidated balance sheets and was approximately $400,000 at December 31, 2017. This liability was not estimated under ASC 605, but was recorded as an adjustment to retained earnings under ASC 606, as described further below.

 

The Company evaluated the criteria outlined in ASC 606-10-55, Principal versus Agent Considerations, in determining whether it is appropriate to record the gross amount of product sales and related costs or the net amount earned related to the Company’s exclusive distribution agreements with manufacturers. In all arrangements, the Company determined that it acts as the principal in the transaction, controlling the good or service before it is transferred to the customer. As such, the Company records gross revenue for such arrangements.

 

The Company applied the practical expedient provided for by ASC 606 by not adjusting the transaction price for significant financing components for periods less than one year. The Company also applied the practical expedient provided for by ASC 606 based upon which the Company generally expenses sales commissions when incurred because the amortization period is one year or less. These costs are recorded within salaries, benefits and payroll tax expenses in the consolidated statements of operations. Furthermore, the Company does not disclose the value of unsatisfied performance obligations for contracts with an original expected length of one year or less.

 

Impacts on Consolidated Financial Statements on January 1, 2017:

 

Upon the initial adoption of Topic 606, the Company recorded an adjustment of $400,000 to record refund liabilities related to the Company’s estimate of returns, offset by a $300,000 asset for the right to recover products from customers based on the Company’s return policy with its customers. The cumulative impact to retained earnings as of January 1, 2017 was $100,000. The following tables summarize the impacts of this adjustment on the Company’s condensed consolidated balance sheet as of January 1, 2017.

 

   As previously recorded under ASC 605 December 31,
2016
   Adjustments   As revised January 1, 2017 
ASSETS            
Current assets            
Other current assets  $330,694   $300,000   $630,694 
Total current assets   10,003,631    300,000    10,303,631 
Total assets  $15,999,866   $300,000   $16,299,866 
                
LIABILITIES AND MEMBERS’ EQUITY               
                
Current liabilities               
Accrued expenses  $1,086,536   $400,000   $1,486,536 
Total current liabilities   6,439,943    400,000    6,839,943 
Total liabilities   8,551,227    400,000    8,951,227 
Members’ equity               
Retained earnings   1,245,538    (100,000)   1,145,538 
Total members’ equity   7,448,639    (100,000)   7,348,639 
Total liabilities and members’ equity  $15,999,866   $300,000   $16,299,866 

 

 F-33 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

GREENLANE HOLDINGS, LLC

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

Impacts on Consolidated Financial Statements at December 31, 2017:

 

The following tables compares the reported condensed consolidated balance sheet as of December 31, 2017, to the pro-forma amounts had the previous guidance been in effect:

 

   As reported   Adjustments   Balances without adoption of Topic 606 
             
ASSETS            
Current assets            
Deferred costs - outbound inventory in transit  $-   $578,137   $578,137 
Total current assets   23,288,456    578,137    23,866,593 
Total assets  $29,571,827   $578,137   $30,149,964 
                
LIABILITIES AND MEMBERS’ EQUITY               
Current liabilities               
Deferred revenue  $-   $922,586   $922,586 
Total current liabilities   19,519,682    922,586    20,442,268 
Total long-term liabilities   656,312    -    656,312 
Total liabilities   20,175,994    922,586    21,098,580 
Members’ equity               
Retained earnings   3,154,623    (344,449)   2,810,174 
Total members’ equity   9,395,833    (344,449)   9,051,384 
Total liabilities and members’ equity  $29,571,827   $578,137   $30,149,964 

 

The adjustments to deferred costs and deferred revenue relate to the deferral of revenue recognition under Topic 605 based on the time of product delivery, whereas net sales and the related cost of sales were recognized at the time of product shipping under Topic 606.

 

The following table compares the reported condensed consolidated statement of operations for the year ended December 31, 2017, to the pro-forma amounts had the previous guidance been in effect:

 

   As reported   Adjustments   Balances without adoption of Topic 606 
Net sales  $88,259,975   $(922,586)  $87,337,389 
Cost of sales   67,689,578    (578,137)   67,111,441 
Gross profit   20,570,397    (344,449)   20,225,948 
Total operating expenses   17,854,624    -    17,854,624 
Income from operations   2,715,773    (344,449)   2,371,324 
Other income (expense)   (241,683)   -    (241,683)
Income before income taxes   2,474,090    (344,449)   2,129,641 
Provision for income taxes   182,533    -    182,533 
Net income  $2,291,557   $(344,449)  $1,947,108 

 

The impact to net sales and costs of sales relates to the deferral of revenue recognition under Topic 605 based on the time of product delivery, whereas net sales and the related cost of sales were recognized at the time of product shipping under Topic 606.

 

 F-34 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

GREENLANE HOLDINGS, LLC

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 4. PROPERTY AND EQUIPMENT

 

The following is a summary of property and equipment, at cost less accumulated depreciation and amortization:

 

   As of December 31, 
   2017   2016 
Furniture, equipment and software  $988,584   $725,361 
Leasehold Improvements   169,506    133,383 
    1,158,090    858,744 
Less: accumulated depreciation and amortization   560,596    504,196 
Property and equipment, net  $597,494   $354,548 

 

Depreciation expense for property and equipment for the years ended December 31, 2017 and 2016 was approximately $150,000 and $150,000, respectively.

 

Property and equipment include assets recorded under capital lease agreements. The cost of this equipment was approximately $305,000 and $330,000 at December 31, 2017 and 2016, respectively. Depreciation expense for these assets is included with depreciation and amortization expense in the consolidated statements of operations. Accumulated amortization expense was approximately $149,000 and $125,000 at December 31, 2017 and 2016, respectively.

 

Property and equipment are pledged as collateral for the Company’s line of credit. See Note 6.

 

NOTE 5. GOODWILL AND INTANGIBLE ASSETS

 

In accordance with ASU 2017-04, the Company performs an analysis of goodwill impairment on an annual basis, or when there are triggering events, using the simplified impairment test. Under ASU 2017-04, an organization performs its annual or interim goodwill impairment test by comparing the fair value of a reporting unit with its carrying amount. An entity would then recognize an impairment charge for the amount by which carrying amount exceeds the reporting unit’s estimated fair value; however, goodwill would not be reduced below zero. ASU 2017-04 eliminates Step 2 of the traditional impairment test.   Based on the impairment analysis performed in the fourth quarter, the Company has concluded that goodwill was not impaired at December 31, 2017 and 2016.

 

At December 31, 2017 and 2016, the Company had $3,150,121 of goodwill that resulted from business combinations that occurred prior to January 1, 2016. The composition of intangible assets subject to amortization at December 31, 2017 and 2016, and associated accumulated amortization was as follows:

 

   As of December 31, 2017 
   Gross carrying amount   Accumulated  amortization   Net book value   Estimated useful lives
(in years)
 
Domain Names  $131,000   $(47,015)  $83,985    15 
Distribution Agreements   1,650,000    (1,180,555)   469,445    5 
Proprietary Technology   1,040,000    (450,667)   589,333    5 
Trademarks and Tradenames   520,000    (112,667)   407,333    10 
Other Intangibles   84,358    (14,618)   69,740    5 
   $3,425,358   $(1,805,522)  $1,619,836      

 

   As of December 31, 2016 
   Gross carrying  amount   Accumulated  amortization   Net book value   Estimated useful  lives
(in years)
 
Domain Names  $131,000   $(43,006)  $87,994    15 
Distribution Agreements   1,000,000    (800,000)   200,000    5 
Proprietary Technology   1,040,000    (242,667)   797,333    5 
Trademarks and Tradenames   520,000    (60,667)   459,333    10 
Other Intangibles   82,036    (28,725)   53,311    5 
   $2,773,036   $(1,175,065)  $1,597,971      

 

Amortization expense relating to the above intangible assets was approximately $631,000 and $419,000 for the years ended December 31, 2017, and 2016, respectively.

 

 F-35 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

GREENLANE HOLDINGS, LLC

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

Approximate estimated amortization for each of the five succeeding fiscal years based on intangible assets as of December 31, 2017 is expected to be as follows:

 

For the year ended December 31,    
2018  $505,000 
2019  $501,000 
2020  $285,000 
2021  $74,000 
2022  $72,000 
Thereafter  $183,000 

 

Intangible assets are pledged as collateral on the line of credit. See Note 6.

 

NOTE 6. COMPOSITION OF CERTAIN FINANCIAL STATEMENT CAPTIONS

 

  As of December 31, 
   2017   2016 
Accrued expenses:        
Customer deposits  $720,527   $17,613 
Refund liability   400,000    - 
Accrued royalties   299,577    202,949 
Accrued bonuses   200,000    100,000 
Employee benefits   701,304    406,875 
Taxes payable   140,690    108,052 
Other   875,574    303,318 
   $3,337,672   $1,138,807 

 

 F-36 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

GREENLANE HOLDINGS, LLC

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 7. LONG TERM DEBT

 

The Company’s long-term debt consisted of the following amounts as of the dates indicated:

 

   As of December 31, 
   2017   2016 
Prime plus 1.25% term loan payable to Marquis Bank collateralized by accounts receivable, inventory, property and equipment, deposit accounts, intangibles and other assets, assignment of shareholder life insurance, and guaranteed by the Company’s members. Monthly principal payments beginning September 12, 2015 of $45,000 plus interest, with maturity on August 12, 2020. Repaid in October 2017.  $-   $1,980,000 
7.1% note payable to a lender in relation to short term financing of the Company’s insurance premiums. The loan is due within one year.   7,792    - 
10% note payable to a member, interest payable monthly and principal payments deferred indefinitely. See Note 17.   460,967    460,967 
6% unsecured loan payable to a director of MSI Imports LLC. The loan has been classified as long-term. See Note 17.   44,569    44,569 
Non-interest bearing unsecured loan from a member. The loan has been classified as long-term. See Note 17.   36,000    36,000 
10% unsecured note payable to a member. The loan has been classified as long-term. See Note 17.   23,713    23,713 
Non-interest bearing note payable to unrelated party for the BVS acquisition in 2015, $7,971 payable monthly, matured November 2017.   -    87,681 
    573,041    2,632,930 
Current portion   7,792    627,681 
Long-term portion  $565,249   $2,005,249 

 

The following is a schedule of approximate maturities of long-term debt subsequent to December 31, 2017:

 

Year ending December 31,    
2018  $- 
2019   113,000 
2020   113,000 
2021   113,000 
2022   113,000 
Thereafter   113,000 
   $565,000 

 

 F-37 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

GREENLANE HOLDINGS, LLC

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 8. LEASES

 

Operating Leases

 

The Company leases distribution centers in Florida, California and Ontario, Canada, an administrative office in Boca Raton, Florida and a returns facility in Seattle, Washington from unrelated parties. Rent expense under the above operating leases amounted to approximately $422,000 and $362,000 for the years ended December 31, 2017 and 2016, respectively.

 

Approximate future minimum lease payments under non-cancelable lease terms in excess of one year with unrelated parties are as follows:

 

Year ending December 31,    
2018  $478,000 
2019   363,000 
2020   293,000 
2021   274,000 
2022   216,000 
Thereafter   198,000 
   $1,822,000 

 

Capital Leases

 

The asset and liability under capital leases have been recorded at the present value of the minimum lease payments.

 

   As of December 31, 
   2017   2016 
         
Equipment under capital lease included in property and equipment (Note 4)  $154,218   $176,042 
Less: current portion   (63,155)   (70,007)
Long term capital lease obligation  $91,063   $106,035 

 

Approximate minimum future lease payments and present values of the minimum lease payments are as follows:

 

Year ending December 31,    
2018  $72,100 
2019   38,200 
2020   28,000 
2021   24,000 
2022   11,800 
Total minimum lease payments   174,100 
Less: imputed interest   19,900 
Present value of minimum lease payments  $154,200 

 

NOTE 9. RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

 

WHG expensed approximately $81,000 and $62,000 in the years ended December 31, 2017 and 2016, respectively, for use of a boat, owned by a related entity, for the Company’s marketing and business entertainment. The related entity is owned by two officers of the Company.

 

WHG purchased approximately $3,133,000 and $4,819,000 of merchandise inventory from NWT in the years ended December 31, 2017 and 2016, respectively. WHG sold approximately $1,919,000 and $2,209,000 in merchandise and services to NWT in the years ended December 31, 2017 and 2016, respectively. As a result of business operations, the Company has both amounts due from NWT and amounts payable to NWT. Such amounts are offset in either accounts receivable or accounts payable at December 31, 2017 and 2016. As of December 31, 2017, the Company had a net accounts receivable of approximately $116,000, which represented the total amounts due from NWT offset by the total amounts payable to NWT, which is included in “Accounts receivable, net” in the accompanying consolidated balance sheet. As of December 31, 2016, the Company had approximately $605,000 net payable to NWT, which was included in “Accounts payable” in the accompanying consolidated balance sheet. A 33.3% interest in NWT is owned by MAHG, and the Company owned 100% of MAHG as of December 31, 2017 and 2016.

 

At December 31, 2017 and 2016, the Company had notes payable to its two members of approximately $565,000. See Note 7. Interest of approximately $63,000 and $50,000 was paid for the years ended December 31, 2017 and 2016, respectively, to the members in relation to these notes payable. The balance of these notes payable was paid in full subsequent to December 31, 2017. See Note 16.

 

 F-38 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

GREENLANE HOLDINGS, LLC

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

On October 4, 2017, Jacoby & Co. Inc., the managing member of the Company, entered into a credit agreement which provides for a revolving credit facility of up to $8.0 million. The revolving credit facility matures on October 3, 2018. Interest is payable monthly at LIBOR plus 3.50% per annum provided that no default has occurred. Jacoby & Co. Inc.’s obligations under the credit facility are guaranteed by the Company and all of its operating subsidiaries, and collateralized by the Company’s accounts receivable, inventory, property and equipment, deposit accounts, intangibles and other assets, and an assignment of member life insurance policies. The line of credit borrowing base is 80% of eligible accounts receivable plus 50% of eligible inventory. The line of credit covenants require a fixed charge coverage ratio of no less than 1.25, to be calculated on a quarterly basis, on the last day of each calendar quarter. All draws under the line of credit are advanced by Jacoby & Co, Inc. to the Company’s subsidiary, WHG, and WHG remits all payments required under the line of credit to the third-party lender on behalf of Jacoby & Co., Inc. Therefore, all activity under the line of credit and the outstanding balance are included in the caption Due to Parent in the accompanying consolidated financial statements. In connection with Jacoby & Co., Inc. securing the line of credit with the third-party lender, the Company used proceeds from the draws under the line of credit to pay down the existing credit facility with a third-party lender in October 2017, which had a balance of $1,980,000 at December 31, 2016. The early extinguishment of this debt resulted in a write off of deferred financing costs of approximately $64,000 related to the old credit facility, offset by approximately $27,600 of accumulated amortization on the asset. Jacoby & Co., Inc. was in compliance with its covenants as of December 31, 2017. The line of credit payable as of December 31, 2017 was approximately $611,000. See Note 16.

 

NOTE 10. CONCENTRATION OF CREDIT RISK AND FOREIGN EXCHANGE RISK

 

Cash balances are maintained at several financial institutions. Accounts are guaranteed by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC) up to $250,000 per institution. At December 31, 2017 and 2016, none of the Company’s domestic cash balances exceeded the FDIC insured limits. At December 31, 2017 and 2016, approximately $192,000 and $143,000, respectively, of the Company’s cash balances were in foreign bank accounts and uninsured.

 

Currency adjustment expense, which is included in general and administrative expense in the accompanying consolidated statements of operations, for the years ended December 31, 2017 and 2016 was approximately $9,200 and $9,600, respectively. This expense related to the conversion of transactions of VWDL denominated in the functional currency of Canadian dollars into U.S. dollars.

 

Customer Concentration

 

One customer represented approximately 19.1% and 24.2% of the Company’s accounts receivable as of December 31, 2017 and 2016, respectively. No individual customer or groups of affiliated customers represented more than 5% of the Company’s sales for the years ended December 31, 2017 and 2016, respectively.

 

Supplier Concentration

 

The Company has two major vendors that accounted for an aggregate of approximately 37% and $33.1 million in purchases from vendors for the year ended December 31, 2017, and an aggregate of approximately 23% and $14.3 million in purchases from these same vendors for the year ended December 31, 2016. The Company expects to maintain its relationships with these vendors.

 

NOTE 11. COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES

 

In the ordinary course of its business, the Company is involved in various legal proceedings involving a variety of matters. The Company does not believe there are any pending legal proceedings that will have a material adverse effect on the Company’s business, consolidated financial position, results of operations, or cash flows. However, the outcome of such legal matters is inherently unpredictable and subject to significant uncertainties.

 

The Company expenses legal fees in the period in which they are incurred. See Note 8 for discussion of lease commitments.

 

 F-39 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

GREENLANE HOLDINGS, LLC

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 12. MEMBERS’ EQUITY

 

As of and for the years ended December 31, 2017 and 2016, respectively, the Company’s limited liability company operating agreement (the “LLC agreement”) provided for a single class of common membership interests. Each member’s percentage interest in the Company is outlined in an appendix to the LLC agreement, whereby it is noted that Jacoby & Co. Inc. held an 83.3334% percentage interest and Adam Schoenfeld held a 16.6666% percentage interest at December 31, 2017 and 2016. The LLC Agreement does not provide a number of authorized membership units. See Note 16.

 

NOTE 13. EARNINGS PER UNIT

 

The Company’s membership interests are defined as percentage interests in the LLC agreement, as the LLC agreement does not define a number of membership units outstanding or authorized. There were no changes to the Company’s membership percentage interests during 2016 or 2017. As such, the Company considered a total of 100 membership units as the denominator of the earnings per unit calculation.

 

Pro forma basic earnings per unit was computed by dividing net income by the pro forma weighted-average number of units outstanding during the period. Pro forma diluted earnings per unit was computed by dividing net income by the pro forma weighted-average number of units outstanding adjusted to give effect to potentially dilutive securities. No such potentially dilutive securities existed for the years ended December 31, 2017 and 2016. See Note 14.

 

NOTE 14. SHARE-BASED COMPENSATION

 

Profits Interests

 

In January 2017, the Company entered into a profits interest award agreement with one of the Company’s executives, which represents a 2% non-voting interest in the Company when fully vested. Similarly, in 2016, the Company entered into profits interest award agreements with two of the Company’s executives, which, in the aggregate, represent a 3% non-voting interest in the Company when fully vested. All three of the profits interests agreements vest over a four year period. Any unvested portion of the profits interest will vest upon the consummation of a capital event that is also a change in control (as defined) of the Company. The agreements specify that the award entitles the grantee to only participate in certain net profit and net proceeds in excess of a threshold amount (as defined) from a capital event that is also a change in control of the Company, allocated and distributed to the profits interest from and after the grant date, and does not entitle the grantee to any other profits of the Company, and as such is intended to constitute a profits interest under the Company’s LLC agreement. The Company determined that these awards represent equity instruments and are accounted for under ASC 718, Stock Compensation. The profits interest award provisions include both a service condition (explicit requisite service period) and a performance condition (i.e., change in control). Vesting of the profits interest awards is based on satisfying either the service or the performance condition. As a result, the initial requisite service period is the shorter of the explicit service period for the service condition or the explicit or implicit service period for the performance condition. Under ASC 718, the total fair value of the profits interest awards is measured at grant date and compensation cost is recognized over the service vesting period or accelerated if a change of control occurs prior to the completion of service vesting. The grant date fair value of awards made in 2017 and 2016 was de minimis. As a result, no compensation expense was recognized during the years ended December 31, 2017 and 2016.

 

Phantom Equity Units

 

As part of an incentive package awarded during 2017 to certain key employees (nine employees as of December 31, 2017), the Company has granted these individuals the opportunity to participate in the phantom equity program of WHG.

 

Under these agreements, each participant is guaranteed a “Phantom Equity Payment” in respect to an agreed upon number of bonus units. The number of units varies for each recipient, as defined in his/her individual agreement. Under the phantom equity program, there were 3,000,000 units authorized (representing 3% of WHG), with 950,000 units granted under this plan as of December 31, 2017. The bonus units contain a stated service condition as well as a performance condition whereby the units cannot be settled unless a change in control event occurs under specified terms. The Company determined that the bonus units represent share-based compensation awards which are accounted for as liability awards under ASC 718, Stock Compensation. Recognition of compensation cost is deferred until the consummation of a Sale event (as defined in the agreements), and as such, no associated compensation expense was recognized during the year ended December 31, 2017. Because liability-classified awards must be remeasured each period, the compensation cost to be recognized upon a change in control event will be equal to the then fair value of the phantom equity awards.

 

 F-40 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

GREENLANE HOLDINGS, LLC

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 15. EMPLOYEE BENEFIT PLAN

 

The Company has a 401(k)-retirement savings plan. Eligible employees must be at least 18 years of age and have completed six months of service. Participants are eligible to receive a Company-matching contribution up to the first 3% of compensation plus 50% of participant contributions between 3% and 5% of compensation. Matching contributions, other than safe harbor contributions, vest 33% per year and are 100% vested after three years of service. Safe harbor matching contributions are 100% vested as of the date of the contribution. The Company safe harbor matching contributions to the plan totaled approximately $139,000 and $121,000 for the years ended December 31, 2017 and 2016, respectively.

 

   As of December 31, 
   2017   2016 
Accrued expenses:        
Customer deposits  $720,527   $17,613 
Refund liability   400,000    - 
Accrued royalties   299,577    202,949 
Accrued bonuses   200,000    100,000 
Employee benefits   701,304    406,875 
Taxes payable   140,690    108,052 
Other   875,574    303,318 
   $3,337,672   $1,138,807 

 

NOTE 16. SUBSEQUENT EVENTS

 

Subsequent events have been evaluated through August 13, 2018, which is the date the financial statements were available to be issued.

 

The Company is subject to certain covenants related to its line of credit described in Note 6. Subsequent to December 31, 2017, the Company and its parent company co-creditor obtained a waiver for the line of credit covenant to prevent a covenant violation for the untimely submission of audited financial statements.

 

Effective February 20, 2018, the Company amended its LLC agreement and created Class A and Class B membership units. The Class A units have voting rights and participate in the residual equity of the Company pro-rata with Class B units. The Class B units are non-voting and contain a put right whereby, at any time after the third anniversary of the LLC agreement (in each case prior to an effective IPO or Capital Event) each of the holders of Class B units has the right to require that the Company purchase all, but not less than all, of its Class B units at an aggregate price equal to the fair market value of the Class B units as of the date of the put notice (as defined).

 

Also, effective February 20, 2018, the Company acquired a 100% interest of Better Life Holdings LLC (“BLH”) in exchange for an aggregate ten percent (10.0%) equity interest in the Company. As consideration for the transaction, the Company issued its Class B units, which are contingently redeemable by the holder. BLH will be consolidated in the Company’s 2018 consolidated financial statements from the February 20, 2018 date of acquisition.

 

The acquisition of the 100% interest in BLH on February 20, 2018 was accounted for as a business combination under the acquisition method under ASC 805, “Business Combinations”. The Company is currently in the process of determining its purchase price allocation accounting for the BLH acquisition.

 

 F-41 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

GREENLANE HOLDINGS, LLC

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

Vibes Holding LLC

 

In February 2018, the Company’s wholly-owned subsidiary, WGH, entered into an operating agreement with Biggerbizz Consulting LLC, a California limited liability company (“Biggerbizz”), to form Vibes Holding, LLC (“VH”), which will be located at the Company’s corporate headquarters in Boca Raton, FL. The purpose of VH will be to launch and develop the Vibes brand and to manufacture and sell products under the Vibes trademarks. As part of the formation of VH, WGH and Biggerbizz each contributed $10,000 in exchange for a 50% ownership interest in VH.

 

Shareholder Note Payable

 

In April 2018, the Company paid down all of its outstanding promissory notes payable to members and affiliates, which totaled $565,000 at December 31, 2017. All amounts were classified as long-term debt in the December 31, 2017 consolidated balance sheet.

 

Name Change

 

Effective July 3, 2018, the legal name of the Company was changed from Jacoby Holdings, LLC to Greenlane Holdings, LLC.

 

Purchase and Sale Agreement

 

On June 25, 2018, the Company’s wholly-owned subsidiary, WHG, entered into a purchase and sale agreement with an unrelated third party to purchase a building for $10,000,000, which will serve as the Company’s new corporate headquarters office facility. The closing of the purchase is expected to be financed with a loan of $8,000,000 from an unrelated third party lender and to take place in September 2018.

  

 F-42 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

  

 

INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT

 

To the Board of Directors and Members of Better Life Holdings, LLC

 

Report on the Financial Statements

 

We have audited the accompanying financial statements of Better Life Holdings, LLC (a Delaware limited liability company), which comprise the balance sheet as of December 31, 2017, the related statements of operations, changes in members’ equity and cash flows for the year then ended, and the related notes to the financial statements.

 

Management’s Responsibility for the Financial Statements

 

Management is responsible for the preparation and fair presentation of these financial statements in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America; this includes the design, implementation, and maintenance of internal control relevant to the preparation and fair presentation of financial statements that are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error.

 

Auditor’s Responsibility

 

Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audit. We conducted our audit in accordance with auditing standards generally accepted in the United States of America. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free from material misstatement.

 

An audit involves performing procedures to obtain audit evidence about the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. The procedures selected depend on the auditor’s judgment, including the assessment of the risks of material misstatement of the financial statements, whether due to fraud or error. In making those risk assessments, the auditor considers internal control relevant to the entity’s preparation and fair presentation of the financial statements in order to design audit procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances, but not for the purpose of expressing an opinion on the effectiveness of the entity’s internal control. Accordingly, we express no such opinion. An audit also includes evaluating the appropriateness of accounting policies used and the reasonableness of significant accounting estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall presentation of the financial statements.

 

We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our audit opinion.

 

Opinion

 

In our opinion, the financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Better Life Holdings, LLC as of December 31, 2017, and the results of its operations and its cash flows for the year then ended in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America.

 

Other Matter

 

As described in Note 10 to the accompanying financial statements, in February of 2018 the Company was purchased in exchange for an equity interest in the acquiring entity. The transaction was accounted for as a business combination and the financial position and results of operations of the Company subsequent to the transaction date will be reported as part of the acquiring entity’s consolidated financial statements.

 

SQUAR MILNER LLP

 

/s/ Squar Milner LLP

 

San Diego, California

June 1, 2018

 

 

 F-43 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

 

 

BETTER LIFE HOLDINGS, LLC
BALANCE SHEET
December 31, 2017

 

 

 

ASSETS    
Current Assets    
Cash  $948,686 
Accounts receivable   104,520 
Due from related party   71,556 
Inventories, net   3,259,954 
Prepaid expenses   6,851 
Total current assets   4,391,567 
      
Property and equipment, net   292,285 
Goodwill   33,333 
Other assets   34,635 
      
Total assets  $4,751,820 
      
LIABILITIES AND MEMBERS’ EQUITY     
      
Current Liabilities     
Accounts payable and accrued expenses  $1,337,548 
Capital lease liability   1,876 
Notes payable – current portion   5,894 
Total current liabilities   1,345,318 
      
Note payable, net of current portion   24,278 
Total liabilities   1,369,596 
      
Members’ Equity   3,382,224 
      
Total liabilities and members’ equity  $4,751,820 

 

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these financial statements.

 

 F-44 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

 

 

BETTER LIFE HOLDINGS, LLC
STATEMENT OF OPERATIONS

For the Year Ended December 31, 2017

 

 

 

SALES – net  $17,213,584 
      
COST OF SALES   13,031,972 
      
GROSS PROFIT   4,181,612 
      
OPERATING EXPENSES     
Selling, general and administrative   4,254,734 
Advertising   274,392 
Depreciation   18,019 
Total operating expenses   4,547,145 
      
OPERATING LOSS   (365,533)
      
OTHER INCOME (EXPENSE)     
Other income   10,103 
Interest expense, net   (2,815)
      
OTHER INCOME, NET   7,288 
      
NET LOSS  $(358,245)

 

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these financial statements.

 

 F-45 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

 

 

BETTER LIFE HOLDINGS, LLC

STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN MEMBERS’ EQUITY
For the Year Ended December 31, 2017

 

 

 

   Class A   Class B     
   Units   Amount   Units   Amount   Total 
                     
Balance – January 1, 2017   12,000,000   $1,046,385    2,317,212   $2,156,873   $3,203,258 
                          
Issuance of Class B units           868,955    825,000    825,000 
                          
Member distributions       (240,000)       (47,789)   (287,789)
                          
Net loss       (298,830)       (59,415)   (358,245)
                          
Balance – December 31, 2017   12,000,000   $507,555    3,186,167   $2,874,669   $3,382,224 

 

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these financial statements.

 

 F-46 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

 

 

BETTER LIFE HOLDINGS, LLC
STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS

For the Year Ended December 31, 2017

 

 

 

CASH FLOWS FROM OPERATING ACTIVITIES    
Net loss  $(358,245)
Adjustments to reconcile net loss to net cash provided by operating activities:     
Depreciation   18,019 
Bad debt expense   12,638 
Inventory reserve   97,225 
Changes in operating assets and liabilities:     
Accounts receivable   34,308 
Due from related party   50,053 
Inventories   (161,105)
Prepaid expenses   84,339 
Other noncurrent assets   4,700 
Accounts payable and accrued expenses   305,259 
Net cash provided by operating activities   87,191 
      
CASH FLOWS FROM INVESTING ACTIVITIES     
Purchase of property and equipment   (119,045)
Net cash used in investing activities   (119,045)
      
CASH FLOWS FROM FINANCING ACTIVITIES     
Proceeds from sale of Class B units   825,000 
Member distributions   (287,789)
Proceeds from note payable   30,172 
Payments on capital leases   (53,096)
Net cash provided by financing activities   514,287 
      
INCREASE IN CASH   482,433 
      
CASH — beginning of year   466,253 
      
CASH — end of year  $948,686 
      
SUPPLEMENTARY DISCLOSURE OF CASH FLOW INFORMATION     
Interest paid  $474 

 

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these financial statements.

 

 F-47 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

 

 

BETTER LIFE HOLDINGS, LLC

NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
December 31, 2017

 

 

 

1.ORGANIZATION AND NATURE OF OPERATIONS

 

Description of Organization

 

Better Life Products, Inc. (“BLP”) was incorporated in California in 2007 as a Subchapter S. Corporation. Better Life Holdings, LLC (the “Company” or “BLH”) was established on April 4, 2016 as a limited liability company in the State of Delaware.

 

On May 16, 2016, BLP entered into a series of legal agreements (the “Transaction”) which resulted in all its assets and liabilities other than the shareholder advances being contributed into the Company. The Company continues BLP’s business as a wholesale distributor and online retailer of vaporizers and accessories, operating under the name of VaporNation. The Company’s principal business location is in Southern California.

 

2.SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES

 

Basis of Accounting

 

The Company’s financial statements are prepared on the accrual basis of accounting in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America (“GAAP”).

 

Use of Estimates

 

The preparation of financial statements in conformity with GAAP requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities and the disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the financial statements, and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting period. Actual results could differ from those estimates.

 

Revenue Recognition

 

The Company recognizes revenue from product sales when the following four revenue recognition criteria are met: persuasive evidence of an arrangement exists, title has transferred, the selling price is fixed or determinable, and collectability is reasonably assured.

 

Product sales and shipping revenues, net of promotional discounts, are recorded when the products are shipped, title passes to customers and collection is reasonably assured. Retail sales to customers are made pursuant to a sales invoice that provides for transfer of both title and risk of loss upon the Company’s delivery to the shipping carrier. Revenue from product sales are recorded net of sales and consumption taxes.

 

The Company periodically provides incentive offers to its customers to encourage purchases. Such offers may include discounts, such as percentage discounts off current purchases. Current discount offers, when accepted by the Company’s customers, are treated as a reduction to the purchase price of the related transaction and the Company reports sales net of discounts on its statements of operations.

 

 F-48 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

 

 

BETTER LIFE HOLDINGS, LLC

NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
December 31, 2017

 

 

 

2.SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued)

 

Shipping and Handling Costs

 

Shipping and handling costs incurred are included in cost of sales and totaled $965,889 for the year ended December 31, 2017.

 

Cash and Cash Equivalents

 

The Company considers all highly liquid investments with an original maturity of three months or less when purchased to be cash equivalents. As of December 31, 2017, there were no cash equivalents.

 

Accounts Receivable

 

Accounts receivable are stated at the amount the Company expects to collect. The Company maintains allowances for doubtful accounts for estimated losses resulting from the inability of its customers to make required payments. Based on management’s assessment, the Company provides for estimated uncollectable amounts through a charge to earnings and a credit to a valuation allowance. Management has determined that no allowance was required at December 31, 2017.

 

Inventories

 

Inventories are stated at the lower of cost (determined by the first-in, first-out method) or net realizable value. The Company provides reserves for excess and obsolete inventories determined primarily based upon inventory on hand, historical sales activity, industry trends and expected net realizable value. As of December 31, 2017, the Company’s inventory reserve was $97,225. The Company’s inventories consist primarily of merchandise available for resale at its primary location and inventories that have been prepaid and are in transit to the Company’s primary location.

 

Property and Equipment

 

Property and equipment is stated at cost less accumulated depreciation and impairment. Depreciation is calculated using the double declining balance method over the estimated useful lives of the assets. Expenditures for repairs and maintenance are charged to expense as incurred. Upon disposition of property and equipment, the costs and related accumulated depreciation amounts are relieved and any resulting gain or loss is reflected in operations during the period of disposition.

 

Long-lived assets are reviewed for impairment when changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying amount of an asset may not be recoverable.

 

Goodwill

 

The Company evaluates goodwill for impairment annually, as well as whenever events or changes in circumstances suggest that the carrying value of goodwill may not be recoverable. The Company tests goodwill for impairment at the reporting unit level, which is consistent with the operating segment, on an annual basis as of December 31 for each year or more frequently if indicators of impairment exist. The Company did not record an impairment charge for the year ended December 31, 2017.

 

 F-49 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

 

 

BETTER LIFE HOLDINGS, LLC

NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
December 31, 2017

 

 

 

2.SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued)

 

Advertising

 

The Company expenses advertising cost as incurred. Advertising expenses amounted to $274,392 during the year ended December 31, 2017.

 

Income Taxes

 

No provision for income taxes has been made in the financial statements as the Company is a “pass through” entity. Each member is individually liable for tax on their share of the Company’s income or loss. The Company prepares a calendar year informational tax return.

 

Lease Accounting

 

The Company evaluates leases for classification as either a capital lease or an operating lease. If substantially all of the benefits and risks of ownership have been transferred to the Company as lessee, the Company records the lease as a capital lease at its inception. The Company performs this evaluation at the inception of the lease and when a modification is made to a lease. If the lease agreement calls for a scheduled rent increase during the lease term, the Company recognizes the lease expense on a straight-line basis over the lease term. The Company determines the straight-line rent impact of an operating lease upon inception of the lease.

 

Assets Held under Capital Leases

 

Assets held under capital leases are recorded at the lower of the net present value of the minimum lease payments or the fair value of the leased asset at the inception of the lease. Depreciation expense is computed using the straight-line method over the shorter of the estimated useful lives of the assets or the period of the related lease. When the Company enters into a lease agreement, it reviews the terms to determine the appropriate classification of the lease as a capital lease or operating lease based on the factors listed in Financial Accounting Standards Board (“FASB”) Accounting Standards Codification (“ASC”) 840, Leases.

 

Recently Issued Accounting Pronouncements

 

In May 2014, the Financial Accounting Standards Board (“FASB”) issued Accounting Standards Update (“ASU”) 2014-09, Revenue from Contracts with Customers. The new guidance establishes a single comprehensive model for entities to use in accounting for revenue and supersedes most current revenue recognition guidance. This guidance introduces a five-step process for revenue recognition that focuses on transfer of control, as opposed to transfer of risk and rewards under current guidance and requires significantly expanded disclosures. Based on the effective date, the Company expects to adopt the new guidance in the first quarter of fiscal year 2019. The Company has not completed its evaluation of the potential impact of adopting the new guidance on its financial statements.

 

 F-50 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

 

 

BETTER LIFE HOLDINGS, LLC

NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
December 31, 2017

 

 

 

2.SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued)

 

Recently Issued Accounting Pronouncements (continued)

 

In February 2016, the FASB issued ASU 2016-02, Leases. The new guidance was issued to increase transparency and comparability among companies by requiring most leases to be included on the balance sheet and by expanding disclosure requirements. Based on the effective date, the Company expects to adopt the new guidance in the first quarter of fiscal 2020 using the modified retrospective method. While the Company expects adoption of this standard to lead to a material increase in the assets and liabilities recorded on the Company’s balance sheet, the Company is still evaluating the overall impact of this guidance.

 

Reclassifications

 

Certain 2016 amounts have been reclassified to conform to 2017 presentation. Such reclassifications had no effect on previously reported net income.

 

3.PROPERTY AND EQUIPMENT, NET

 

Property and equipment consisted of the following as of December 31, 2017:

 

Computer Software  $284,424 
Furniture and Fixtures   127,145 
Machinery & Equipment   381,656 
Less: Accumulated Depreciation   (500,940)
      
Property and Equipment, net  $292,285 

 

Depreciation expense totaled $18,019 during the year ended December 31, 2017.

 

4.NOTES PAYABLE

 

During the year ended December 31, 2017, the Company entered into a borrowing arrangement with a financial institution to purchase an automobile. The note is secured by the automobile asset and bears interest at a rate of 2.99% per annum. The total amount financed under the loan was $31,135 and, as of December 31, 2017 the total outstanding principal balance under the loan totaled $30,172. Future minimum payments required under this note are as follows:

 

Years ending December 31,    
2018  $5,894 
2019   6,072 
2020   6,257 
2021   6,446 
Thereafter   5,503 
      
Total payments  $30,172 

 

 F-51 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

 

 

BETTER LIFE HOLDINGS, LLC

NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
December 31, 2017

 

 

 

5.CONCENTRATION

 

During the year ended December 31, 2017, purchases from three vendors represented 70% of total inventory purchases. As of December 31, 2017, amounts owed to these vendors totaled $433,631 and are included in accounts payable in the accompanying balance sheet.

 

6.RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

 

An affiliate of the Company provides credit card processing services for the Company. The affiliate earned $90,833 for the year ended December 31, 2017 for these services. The affiliate charges a 1% fee on credit card remittances to the Company.

 

The Company pays certain reimbursable operating expenses of an affiliate. The same affiliate also collects cash on behalf of the Company as part of the credit card processing arrangement. The total cash and reimbursable expenses was $71,556 as of December 31, 2017 and are recorded as due from related party on the accompanying balance sheet.

 

7.CAPITAL LEASES

 

The Company leases property under capital leases. Interest rates on capitalized leases range from 4% to 11%, imputed based on the lesser of the Company’s incremental borrowing rate at the inception of each lease or the lessor’s implicit rate of return. Property and equipment includes the following under capital leases at December 31, 2017:

 

Equipment  $331,140 
Less: Accumulated depreciation   (331,140)
      
   $ 

 

Future minimum payments required under these leases together with their present value are as follows:

 

Years ending December 31,    
2018  $1,902 
Total payments   1,902 
Amount representing interest   (26)
   $1,876 

 

 F-52 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

 

 

BETTER LIFE HOLDINGS, LLC

NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
December 31, 2017

 

 

 

8.COMMITMENTS

 

Operating Leases

 

On January 14, 2016, the Company entered into a 63-month lease agreement for its corporate offices in Torrance California, which includes the use of warehouse space. The lease agreement commenced on February 15, 2016 and required monthly rental payments with periodic scheduled increases. Total rent expense under all cancellable and non-cancellable operating leases was $489,593 for the year ended December 31, 2017.

 

Future minimum lease payments under these lease agreements at December 31, 2017, are as follows:

 

Years ending December 31,    
2018  $348,128 
2019   391,256 
2020   402,999 
2021 and thereafter   137,690 
Total payments  $1,280,073 

 

On March 1, 2016, the Company entered into a 12-month sublease agreement related to a portion of its corporate office space. The tenant continued to lease on a month to month basis until the original lease agreement was renewed in October 2017, during which monthly income payments of $9,025 plus its portion of CAM charges were received by the Company. In October 2017, the sublessee vacated the premises and transferred possession of the premises to a third-party without requisite consents. Total rental income under the sublease was $154,333 for the year ended December 31, 2017 and is included in selling, general and administrative expense in the accompanying statement of operations as a reduction of rental expense.

 

9.MEMBERS’ EQUITY

 

The rights and obligations of members, as well as all other significant ownership and governance matters, are set forth in the Company Agreement of Better Life Holdings, LLC.

 

The Company issues membership interests in the form of Units with the following three classes of Units authorized: Class A Common Units (“Class A Units”), Class B Common Units (“Class B Units”) and Profit Units. The Company has authorized 15,000,000 Class A Units, 5,000,000 Class B Units, and 1,900,000 Profit Units. Each Class A Unit and Class B Unit has a vote and profit and losses are allocated proportionally to each Class A and Class B Units as provided in the Company Agreement. The Profit Units are non-voting and are not entitled to distributions or allocations, except upon the occurrence of a liquidity event.

 

With the approval of Rochester Vapor Group, LLC (“RVG”), the Company’s Board of Directors (the “Board”) shall have the right to amend the number of the authorized Class A Units or Class B Units without obtaining the consent of the Members. Unless otherwise determined by the Board or required by applicable law, the Units will not be evidenced by certificates.

 

 F-53 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

 

 

BETTER LIFE HOLDINGS, LLC

NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
December 31, 2017

 

 

 

9.MEMBERS’ EQUITY (continued)

 

During the year ended December 31, 2016, RVG purchased 2,317,212 Class B Units for $2,200,000. In November of 2017, RVG purchased an additional 868,955 Class B Units for $825,000. The B Units have a liquidation preference and other protective rights. Further, if at any time the Company proposes to issue equity securities (other than the issuance of securities to the public in a firm commitment underwriting pursuant to a registration statement filed under the Securities Act), or pursuant to the acquisition of another company by the Company by merger, purchase of substantially all of the assets or other form of reorganization approved by the Board, shall offer to issue to RVG at least fifty percent (50%) of the proposed securities.

 

A Member, by written notice to the Company after May 1, 2019, can request the Company redeem all the Units then held by the Member. The Company shall redeem the Units within six months after the date of such request by the Member.

 

Only a Member may initiate the redemption of Units and other Members may participate in the redemption. The Company shall provide written notice to all Members of their opportunity to participate upon receiving a valid redemption request from a Member.

 

The Company shall pay the Member an amount in cash for the Units equal to the fair market value as determined in good faith by the Board and the unanimous consent of all Members. If the Board and the Member are not able to agree as to the fair market value for the redemption within ten (10) Business Days of receiving a valid redemption request from a Member, then the fair market value shall be determined by mediation or binding arbitration in accordance with the Company Agreement.

 

The Board may issue Profit Units at its discretion. These Units may be issued to employees or other persons as incentives to improve earnings and the growth of the Company and subject to vesting as determined by the Board.

 

Effective January 1, 2017, the Company granted 825,889 Profit Units to certain employees and officers. Profit Units represent the right to participate in future profits and appreciation in the value of the Company after the date of the grant without having to contribute capital to the Company. The award is subject to vesting provisions whereby 100% of the award will vest upon the third anniversary of the date of the grant provided that the grantee remains in the continued service of the Company. In accordance with ASC 718-40, Awards Classified as Equity, management has determined as of the grant date, the estimated fair value of the Profit Units was $0 (see Note 10), and as such, no compensation expense has been recorded for the year ended December 31, 2017.

 

10.SUBSEQUENT EVENTS

 

On February 20, 2018, the Company was acquired by Jacoby Holdings LLC (d/b/a/ Greenlane) in exchange for an equity interest in the acquiring entity. The transaction was accounted for as a business combination and the Company’s financial position and results of operations subsequent to the transaction date will be reported as part of the acquiring entity’s consolidated financial statements. As a result of this transaction, the rights and obligations of the Class A and Class B Units were terminated.

 

Effective February 20, 2018, the Profit Units (see Note 9) were canceled in conjunction with the sale of the Company.

 

The Company has evaluated subsequent events through June 1, 2018, the date on which these financial statements were available to be issued.

  

 F-54 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

 

INDEPENDENT AUDITORS’ REPORT

 

To the Board of Directors and Members

of Better Life Holdings, LLC

 

Report on the Financial Statements

 

We have audited the accompanying financial statements of Better Life Holdings, LLC (a Delaware limited liability company), which comprise the balance sheets as of December 31, 2016 and 2015, and the related statements of operations, members’ equity, and cash flows for the years then ended, and the related notes to the financial statements.

 

Management’s Responsibility for the Financial Statements

 

Management is responsible for the preparation and fair presentation of these financial statements in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America; this includes the design, implementation, and maintenance of internal control relevant to the preparation and fair presentation of financial statements that are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error.

 

Auditors’ Responsibility

 

Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audits. We conducted our audits in accordance with auditing standards generally accepted in the United States of America. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free from material misstatement.

 

An audit involves performing procedures to obtain audit evidence about the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. The procedures selected depend on the auditors’ judgment, including the assessment of the risks of material misstatement of the financial statements, whether due to fraud or error. In making those risk assessments, the auditor considers internal control relevant to the entity’s preparation and fair presentation of the financial statements in order to design audit procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances, but not for the purpose of expressing an opinion on the effectiveness of the entity’s internal control. Accordingly, we express no such opinion. An audit also includes evaluating the appropriateness of accounting policies used and the reasonableness of significant accounting estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall presentation of the financial statements.

 

We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our audit opinion.

 

Opinion

 

In our opinion, the financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Better Life Holdings, LLC as of December 31, 2016 and 2015, and the results of its operations and its cash flows for the years then ended in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America.

 

/s/ LBB & Associates Ltd., LLP

 

LBB & Associates Ltd., LLP

Houston, Texas

December 11, 2017

 

 

 F-55 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

BETTER LIFE HOLDINGS, LLC
BALANCE SHEETS

DECEMBER 31, 2016 AND 2015

  

   2016   2015 
ASSETS        
CURRENT ASSETS:        
Cash and cash equivalents
  $466,253   $541,050 
Accounts receivable, net
   151,466    298,697 
Due from related party   121,609    139,523 
Inventories   3,196,071    2,614,237 
Prepaid
   91,190    28,265 
TOTAL CURRENT ASSETS   4,026,589    3,621,772 
           
Property and equipment, net   191,260    - 
Other non-current assets   39,334    - 
Goodwill   33,333    33,333 
TOTAL ASSETS  $4,290,516   $3,655,105 
           
LIABILITIES AND MEMBERS’ EQUITY          
CURRENT LIABILITIES:          
Accounts payable and accrued expenses  $1,032,289   $1,410,605 
Current portion of capital lease liability   53,856    109,703 
Advances from shareholder   -    852,088 
Notes payable   -    616,809 
TOTAL CURRENT LIABILITIES   1,086,145    2,989,205 
           
Capital lease liability, net of current portion   1,113    48,716 
TOTAL LIABILITIES   1,087,258    3,037,921 
           
COMMITMENTS          
           
MEMBERS’ EQUITY   3,203,258    617,184 
           
TOTAL LIABILITIES AND MEMBERS’ EQUITY  $4,290,516   $3,655,105 

  

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these financial statements.

 

 F-56 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

BETTER LIFE HOLDINGS, LLC
STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS

YEARS ENDED DECEMBER 31, 2016 AND 2015

 

   2016   2015 
         
SALES – net  $15,589,923   $17,870,650 
           
Cost of sales   12,015,561    14,310,160 
           
Gross profit   3,574,362    3,560,490 
           
OPERATING EXPENSES:          
           
Selling, general and administrative   3,533,641    3,709,591 
           
Depreciation & amortization   46,597    21 
           
Advertising   189,845    310,387 
           
Total operating expenses   3,770,083    4,019,999 
           
OPERATING INCOME (LOSS)   (195,721)   (459,509)
           
OTHER INCOME (EXPENSE):          
Other income   20,464    31 
Interest expense, net   (23,305)   (70,423)
           
OTHER INCOME (EXPENSE), NET   (2,841)   (70,392)
           
NET INCOME (LOSS)  $(198,562)  $(529,901)

 

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these financial statements.

  

 F-57 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

BETTER LIFE HOLDINGS, LLC

STATEMENTS OF MEMBERS’ EQUITY
YEARS ENDED DECEMBER 31, 2016 AND 2015

 

   Class A   Class B     
   Units   Amount   Units   Amount   Total 
                     
Balance, December 31, 2014   11,000,000   $1,147,085    -   $-   $1,147,085 
                          
Net loss   -    (529,901)   -    -    (529,901)
                          
Balance, December 31, 2015   11,000,000    617,184    -    -    617,184 
                          
Issuance of Class A units for shareholder advances   1,000,000    748,091    -    -    748,091 
                          
Issuance of Class B units   -    -    2,317,212    2,200,000    2,200,000 
                          
Member distributions   -    (137,000)   -    (26,455)   (163,455)
                          
Net loss   -    (181,890)   -    (16,672)   (198,562)
                          
Balance, December 31, 2016   12,000,000   $1,046,385    2,317,212   $2,156,873   $3,203,258 

 

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these financial statements.

  

 F-58 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

BETTER LIFE HOLDINGS, LLC

STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS

YEARS ENDED DECEMBER 31, 2016 AND 2015

 

   2016   2015 
CASH FLOWS FROM OPERATING ACTIVITIES:        
Net income (loss)  $(198,562)  $(529,901)
Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by (used in) operating activities:          
Depreciation and amortization   46,597    21 
Bad debt expense   5,241    29,946 
Gain on forgiveness of debt   (16,809)   - 
Changes in assets and liabilities:          
Merchant credit card processors reserve   -    60,888 
Accounts receivable   141,990    100,147 
Due from related party   17,914    (77,553)
Inventories   (581,834)   (3,607)
Prepaid expenses   (102,259)   21,620 
Accounts payable and accrued expenses   (329,863)   556,931 
NET CASH PROVIDED (USED) BY OPERATING ACTIVITIES   (1,017,585)   158,492 
           
INVESTING ACTIVITIES:          
Purchase of property and equipment   (237,857)   - 
Disposal of property and equipment   -    - 
NET CASH PROVIDED USED BY INVESTING ACTIVITIES   (237,857)   - 
           
FINANCING ACTIVITIES          
Proceeds from sale of Class B units   1,600,000    - 
Distributions   (163,455)   - 
Payment on advances from shareholder   (152,450)   (233,919)
Payment on capital leases   (103,450)   (102,918)
Proceeds from notes payable   -    616,809 
NET CASH PROVIDED (USED) BY FINANCING ACTIVITIES   1,180,645    279,972 
           
INCREASE (DECREASE) IN CASH   (74,797)   438,464 
CASH — BEGINNING OF YEAR   541,050    102,586 
CASH — END OF YEAR  $466,253   $541,050 
           
Supplementary disclosure of cash flow information:          
Interest paid  $23,305   $29,971 
           
Noncash investing and financing activities:          
Issuance of Class A units for the net assets of BLP  $532,543   $- 
Issuance of Class A units for shareholder advances and accrued expenses  $748,091   $- 
Issuance of Class B units for notes payable  $600,000   $- 

 

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these financial statements.

  

 F-59 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

BETTER LIFE HOLDINGS, LLC

NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

DECEMBER 31, 2016 AND 2015

 

NOTE 1 – ORGANIZATION AND NATURE OF OPERATIONS

 

Description of Organization

 

Better Life Products, Inc. (“BLP”) was incorporated in California in 2007 as a Subchapter S. Corporation. Better Life Holdings, LLC. (the “Company” or “BLH”) was established on April 4, 2016, as a limited liability company in the State of Delaware.

 

On May 16, 2016, BLP entered into a series of legal agreements (the “Transaction”) which resulted in all its assets and liabilities other than the shareholder advances being contributed into the Company. The Company continues BLP’s business as a wholesale distributor and online retailer of vaporizers and accessories, operating under the name of VaporNation. The Company’s principal business location is in Southern California.

 

The Transaction resulted in BLP receiving 11,000,000 Class A units of BLH and its sole shareholder, Mr. Jeffrey Sherman, receiving 1,000,000 Class A units of BLH in exchange for his various shareholder advances, which at May 16, 2016 was $748,091. Further, the Company received a cash contribution of $2,200,000, less notes payable from Rochester Vapor Group, LLC (“RVG”) and RVG affiliates in exchange for 2,317,212 Class B units of BLH. Concurrently, upon the Transaction, $600,000 of these proceeds extinguished all the promissory notes held by affiliates of RVG.

 

As of the date of the Transaction, BLP continues to be the majority owner of the Company’s units. In accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, these financial statements have been prepared to reflect the financial results of BLP and its continuation as the Company. The transaction represents a transfer of net assets between entities under common control. Upon completion of the transfer, pursuant to ASC 805-50-30-5, the Company has recording the net assets at BLP’s carrying amounts.

 

NOTE 2 – SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES

 

Basis of Accounting

 

The Company’s financial statements are prepared on the accrual basis of accounting in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America (“GAAP”).

 

Use of Estimates

 

The preparation of financial statements in conformity with GAAP requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities and the disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the financial statements, and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting period. Actual results could differ from those estimates.

 

Future events and their effects cannot be predicted with certainty; accordingly, accounting estimates require the exercise of judgement. The accounting estimates used in the preparation of the financial statements will change as new events occur, as more experience is acquired, as additional information is obtained, and as the operating environment changes. The Company evaluates and updates the assumptions and estimates used on an ongoing basis as considered necessary. Actual results could differ from those estimates.

 

 F-60 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

BETTER LIFE HOLDINGS, LLC

NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

DECEMBER 31, 2016 AND 2015

 

NOTE 2 – SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES (CONTINUED)

 

Revenue Recognition

 

The Company recognizes revenue from product sales when the following four revenue recognition criteria are met: persuasive evidence of an arrangement exists, delivery has occurred, the selling price is fixed or determinable, and collectability is reasonably assured.

 

Product sales and shipping revenues, net of promotional discounts, are recorded when the products are shipped, title passes to customers and collection is reasonably assured. Retail sales to customers are made pursuant to a sales invoice that provides for transfer of both title and risk of loss upon the Company’s delivery to the shipping carrier. Revenues from product sales are recorded net of sales and consumption taxes.

 

The Company periodically provides incentive offers to its customers to encourage purchases. Such offers may include discounts, such as percentage discounts off current purchases. Current discount offers, when accepted by the Company’s customers, are treated as a reduction to the purchase price of the related transaction and the Company reports sales, net of discounts on its statements of operations.

 

Shipping and Handling Costs

 

The Company’s general policy is to provide free standard shipping and handling for most online-retail and some wholesale orders. Shipping and handling costs incurred are included in cost of sales and totaled $733,399 and $807,708 for the years ended December 31, 2016 and 2915, respectively.

 

Cash and Cash Equivalents

 

The Company considers all highly liquid investments with an original maturity of three months or less when purchased to be cash equivalents.

 

Accounts Receivable

 

Accounts receivable are stated at the amount the Company expects to collect. The Company maintains allowances for doubtful accounts for estimated losses resulting from the inability of its customers to make required payments. Based on management’s assessment, the Company provides for estimated uncollectable amounts through a charge to earnings and a credit to a valuation allowance. Management has determined that no allowance was required at December 31, 2016 and 2015.

 

Due from Merchant Credit Card Processor

 

Due from merchant credit card processor represents monies held by the Company’s credit card processors. The funds are being held by the merchant credit card processors pending satisfaction of their hold requirements and expiration of charge backs/refunds from customers. These amounts are included in due from related party.

 

Inventories

 

Inventories are stated at the lower of cost (determined by the first-in, first-out method) or market. If the cost of the inventories exceeds their market value, provisions are recorded to write down excess inventory to its net realizable value. The Company’s inventories consist primarily of merchandise available for resale at its primary location and inventories that have been pre-paid and are in transit to the Company’s primary location.

 

 F-61 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

BETTER LIFE HOLDINGS, LLC

NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

DECEMBER 31, 2016 AND 2015

 

NOTE 2 – SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES (CONTINUED)

 

Fixed Assets

 

Fixed assets are stated at cost less accumulated depreciation and impairment. Depreciation is calculated using the double declining balance method over the estimated useful lives of the assets. Estimated lives for machinery and equipment, furniture and fixtures and computer and computer software are 5, 7, 3 and 3 years, respectively. Expenditures for repairs and maintenance are charged to expense as incurred. Upon disposition of fixed assets, the costs and related accumulated depreciation amounts are relieved and any resulting gain or loss is reflected in operations during the period of disposition.

 

Long-lived assets are reviewed for impairment when changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying amount of an asset may not be recoverable.

 

Goodwill

 

The Company evaluates goodwill for impairment annually, as well as whenever events or changes in circumstances suggest that the carrying value of goodwill may not be recoverable. The Company tests goodwill for impairment at the reporting unit level which we have determined is consistent with our operating segment, on an annual basis on the December 31 or more frequently if indicators of impairment exist.

 

The goodwill impairment test requires an entity to compare the fair value of a reporting unit with its carrying amount. The Company determines the fair value of its reporting units using a weighting of the income and market approaches. Under the income approach, the Company uses a discounted cash flow methodology which requires management to make significant estimates and assumptions related to forecasted revenues, gross profit margins, operating income margins, working capital cash flow, perpetual growth rates, and long-term discount rates, among others. For the market approach, the Company uses the guideline public company method. Under this method the Company utilizes information from comparable publicly traded companies with similar operating and investment characteristics as the reporting units, to create valuation multiples that are applied to the operating performance of the reporting unit being tested, in order to estimate their respective fair values. In order to assess the reasonableness of the calculated reporting unit fair values, the Company reconciles the aggregate estimated fair values of its reporting units determined to its current market capitalization, allowing for a reasonable control premium. If the carrying amount of a reporting unit, calculated using the above approaches, exceeds the reporting unit’s fair value, an impairment loss is recognized for the amount of the carrying value that exceeds the amount of the reporting unit’s fair value, not to exceed the total amount of goodwill allocated to the reporting unit. Additionally, the Company considers income tax effects from any tax deductible goodwill on the carrying amount of the reporting unit when measuring the goodwill impairment loss, if applicable.

 

There was no impairment of goodwill in any of the fiscal years presented. The Company’s next annual impairment assessment will be performed as of December 31, 2017 unless indicators arise that would require the Company to reevaluate at an earlier date.

 

Advertising

 

The Company expenses advertising cost as incurred. Advertising expenses amounted to $189,845 and $310,387 during the years ended December 31, 2016 and 2015, respectively.

 

 F-62 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

BETTER LIFE HOLDINGS, LLC

NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

DECEMBER 31, 2016 AND 2015

 

NOTE 2 – SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES (CONTINUED)

 

Income Taxes

 

No provision for income taxes has been made in the financial statements as the Company is a “pass through” entity. Each member is individually liable for tax on their share of the Company’s income or loss. The Company prepares a calendar year informational tax return.

 

BLP is a Subchapter S Corporation under the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended. Under this election, the Company’s taxable income or loss flows through to the shareholders of the Company who are responsible for the federal and state taxes due on the taxable income.

 

Lease Accounting

 

The Company evaluates leases for classification as either a capital lease or an operating lease. If substantially all of the benefits and risks of ownership have been transferred to the Company as lessee, the Company records the lease as a capital lease at its inception. The Company performs this evaluation at the inception of the lease and when a modification is made to a lease. If the lease agreement calls for a scheduled rent increase during the lease term, the Company recognizes the lease expense on a straight-line basis over the lease term. The Company determines the straight-line rent impact of an operating lease upon inception of the lease.

 

Assets Held under Capital Leases

 

Assets held under capital leases are recorded at the lower of the net present value of the minimum lease payments or the fair value of the leased asset at the inception of the lease. Depreciation expense is computed using the straight-line method over the shorter of the estimated useful lives of the assets or the period of the related lease. When the Company enters into a lease agreement, the terms are reviewed to determine the appropriate classification of the lease as a capital lease or operating lease based on the factors listed in FASB ASC 840, Leases.

 

Recently Issued Accounting Pronouncements

 

In May 2014, the Financial Accounting Standards Board (“FASB”) issued Accounting Standards Update (“ASU”) 2014-09, Revenue from Contracts with Customers. The new guidance establishes a single comprehensive model for entities to use in accounting for revenue and supersedes most current revenue recognition guidance. It introduces a five-step process for revenue recognition that focuses on transfer of control, as opposed to transfer of risk and rewards under current guidance. It also requires significantly expanded disclosures regarding revenues. We are still evaluating the impact of adopting the new guidance to our annual financial statements.

 

In July 2015, the FASB issued ASU 2015-11, Inventory: Simplifying the Measurement of Inventory. The new guidance replaces the current inventory measurement requirement of lower of cost or market with the lower of cost or net realizable value. Based on the effective dates, we will prospectively adopt this standard in the first quarter of our fiscal 2018. We do not expect a material impact to our financial statements.

 

In February 2016, the FASB issued ASU 2016-02, Leases. The new guidance was issued to increase transparency and comparability among companies by requiring most leases to be included on the balance sheet and by expanding disclosure requirements. Based on the effective dates, we expect to adopt the new guidance in the first quarter of fiscal 2020 using the modified retrospective method. While we expect adoption to lead to a material increase in the assets and liabilities recorded on our balance sheet, we are still evaluating the overall impact on our financial statements.

 

 F-63 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

BETTER LIFE HOLDINGS, LLC

NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

DECEMBER 31, 2016 AND 2015

 

NOTE 2 – SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES (CONTINUED)

 

Reclassifications

 

Certain 2015 amounts have been reclassified to conform to 2016 presentation. Such reclassifications had no effect on previously reported net income.

 

NOTE 3 – PROPERTY AND EQUIPMENT, NET

 

Property and equipment consists of the following:

 

   December 31, 
   2016   2015 
Computer Software  $242,586   $223,198 
Furniture and Fixtures   124,601    44,264 
Machinery & Equipment   306,993    168,861 
Less: Accumulated Depreciation   (482,920)   (436,323)
Property and Equipment, net  $191,260   $- 

 

Depreciation amounted to $46,597 and $21 during the years ended December 31, 2016 and 2015, respectively.

 

NOTE 4 – ADVANCES FROM SHAREHOLDER

 

The Company received advances from its sole shareholder to finance inventory and other working capital needs during each of the years ended 2016 and 2015. The advances had no fixed repayment date, bore interest at 5% and were subordinate to any claims of the Company’s creditors. The Company owes the shareholder $0 and $852,088 as of December 31, 2016 and 2015, respectively. All of the shareholder advances totaling $748,091 were exchanged for the issuance of 1,000,000 Class A units at the date of the Transaction.

 

NOTE 5 – NOTES PAYABLE

 

The Company received cash proceeds represented by promissory notes from affiliates of its potential investor, RVG to finance inventory and other working capital needs during 2015. The notes had a maturity date of August 7, 2016, subject to 6.5% interest rate per annum. The principal amount of the notes payable totaled $600,000 as of December 31, 2015. These notes, and all related interest were fully repaid in exchange for Class B units in accordance with the Transaction.

 

The Company acquired a short term loan $15,970 in 2015 from PubCo Investors for operation expenses. As of December 31, 2016, the lender has relinquished its claim to repayment of this loan. The cancellation of debt and accrued interest of $16,809 was recognized as income in 2016.

 

 F-64 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

BETTER LIFE HOLDINGS, LLC

NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
DECEMBER 31, 2016 AND 2015

 

NOTE 6 – CONCENTRATION

 

During the year ended December 31, 2016, purchases from two vendors represented 19% and 10% of the total inventory purchases. The outstanding accounts payable as of December 31, 2016 owed to these vendors comprised of $173,129 and $5,996, respectively. During the year ended December 31, 2015, purchases from two vendors represented 20% and 14% of the total inventory purchases. The outstanding accounts payable as of December 31, 2015 owed to these vendors comprised of $199,483 and $0, respectively.

 

NOTE 7 – RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

 

An affiliate of the Company provides credit card processing services for the Company. The affiliate charged $106,240 and $114,937 for the years ended December 31, 2016 and 2015, respectively for these services. The affiliate charges a 1% fee on credit card remittances to the Company. The affiliate owes the Company $121,609 and $139,523 as of December 31, 2016 and 2015, respectively, which amounts include merchant card processor holdbacks which are released 3 days after the Company’s customer’s credit card is charged.

 

NOTE 8 – CAPITAL LEASES

 

The Company leases property under capital leases. Interest rates on capitalized leases range from 4% to 11%, imputed based on the lesser of the Company’s incremental borrowing rate at the inception of each lease or the lessor’s implicit rate of return. Property and equipment includes the following under capital leases at December 31:

 

   2016   2015 
Equipment  $333,140    $333,140 
Less: Accumulated depreciation   (333,140)   (333,140)
   $-   $- 

 

Future minimum payments required under these leases together with their present value are as follows:

 

Years ending December 31,    
2017  $54,422 
2018   1,831 
2019   - 
Total payments   56,253 
Amount representing interest   (1,284)
   54,969 
Less current portion   (53,856)
Long-term portion  $1,113 

 

 F-65 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

BETTER LIFE HOLDINGS, LLC

NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

DECEMBER 31, 2016 AND 2015

 

NOTE 9 – COMMITMENTS

 

Operating Leases

 

The Company was obligated under two operating leases for its administrative office and warehouse located in Marina del Rey, California. The administrative office space lease agreement commenced on November 1, 2008 and the warehouse lease agreement commenced on April 16, 2012. Both of the leases terminated on February 29, 2016.

 

On January 14, 2016, the Company entered into a lease agreement for office rent, which includes the use of warehouse space. The lease agreement commenced on February 15, 2016 and continues until May 15, 2021. Rent due under the lease is $27,874 per month for the first 12 months, $30,808 per month for months 13 to 24, $31,732 per month for months 25 to 36, $32,684 per month for months 37 to 48, $33,665 per month for months 49 to 60, and $34,675 per month for months 61 to 63.

 

Rent expense is recognized in the month the office space is utilized. Total rent expense was $205,477 and $192,549 and sublease income was $63,047 and $0 for the years ended December 31, 2016 and 2015, respectively.

 

Future minimum lease payments under these lease and sublease agreements at December 31, 2016, are as follows:

 

Years ending December 31,  Gross
lease
   Sublease income   Net operating lease
commitments
 
2017  $366,762   $(99,750)  $267,012 
2018   379,860    (19,950)   359,910 
2019   391,256    -    391,256 
2020   402,999    -    402,999 
2021 and thereafter   137,690    -    137,690 
Total payments  $1,678,567   $(119,700)  $1,558,867 

 

NOTE 10 – MEMBERS’ EQUITY

 

The rights and obligations of members, as well as all other significant ownership and governance matters, are set forth in the Company Agreement of Better Life Holdings, LLC.

 

The Company issues membership interests in the form of Units with the following three classes of Units authorized: Class A Common Units, Class B Common Units and Profit Units. The Company has authorized 15,000,000 Class A Common Units, 5,000,000 Class B Common Units, and 1,900,000 Profit Units. Each Class A Unit and Class B Unit has a vote and profit and losses are allocated proportionally to each Class A and Class B Unit as provided in the Company Agreement. The Profit Units are non-voting and are not entitled to distributions or allocations, except upon the occurrence of a liquidity event.

 

With the approval of RVG, the Board shall have the right to amend the number of the authorized Class A Common Units or Class B Common Units without obtaining the consent of the Members. Unless otherwise determined by the Board or required by applicable law, the Units will not be evidenced by certificates.

 

Class B Units were issued to Rochester Vapor Group, LLC. The Class B Units have a liquidation preference and other protective rights. Further, if at any time the Company proposes to issue equity securities (other than the issuance of securities to the public in a firm commitment underwriting pursuant to a registration statement filed under the Securities Act), or pursuant to the acquisition of another company by the Company by merger, purchase of substantially all of the assets or other form of reorganization approved by the Board, shall offer to issue to RGV at least fifty percent (50%) of the proposed securities.

 

 F-66 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

BETTER LIFE HOLDINGS, LLC

NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

DECEMBER 31, 2016 AND 2015

 

NOTE 10 – MEMBERS’ EQUITY (CONTINUED)

 

A Member, by written notice to the Company after May 1, 2019, can requests the Company redeem all the Units then held by the Member. The Company shall redeem the Units within six (6) months after the date of such request by the Member.

 

A Member may initiate the redemption of Units and other Members may participate in the redemption. The Company shall provide written notice to all Members of their opportunity to so participate upon receiving a valid redemption request from a Member.

 

The Company shall pay the Member an amount in cash for the Units equal to the fair market value as determined in good faith by the Board and the unanimous consent of all Members. If the Board and the Member are not able to agree as to the fair market value for the redemption within ten (10) Business Days of receiving a valid redemption request from a Member, then the fair market value shall be determined by mediation or binding arbitration in accordance with the Company Agreement.

 

The Board the Company may issue Profit Units at its discretion. These units may be issued to employees or other persons as incentives to improve earnings and the growth of the Company and subject to vesting as determined by the Board.

 

In accordance with the Transaction, Rochester Vapor Group, LLC may at any time before November 16, 2017, invest up to an additional $2,200,000 for additional Class A and Class B units at an adjusted price per unit of $0.95. (see below)

 

NOTE 11 – SUBSEQUENT EVENTS

 

Effective January 1, 2017, the Company granted 825,889 profit units to certain employees and officers. Profit units represent the right to participate in future profits and appreciation in the value of the Company after the date of the grant without having to contribute capital to the Company. The award is subject to vesting provisions whereby 100% of the award will vest upon the third anniversary of the date of the grant provided that the grantee remains in the continued service of the Company through the third anniversary date.

 

In accordance with the Transaction, in November 2017, RVG exercised its rights for additional Class B Units in the amount of $825,000 and in return, received 868,955 Class B Units. Further, the Company extended RVG’s right to invest up to an additional $825,000 for Class B Units at any time before April 30, 2018.

 

In accordance with ASC 855, “Subsequent Events”, the Company has evaluated subsequent events through December 11, 2017, the date on which these financial statements were available to be issued and found no other events requiring disclosure.

 

 F-67 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

 

 

 

 

 

Shares

 

 

Greenlane Holdings, Inc.

 

Class A Common Stock

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

PRELIMINARY PROSPECTUS

 

 

 

 

 

Canaccord Genuity

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

                           , 2018

 

 

 

Until                        , 2018 (25 days after the date of this prospectus), all dealers that buy, sell or trade shares of our Class A common stock, whether or not participating in this offering, may be required to deliver a prospectus. This is in addition to the dealers’ obligation to deliver a prospectus when acting as underwriters and with respect to their unsold allotments or subscriptions.

 

 

  

 

 

 

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

A copy of this preliminary base PREP prospectus has been filed with the securities regulatory authority in each of the provinces and territories of Canada, other than Quebec, but has not yet become final for the purpose of the sale of securities. Information contained in this preliminary base PREP prospectus may not be complete and may have to be amended. The securities may not be sold until a receipt for this preliminary base PREP prospectus is obtained from the securities regulatory authorities.

 

No securities regulatory authority has expressed an opinion about these securities and it is an offence to claim otherwise. This prospectus constitutes a public offering of these securities only in those jurisdictions where they may be lawfully offered for sale and therein only by persons permitted to sell such securities.

 

This preliminary base PREP prospectus has been filed under procedures in each of the provinces and territories of Canada, other than Quebec, that permit certain information about these securities to be determined after the prospectus has become final and that permit the omission of that information from this preliminary base PREP prospectus. The procedures require the delivery to purchasers of a supplemented PREP prospectus containing the omitted information within a specified period of time after agreeing to purchase any of these securities. All of the information contained in the supplemented PREP prospectus that is not contained in this preliminary base PREP prospectus will be incorporated by reference into this preliminary base PREP prospectus as of the date of the supplemented PREP prospectus.

 

We have filed a registration statement on Form S-1 with the United States Securities and Exchange Commission (the “SEC”) under the United States Securities Act of 1933, as amended, with respect to these securities. See “Underwriting” in the U.S. Prospectus (as defined herein).

 

PRELIMINARY BASE PREP PROSPECTUS

 

Initial Public Offering
Secondary Offering
  ●, 2018

 

 

Greenlane Holdings, Inc.

shares of Class A Common Stock

C$per share

 

 

 

This preliminary base PREP prospectus (the “Canadian Prospectus”) qualifies the distribution of an aggregate ● shares of our Class A common stock. We currently expect the public offering price to be between C$● and C$● per share (the “Offering Price”).

 

● shares of our Class A common stock are being offered by Greenlane Holdings, Inc. (“we”, “us”, “our”, the “Company” and “Greenlane”) at the Offering Price and ● shares of our Class A common stock are being offered and sold by Jacoby & Co. Inc., Better Life Products Investment Group, Inc., Rochester Vapor Group, LLC and Adam Schoenfeld (collectively, the “Selling Stockholders”) at the Offering Price. See “Principal and Selling Stockholders” in the U.S. Prospectus.

 

C-1

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Shares of our Class A common stock are being offered for sale concurrently in Canada under this Canadian Prospectus and in the United States under a registration statement on Form S-1 filed with the United States Securities and Exchange Commission (the “Registration Statement”). The Registration Statement contains a form of U.S. preliminary prospectus dated August 14, 2018 (the “U.S. Prospectus”), the full text of which is included in and forms a part of this Canadian Prospectus. Shares of our Class A common stock are being offered in Canada in all provinces and territories of Canada, other than Quebec, by Canaccord Genuity Corp. and ● (collectively, the “Canadian Underwriters”) and in the United States by Canaccord Genuity Corp. and ● (and together with the Canadian Underwriters, the “Underwriters”). The offering is being effected pursuant to an underwriting agreement dated ●, 2018 among us, the Selling Stockholders and each of the Underwriters (the “Underwriting Agreement”). See “Underwriting” in the U.S. Prospectus.

 

Price: C$ per Share

 

    Price to the Public(1)  

Underwriters’

Commissions(2)(3)

 

Net Proceeds

to Us(2)(4)

 

Net Proceeds to the Selling

Stockholders(3)(5)

Per Share   C$●   C$●   C$●   C$●
Total   C$●   C$●   C$●   C$●

 

Notes:

 

(1)The Offering Price for the shares of our Class A common stock has been determined by negotiation among us, the Selling Stockholders and the Underwriters.

 

(2)The Underwriters will receive: (i) a commission (the “Commission”) of 6.0% of the gross amount raised in the offering, payable in cash from the proceeds of the sale of shares of our Class A common stock; and (ii) warrants (the “Compensation Warrants”) entitling the Underwriters to purchase that number of shares of our Class A common stock equal to 3.0% of the number of shares of Class A common stock sold pursuant to the offering for a period of two years following the Closing Date (as hereinafter defined) at the Offering Price per share of Class A common stock. This prospectus qualifies the distribution of the Compensation Warrants to the Underwriters. See “Underwriting” in the U.S. Prospectus for a description of compensation payable to the Underwriters.

 

(3)The Selling Stockholders have granted to the Underwriters an option (the “Over-Allotment Option”), exercisable in whole or in part at any time until 30 days following the Closing Date, to purchase at the Offering Price up to 15% of the number of shares of our Class A common stock purchased under the offering to cover over-allotments, if any, and for market stabilization purposes. If the Over-Allotment Option is exercised in full, the total Price to the Public, Underwriters’ Commission, Net Proceeds to Us and Net Proceeds to the Selling Stockholders will be C$●, C$●, C$● and C$●, respectively. See “Underwriting” and “Principal and Selling Stockholders” in the U.S. Prospectus. This Canadian Prospectus qualifies the grant of the Over-Allotment Option and the distribution of the additional shares of our Class A common stock by the Selling Stockholders upon exercise of the Over-Allotment Option. A purchaser who acquires shares of our Class A common stock forming part of the Underwriters’ over-allocation position acquires those shares of our Class A common stock under this Canadian Prospectus, regardless of whether the over-allocation position is ultimately filled through the exercise of the Over-Allotment Option or secondary market purchases. See “Underwriting” in the U.S. Prospectus.

 

(4)After deducting the Commission but before deducting the expenses of the offering, estimated at C$●, which we will pay out of the proceeds of the sale of shares of our Class A common stock that we receive.

 

(5)The Selling Stockholders will pay the Commission in respect of the Class A common stock sold by the Selling Stockholders. The Selling Stockholders will not pay any expenses of the offering in connection with the secondary offering.

 

There is currently no market through which shares of our Class A common stock may be sold and purchasers may not be able to resell shares of our Class A common stock purchased under this Canadian Prospectus. This may affect the pricing of the securities in the secondary market, the transparency and availability of trading prices, the liquidity of the securities and the extent of issuer regulation. An investment in our Class A common stock is subject to a number of risks that should be considered by a prospective purchaser. Investors should carefully consider the risk factors described under “Risk Factors” in the U.S. Prospectus before purchasing shares of our Class A common stock. We have applied to list our Class A common stock on the Canadian Securities Exchange (the ”CSE”) under the symbol “GNLN”. Listing of our Class A common stock will be subject to us fulfilling all of the listing requirements of the CSE.

 

As of the date hereof, we are an “IPO Venture Issuer” (defined under National Instrument 41-101— General Prospectus Requirements (“NI 41-101”), which is an issuer that does not have any of its securities listed or quoted, has not applied to list or quote any of its securities, and does not intend to apply to list or quote any of its securities, on the Toronto Stock Exchange, Aequitas NEO Exchange Inc., a U.S. marketplace, or a marketplace outside of Canada and the United States of America other than the Alternative Investment Market of the London Stock Exchange or the PLUS markets operated by PLUS Markets Group plc.).

 

C-2

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

The following table summarizes the maximum number of shares of our Class A common stock granted by the Selling Stockholders and us to the Underwriters pursuant to the offering:

 

Underwriters’ Position  

Maximum Number of

Securities Available

  Exercise Period   Exercise Price
Over-Allotment Option(1)   Options to acquire up to ● shares of our Class A common stock   Within 30 days following the Closing Date   C$● per share
             
Compensation Warrants(2)   (2)  

Within 2 years of the

Closing Date

  C$● per share

 

Notes:

 

(1)This Canadian Prospectus qualifies the grant of the Over-Allotment Option by the Selling Stockholders and the distribution of all securities issuable thereunder. See “Underwriting” in the U.S. Prospectus.

 

(2)Each Compensation Warrant entitles the holder thereof to purchase a share of our Class A common stock at the Offering Price.

 

The Canadian Underwriters, as principals, conditionally offer shares of our Class A common stock qualified under this Canadian Prospectus, subject to prior sale, if, as and when issued by us and accepted by the Canadian Underwriters in accordance with the conditions contained in the Underwriting Agreement and subject to the approval of certain legal matters on behalf of us by Dentons Canada LLP, as to matters of Canadian law, and by Pryor Cashman LLP, as to matters of U.S. law, and on behalf of the Underwriters by DLA Piper (Canada) LLP, as to matters of Canadian law, and DLA Piper LLP US, as to matters of U.S. law.

 

Unless otherwise indicated, all information in this Canadian Prospectus assumes that the Over-Allotment Option will not be exercised.

 

Greenlane Holdings, Inc. is a Delaware corporation that was formed to acquire certain equity interests of Greenlane Holdings, LLC. The net proceeds of the offering will be used by us to subscribe for ● units of common membership interest of Greenlane Holdings, LLC (“Common Units”) from Greenlane Holdings, LLC at a price per Common Unit equal to the Offering Price, less the applicable Commission. See “Use of Proceeds” in the U.S. Prospectus. This Canadian Prospectus qualifies the distribution by us of an aggregate ● shares of our Class A common stock and by the Selling Stockholders of ● shares of our Class A common stock issuable upon the redemption of Common Units.

 

The financial statements included in this Canadian Prospectus have not been prepared in accordance with Canadian generally accepted accounting principles or international financial reporting standards (“IFRS”) and may not be comparable to financial statements of a Canadian issuer. See “Notice to Investors Regarding GAAP”.

 

In connection with the offering, and subject to applicable laws, the Underwriters may over-allot or effect transactions that are intended to stabilize or with a view to supporting the market price of our Class A common stock during the stabilization period at levels other than that which might otherwise prevail in the open market. See “Underwriting” in the U.S. Prospectus. The Underwriters may offer shares of our Class A common stock at a lower price than stated above.

 

Subscriptions for shares of our Class A common stock will be received subject to rejection or allotment in whole or in part and the right is reserved to close the subscription books at any time without notice. Shares of our Class A common stock to be issued or sold in this offering in Canada will be issued in registered form to CDS Clearing and Depositary Services Inc. (“CDS”) and deposited with CDS on the closing date of this offering which is expected to occur on or about ●, 2018 or such later date as we, the Selling Stockholders and the Underwriters may agree, but in any event not later than ●, 2018 (the “Closing Date”). A purchaser of shares of our Class A common stock in Canada will receive only a customer confirmation from a registered dealer that is a participant in CDS through which shares of our Class A common stock are purchased.

 

C-3

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Any “template version” of any “marketing materials” (as such terms are defined under Canadian securities laws) that are utilized by the Canadian Underwriters in connection with the offering are not part of this Canadian Prospectus to the extent that the contents of the template version of the marketing materials have been modified or superseded by a statement contained in this Canadian Prospectus. Any template version of any marketing materials that has been, or will be, filed under our profile on www.sedar.com before the termination of the distribution under the offering (including any amendments to, or an amended version of, any template version of any marketing materials) is deemed to be incorporated into this Canadian Prospectus.

 

Potential investors are advised to consult their own legal counsel and other professional advisors in order to assess income tax, legal and other aspects of this investment.

 

Greenlane Holdings, Inc. was incorporated in Delaware pursuant to Delaware General Corporation Law. Our principal executive offices are located at 6501 Park of Commerce Blvd., Suite 200, Boca Raton, FL 33487.

 

This Canadian Prospectus contains three sections. The first section consists of the cover page disclosure that is required to be included in the Canadian Prospectus pursuant to NI 41-101 and Form 41-101F1 – Information Required in a Prospectus. The second section is a supplement to the U.S. Prospectus, which sets out information that is required to be included in the Canadian Prospectus pursuant to NI 41-101 and is not otherwise included in the U.S. Prospectus. The third section is the U.S. Prospectus.

 

This Canadian Prospectus does not contain all the information set forth in the Registration Statement and its exhibits and schedules, portions of which have been omitted as permitted by the rules and regulations of the SEC. With respect to the statements in this Canadian Prospectus about the contents of any contract, agreement or other document filed as an exhibit to the Registration Statement, we refer you, in each instance, to the copy of such contract, agreement or document filed as an exhibit to the Registration Statement, and each such statement is qualified in all respects by reference to the document to which it refers.

 

A copy of the Registration Statement and the exhibits that were filed with the Registration Statement may be inspected without charge at the public reference facilities maintained by the SEC at 100 F Street, N.E., Room 1580, Washington, D.C. 20549 and copies of all or any part of the Registration Statement may be obtained from the SEC upon payment of the prescribed fee. Information on the operation of the public reference facilities may be obtained by calling the SEC at 1-800-SEC-0330. The SEC maintains a website that contains reports, proxy and information statements, and other information regarding registrants that file electronically with the SEC. The address of the site is www.sec.gov.

 

Greenlane Holdings, Inc. and each of the Selling Stockholders that is an entity are incorporated or formed under the laws of a foreign jurisdiction and certain of our current directors and officers reside outside of Canada. We and the persons named below have appointed the following agent for service of process.

 

Name   Name and Address of Agent
Greenlane Holdings, Inc.   Dentons Canada LLP, 77 King Street West, Suite 400, Toronto, Ontario, M5K 0A1
Aaron LoCascio   Dentons Canada LLP, 77 King Street West, Suite 400, Toronto, Ontario, M5K 0A1
Adam Schoenfeld   Dentons Canada LLP, 77 King Street West, Suite 400, Toronto, Ontario, M5K 0A1
Zachary Tapp   Dentons Canada LLP, 77 King Street West, Suite 400, Toronto, Ontario, M5K 0A1
Rochester Vapor Group, LLC   Dentons Canada LLP, 77 King Street West, Suite 400, Toronto, Ontario, M5K 0A1
Better Life Products Investment Group, Inc.   Dentons Canada LLP, 77 King Street West, Suite 400, Toronto, Ontario, M5K 0A1
Jacoby & Co. Inc.   Dentons Canada LLP, 77 King Street West, Suite 400, Toronto, Ontario, M5K 0A1

 

Purchasers are advised that it may not be possible for investors to enforce judgments obtained in Canada against any person or company that is incorporated, continued or otherwise organized under the laws of a foreign jurisdiction or resides outside of Canada, even if the party has appointed an agent for service of process.

 

C-4

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Investors should rely only on the information contained in this Canadian Prospectus. Neither we, the Selling Stockholders nor the Underwriters have authorized anyone to provide investors with different information. Information contained on our website does not form part of this Canadian Prospectus and should not be relied upon by prospective investors for the purpose of determining whether to invest. Neither we, the Selling Stockholders nor the Underwriters are making an offer of these securities in any jurisdiction in which the offer is not permitted. Investors should not assume that the information contained in this Canadian Prospectus is accurate as of any other date other than the date of the front of this Canadian Prospectus. Our business, operating results, financial condition and prospects may have changed since that date.

 

The risk factors outlined or incorporated by reference in this Canadian Prospectus should be carefully reviewed and considered. See the sections entitled “Cautionary Note Regarding Forward-Looking Statements” and “Risk Factors” in the U.S. Prospectus.

 

This Canadian Prospectus qualifies the distribution of securities of an entity that expects to indirectly derive a portion of its revenues through involvement in the cannabis industry in certain U.S. states, which industry is illegal under U.S. federal law.

 

Currently, in the United States, 31 states and the District of Columbia permit some form of whole-plant cannabis cultivation, sales, and use for certain medical purposes (“medical states”). Nine of those states and the District of Columbia have also legalized cannabis for adults for non-medical purposes (sometimes referred to as recreational use). Fifteen additional states have legalized low-tetrahydrocannabinol (“THC”) / high-cannabidiol (“CBD”) extracts for select medical conditions (“CBD states”). Several CBD states are considering legalizing medical cannabis, and several medical states may extend legalization to adult use.

 

Despite the proliferation of states’ cannabis programs, the cultivation, sale and use of cannabis is considered illegal under U.S. federal law. Under the Controlled Substances Act (the “CSA”), cannabis is a Schedule I drug, meaning that the U.S. Drug Enforcement Administration recognizes no accepted medical use for cannabis, and the substance is considered illegal under federal law. Nevertheless, the U.S. federal government approach to enforcement of such laws has generally trended toward non-enforcement. More recently, however, the landscape has become less certain in the wake of Attorney General Sessions’ rescission of previous U.S. Department of Justice guidance on the cannabis industry, as well as President Trump’s recent pronouncement that he will support federal legislation that would to states that have legalized cannabis. Limitations on enforcement of such U.S. federal laws are further described in this Canadian Prospectus. See “Regulatory MattersEnforcement of U.S. Federal Laws” and “Regulatory Matters – U.S. Enforcement Proceedings”. Unless and until the United States Congress amends the CSA with respect to cannabis (and as to the timing or scope of any such potential amendments there can be no assurance), there is a risk that federal authorities may enforce current federal law, which may adversely affect our business operations in the United States. As such, there are a number of risks associated with any of our business operations in the United States, and such business operations may become the subject of heightened scrutiny by regulators, stock exchanges, third party service providers, financial institutions, depositories and other authorities in Canada and the United States. As a result, we may be subject to significant direct and indirect interaction with public officials. See “Risk Factors” in the U.S. Prospectus.

C-5

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

CURRENCY RATE AND EXCHANGE RATE INFORMATION C-7
NOTICE TO INVESTORS REGARDING GAAP C-7
CONTINUOUS DISCLOSURE C-7
MARKETING MATERIALS C-7
ENFORCEMENT OF LEGAL RIGHTS C-8
MATERIAL DIFFERENCES BETWEEN CORPORATE LEGISLATION C-8
REGULATORY MATTERS C-16
PRIOR SALES C-19
MATERIAL CONTRACTS C-20
INDEBTEDNESS OF DIRECTORS AND EXECUTIVE OFFICERS C-20
AUDIT COMMITTEE C-21
ELIGIBILITY FOR INVESTMENT C-21
CERTAIN CANADIAN FEDERAL INCOME TAX CONSIDERATIONS C-22
PROMOTERS C-25
LEGAL PROCEEDINGS AND REGULATORY ACTIONS C-25
INTEREST OF MANAGEMENT AND OTHERS IN MATERIAL TRANSACTIONS C-26
AUDITORS, TRANSFER AGENTS & REGISTRARS C-26
PURCHASERS’ STATUTORY RIGHTS C-26
EXEMPTIONS C-26
UNITED STATES PROSPECTUS C-26
CERTIFICATE OF THE COMPANY C-27
CERTIFICATE OF THE SELLING STOCKHOLDERS C-28
CERTIFICATE OF THE PROMOTERS C-29
CERTIFICATE OF UNDERWRITERS C-30

 

C-6

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

CURRENCY RATE AND EXCHANGE RATE INFORMATION

 

The following table sets forth, for each of the periods indicated, the period end exchange rate, the average exchange rate and the high and low exchange rates of one U.S. dollar in exchange for Canadian dollars, based on the historical noon exchange rates or, after March 1, 2017, the daily exchange rates, as reported by the Bank of Canada.

 

   Year Ended
December 31
  

Three Months Ended

March 31

 
   2017   2016   2015   2018   2017 
   C$   C$   C$   C$   C$ 
High   1.3743    1.4589    1.3990    1.3088    1.3513 
Low   1.2128    1.2544    1.1728    1.2288    1.3016 
Average   1.2986    1.3248    1.2787    1.2647    1.3238 
Period End   1.2545    1.3427    1.3840    1.2894    1.3310 

 

The daily exchange rate on August 13, 2018, as reported by the Bank of Canada for the conversion of U.S. dollars into Canadian dollars was C$1.3136 equals US$1.00.

 

NOTICE TO INVESTORS REGARDING GAAP

 

The financial statements included in the U.S. Prospectus have been prepared in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States (“GAAP”), which differ in certain material respects from IFRS. As we will become an “SEC issuer” (as such term is defined in National Instrument 52-107 – Acceptable Accounting Principles and Auditing Standards (“NI 52-107”)) as a result of our registration statement on Form S-1 becoming effective with the SEC, we are not required to provide, and have not provided, a reconciliation of our financial statements to IFRS.

 

CONTINUOUS DISCLOSURE

 

Upon the filing of a final prospectus with the securities regulatory authorities in all provinces and territories of Canada, other than Quebec, we will become a reporting issuer under the securities laws of such jurisdictions. Pursuant to the rules of the securities regulatory authorities of such provinces and territories, we (or, in the case of insider reporting, our insiders) will be required to satisfy the requirements of the laws of such jurisdictions relating to continuous disclosure, proxy solicitation and insider reporting. These laws generally permit us to comply with certain informational requirements applicable in the United States instead of the continuous disclosure requirements normally applicable in such Canadian jurisdictions, provided that the relevant documents are filed with the securities regulatory authorities in the relevant Canadian jurisdictions and are provided to security holders in Canada to the extent and in the manner and within the time required by applicable U.S. requirements.

 

MARKETING MATERIALS

 

A “template version” of the following “marketing materials” (each such term as defined in NI 41-101) for this offering filed with the securities commission or similar regulatory authority in each of the provinces and territories of Canada, other than Quebec, is specifically incorporated by reference into this Canadian Prospectus:

 

(i)the ● filed on SEDAR on ●.

 

In addition, any template version of any other marketing materials filed with the securities commission or similar regulatory authority in each of the provinces and territories of Canada, other than Quebec, in connection with this offering after the date hereof, but prior to the termination of the distribution under this Canadian Prospectus (including any amendments to, or an amended version of, any template version of any marketing materials), is deemed to be incorporated by reference herein. Any template version of any marketing materials used in connection with this offering is not part of this Canadian Prospectus to the extent that the contents of the template version of the marketing materials have been modified or superseded by a statement contained in this Canadian Prospectus.

 

C-7

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

 

ENFORCEMENT OF LEGAL RIGHTS

 

Greenlane Holdings, Inc. and each of the Selling Stockholders that is an entity are incorporated or formed under the laws of a foreign jurisdiction and certain of our current directors and officers reside outside of Canada. We and the persons named below have appointed the following agent for service of process.

 

Name  Name and Address of Agent
Greenlane Holdings, Inc.  Dentons Canada LLP, 77 King Street West, Suite 400, Toronto, Ontario, M5K 0A1
Aaron LoCascio  Dentons Canada LLP, 77 King Street West, Suite 400, Toronto, Ontario, M5K 0A1
Adam Schoenfeld  Dentons Canada LLP, 77 King Street West, Suite 400, Toronto, Ontario, M5K 0A1
Zachary Tapp  Dentons Canada LLP, 77 King Street West, Suite 400, Toronto, Ontario, M5K 0A1
Rochester Vapor Group, LLC  Dentons Canada LLP, 77 King Street West, Suite 400, Toronto, Ontario, M5K 0A1
Better Life Products Investment Group, Inc  Dentons Canada LLP, 77 King Street West, Suite 400, Toronto, Ontario, M5K 0A1
Jacoby & Co. Inc.  Dentons Canada LLP, 77 King Street West, Suite 400, Toronto, Ontario, M5K 0A1

 
Although we have appointed Dentons Canada LLP as our agent for service of process in Toronto, Ontario, it may not be possible for investors to enforce judgments obtained in Canada against us. Each of Aaron LoCascio, Adam Schoenfeld, and Zachary Tapp, who has signed the Certificate of the Company and the Certificate of the Promoters, as applicable, attached as C-1 and C-3 to this Canadian Prospectus, and the other Selling Stockholders reside outside of Canada. Although each has appointed Dentons Canada LLP as its agent for service of process in Ontario, it may not be possible for investors to enforce judgments obtained in Canada against such parties.

 

MATERIAL DIFFERENCES BETWEEN CORPORATE LEGISLATION

 

Our corporate affairs are governed by our articles and by-laws and the provisions of the Delaware General Corporate Law (the “DGCL”). While the rights and privileges of shareholders of a company governed by the DGCL are in many instances comparable to those of shareholders of a corporation incorporated under the Canada Business Corporations Act (the “CBCA”), there are several differences. The following is a summary of the principal differences.

 

DGCL   CBCA
Stockholder/Shareholder Approval of Business Combinations; Fundamental Changes
Under the DGCL, certain fundamental changes such as amendments to the certificate of incorporation, a merger, consolidation, sale, lease, exchange or other disposition of all or substantially all of the property of a corporation not in the usual and regular course of the corporation’s business, or a dissolution of the corporation, are generally required to be approved by the holders of a majority of the outstanding stock entitled to vote on the matter, unless the certificate of incorporation requires a higher percentage.   Under the CBCA, certain fundamental changes such as amendments to the articles, certain by-law amendments, certain amalgamations (other than with certain affiliated corporations), continuances to another jurisdiction and sales, leases or exchanges of all or substantially all of the property of a corporation (other than in the ordinary course of business) and other extraordinary corporate actions such as liquidations, dissolutions and arrangements (if ordered by a court) are required to be approved by special resolution. A special resolution is a resolution: (i) passed by not less than two-thirds of the votes cast by the shareholders who voted in respect of the resolution at a meeting duly called and held for that purpose, or (ii) signed by all shareholders entitled to vote on the resolution. In certain cases, a special resolution to approve an extraordinary corporate action is also required to be approved separately by the holders of a class or series of shares, including in certain cases a class or series of shares not otherwise carrying voting rights (unless in certain cases the share provisions with respect to such class or series of shares otherwise provides).

 

C-8

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

DGCL   CBCA

However, under the DGCL, mergers in which less than 20% of a corporation’s stock outstanding immediately prior to the effective date of the merger is issued generally do not require stockholder approval. In addition, mergers in which one corporation owns 90% or more of each class of stock of a second corporation may be completed without the vote of the second corporation’s board of directors or shareholders. In certain situations, the approval of a business combination may require approval by a certain number of the holders of a class or series of shares. In addition, Section 251(h) of the DGCL provides that stockholders of a constituent corporation need not vote to approve a merger if: (i) the merger agreement permits or requires the merger to be effected under Section 251(h) and provides that the merger shall be effected as soon as practicable following the tender offer or exchange offer, (ii) a corporation consummates a tender or exchange offer for any and all of the outstanding stock of such constituent corporation that would otherwise be entitled to vote to approve the merger, (iii) following the consummation of the offer, the stock accepted for purchase or exchanges plus the stock owned by the consummating corporation equals at least the percentage of stock that would be required to adopt the agreement of merger under the DGCL, (iv) the corporation consummating the offer merges with or into such constituent corporation, and (v) each outstanding share of each class or series of stock of the constituent corporation that was the subject of and not irrevocably accepted for purchase or exchange in the offer is to be converted in the merger into, or the right to receive, the same consideration to be paid for the shares of such class or series of stock of the constituent corporation irrevocably purchased or exchanged in such offer.

 

The DGCL does not contain a procedure comparable to a plan of arrangement under the CBCA.

 

 

In addition, the CBCA provides that, where it is not practicable for a corporation (that is not an insolvent corporation) to effect such a fundamental change under any other provision contemplated under the CBCA, the corporation may apply to a court for an order approving an arrangement.

 

In general, a plan of arrangement is approved by a corporation’s board of directors and then is submitted to a court for approval. It is not unusual for a corporation in such circumstances to apply to court initially for an interim order governing various procedural matters prior to calling any security holder meeting to consider the proposed arrangement. The court determines to whom notice shall be given and whether, and in what manner, approval of any person is to be obtained, and also determines whether any shareholders may dissent from the proposed arrangement and receive payment of the fair value of their shares. Following compliance with the procedural steps contemplated in any such interim order (including as to obtaining security holder approval), the court would conduct a final hearing and approve or reject the proposed arrangement.

 

Subject to approval by the persons entitled to notice and to issuance of the final order, articles of arrangement are executed and filed by the corporation. The articles of arrangement must contain details of the plan, the court’s approval and the manner in which the plan was approved, if so required by the court order. Finally, the articles of arrangement are filed with Industry Canada, which after such filing issues a certificate of arrangement. The arrangement becomes effective on the date shown in the certificate of arrangement. In addition, the CBCA provides that if, within 120 days after the date of a take-over bid made to shareholders of a corporation, the bid is accepted by the holders of not less than 90% of the shares (other than the shares held by the offeror or an affiliate of the offeror) of any class of shares to which the bid relates, the offeror is entitled to acquire, on the same terms on which the offeror acquired shares under the take-over bid, the shares held by those holders of shares of that class who did not accept the take-over bid.

 

 

C-9

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

DGCL   CBCA
Special Vote Required for Combinations with Interested Stockholders/Shareholders

Section 203 of the DGCL provides (in general) that a corporation may not engage in a business combination with an interested stockholder for a period of three years after the time of the transaction in which the person became an interested stockholder.

 

The prohibition on business combinations with interested stockholders does not apply in some cases, including if: (i) the board of directors of the corporation, prior to the time of the transaction in which the person became an interested stockholder, approves (a) the business combination or (b) the transaction in which the stockholder becomes an interested stockholder, (ii) upon consummation of the transaction which resulted in the stockholder becoming an interested stockholder, the interested stockholder owned at least 85% of the voting stock of the corporation outstanding at the time the transaction commenced, or (iii) the board of directors and the holders of at least two-thirds of the outstanding voting stock not owned by the interested stockholder approve the business combination on or after the time of the transaction in which the person became an interested stockholder. For the purpose of Section 203, the DGCL, subject to specified exceptions, generally defines an interested stockholder to include any person who, together with that person’s affiliates or associates: (i) owns 15% or more of the outstanding voting stock of the corporation (including any rights to acquire stock pursuant to an option, warrant, agreement, arrangement or understanding, or upon the exercise of conversion or exchange rights, and stock with respect to which the person has voting rights only), or (ii) is an affiliate or associate of the corporation and owned 15% or more of the outstanding voting stock of the corporation at any time within the previous three years.

 

 

The CBCA does not contain a provision comparable to Section 203 of the DGCL with respect to business combinations. However, in Canada, takeovers and other related party transactions are addressed in provincial securities legislation and policies which may apply to us.

 

In addition, Multilateral Instrument 61-101Protection of Minority Security Holders in Special Transactions (“MI 61-101”) which is applicable to Canadian reporting issuers contains detailed requirements in connection with “related party transactions.” A “related party transaction” as defined under MI 61-101 means, generally, any transaction by which an issuer, directly or indirectly, consummates one or more specified transactions with a related party, including purchasing or disposing of an asset, issuing securities or assuming liabilities. “Related party” as defined in MI 61-101 includes: (i) directors and senior officers of the issuer, (ii) holders of voting securities of the issuer carrying more than 10% of the voting rights attached to all the issuer’s outstanding voting securities and (iii) holders of a sufficient number of any securities of the issuer to materially affect control of the issuer.

 

MI 61-101 requires, subject to certain exceptions, specific detailed disclosure in the proxy circular sent to security holders in connection with a related party transaction where a meeting is required and, subject to certain exceptions, the preparation of a formal valuation of the subject matter of the related party transaction and any non-cash consideration offered in connection therewith, and the inclusion of a summary of the valuation in the proxy circular. MI 61-101 also requires, subject to certain exceptions, that an issuer not engage in a related party transaction unless the disinterested shareholders of the issuer have approved the related party transaction by a simple majority of the votes cast.

 

Appraisal Rights; Rights to Dissent; Compulsory Acquisition

Under the DGCL, a stockholder of a corporation participating in some types of major corporate transactions may, under varying circumstances, be entitled to appraisal rights pursuant to which the stockholder may receive cash in the amount of the fair market value of his or her shares in lieu of the consideration he or she would otherwise receive in the transaction.

 

For example, a stockholder is entitled to appraisal rights in the case of a merger or consolidation if the shareholder is required to accept in exchange for the shares anything other than: (i) shares of stock of the corporation surviving or resulting from the merger or consolidation, or depository receipts in respect thereof, (ii) shares of any other corporation, or depository receipts in respect thereof, that on the effective date of the merger or consolidation will be either listed on a national securities exchange or held of record by more than 2,000 shareholders, (iii) cash instead of fractional shares of the corporation or fractional depository receipts of the corporation, or (iv) any combination of the shares of stock, depository receipts and cash instead of the fractional shares or fractional depository receipts.

 

  The CBCA provides that shareholders of a corporation are entitled to exercise dissent rights in respect of certain matters and to be paid the fair value of their shares in connection therewith. Such matters include: (i) an amalgamation with another corporation (other than with certain affiliated corporations), (ii) an amendment to the corporation’s articles to add, change or remove any provisions restricting or constraining the issue, transfer or ownership of shareholder is dissenting, (iii) an amendment to the corporation’s articles to add, change or remove any restriction on the business or businesses that the corporation may carry on, (iv) a continuance under the laws of another jurisdiction, (v) a sale, lease or exchange of all or substantially all the property of the corporation other than in the ordinary course of business, (vi) a court order permitting a shareholder to dissent in connection with an application to the court for an order approving an arrangement proposed by the corporation, (vii) the carrying out of a going-private transaction or a squeeze-out transaction, and (viii) certain amendments to the articles of a corporation which require a separate class or series vote by a holder of shares of any class or series entitled to vote on such matters, including in certain cases a class or series of shares not otherwise carrying voting rights; provided that, a shareholder is not entitled to dissent if any amendment to the articles is effected by a court order (a) approving a reorganization; or (b) made in connection with an action for an oppression remedy, described below.

 

C-10

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

DGCL   CBCA

 

 

 

Oppression Remedy

 

The CBCA provides an oppression remedy that enables a court to make any order, both interim and final, to rectify the matters complained of if the court is satisfied upon application by a complainant (as defined herein) that certain acts or omissions by the corporation or an affiliate are oppressive or unfairly prejudicial to or that unfairly disregards the interests of any security holder, creditor, director or officer of the corporation.

 

A “complainant” means: (i) a present or former registered holder or beneficial owner of securities of a corporation or any of its affiliates, (ii) a present or former officer or director of the corporation or any of its affiliates, (iii) the “Director” appointed under the CBCA, or (iv) any other person who in the discretion of the court is a proper person to make such application.

 

The oppression remedy provides the court with extremely broad and flexible jurisdiction to intervene in corporate affairs to protect shareholders and other complainants. While conduct that is in breach of fiduciary duties of directors or that is contrary to the legal right of a complainant will normally trigger the court’s jurisdiction under the oppression remedy, the exercise of that jurisdiction does not depend on a finding of a breach of such legal and equitable rights. Furthermore, the court may order a corporation to pay the interim expenses of a complainant seeking an oppression remedy, but the complainant may be held accountable for such interim costs on final disposition of the complaint (as in the case of a derivative action — see “—Stockholder/Shareholder Lawsuits” herein). The complainant is not required to give security for costs in an oppression action.

 

Compulsory Acquisition

 

In a compulsory acquisition, if a shareholder who did not accept the take-over bid does not receive an offeror’s notice, with respect to a compulsory acquisition (as described under “— Stockholder/Shareholder Approval of Business Combinations; Fundamental Changes”), that shareholder may require the offeror to acquire those shares on the same terms under which the offeror acquired (or will acquire) the shares owned by the shareholders who accepted the take-over bid. It is worth noting that National Instrument 62-104 — Take-Over Bids and Issuer Bids would apply to a Canadian reporting issuer in the context of a compulsory acquisition.

 

 

C-11

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

DGCL   CBCA
Stockholder/Shareholder Consent to Action Without Meeting
Under the DGCL, unless otherwise provided in the certificate of incorporation, any action that can be taken at a meeting of the stockholders may be taken without a meeting if written consent to the action is signed by the holders of outstanding stock having not less than the minimum number of votes necessary to authorize or take the action at a meeting of the stockholders.   Under the CBCA, shareholder action without a meeting may be taken by written resolution signed by all shareholders who would be entitled to vote on the relevant issue at a meeting (other than where a written statement is submitted by a director or auditor giving reasons for resigning or for opposing any proposed action or resolution, in accordance with the CBCA).
     
Special Meetings of Stockholders/Shareholders
Under the DGCL, a special meeting of shareholders may be called by the board of directors or by such persons authorized in the certificate of incorporation or the bylaws.   Under the CBCA, the holders of not less than 5% of the issued shares of a corporation that carry the right to vote at the special meeting sought to be held may require that the directors call a meeting of shareholders. Upon meeting the technical requirements set out in the CBCA for making such a requisition, the directors of the corporation must call a meeting of shareholders. If the directors do not call such meeting within 21 days after receiving the requisition despite the technical requirements under the CBCA having been met, any shareholder who signed the requisition may call the special meeting.
     
Distributions and Dividends; Repurchases and Redemptions

Under the DGCL, subject to any restrictions contained in the certificate of incorporation, a corporation may pay dividends out of capital surplus or, if there is no surplus, out of net profits for the current and/or the preceding fiscal year in which the dividend is declared, as long as the amount of capital of the corporation following the declaration and payment of the dividend is not less than the aggregate amount of the capital represented by issued and outstanding shares having a preference upon the distribution of assets. Surplus is defined in the DGCL as the excess of the net assets over capital, as such capital may be adjusted by the board.

 

A Delaware corporation may purchase or redeem shares of any class except when its capital is impaired or would be impaired by the purchase or redemption. A corporation may, however, purchase or redeem out of capital shares that are entitled upon any distribution of its assets to a preference over another class or series of its shares if the shares are to be retired and the capital reduced.

 

 

Under the CBCA, dividends may be declared at the discretion of the board. A corporation may pay a dividend in money or property unless there are reasonable grounds for believing that: (i) the corporation is, or would after the payment be, unable to pay its liabilities as they become due, or (ii) the realizable value of the corporation’s assets would thereby be less than the aggregate of its liabilities and stated capital of all classes.

 

Under the CBCA, the purchase or other acquisition by a corporation of its shares is generally subject to solvency tests similar to those applicable to the payment of dividends, as set out above.

 

 

C-12

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

DGCL   CBCA
Vacancies on Board of Directors
Under the DGCL, a vacancy or a newly created directorship may be filled by a majority of the directors then in office, although less than a quorum, or by the sole remaining director, unless otherwise provided in the certificate of incorporation or bylaws. Any newly elected director usually holds office for the remainder of the full term expiring at the annual meeting of stockholders at which the term of the class of directors to which the newly elected director has been elected expires.   The CBCA allows a vacancy on the board to be filled by a quorum of directors except when the vacancy results from an increase in the number of or minimum or maximum number of directors or from a failure to elect the number or minimum number of directors required by a corporation’s articles. In addition, the CBCA authorizes a corporation’s board to appoint one or more additional directors not to exceed the maximum number set forth in the corporation’s articles, who shall hold office for a term expiring not later than the close of the next annual meeting of shareholders, but the total number of directors so appointed may not exceed one-third of the number of directors elected at the previous annual meeting of shareholders.
     
Constitution and Residency of Directors
The DGCL does not have residency requirements comparable to those of the CBCA, but a corporation may prescribe qualifications for directors under its certificate of incorporation or bylaws.   The CBCA provides that at least 25% of the directors (or if a corporation has less than four directors, at least one director) must be resident Canadians. Except as permitted by the CBCA, no business may be transacted by the board of directors except at a meeting of directors at which a quorum is present and at least 25% of the directors present, or able to provide approval of the business transacted at the meeting in writing, by telephone or other mean of communication, are resident Canadians or, if the corporation has less than four directors, at least one director present is a resident Canadian. There is no residency requirement with respect to board committees. The CBCA also requires that a corporation whose securities are publicly traded have not fewer than three directors, at least two of whom are not officers or employees of the corporation or its affiliates.
     
Removal of Directors; Terms of Directors
Under the DGCL, except in the case of a corporation with a classified board or with cumulative voting, any director or the entire board may be removed, with or without cause, by the holders of a majority of the shares entitled to vote at an election of directors.  

Under the CBCA, provided that articles of a corporation do not provide for cumulative voting, shareholders of the corporation may, by ordinary resolution passed at a special meeting, remove any director or directors from office.

 

If holders of a class or series of shares have the exclusive right to elect one or more directors, a director elected by them may only be removed by an ordinary resolution at a meeting of the shareholders of that class or series.

     
Inspection of Books and Records
Under the DGCL, any holder of record of stock or a person who is the beneficial owner of shares of such stock held either in a voting trust or by a nominee on behalf of such person may inspect the corporation’s books and records for a proper purpose.   Under the CBCA, shareholders, creditors, and their representatives, after giving the required notice, may examine certain of the records of a corporation during usual business hours and take copies of extracts free of charge.

 

 

C-13

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

DGCL   CBCA
Amendment of Governing Documents

Under the DGCL, a certificate of incorporation may be amended if: (i) the board of directors adopts a resolution setting forth the proposed amendment, declares the advisability of the amendment and directs that it be submitted to a vote at a meeting of shareholders; provided that unless required by the certificate of incorporation, no meeting or vote is required to adopt an amendment for certain specified changes, and (ii) the holders of a majority of shares of stock entitled to vote on the matter approve the amendment, unless the certificate of incorporation requires the vote of a greater number of shares.

 

If a class vote on the amendment is required by the DGCL, a majority of the outstanding stock of the class is required, unless a greater proportion is specified in the certificate of incorporation or by other provisions of the DGCL.

 

Under the DGCL, the board of directors may amend a corporation’s bylaws if so authorized in the certificate of incorporation. The shareholders of a Delaware corporation also have the power to amend bylaws.

 

 

Under the CBCA, any amendment to a corporation’s articles generally requires shareholder approval by special resolution and in certain cases, shareholders are entitled to a class vote. The CBCA provides, however, that no rights, privileges, restrictions or conditions attached to a series of shares shall confer on a series a priority in respect of dividends or return of capital over any other series of shares of the same class that are then outstanding.

 

A board of directors may, by resolution, make, amend or repeal any bylaws that regulate the business or affairs of a corporation. Where the directors make, amend or repeal a by-law, they are required under the CBCA to submit the by-law, amendment or repeal to the shareholders at the next meeting of shareholders and the shareholders may confirm, reject or amend the by-law, amendment or repeal by an ordinary resolution, which is a resolution passed by a majority of the votes cast by shareholders who voted in respect of the resolution. If a by-law, amendment or repeal is rejected by shareholders, or the directors of a corporation do not submit a by-law, an amendment or a repeal to the shareholders at the next meeting of shareholders, then such by-law, amendment or repeal will cease to be effective and no subsequent resolution of the directors to make, amend or repeal a by-law having substantially the same purpose or effect is effective until it is confirmed or confirmed as amended by the shareholders.

 

Indemnification of Directors and Officers

Under the DGCL, subject to specified limitations in the case of derivative suits brought by a corporation’s stockholders in its name, a corporation may indemnify any person who is made a party to any action, suit or proceeding on account of being a director, officer, employee or agent of the corporation (or was serving at the request of the corporation in such capacity for another corporation, partnership, joint venture, trust or other enterprise) against expenses (including attorneys’ fees), judgments, fines and amounts paid in settlement actually and reasonably incurred by him or her in connection with the action, suit or proceeding, provided that there is a determination that: (i) the individual acted in good faith and in a manner reasonably believed to be in or not opposed to the best interests of the corporation, and (ii) in a criminal action or proceeding, the individual had no reasonable cause to believe his or her conduct was unlawful. Without court approval, however, no indemnification may be made in respect of any derivative action in which an individual is adjudged liable to the corporation, except to the extent the Court of Chancery or the court in which such action or suit was brought shall determine upon application that, despite the adjudication but in view of all the circumstances of the case, such person is fairly and reasonably entitled to indemnity.

 

The DGCL requires indemnification of directors and officers for expenses (including attorneys’ fees) actually and reasonably relating to a successful defense on the merits or otherwise of a derivative or third-party action.

 

Under the DGCL, a corporation may advance expenses relating to the defense of any proceeding to directors and officers upon the receipt of an undertaking by or on behalf of the individual to repay such amount if it shall ultimately be determined that such person is not entitled to be indemnified.

 

  Under the CBCA, a corporation may indemnify a director or officer, a former director or officer or a person who acts or acted at the corporation’s request as a director or officer or an individual acting in a similar capacity of another entity (an “indemnifiable person”), against all costs, charges and expenses, including an amount paid to settle an action or satisfy a judgment, reasonably incurred by him or her in respect of any civil, criminal, administrative, investigative or other proceeding in which he or she is involved because of that association with the corporation or other entity, if: (i) the individual acted honestly and in good faith with a view to the best interests of such corporation (or the other entity, as the case may be), and (ii) in the case of a criminal or administrative action or proceeding that is enforced by a monetary penalty, the individual had reasonable grounds for believing that the individual’s conduct was lawful. An indemnifiable person may require the corporation to indemnify the individual in respect of all costs, charges and expenses reasonably incurred by the individual in connection with the defense of any civil, criminal, administrative, investigative or other proceeding to which the individual is subject because of the individual’s association with the corporation (or other entity, as the case may be) if the individual was not judged by the court or other competent authority to have committed any fault or omitted to do anything that the individual ought to have done and the individual fulfills the conditions set out in (i) and (ii) above. A corporation may, with the approval of a court, also indemnify an indemnifiable person against all costs, charges and expenses in respect of an action by or on behalf of the corporation or other entity to procure a judgment in its favor, to which such person is made a party by reason of being or having been a director or an officer of the corporation or other entity, if he or she fulfills the conditions set forth in (i) and (ii), above.

 

C-14

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

DGCL   CBCA
Limited Liability of Directors
The DGCL permits the adoption of a provision in a corporation’s certificate of incorporation limiting or eliminating the monetary liability of a director to a corporation or its shareholders by reason of a director’s breach of the fiduciary duty of care. The DGCL does not permit any limitation of the liability of a director for: (i) breaching the duty of loyalty to the corporation or its shareholders, (ii) acts or omissions not in good faith, (iii) engaging in intentional misconduct or a known violation of law, (iv) obtaining an improper personal benefit from the corporation, or (v) paying a dividend or approving a stock repurchase that was illegal under applicable law.   The CBCA does not permit any limitation of a director’s liability other than in connection with the adoption of a unanimous shareholder agreement that restricts certain powers of the directors. If such a unanimous shareholder agreement were adopted, the parties who are given the power to manage or supervise the management of the business and affairs of the corporation under such agreement assume all of the liabilities of a director under the CBCA.
     
Stockholder/Shareholder Lawsuits
Under the DGCL, a stockholder may bring a derivative action on behalf of the corporation to enforce the rights of the corporation; provided, however, that under Delaware case law, the plaintiff generally must be a stockholder not only at the time of the transaction which the subject of the suit, but through the duration of the derivative suit. Delaware law also requires that the derivative plaintiff make a demand on the directors of the corporation to assert the corporate claim before the suit may be prosecuted by the derivative plaintiff, unless such demand would be futile. An individual also may commence a class action suit on behalf of himself or herself and other similarly situated stockholders where the requirements for maintaining a class action have been met.  

A complainant may apply to the court for leave to bring an action in the name of and on behalf of a corporation or any subsidiary, or to intervene in an existing action to which a corporation or its subsidiary is a party, for the purpose of prosecuting, defending or discontinuing the action on behalf of a corporation or its subsidiary. Under the CBCA, no action may be brought and no intervention in an action may be made unless a court is satisfied that: (i) the complainant has given the requisite notice to the directors of a corporation or its subsidiary of the complainant’s intention to apply to the court if the directors do not bring, diligently prosecute or defend or discontinue the action, (ii) the complainant is acting in good faith, and (iii) it appears to be in the interests of a corporation or its subsidiary that the action be brought, prosecuted, defended or discontinued.

 

Under the CBCA, the court in a derivative action may make any order it determines to be appropriate. In addition, under the CBCA, a court may order a corporation or its subsidiary to pay the complainant’s interim costs, including reasonable legal fees and disbursements. Although the complainant may be held accountable for the interim costs on final disposition of the complaint, he or she is not required to give security for costs in a derivative action. See “— Appraisal Rights; Rights to Dissent; Compulsory Acquisition” above for the definition of “complainant”.

  

Blank Check Preferred Stock/Shares

Under the DGCL, the certificate of incorporation of a corporation may give the board the right to issue new classes of preferred shares with voting, conversion, dividend distribution, and other rights to be determined by the board at the time of issuance, which could prevent a takeover attempt and thereby preclude shareholders from realizing a potential premium over the market value of their shares.

 

In addition, Delaware law does not prohibit a corporation from adopting a shareholder rights plan, or “poison pill,” which could prevent a takeover attempt and also preclude shareholders from realizing a potential premium over the market value of their shares.

 

  As permitted under the CBCA, the articles of a corporation may permit the board to fix the number of preferred shares in, and determine the designation of the shares of, each series and create, define and attach rights and restrictions to preferred shares without additional shareholder approval.

 

C-15

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

REGULATORY MATTERS

 

In accordance with the Canadian Securities Administrators Staff Notice 51-352 (Revised) dated February 8, 2018 – Issuers with U.S. Marijuana-Related Activities (“CSA Notice 51-352”), below is a discussion of the U.S. regulatory regime. In accordance with CSA Notice 51-352, we will evaluate, monitor and reassess this disclosure, and any related risks, on an ongoing basis and the same will be supplemented, amended and communicated to investors in public filings, including in the event of government policy changes or the introduction of new or amended guidance, laws or regulations regarding marijuana regulation.

 

United States Federal Overview

 

In the United States, 31 states and the District of Columbia permit some form of whole-plant cannabis cultivation, sales, and use for certain medical purposes. Nine of those states and the District of Columbia have also legalized cannabis for adults for non-medical purposes (sometimes referred to as recreational use). Fifteen additional states have legalized THC/CBD extracts for select medical conditions. Several CBD states are considering legalizing medical cannabis, and several medical states may extend legalization to adult use.

 

Although federally illegal, the U.S. federal government’s approach to enforcement of such laws has generally trended toward non-enforcement. On August 29, 2013, the U.S. Department of Justice (“DOJ”) issued a memorandum known as the “Cole Memorandum” to all U.S. attorneys’ offices (“U.S. Attorneys”). The Cole Memorandum generally directed U.S. Attorneys not to prioritize the enforcement of federal marijuana laws against individuals and businesses that comply with state regulatory provisions in states with strictly-regulated medical or adult-use cannabis programs. The Cole Memorandum, while not legally binding, assisted in managing the tension between state and federal laws concerning state-regulated marijuana businesses.

 

However, on January 4, 2018, the Cole Memorandum was revoked by Attorney General Jeff Sessions. While this did not create a change in federal law, as the Cole Memorandum was not itself law but a guidance document, the revocation added to the uncertainty of U.S. federal enforcement of the CSA in states where cannabis use is regulated.

 

At the same time he revoked the Cole Memorandum, Attorney General Sessions also issued a one-page memorandum known as the “Sessions Memorandum”. This memo confirmed the rescission of the Cole Memorandum and explained that the Cole Memorandum was “unnecessary” due to the pre-existing enforcement guidance as set forth in the U.S. Attorney’s Manual (the “USAM”). The USAM enforcement priorities, like those of the Cole Memorandum, are focused an the appropriate expenditure of on the federal government’s limited resources, and include “law enforcement priorities set by the Attorney General,” the “seriousness” of the alleged crimes, the “deterrent effect of criminal prosecution,” and “the cumulative impact of particular crimes on the community”.

 

C-16

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

While the Sessions Memorandum emphasizes that marijuana remains a Schedule I controlled substance under federal law, and reiterates the statutory view that it is a “dangerous drug and that marijuana activity is a serious crime,” it does not otherwise instruct U.S. Attorneys that the prosecution of marijuana-related offenses is now a DOJ priority. Furthermore, the Sessions Memorandum explicitly describes itself as a guide to prosecutorial discretion. Such discretion remains firmly in the hands of U.S. Attorneys in deciding whether or not to prosecute marijuana-related offenses. Several U.S. Attorneys have affirmed their commitment to proceeding under the priority scheme set forth in the Cole Memorandum, or have otherwise affirmed that their view of federal enforcement priorities has not changed, while a few have displayed greater ambivalence.

 

Additionally, under U.S. federal law, it may potentially be a violation of federal money laundering statutes for financial institutions to take any proceeds from the sale of marijuana or any other Schedule I controlled substance. Canadian banks are likewise hesitant to engage with cannabis companies, due to the uncertain legal and regulatory framework of the industry. Banks and other financial institutions, particularly those that are federally chartered in the U.S., could be prosecuted and possibly convicted of money laundering for providing services to cannabis businesses.

 

Despite these laws, the U.S. Department of the Treasury’s Financial Crimes Enforcement Network (“FinCEN”) issued a memorandum on February 14, 2014 (the “FinCEN Memorandum”) outlining the pathways for financial institutions to bank state-sanctioned marijuana businesses in compliance with federal enforcement priorities. The FinCEN Memorandum echoed the enforcement priorities of the Cole Memorandum. Under these guidelines, financial institutions must submit a Suspicious Activity Report (“SAR”) in connection with all marijuana-related banking activities by any client of such financial institution, in accordance with federal money laundering laws. These marijuana-related SARs are divided into three categories – marijuana limited, marijuana priority, and marijuana terminated – based on the financial institution’s belief that the business in question follows state law, is operating outside of compliance with state law, or where the banking relationship has been terminated, respectively.

 

On the same day as the FinCEN Memorandum was published, the DOJ issued a memorandum (the “2014 Cole Memo”) directing prosecutors to apply the enforcement priorities of the Cole Memorandum in determining whether to charge individuals or institutions with crimes related to financial transactions involving the proceeds of marijuana-related conduct. The 2014 Cole Memo has been rescinded as of January 4, 2018, along with the Cole Memorandum, removing guidance that enforcement of applicable financial crimes against state-compliant actors was not a DOJ priority.

 

However, Attorney General Sessions’ revocation of the Cole Memorandum and the 2014 Cole Memo has not affected the status of the FinCEN Memorandum, nor has the Department of the Treasury given any indication that it intends to rescind the FinCEN Memorandum itself. Though it was originally intended for the 2014 Cole Memo and the FinCEN Memorandum to work in tandem, the FinCEN Memorandum appears to be a standalone document which explicitly lists the eight enforcement priorities originally cited in the Cole Memorandum. As such, the FinCEN Memorandum remains intact, indicating that the Department of the Treasury and FinCEN intend to continue abiding by its guidance. In the United States, it remains difficult for cannabis-based businesses to open and maintain a bank account with any bank or other financial institution.

 

Enforcement of U.S. Federal Laws

 

For the reasons set forth herein, our existing business operations in the United States, and any future business operations, may become the subject of heightened scrutiny by regulators, stock exchanges, third party service providers, financial institutions, depositories and other authorities in Canada and the United States. As a result, we may be subject to significant direct and indirect interaction with public officials. There can be no assurance that this heightened scrutiny will not in turn lead to the imposition of certain restrictions on our ability to invest or conduct our existing business operations in the United States or any other jurisdiction.

 

C-17

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Further, violations of any federal laws and regulations could result in significant fines, penalties, administrative sanctions, convictions or settlements arising from civil proceedings conducted by either the federal government or private citizens, or criminal charges, including, but not limited to, disgorgement of profits, cessation of business activities or divestiture. This could have a material adverse effect on us, including our reputation and ability to conduct business, the listing of our securities on various stock exchanges, our financial position, operating results, profitability or liquidity or the market price of our Class A common stock. In addition, it is difficult for us to estimate the time or resources that would be needed for the investigation of any such matters or its final resolution because, in part, the time and resources that may be needed are dependent on the nature and extent of any information requested by the applicable authorities involved, and such time or resources could be substantial.

 

U.S. Enforcement Proceedings

 

Although the Cole Memorandum and 2014 Cole Memo have been rescinded, one legislative safeguard for the medical marijuana industry remains in place. Congress has used a rider provision in the FY 2015, 2016 and 2017 Consolidated Appropriations Acts (currently, the “Leahy Amendment”) to prevent the federal government from using congressionally appropriated funds to enforce federal marijuana laws against regulated medical marijuana actors operating in compliance with state and local law. The Leahy Amendment was included in the FY 2018 budget passed on March 23, 2018, meaning that the Leahy Amendment is still in effect as of today’s date and will remain in effect until September 30, 2018, when FY 2019 begins.

 

Summary of Our United States Cannabis Related Activity

 

Upon closing of the offering, we expect to indirectly derive a portion of our revenues from the cannabis industry through the distribution and sale of premium consumption accessories and vaporization products in the United States and Canada. Currently, we operate five distribution facilities in the United States, located in Florida, Washington, New York and two in California. A sixth facility is located in Toronto, Canada. See “Business Overview” in the U.S. Prospectus.

 

We have developed a robust compliance program designed to ensure operational and regulatory requirements continue to be satisfied, and have retained Pryor Cashman LLP and Jones Day LLP as local outside counsel to monitor our compliance with U.S. state law on an ongoing basis. We will continue to work closely with Pryor Cashman LLP and Jones Day LLP to develop and improve our internal compliance program, and will defer to their legal opinions and risk mitigation guidance regarding our U.S. operations.

 

Ability to Access Public and Private Capital

 

We currently have: (i) access to equity financing through the prospectus exempt markets in the United States and Canada, and (ii) a US$8,000,000 line of credit with a financial institution in the United States. There can be no assurance that additional financing will be available to us when needed or on terms which are acceptable. Our inability to raise financing to fund working capital, particularly, inventory, capital expenditures or acquisitions, could limit our growth and may have a material adverse effect upon our future profitability.

 

Canada Regulatory Overview

 

On August 24, 2016, the Health Canada’s Access to Cannabis for Medical Purposes Regulations (the “ACMPR”) was introduced to allow for reasonable access to cannabis for medical purposes for Canadians who have been authorized to use cannabis by their health care practitioner. The ACMPR replaced the Marijuana for Medical Purposes Regulations (the “MMPR”) and reflected the federal government’s evolving view on medical marijuana policy. MMPR and the Marijuana Medical Access Regulations (the “MMAR”) are both legislative schemes that were important early steps in the Canadian government’s legislative path towards legalizing and regulating medical marijuana.

 

Despite the MMAR being repealed on March 31, 2014, and the MMPR ceasing to be in effect as of August 24, 2016, the marijuana medical research and patient treatment industries have grown rapidly. The introduction of the ACMPR further regulates the production and distribution of medical cannabis, demonstrating Health Canada’s commitment to improving the regulatory landscape surrounding medical marijuana use, in addition to ensuring that production occurs under secure and regulated commercial production facilities. Under the ACMPR, Canadians who have been authorized by their health care practitioner will continue to have the option of purchasing safe, quality-controlled cannabis from one of the producers licensed by Health Canada. Canadians will also be able to produce a limited amount of cannabis for their own medical purposes, or designate someone to produce it for them.

 

C-18

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

On June 30, 2016, the Government of Canada established the Task Force on Cannabis Legalization and Regulation (the “Task Force”) to seek input on the design of a new system to legalize, strictly regulate and restrict access to adult-use recreational cannabis. On December 13, 2016, the Task Force completed its review and published a report outlining its recommendations.

 

On April 13, 2017, Government of Canada introduced legislation to legalize, strictly regulate and restrict access to cannabis. The proposed Cannabis Act (Canada) (the “Cannabis Act”) would create a strict legal framework for controlling the production, distribution, sale and possession of cannabis in Canada. On November 27, 2017, the House of Commons passed Bill C-45, an Act respecting cannabis and to amend the Controlled Drugs and Substances Act, the Criminal Code and other Acts (”Bill C-45”), and on December 20, 2017, the Prime Minister communicated that the Government of Canada intended to legalize cannabis in the summer of 2018, despite previous reports of a July 1, 2018 deadline. On June 7, 2018, Bill C-45 passed the third reading in the Senate with a number of proposed amendments to the Cannabis Act.

 

In total, forty six (46) amendments were proposed by the Senate to the House of Commons on June 13, 2018 . The House of Commons rejected 13 of such proposed amendments, including: (i) an amendment which proposed allowing provinces to prohibit home cultivation of marijuana plants; (ii) the prohibition of any marijuana branded promotional materials; (iii) setting limits on the quantities of THC permissible in products; and (iv) the provision of expanded power to require security clearances. The House of Commons effectively accepted the Senate’s remaining thirty-three (33) technical amendments and returned the bill to the Senate for a vote. On June 19, 2018, the Senate passed Bill C-45. On June 20, 2018, Prime Minister Trudeau announced that marijuana would be legal by October 17, 2018 but did not disclose the expected date on which the bill would receive Royal Assent. On June 21, 2018, the Government of Canada announced that Bill C-45 received Royal Assent.

 

While the production of cannabis will be under the regulatory oversight of the Government of Canada, the distribution of adult-use recreational cannabis will be the responsibility of provincial and territorial governments. All of the Canadian provinces have announced that the wholesale distribution of cannabis will fall under the responsibility of their provincial liquor or other governmental authorities. The legal retail business for adult-use recreational cannabis will initially fall under a framework of new provincially owned and operated stand-alone cannabis outlets in Quebec, New Brunswick, Nova Scotia and Prince Edward Island. Crown corporation operated retail outlets will thus have a monopoly over the legal retailing and distribution of cannabis in these provinces, which represent a significant percentage of the Canadian population. The provinces of Alberta, Manitoba, Saskatchewan and Newfoundland and Labrador have indicated they will allow private retailers to manage the retail sales of cannabis in their provinces, while Ontario and British Columbia will allow a mix of private and Crown corporation operated retail stores.

 

PRIOR SALES

 

On May 2, 2018, Greenlane Holdings, Inc. issued 200 shares of common stock, par value US$0.01 per share, which will be redeemed, for the issue price thereof, upon the completion of this offering.

 

Prior Sales of Greenlane Holdings, LLC

 

The following table sets forth the sales for the 12-month period prior to the date of the Canadian Prospectus of securities of Greenlane Holdings, LLC, the price at which such securities were issued, the number of securities issued and the date on which such securities were issued.

 

Date of Issuance  Nature of Securities Issued 

Number of Shares

Issued or Issuable

   Issue Price Per Share     Aggregate Issue Price 
February 20, 2018  Common Units  (1)   N/A(2)    N/A(2) 

 

Notes:

 

  (1) Represented 10% of the Common Units outstanding as of the date hereof.
  (2) Common Units were issued as consideration for the acquisition by Greenlane Holdings, LLC of Better Life Holdings, LLC.

 

C-19

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

MATERIAL CONTRACTS

 

The only material contracts not in the ordinary course of business entered into since the beginning of the last fiscal year ending before the date of this Canadian Prospectus, or before the beginning of such fiscal year where such contract is still in effect, or to be entered into, on or before the closing of the offering, are as follows:

 

  (a) Underwriting Agreement.
     
  (b) Reorganization Agreement, dated as of ●, 2018, among Greenlane Holdings, Inc., Greenlane Holdings, LLC and the members of Greenlane Holdings, LLC listed on the signature pages thereto.
     
  (c) Registration Rights Agreement, dated as of ●, 2018, between Greenlane Holdings, Inc. and the members of Greenlane Holdings, LLC.
     
  (d) Form of Third Amended and Restated Operating Agreement of Greenlane Holdings, LLC, dated as of ●, 2018.
     
  (e) Form of Tax Receivable Agreement, dated as of ●, 2018, between Greenlane Holdings, Inc. and the members of Greenlane Holdings, LLC.
     
  (f)

Credit Agreement, dated as of October 4, 2017, by and between Jacoby & Co. Inc. and Fifth Third Bank.

     
  (g) Contribution Agreement, dated as of February 20, 2018, by and among Greenlane Holdings LLC, Rochester Vapor Group, LLC and Better Life Products, Inc.

 

Copies of these material contracts are attached as exhibits to the U.S. Prospectus and are available on www.sedar.com and on www.sec.gov and also may be examined during normal business hours at the offices of our Canadian legal counsel, Dentons Canada LLP, of 77 King Street West, Suite 400, Toronto, Ontario, M5K 0A1, any time during the period of distribution of shares of our Class A common stock under this Canadian Prospectus.

 

INDEBTEDNESS OF DIRECTORS AND EXECUTIVE OFFICERS

 

There is not, and there has not been within 30 days before the date of this Canadian Prospectus, any indebtedness owing to us from any of our directors or executive officers or our former directors or executive officers or any of our subsidiaries or any associate of such person, including indebtedness that is the subject of a guarantee, support agreement, letter of credit or other similar arrangement or understanding provided by us or any of our subsidiaries.

 

C-20

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

AUDIT COMMITTEE

 

Composition of the Audit Committee

 

Upon the completion of this offering, our audit committee will consist of ●, ● and ●. We believe that each of ●, ● and ● meets the definition of “independent director” for purposes of serving on an audit committee under applicable securities laws (including National Instrument 52-110 – Audit Committees). In addition, our board of directors has determined that ● qualifies as an “audit committee financial expert,” as such term is defined in Item 407(d)(5) of Regulation S-K. We may rely on exemptions provided to “venture issuers” in accordance with National Instrument 52-110 – Audit Committees. A description of the education and experience of each audit committee member that is relevant to the performance of his or her responsibilities as an audit committee member may be found under the heading “Management—Executive Officers” in the U.S. Prospectus and “Management—Non-Employee Directors” in the U.S. Prospectus.

 

The audit committee will be responsible for, among other matters: (i) appointing, retaining and evaluating our independent registered public accounting firm and approving all services to be performed by them; (ii) overseeing our independent registered public accounting firm’s qualifications, independence and performance; (iii) overseeing the financial reporting process and discussing with management and our independent registered public accounting firm the interim and annual financial statements that we file with Canadian Securities Regulators and the SEC; (iv) reviewing and monitoring our accounting principles, accounting policies, financial and accounting controls and compliance with legal and regulatory requirements; (v) establishing procedures for the confidential anonymous submission of concerns regarding questionable accounting, internal controls or auditing matters; and (vi) reviewing and approving certain related person transactions. The audit committee will also review the annual audited financial statements and make recommendations to our board of directors. A copy of the audit committee’s charter will be available on our corporate website www.gnln.com upon the completion of this offering.

 

Audit Committee Oversight

 

Since the commencement of our most recently completed fiscal year, there has not been a recommendation of the audit committee to nominate or compensate an external auditor which was not adopted by our board of directors.

 

Pre-Approval Policies and Procedures

 

The audit committee will have authority and responsibility for pre-approval of all non-audit services to be provided to us by the external auditor, unless such pre-approval is otherwise appropriately delegated or if appropriate specific policies and procedures for the engagement of non-audit services have been adopted by the audit committee.

 

External Auditor Service Fees by Category

 

In connection with our last fiscal year end, we incurred audit fees as set out in the table below. In the table, “audit fees” are fees billed by our external auditor for services provided in auditing our annual financial statements. “Audit-related fees” are fees not included in audit fees that are billed by the auditor for assurance and related services that are reasonably related to the performance of the audit review of our financial statements. “Tax fees” are fees billed by the auditor for professional services rendered for tax compliance, tax advice and tax planning. “All other fees” are fees billed by the auditor for products and services not included in the foregoing categories.

 

Fiscal Year Ending  Audit Fees  Audit Related Fees  Tax Fees  All other Fees
December 31, 2017       
December 31, 2016       

 

ELIGIBILITY FOR INVESTMENT

 

In the opinion of Dentons Canada LLP, counsel to our company, and DLA Piper (Canada) LLP, counsel to the Underwriters, shares of our Class A common stock, if issued on the date hereof, would be qualified investments under the Income Tax Act (Canada) and the regulations thereunder (the “Tax Act”) for a trust governed by a registered retirement savings plan (“RRSP”), registered retirement income fund (“RRIF”), registered education savings plan (“RESP”), registered disability savings plan (“RDSP”) or tax-free savings account (“TFSA”, and collectively “Registered Plans”) and deferred profit sharing plans, provided our Class A common stock is listed on a “designated stock exchange,” as defined in the Tax Act (which currently includes the CSE).

 

Notwithstanding the foregoing, if our Class A common stock is a “prohibited investment” (as defined in the Tax Act) for a particular Registered Plan, the annuitant, holder or subscriber of the particular Registered Plan (collectively, “Registered Holders”), as the case may be, will be subject to a penalty tax as set out in the Tax Act. Our Class A common stock will not be a “prohibited investment” for such a Registered Plan provided the Registered Holder deals at arm’s length with us for purposes of the Tax Act and does not have a “significant interest” in us within the meaning of the Tax Act. Generally, a Registered Holder will have a significant interest in us if the Registered Holder and/or persons or partnerships not dealing at arm’s length with the Registered Holder own directly or indirectly 10% or more of the issued shares of any class of our capital stock or any corporation related to us within the meaning of the Tax Act. In addition, our Class A common stock will not be a prohibited investment if such securities are “excluded property”, for purposes of the prohibited investment rules, for a Registered Plan. Registered Holders should consult their own tax advisors as to whether our Class A common stock will be a prohibited investment for such Registered Plans in their particular circumstances.

 

Prospective holders that intend to hold shares of our Class A common stock in a Registered Plan are urged to consult their own tax advisors to ensure that the securities would not constitute a “prohibited investment” in their particular circumstances.

 

C-21

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

CERTAIN CANADIAN FEDERAL INCOME TAX CONSIDERATIONS

 

In the opinion of Dentons Canada LLP, counsel to our company, and DLA Piper (Canada) LLP, counsel to the Underwriters, the following is a summary of certain Canadian federal income tax considerations under the Tax Act generally applicable to a holder who acquires shares of our Class A common stock pursuant to this offering, and who, for the purposes of the Tax Act and at all relevant times, is, or is deemed to be, resident in Canada, holds such shares of our Class A common stock as capital property and deals at arm’s length with, and is not affiliated with us or the Underwriters (a “Resident Holder”). Shares of our Class A common stock will generally be considered to be capital property to a Resident Holder unless the Resident Holder holds such shares of our Class A common stock in the course of carrying on a business of buying and selling securities or has acquired them in one or more transactions considered to be an adventure or concern in the nature of trade.

 

This summary is not applicable to a Resident Holder: (i) with respect to whom our company is or will be a “foreign affiliate” within the meaning of the Tax Act, (ii) that is a “financial institution” for the purposes of the mark-to-market rules under the Tax Act, (iii) an interest in which is a “tax shelter” or a “tax shelter investment” as defined in the Tax Act, (iv) that is a “specified financial institution” as defined in the Tax Act, (v) who has made a “functional currency” reporting election under section 261 of the Tax Act to report the holder’s “Canadian tax results” (as defined in the Tax Act) in a currency other than the Canadian currency or (vi) that has entered or will enter into a “derivative forward agreement” (as defined in the Tax Act) with respect to shares of our Class A common stock. Any such holder should consult its own tax advisor with respect to the income tax considerations applicable to it in respect of acquiring, holding and disposing of shares of our Class A common stock.

 

This summary is based on the current provisions of the Tax Act and an understanding of the current published administrative policies and assessing practices of the Canada Revenue Agency (the “CRA”) made public prior to the date hereof. This summary takes into account all proposed amendments to the Tax Act that have been publicly announced by or on behalf of the Minister of Finance (Canada) prior to the date hereof, which we refer to as the “Proposed Amendments,” and assumes that such Proposed Amendments will be enacted in the form proposed, although no assurance can be given that the Proposed Amendments will be enacted in their current form or at all. Except for the Proposed Amendments, this summary does not take into account or anticipate any other changes in law or any changes in the CRA’s administrative policies and assessing practices, whether by judicial, governmental or legislative action or decision, nor does it take into account other federal or any provincial, territorial or foreign tax legislation or considerations, which may differ from the Canadian federal income tax considerations described herein. The provisions of provincial income tax legislation vary from province to province in Canada and in some cases differ from the Tax Act.

 

This summary is of a general nature only and is not intended to be, nor should it be construed to be, legal or tax advice to any particular Resident Holder, and no representations with respect to the income tax considerations applicable to any particular Resident Holder are made. This summary is not exhaustive of all Canadian federal income tax considerations. The relevant tax considerations applicable to the acquiring, holding and disposing of shares of our Class A common stock may vary according to the status of the purchaser, the jurisdiction in which the purchaser resides or carries on business and the purchaser’s own particular circumstances. Accordingly, prospective Resident Holders are urged to consult their own tax advisors about the specific tax consequences to them of acquiring, holding and disposing of shares of our Class A common stock.

 

C-22

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Currency Conversion

 

For purposes of the Tax Act, all amounts relating to the acquisition, holding or disposition of securities (including dividends, adjusted cost base and proceeds of disposition) must generally be expressed in Canadian dollars. Amounts denominated in any other currency must be converted into Canadian dollars generally based on the exchange rate quoted by the Bank of Canada on the date such amounts arise or such other rate of exchange as is acceptable to the Minister of National Revenue (Canada).

 

Dividends on Class A common stock

 

A Resident Holder will be required to include in computing such Resident Holder’s income for a taxation year the amount of any dividends including amounts deducted for U.S. withholding tax, if any, received on shares of our Class A common stock. Dividends received on shares of our Class A common stock by a Resident Holder who is an individual will not be subject to the gross-up and dividend tax credit rules in the Tax Act normally applicable to taxable dividends received from taxable Canadian corporations. A Resident Holder that is a corporation will be required to include dividends received on shares of our Class A common stock in computing its income and will not be entitled to deduct the amount of such dividends in computing its taxable income.

 

To the extent that U.S. withholding tax is payable by a Resident Holder in respect of any dividends received on shares of our Class A common stock, the Resident Holder may be eligible for a foreign tax credit or deduction under the Tax Act to the extent and under the circumstances described in the Tax Act. Resident Holders should consult their own tax advisors regarding the availability of a foreign tax credit or deduction in their particular circumstances.

 

Disposition of Class A common stock

 

A disposition or deemed disposition of shares of our Class A common stock by a Resident Holder (including on a purchase of shares of our Class A common stock for cancellation by us) will generally result in a capital gain (or capital loss) to the extent that the proceeds of disposition, net of any reasonable costs of the disposition, exceed (or are less than) the adjusted cost base to the Resident Holder of shares of our Class A common stock immediately before the disposition. See “—Taxation of Capital Gains and Capital Losses.”

 

Taxation of Capital Gains and Capital Losses

 

Generally, one-half of any capital gain, or a “taxable capital gain,” realized by a Resident Holder will be included in the Resident Holder’s income for the year of disposition. One-half of any capital loss, or an “allowable capital loss,” realized by a Resident Holder in a taxation year generally must be deducted by the Resident Holder against taxable capital gains in that year (subject to, and in accordance with, the provisions of the Tax Act). Any excess of allowable capital losses over taxable capital gains of a Resident Holder realized in the year of disposition may be carried back up to three taxation years or forward indefinitely and deducted against net taxable capital gains realized in such years, to the extent and under the circumstances described in the Tax Act.

 

Capital gains realized by a Resident Holder that is an individual or trust, other than certain specified trusts, may give rise to a liability for minimum tax under the Tax Act.

 

U.S. tax, if any, levied on any gain realized on a disposition of shares of our Class A common stock may be eligible for a foreign tax credit under the Tax Act to the extent and under the circumstances described in the Tax Act. Resident Holders should consult their own tax advisors with respect to the availability of a foreign tax credit, having regard to their own particular circumstances.

 

C-23

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Offshore Investment Fund Property Rules

 

The Tax Act contains provisions which, in certain circumstances, may require a Resident Holder to include an amount in income in each taxation year in respect of the acquisition and holding of shares of our Class A common stock (the “OIF Rules”): if (1) the value of such shares of our Class A common stock may reasonably be considered to be derived, directly or indirectly, primarily from portfolio investments in: (i) shares of the capital stock of one or more corporations, (ii) indebtedness or annuities, (iii) interests in one or more corporations, trusts, partnerships, organizations, funds or entities, (iv) commodities, (v) real estate, (vi) Canadian or foreign resource properties, (vii) currency of a country other than Canada, (viii) rights or options to acquire or dispose of any of the foregoing or (ix) any combination of the foregoing, which we collectively refer to as “Investment Assets” and (2) it may reasonably be concluded that one of the main reasons for the Resident Holder acquiring, holding or having shares of our Class A common stock was to derive a benefit from portfolio investments in Investment Assets in such a manner that the taxes, if any, on the income, profits and gains from such Investment Assets for any particular year are significantly less than the tax that would have been applicable under Part I of the Tax Act if the income, profits and gains had been earned directly by the Resident Holder.

 

In making this determination, the OIF Rules provide that regard must be had to all of the circumstances, including (i) the nature, organization and operation of any non-resident entity, including our company, and the form of, and the terms and conditions governing, the Resident Holder’s interest in, or connection with, any such non-resident entity, (ii) the extent to which any income, profit and gains that may reasonably be considered to be earned or accrued, whether directly or indirectly, for the benefit of any such non-resident entity, including our company, are subject to an income or profits tax that is significantly less than the income tax that would be applicable to such income, profits and gains if they were earned directly by the Resident Holder and (iii) the extent to which any income, profits and gains of any such non-resident entity, including our company, for any fiscal period are distributed in that or the immediately following fiscal period.

 

If applicable, the OIF Rules can result in a Resident Holder being required to include in its income for each taxation year in which such Resident Holder owns shares of our Class A common stock the amount, if any, by which: (i) the total of all amounts each of which is the product obtained when the Resident Holder’s “designated cost” (as defined in the Tax Act) of shares of our Class A common stock at the end of a month in the year is multiplied by 1⁄12 of the aggregate of the prescribed rate of interest for the period including that month plus two percentage points exceeds (ii) the Resident Holder’s income for the year (other than a capital gain) in respect of shares of our Class A common stock determined without reference to the OIF Rules. Any amount required to be included in computing a Resident Holder’s income under these provisions will be added to the adjusted cost base of such shares to the Resident Holder.

 

The CRA has taken the position that the term “portfolio investment” should be given a broad interpretation. While the value of shares of our Class A common stock should not be regarded as being derived primarily from portfolio investments in Investment Assets, there is a possibility that the CRA may take a different view. However, as noted above, even if this is the case, the OIF Rules will apply only if it is reasonable to conclude that one of the main reasons for a Resident Holder acquiring, holding or having shares of our Class A common stock was to derive, either directly or indirectly, a benefit from Investment Assets in such a manner that the taxes, if any, on the income, profits and gains from such Investment Assets for any particular year are significantly less than the tax that would have been applicable under Part I of the Tax Act if the income, profits and gains had been earned directly by the Resident Holder.

 

The OIF Rules are complex and their application will potentially depend, in part, on the reasons for a Resident Holder acquiring, holding or having shares of our Class A common stock. Resident Holders are urged to consult their own tax advisors regarding the application and consequences of the OIF Rules in their own particular circumstances.

 

C-24

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Additional Refundable Tax

 

A Resident Holder that is, throughout the relevant taxation year, a “Canadian-controlled private corporation” (as defined in the Tax Act) may be subject to pay a refundable tax on its “aggregate investment income” (as defined in the Tax Act), including taxable capital gains and certain dividends.

 

Foreign Property Information Reporting

 

In general, a Resident Holder that is a “specified Canadian entity” (as defined in the Tax Act) for a taxation year or a fiscal period and whose total cost amount of “specified foreign property” (as defined in the Tax Act), including Class A common stock, at any time in the year or fiscal period exceeds C$100,000 will be required to file an information return with the CRA for the taxation year or fiscal period disclosing certain prescribed information in respect of such property. Subject to certain exceptions, a taxpayer resident in Canada, other than a corporation or trust exempt from tax under Part I of the Tax Act, will be a “specified Canadian entity,” as will certain partnerships. Class A common stock will be “specified foreign property” to a Resident Holder. Penalties may apply where a Resident Holder fails to file the required information return in respect of such Resident Holder’s “specified foreign property” (as defined in the Tax Act) on a timely basis in accordance with the Tax Act. The reporting requirements with respect to “specified foreign property” were expanded so that more detailed information is required to be provided to the CRA.

 

The reporting rules in the Tax Act are complex and this summary does not purport to address all circumstances in which reporting may be required by a Resident Holder. Resident Holders should consult their own tax advisors regarding the reporting rules contained in the Tax Act.

 

PROMOTERS

 

Aaron LoCascio, our Chief Executive Officer, is a promoter pursuant to applicable Canadian securities laws. As of the date of this Canadian Prospectus, Mr. LoCascio beneficially owns, controls, or directs, directly or indirectly, (i) ● Common Units which are redeemable for ● shares of our Class A common stock, and (ii) ● shares of our Class C common Stock representing approximately ●% of the issued and outstanding shares of our Class C common stock (and such Class C common stock shall be automatically cancelled, without consideration, on a three-to-one basis upon the redemption of Common Units for Class A common stock).

 

Adam Schoenfeld, our President and Chief Strategy Officer, is a promoter pursuant to applicable Canadian securities laws. As of the date of this Canadian Prospectus, Mr. Schoenfeld beneficially owns, controls, or directs, directly or indirectly, (i) ● Common Units which are redeemable for ● shares of our Class A common stock, and (ii) ● shares of our Class C common Stock representing approximately ●% of the issued and outstanding shares of our Class C common stock (and such Class C common stock shall be automatically cancelled, without consideration, on a three-to-one basis upon the redemption of Common Units for Class A common stock).

 

LEGAL PROCEEDINGS AND REGULATORY ACTIONS

 

Legal Proceedings

 

There are no material legal proceedings outstanding, threatened or pending, as of the date hereof, by or against us or to which we are a party or to which our business or any of our assets is subject, nor to our knowledge are any such legal proceedings contemplated which could become material to a purchaser of our securities.

 

Regulatory Actions

 

There have not been any penalties or sanctions imposed against us by a court relating to provincial or territorial securities legislation or by a securities regulatory authority, nor have there been any other penalties or sanctions imposed by a court or regulatory body against us, and we have not entered into any settlement agreements before a court relating to provincial or territorial securities legislation or with a securities regulatory authority.

 

C-25

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

INTEREST OF MANAGEMENT AND OTHERS IN MATERIAL TRANSACTIONS

 

Other than as disclosed herein or in the U.S. Prospectus, none our directors or executive officers or shareholders that beneficially own, or control or direct, directly or indirectly, more than 10% of our issued and outstanding voting securities, or any of their respective associates or affiliates have any material interest, direct or indirect, in any transaction which has materially affected or is reasonably expected to materially affect us within the three years preceding the date of this Canadian Prospectus.

 

AUDITORS, TRANSFER AGENTS & REGISTRARS

 

Our auditor is BDO USA, LLP, an independent registered public accounting firm, located at 1601 Forum Place, 9th Floor, West Palm Beach, FL 33401, USA.

 

The co-transfer agents and co-registrars for our Class A common stock are Odyssey Trust Company, at its office in Calgary, Alberta and Corporate Stock Transfer, Inc., at its office in Denver, Colorado.

 

PURCHASERS’ STATUTORY RIGHTS

 

Securities legislation in certain provinces and territories of Canada provides purchasers with the right to withdraw from an agreement to purchase securities. This right may be exercised within two business days after receipt or deemed receipt of a prospectus and any amendment thereto. In several of the provinces and territories, the securities legislation further provides a purchaser with remedies for rescission or, in some jurisdictions, damages if the Canadian Prospectus and any amendment contains a misrepresentation or is not delivered to the purchaser, provided that such remedies for rescission or damages are exercised by the purchaser within the time limit prescribed by the securities legislation of the purchaser’s province or territory. Each purchaser should refer to any applicable provisions of the securities legislation of the purchaser’s province or territory for the particulars of these rights or consult with a legal advisor.

 

EXEMPTIONS

 

We have applied to the Ontario Securities Commission (“OSC”) for relief from the requirement in section 3.3 of NI 52-107 that financial statements included in this Canadian Prospectus be audited in accordance with Canadian generally accepted auditing standards (the “Accounting Standards Relief”). The Accounting Standards Relief will allow us to include in this Canadian Prospectus financial statements audited in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States) (“PCAOB”).

 

Upon completion of the offering, we will become an “SEC issuer” within the meaning of NI 52-107. As prescribed by U.S. federal securities laws, the financial statements included in the U.S. Prospectus included herein have been audited in accordance with PCAOB. Our application for the Accounting Standards Relief is based on the fact that the use of PCAOB is permitted by NI 52-107 for reporting issuers that are SEC issuers. The issuance of a receipt by the OSC for the final prospectus will constitute evidence that the Accounting Standards Relief has been granted.

 

UNITED STATES PROSPECTUS

 

Attached is the U.S. Prospectus, which forms part of the U.S. registration statement on Form S-1, filed with the SEC in connection with the offering. The U.S. Prospectus forms a part of this Canadian Prospectus.

 

C-26

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

CERTIFICATE OF THE COMPANY

 

Date: August ●, 2018

 

This prospectus, together with the documents and information incorporated by reference, will, as of the date of the supplemented prospectus providing the information permitted to be omitted from this prospectus, constitute full, true and plain disclosure of all material facts relating to the securities offered by this prospectus as required under the securities legislation of each of the provinces and territories of Canada, other than Quebec.

 

(signed) “Aaron LoCascio (signed) “Zachary Tapp
Chief Executive Officer Chief Financial Officer

 

 On Behalf of the Board of Directors

 

(signed) “●” (signed) “●”
Director Director

  

C-27

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

CERTIFICATE OF THE SELLING STOCKHOLDERS

 

Date: August ●, 2018

 

This prospectus, together with the documents and information incorporated by reference, will, as of the date of the supplemented prospectus providing the information permitted to be omitted from this prospectus, constitute full, true and plain disclosure of all material facts relating to the securities offered by this prospectus as required under the securities legislation of each of the provinces and territories of Canada, other than Quebec.

 

JACOBY & CO. INC.

BETTER LIFE PRODUCTS INVESTMENT GROUP, INC.

(signed) “●” (signed) “●”

  

ROCHESTER VAPOR GROUP, LLC

(signed) “●” (signed) “Adam Schoenfeld

 

 

C-28

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

CERTIFICATE OF THE PROMOTERS

 

Date: August ●, 2018

 

This prospectus, together with the documents and information incorporated by reference, will, as of the date of the supplemented prospectus providing the information permitted to be omitted from this prospectus, constitute full, true and plain disclosure of all material facts relating to the securities offered by this prospectus as required under the securities legislation of each of the provinces and territories of Canada, other than Quebec.

 

(signed) “Aaron LoCascio (signed) “Adam Schoenfeld

 

C-29

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

CERTIFICATE OF UNDERWRITER

 

Date: August ●, 2018

 

To the best of our knowledge, information and belief, this prospectus, together with the documents and information incorporated by reference, will, as of the date of the supplemented prospectus providing the information permitted to be omitted from this prospectus, constitute full, true and plain disclosure of all material facts relating to the securities offered by this prospectus as required under the securities legislation of each of the provinces and territories of Canada, other than Quebec.

 

CANACCORD GENUITY CORP.
(signed) “●”

 

C-30

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

PART II

 

INFORMATION NOT REQUIRED IN PROSPECTUS

 

Item 13. Other Expenses of Issuance and Distribution

 

The following table sets forth all expenses to be paid by the registrant, other than estimated underwriting discounts and commissions, in connection with our initial public offering. All amounts shown are estimates except for the SEC registration fee and the FINRA filing fee:

 

SEC registration fee  $              *
Stock exchange listing fee    *
FINRA filing fee    *
Printing expenses    *
Legal fees and expenses    *
Accounting fees and expenses    *
Blue Sky fees and expenses (including legal fees)    *
Transfer agent and registrar fees    *
Miscellaneous    *
Total  $ *

 

 

*To be completed by amendment

 

Item 14. Indemnification of Directors and Officers

 

Section 145 of the Delaware General Corporation Law provides that a corporation may indemnify directors and officers as well as other employees and individuals against expenses (including attorneys’ fees), judgments, fines and amounts paid in settlement actually and reasonably incurred by such person in connection with any threatened, pending or completed actions, suits or proceedings in which such person is made a party by reason of such person being or having been a director, officer, employee or agent to the registrant. The Delaware General Corporation Law provides that Section 145 is not exclusive of other rights to which those seeking indemnification may be entitled under any bylaw, agreement, vote of stockholders or disinterested directors or otherwise. The registrant’s bylaws provide for indemnification by the registrant of its directors, officers and employees to the fullest extent permitted by the Delaware General Corporation Law.

 

Section 102(b)(7) of the Delaware General Corporation Law permits a corporation to provide in its certificate of incorporation that a director of the corporation shall not be personally liable to the corporation or its stockholders for monetary damages for breach of fiduciary duty as a director, except for liability (i) for any breach of the director’s duty of loyalty to the corporation or its stockholders, (ii) for acts or omissions not in good faith or which involve intentional misconduct or a knowing violation of law, (iii) for unlawful payments of dividends or unlawful stock repurchases, redemptions or other distributions, or (iv) for any transaction from which the director derived an improper personal benefit. The registrant’s amended and restated certificate of incorporation provides for such limitation of liability.

 

The registrant maintains standard policies of insurance under which coverage is provided (a) to its directors and officers against loss rising from claims made by reason of breach of duty or other wrongful act, and (b) to the registrant with respect to payments which may be made by the registrant to such officers and directors pursuant to the above indemnification provision or otherwise as a matter of law.

 

The proposed form of Underwriting Agreement filed as Exhibit 1.1 to this registration statement provides for indemnification of directors and officers of the registrant by the underwriters against certain liabilities.

 

The registrant expects to enter into customary indemnification agreements with its executive officers and directors that provide them, in general, with customary indemnification in connection with their service to the registrant or on the registrant’s behalf.

 

II-1

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Item 15. Recent Sales of Unregistered Securities

 

On May 2, 2018, the registrant issued 200 shares of common stock, par value $0.01 per share, which will be redeemed upon the completion of this offering. Each of two officers of the registrant received 100 shares of common stock in exchange for $0.01 each. The issuances were exempt from registration under Section 4(a)(2) of the Securities Act, on the basis that the transactions did not involve a public offering.

 

Additionally, in connection with the Transactions described under “The Transactions” in the accompanying prospectus, the registrant will issue an aggregate of                  shares of its Class B common stock to the Non-Founder Members and                 shares of its Class C common stock to the Founder Members. The shares of Class B common stock and the shares of Class C common stock described above will be issued in reliance on the exemption contained in Section 4(a)(2) of the Securities Act, on the basis that the transactions will not involve a public offering. No underwriters will be involved in the transactions.

 

Item 16. Exhibits and Financial Statement Schedules

 

(a)Exhibits. The following exhibits are included herein or incorporated herein by reference:

 

Exhibit    
Number   Description
     
1.1*   Form of Underwriting Agreement
3.1*   Form of Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation of Greenlane Holdings, Inc.
3.2*   Form of Amended and Restated Bylaws of Greenlane Holdings, Inc.
4.1*   Form of Stock Certificate
4.2*   Form of Representative’s Warrant
5.1*   Form of opinion of Pryor Cashman LLP as to the validity of securities being offered
10.1*   Form of Reorganization Agreement among Greenlane Holdings, Inc., Greenlane Holdings, LLC and the Members listed on the signature pages thereto
10.2*   Form of Registration Rights Agreement between Greenlane Holdings, Inc. and the Members of Greenlane Holdings, LLC
10.3*   Form of Third Amended and Restated Greenlane Holdings, LLC Operating Agreement
10.4*     Form of Tax Receivable Agreement between Greenlane Holdings, Inc. and the Members of Greenlane Holdings, LLC
10.5*   Form of Indemnification Agreement
10.6*   Credit Agreement, dated as of October 4, 2017, by and between Jacoby & Co. Inc. and Fifth Third Bank.
10.7*   Greenlane Holdings, Inc. 2018 Equity Incentive Plan
10.8*   Contribution Agreement, dated as of February 18, 2018, by and among Greenlane Holdings, LLC (f/k/a Jacoby Holdings LLC), the Sellers named therein and Better Life Products, Inc., as Seller Representative
10.9*   Form of Employment Agreement with Aaron LoCascio.
10.10*   Form of Employment Agreement with Adam Schoenfeld.
10.11*   Form of Employment Agreement with Sasha Kadey.
10.12*   Form of Employment Agreement with Jay Scheiner.
10.13*   Form of Employment Agreement with Zachary Tapp.
21.1*   List of subsidiaries of Greenlane Holdings, Inc.
23.1*   Consent of BDO USA, LLP
23.2*   Consent of Squar Milner LLP
23.3*   Consent of LBB & Associates Ltd., LLP
23.4*   Consent of Pryor Cashman LLP (included in Exhibit 5.1 to this Registration Statement)  
24.1*   Powers of Attorney (included in signature page)

 

 

*Indicates to be filed by amendment.

 

(b)Financial Statement Schedules. All financial statement schedules are omitted because they are not applicable or the information is included in the Registrant’s consolidated financial statements or related notes.

 

II-2

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

Item 17. Undertakings

 

The undersigned registrant hereby undertakes to provide to the underwriters at the closing specified in the underwriting agreement, certificates in such denominations and registered in such names as required by the underwriters to permit prompt delivery to each purchaser.

 

Insofar as indemnification for liabilities arising under the Securities Act may be permitted to directors, officers and controlling persons of the registrant pursuant to the foregoing provisions, or otherwise, the registrant has been advised that in the opinion of the SEC such indemnification is against public policy as expressed in the Securities Act and is, therefore, unenforceable. In the event that a claim for indemnification against such liabilities (other than the payment by the registrant of expenses incurred or paid by a director, officer or controlling person of the registrant in the successful defense of any action, suit or proceeding) is asserted by such director, officer or controlling person in connection with the securities being registered, the registrant will, unless in the opinion of its counsel the matter has been settled by controlling precedent, submit to a court of appropriate jurisdiction the question whether such indemnification by it is against public policy as expressed in the Securities Act and will be governed by the final adjudication of such issue.

 

The undersigned registrant hereby undertakes that:

 

(1) For purposes of determining any liability under the Securities Act, the information omitted from the form of prospectus filed as part of this registration statement in reliance upon Rule 430A and contained in a form of prospectus filed by the registrant pursuant to Rule 424(b)(1) or (4) or 497(h) under the Securities Act shall be deemed to be part of this registration statement as of the time it was declared effective.

 

(2) For purposes of determining any liability under the Securities Act, each post-effective amendment that contains a form of prospectus shall be deemed to be a new registration statement relating to the securities offered therein, and the offering of such securities at that time shall be deemed to be the initial bona fide offering thereof.

 

II-3

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

SIGNATURES

 

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, the registrant has duly caused this registration statement to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized in the City of Boca Raton, State of Florida, on                      , 2018.

 

  GREENLANE HOLDINGS, INC.
     
  By:          
    Name: Aaron LoCascio
    Title:   Chief Executive Officer

 

POWER OF ATTORNEY

 

Each person whose signature appears below authorizes Aaron LoCascio and Adam Schoenfeld, or any of them, as his or her true and lawful attorney-in-fact and agent, with full power of substitution and resubstitution, to execute in his or her name and on his or her behalf, in any and all capacities, this Registrant’s registration statement on Form S-1 and any amendments thereto (and any additional registration statement related thereto permitted by Rule 462(b) promulgated under the Securities Act of 1933 (and all further amendments, including post-effective amendments thereto)), necessary or advisable to enable the registrant to comply with the Securities Act of 1933, and any rules, regulations and requirements of the Securities and Exchange Commission, in respect thereof, in connection with the registration of the securities which are the subject of such registration statement, which amendments may make such changes in such registration statement as such attorney may deem appropriate, and with full power and authority to perform and do any and all acts and things whatsoever which any such attorney or substitute may deem necessary or advisable to be performed or done in connection with any or all of the above-described matters, as fully as each of the undersigned could do if personally present and acting, hereby ratifying and approving all acts of any such attorney or substitute.

 

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, this registration statement has been signed by the following persons in the capacities and on the dates indicated.

 

Signature   Title   Date
         
   

Chief Executive Officer and

Chairman of the Board of Directors

   
Aaron LoCascio   (Principal Executive Officer)    
         
   

Chief Financial Officer

   
Zachary Tapp  

(Principal Financial Officer and

Principal Accounting Officer)

   
         
         
Adam Schoenfeld   Director    

 

II-4